Phan Mem FB

FB-MultiPier Version 5.
4
FB-MultiPier Features
Multiple Pier Modeling
Unique piers
Each pier can have an entire different set of properties, including: pier geometry, pile
group size, soil strata, loads, etc. Each pier can also have its own elevation. Up to 99
piers can be easily generated to rapidly layout an entire bridge. The 2D Bridge window
shows the bridge layout in plan and the 3D Bridge window shows the 3D visualization
of the bridge.
Pier rotation
Each pier can have a rotation about the vertical (Z) axis. This is ideal for modeling skew
bridges and radial piers on curved alignments.
Bridge superstructure
The bridge superstructure is incorporated into the model using an equivalent beam that
connects the centerline of two piers. The bearing connections at the pier supports can be
released, constrained, or user-defined using a custom load-displacement curve.
Two rows of bearing locations

Two independent lines of bearings accommodate the transfer of load from the bridge
superstructure to the piers. Because the bearings are offset from the center of the pier
cap, any pier cap torque induced from unequal spans is automatically included.
Wind Load Generation

Wind loads can be automatically generated for the bridge superstructure. The resulting
loads are applied to the bearings at each pier, more specifically to the bearing locations
of the transfer beam. These are based upon tributary areas and are redistributed during
analysis if the superstructure is continuous.
Dynamic Pier Analysis
Time step integration

Time history load functions and ground acceleration records can be applied to the
model. Different time step integration methods are available as well as a variety of
analysis control parameters. Concentrated masses and dampers can be added to the
model to simulate added mass and energy dissipation effects.
Modal analysis
The modal analysis option performs a frequency analysis of the model. Both frequencies
and mode shapes are provided as output results.
Dynamic soil modeling

Soil gap modeling is available to model energy dissipation due to hysteretic damping.
Cyclic degradation parameters are also available to modify the lateral soil response
during dynamic loading.
Animated results
The 3D model displacement results can be animated for a time step integration analysis.
Animation results can be played and paused and a slider bar is provided for selectively
viewing individual time step results.
Time-Displacement plots
The displacement results for any model node can be plotted over time.
Seismic database
Ground acceleration records and response spectrums are provided for notable
earthquakes.
1 Program Menus
1. File Menu
2. View Menu
3. Control Menu
4. Help Menu
5. About FB-MultiPier
1.1 File Menu
The File menu handles problem creation, file access, printing, and exiting the program.
Figure: 1.1.a File Menu Options
1.2 View Menu

The View menu controls the appearance of the toolbar at the top of the screen and the
status bar at the bottom of the screen.
Figure: 1.2.a View Menu Options
1.3 Control Menu
The Control menu allows the user to access the output data from the program, log file
options, program settings, access to the license update wizard, and control the
appearance of the fonts used in the dialogs, graphics, and plots.
Figure: 1.3.a Control Menu Options
The Program Settings option will open the Program Settings Dialog with options for
memory settings.
1.4 Help Menu
The Help menu provides access to the Help Manual. There are two different Help
Manual formats: the Browser format, and the PDF format. The "About FB-MultiPier"
option is provided to list the version number of the program and current system
settings.
Figure: 1.4.a Help Menu Options
Help About Tutorial
1.5 About FB-MultiPier
The "About FB-MultiPier" dialog displays the following information :
l Version number
l Expiration date
l License type
l Number of seats
l License file path
l Physical RAM
l Drive Space
Figure: 1.5.a About FB-MultiPier
2 Model Data
1. New Project/Model Page

2. Analysis Settings Page
3. AASHTO Page
4. Dynamics Page
5. Lateral Stability Page
6. Pile Cap Page
7. Pile Page
8. Soil Page
9. Pier Page
10. Wall Structure Page
11. Extra Members Page
12. Load Page
13. Spring Page
14. Concentrated Mass/Damper Page
15. Retained Soil Page
16. Bridge Page
2.1 New Project/Model Page
Select a new model type in the "Select New Model Type" window, or change an existing
one in the "Model Data" window.
Figure: 2.1.a New Model Page
Choose from the following model types:
1. Pier
2. Pile and Cap
3. Pile
4. High Mast Lighting/Sign
5. Retaining Wall
6. Sound Wall
7. Stiffness (Pile and Cap)
8. Pile Bent
9. Column
10. Bridge
11. One Pier Two Span
Select the unit type (English or SI) in the "Select New Model Type" window.
2.1.1 Pier Model
Figure: 2.1.b Pier Model
Select this option to begin a typical pier model.
For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.1.2 Pile and Cap Model
Figure: 2.1.c Pile and Cap Model
Select this option to begin a typical pile and cap model.

2.1.3 Pile Model
Figure: 2.1.d Pile Model
Select this option to begin a typical pile model.

2.1.4 High Mast Lighting/Sign Model
Figure: 2.1.e High Mast Lighting/Sign Model
Select this option to begin a typical high mast lighting/sign model.
For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page. .

2.1.5 Retaining Wall Model
Figure: 2.1.f Retaining Wall Model
Select this option to begin a typical retaining wall model.
Note: With this option, the Pier page becomes the Wall Structure page.

2.1.6 Sound Wall Model
Figure: 2.1.g Sound Wall Model
Select this option to begin a typical sound wall model.
Note: With this option, the Pier page becomes the Wall Structure page.

2.1.7 Stiffness Model
Figure: 2.1.h Stiffness Model
Select this option to begin a typical stiffness model. As an alternative to the stiffness
model type, the equivalent stiffness can be calculated for any pier, pile bent, pile and
cap, or single pile model.

2.1.8 Pile Bent Model
Figure: 2.1.i Pile Bent Model
Select this option to begin a typical pile bent model.
Note: With this option, the Pier Page becomes the Bent Cap page.

2.1.9 Column
Figure: 2.1.j Column Model
Select this option to begin a typical column model.
The “Column” model type allows for the convenient analysis/design of a single
structural (frame) member. The column ends are supported by springs, and the
engineer may adjust the spring stiffnesses to simulate the actual end support
conditions. A spring value equal to zero eliminates that support. External forces and self
weight may be applied to all nodes on the column.

2.1.10 Bridge Model
Figure: 2.1.k Bridge Model
Select this option to begin a typical bridge (multiple piers) model.

2.1.11 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Model
Figure: 2.1.l One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Model
Select this option to begin the OPTS model.
2.2 Analysis Settings Page

Figure: 2.2.a Analysis Settings Page
Pile/Pier Behavior allows "Linear - Gross", "Linear" or "Nonlinear" material behavior,

which in turn, allow for input of "Gross" or detailed cross section descriptions.
The Soil Behavior option "Include Soil" is enabled by default and incorporates nonlinear
soil resistance into the model. Unchecking this option removes the soil and requires the
user to enter pile tip spring stiffness to restrain the model.
Print control options determine what information is printed in the output file.
Choose options in the following categories:
1. Pile/Pier Behavior
2. Section Properties
3. Iteration Control
4. Analysis Type
5. Soil Behavior
6. Interaction Diagram Phi Factor
7. Design Options
8. Stiffness Options
9. Print Control
2.2.1 Pile/Pier Behavior
The setting for "Linear - Gross", "Linear", or "Nonlinear" behavior can be assigned
independently for:
- All pile/shaft elements;
- All pier column/pier cap/extra member elements.
"Linear - Gross" Behavior:

• Cross section input consists of "Gross" properties such as "Area", "Intertia About
2 Axis", and moduli.
• Assumes the behavior is purely linear elastic.
• Deflections do not cause secondary moments; no P-delta moments (moments of
the axial force times the displacements of one end of element to another).
"Linear" Behavior:
• Cross section input consists of detailed descriptions of dimensions and relative
positions.
• Assumes the behavior is purely linear elastic.
• Deflections do not cause secondary moments; no P-delta moments (moments of
the axial force times the displacements of one end of element to another).
"Nonlinear" Behavior:
• Cross section input consists of detailed descriptions of dimensions and relative
positions.
• Uses input or default stress strain curves which are integrated over the cross-
section of the piles/pier components.
• Uses P-delta moments (moments of the axial force times the displacements of
one end of element to another). Furthermore, since the user subdivides the pile/pier
members into a number of sub-elements, the P-y moments (moments of axial force
times internal displacements within members due to bending) are also modeled.
Note: When "Nonlinear" behavior is selected, the text output results for an analysis
may include the warning that 'The concrete in at least one element of this section has
cracked'. This message indicates that AT LEAST one of the elements in the model that
utilize nonlinear behavior have developed concrete tensile strains in excess of the
cracking strain. However, this warning message does NOT indicate that all elements in
the model have undergone cracking. These messages are printed to the analysis log file
and text output file. For the text output file prints, the warning is issued within the
regions specific to each load case (or load combination, time step).
Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

2.2.2 Section Properties
The option for "Transformed Section" properties is available within the "Section
Properties" region of the Analysis Settings page. This option is used when "Linear"
behavior is selected, and NOT used if only "Linear - Gross" and/or "Nonlinear" behavior
is selected.
Figure: 2.2.b Transformed Section properties option in Analysis Settings page
Note: If "Linear" behavior is selected, and the "Transformed Section" checkbox is

NOT checked, then cross section properties used in analysis for linear sections will
NOT be transformed.

2.2.3 Iteration Control
Enter the maximum number of iterations that analysis will run before it determines that
the solution will not converge.
Note: If a small value is entered, the solution may not converge, because it has not
been given the chance to finish the calculations. On the other hand, if a very large value
is entered, the analysis may take a long time.
A typical value for the number of iterations is 100.
Enter the tolerance between successive iterations that the analysis must reach before
providing a solution.
Note: The user-input convergence tolerance is used by the engine to sweep through
every node in the model. For each iteration, an out-of-balance force for every nodal
degree-of-freedom is calculated and compared to the convergence tolerance. During
this sweep, the maximum out-of-balance force is cataloged. If, after completing the
sweep for the entire model, the maximum magnitude out-of-balance force is found to
be less than the convergence tolerance, then the engine decides that a solution has been
reached. Otherwise, the system stiffness is updated, and the next iteration cycle begins.
Because, for each iteration and nodal degree-of-freedom, the out-of-balance force is
directly compared to the convergence tolerance, it is important to select an input
convergence tolerance that is small relative to the smallest (meaningful) computed
nodal reaction force.

2.2.4 Analysis Type
The Analysis Page offers two types of analysis:
1. Static
2. Dynamic

2.2.5 Soil Behavior
Check "Include Soil" to include soil in the analysis. If "Include Soil" is unchecked, then
enter the stiffness at the tip of the pile.
Check "Coupled Axial and Lateral Soil Resistance" to activate soil rotational resistance
about the 2 and 3 axes. This feature is detailed in 12.7 Soil Resistance Due to Shaft
Rotation, and may be useful when modeling large-diameter foundation members.
Check "Exclude Skin Friction for Embedded Casings" to exclude t-z resistance for
embedded portions of concrete piles or shafts that contain casings.
Note: The "Coupled Axial and Lateral Soil Resistance" feature is recommended
ONLY for use with drilled shaft axial models.
Figure: 2.2.c Soil Behavior Options

2.2.6 Interaction Diagram Phi Factor
Check "User-defined phi" to enter custom phi factors for Flexure and Axial behaviors, or
leave the option unchecked if you want the program to make use of AASHTO phi factors
(see Interaction Diagrams for details).

2.2.7 Design Options
Check "AASHTO Combinations" if you want to select various AASHTO load

combinations to use in the analysis.
The AASHTO Page will be enabled once this option is checked.
When converting an existing model to an AASHTO design model, the existing load cases
will be deleted so that new AASHTO load cases can be added. To add AASHTO load
cases and assign a load type to each load case, click the "Load Case Manager" on the
AASHTO page or the Load Table on the Load Page.

2.2.8 Stiffness Options
Stiffness option is available for pier, pile bent, pile and cap, and pile models. Input or
graphically select the node of interest. Please see "16.1 Equivalent Stiffness Generation"
for more details.

2.2.9 Print Control
Select the type of output to be printed to an output file from the following:
1. Pile Displacements
2. Pile Element Forces
3. Pile Properties
4. Pier Displacements
5. Pier Element Forces
6. Pier Properties
7. Soil Response Forces
8. Soil Data per Layer
9. Soil Data per Pile Node
10. Soil Resistance Curves
11. Unbalanced Forces
12. Bridge Span Element Displacements
13. Bridge Span Element Forces
14. Bridge Span Properties
15. Bridge Span Temperature Loads
16. Cap Stresses and Moments
17. Stress-Strain Curve Data
18. Spring Forces
19. Interaction Data
20. Coordinates
21. XML Data Printing – Creates XML output file that can be used to extract FB-
MultiPier data. See FB-MultiPier XML Specification documentation.
Note: Anytime XML Data Printing is enabled, the Pile Element Forces, Pier
Properties, Pier Element Forces, and Coordinates flags will also be treated as
enabled.
2.3 AASHTO Page
Note: The AASHTO Combination option in the Design Options section of the Analysis
Page must be selected for this Page to appear.
Figure: 2.3.a AASHTO Page
Select the AASHTO combinations that will be used in the analysis using the following:
1. AASHTO Design Approach

2. AASHTO Load Generation
3. AASHTO Load Case Manager
4. AASHTO Editable Load Factors Table
5. Wind Load Generator
6. Temperature Load Generator
7. AASHTO Load Combination Preview Table
8. AASHTO Limit States
9. AASHTO Vertical Wind Pressure Loads
10. AASHTO Fatigue Limit States
2.3.1 AASHTO Design Approach
Select between Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) or Load Factor Design (LFD)
method. Limit States will be updated depending on this selection.
Return to the AASHTO Page.

2.3.2 AASHTO Load Generation
Choose to include self weight and/or buoyancy cases.
For AASHTO LRFD, self weight is included in the "DC" case and buoyancy is included in
the "WA" case.
For AASHTO LFD, self weight is included in the "D" case and buoyancy is included in the
"B" case.

2.3.3 AASHTO Load Case Manager
The AASHTO Load Case Manager manages the type and number of load cases in your
model. Changes made with this manager apply to every pier.
Figure: 2.3.b AASHTO Load Case Manager Dialog
To add a new load case, select a load case from the "Available Types" list. Then click the
"Add" ( << ) button. This will add the selected load case to the "Defined Load Cases" list.
To remove a defined load case, select a load case from the "Defined Load Cases" list.
Then click the "Remove" ( >> ) button.
To change the number of load cases for a particular load type, select a load case from
the "Defined Load Cases" list. Load case types which can be defined as multiple
instances are followed by parentheses and a number. Example: click on Live Load (1).
The "spinner" box located below the "Defined Load Cases" list will then update. The
engineer can then update the number in the "spinner" box and thereby modify the
number of live load instances. Updates to the "spinner" box will correspondingly change
the number of load case instances for the currently selected load type in the "Defined
Load Cases" list, where between 1 and 25 instances can be defined.
Note: Certain load case types are grouped together. Namely: "Veh. Braking" and
"Impact" load types are grouped with "Live Load". Changing the number of instances for
"Live Load" will automatically change the number of instances for "Veh. Braking" and
"Impact".

2.3.4 AASHTO Load Factor Table
Load Factors can be edited by clicking on the "Edit Load Factors" button. Edit the
individual AASHTO load factors in the table, or reset the values to the default values.
Figure: 2.3.c AASHTO Maximum Load Factor Table.

Figure: 2.3.d AASHTO Minimum Load Factor Table.
The minimum Load Factor Table is not editable.

Figure: 2.3.e AASHTO Load Factor Table using Load Factored Design (LFD)
AASHTO Load Factor Table using Load Factored Design (LFD). When using LFD, Gamma
(load factor) is multiplied by each coefficient in the corresponding group. These
products can be seen in the AASHTO Load Preview Combination dialog. For example,
Dead Load (D) has a default value of 1.00. It is multiplied by the GROUP-I Gamma value
1.3. Thus, the AASHTO Load Preview Combination dialog displays the value 1.3 (1.00 *
1.3 = 1.3). This is the value used in the analysis.

2.3.5 Wind Load Generator
Enter the wind load parameters.
Click "Generate Wind Load Cases" to convert the wind load to loads at the bearing
locations and automatically create wind load cases. Depending on the model type you
will see one of the following dialog boxes.
This dialog appears for the Pier, Pile Bent, and One Pier Two Span model types.
Figure: 2.3.f Wind Load Generation Dialog
The following dialog appears for the Bridge model type.
Figure: 2.3.g Bridge Wind Load Generation Dialog
A wind angle of zero degrees applies all of the wind in the transverse direction. The
equations used in the wind load generation are found here.

2.3.6 Temperature Load Generator
As mentioned in the dialog below, FB-MultiPier automatically calculates the force effect
due to superimposed temperature deformations, when TU, and/or TG load case is
included. The temperature and superstructure cross-section details can be entered on
'Bridge' page → Click 'Edit Span' → Click 'Section Properties and Temperatures'.
Figure: 2.3.h Temperature Load Generation Dialog

2.3.7 AASHTO Load Combination Preview Table
The Load Combination Preview table catalogs all load types and load factors associated
with each load combination.
Figure: 2.3.i AASHTO Load Combination Preview Table
Factors from the Load Combination Preview table (and utilized in FB-MultiPier unless
manually overridden) are taken from AASHTO LRFD Bridge Specifications, 8th Edition,
by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, Washington,
D.C.

2.3.8 AASHTO Limit States
Select the limit states to check in the analysis.
Note: The program does not display (or analyze) a load combination unless the load
types expected in that combination are defined. For example, the STRENGTH-III load
combination will not be considered until a dead load type (DC) and a wind load type
(WS) are defined. Dead, live, and wind load types are considered mandatory to generate
load combinations. All other load types are optional. Check the load combination
preview in the AASHTO Page to confirm the generation of specific load combinations.

2.3.9 AASHTO Vertical Wind Pressure Load
The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Spec. requires a vertical wind force to be considered in
Limit States Strength III and Service IV.
To facilitate this requirement, FB-MultiPier program enables users to include two
separate load cases, i.e., VP (vertical pressure) and VR (vertical pressure for a reversed
load case), only for Strength III and Service IV.
Note: VR appears if and only if “Reversible Loads” is selected in the “Limit States to
Check” found on the AASHTO page.
Figure: 2.3.j AASHTO Load Combination.

Figure: 2.3.k Wind Load Generator.
These VP and VR load cases are only combined with WS1 (first wind-on-structure load
case). In such cases, if the Wind Load Generator is utilized, then the engineer should
assign a wind angle of 0.0 in association with WS1.

2.3.10 AASHTO Fatigue Limit States
Live load cases of Fatigue Limit States represent the load effects due to fatigue loading
and all the other limit states of which live load combinations are related to the normal
vehicular use of the bridge should be analyzed separately.
Difference between Fatigue Limit States I and II
The load factors for Fatigue I are of greater magnitude than those for Fatigue II. These
differences represent cumulative load effects associated with “infinite” and “finite”
fatigue loading cycles, respectively.
Note: The AASHTO spec. states that only the load cases of LL, IM, and CE are to be
included in Fatigue I and II.
Load Cases of LL, IM, CE, BR, PL, and LS
When assigning LL, the program will automatically create load cases for IM and BR.
These loads are typically assumed to coexist and are dependent upon one another. For
example, if LL is the result of two lanes being loaded, then BR will also be the result of
two lanes being loaded and so forth. If the bridge deck is curved then the user has the
option to assign Centrifugal Forces (CE) that also correspond to each LL case in a
sequential order.
Pedestrian Loading (PL), if used, is typically assumed to be a constant loading applied to
the bearings near the side walk positions and for this reason only one load case is
provided for PL. Very often in practice it is assumed that traffic may be positioned over
sidewalks.
Live Load Surcharge (LS) is typically a vehicular loading applied to the ground surface of
backfill being supported by a retaining wall. FB-MultiPier has a special model case
“Retaining Wall” that allows for this type of loading.
See the following AASHTO Spec. sections for additional details:
LL 3.6
PL 3.6
IM 3.6
CE 3.6
BR 3.6
LS 3.11
2.4 Dynamics Page
Figure: 2.4.a Dynamics Page - Time Step Integration

Figure: 2.4.b Dynamics Page - Modal Response
The Dynamics Page provides various options for controlling a dynamic analysis.
Analysis Type
Two dynamic analysis types are available.
1. Time Step Integration - Uses implicit integration to solve for results at every time
step.
2. Modal Response Analysis – Applies static loads and then performs a response
spectrum analysis using the equilibrium (deformed) position. Performs a CQC of
the modal analysis results.
Note: Modal analysis requires the user to select the number of modes to use in the
analysis. For a Modal Response Spectrum analysis, enter the number of modes to
consider and the damping level used for the response spectrum. Then, check the
modal contribution factors in the printed output file to ensure that at least 90% of the
structure mass is participating in the response.
Check "Dynamic Analysis Types" for more details.
Advanced Options
Relatively more advanced dynamic analysis options may be activated from within the
“Dynamics – Advanced” dialog (Figure: 2.4.c).
For "Time Step Integration" analysis, concrete and steel hysteresis options are available.
Additional details are provided here: "Structural Material Hysteresis".
For “Time Step Integration” or “Modal Analysis”, the Rayleigh Damping Factors can be
automatically computed based on two modes of interest and a specified level of critical
damping.
For “Modal Response” analysis, two options are available:

1. The engineer can elect to halt the analysis after the Eigen analysis has completed.
3. The CQC3 combination rule can be used in combining the direction-dependent
results.
Figure: 2.4.c Dynamics - Advanced
Time Stepping Parameters

Three types of time stepping options are available.
1. Average acceleration (Newmark).

2. Linear acceleration (Newmark).
3. Wilson-Theta.
Enter a constant value for the time step and the number of time steps to consider in the
analysis.
Dynamic Relaxation
The Dynamic Relaxation feature is utilized to initialize the system in equilibrium with
permanent (static) loading, while minimizing non-physical system vibrations due to the
presence of permanent loads. For more details, see "Dynamic Relaxation".
The reported analysis results do not include the effect of static loads (i.e. self weight).
Adding the static results and response spectrum results may not be conservative and is
left to engineering judgment.
Global Damping
Two types of damping input are available.
1. For Time Step Integration, Rayleigh damping can be specified. The damping is
proportional to the mass and stiffness. Factors can be entered for the pier, piles,
and soil. Note that if the ‘Damping’ checkbox is checked, but the mass and
stiffness damping coefficients for the Soil are both defined as ‘0.0’, then radiation
damping will be applied to embedded nodes in the model. See "Dynamic Soil
Properties" for additional details about radiation damping
2. For Modal Response, modal analysis damping can be specified. Enter the damping
level as a percentage of critical damping.
Check "Damping" for more details.
Soil Mass
Soil mass can be automatically incorporated into the system mass matrices. In this
context, the 'Percentage' is used to determine the mass of the soil that is attributed to
the translation degrees-of-freedom for each subsurface node in the model. The
'Percentage' input is taken relative to the pile diameter (or equivalent diameter) at each
subsurface node.
For example, a 'Percentage' input value of 10% would correspond to masses of soil
extending 10% beyond the diameters (or equivalent diameters) of all pile cross sections.
The corresponding soil masses contained within the 10% regions would be accounted
for in the system mass matrices.
Note that if non-zero values are supplied to the 'Rayleigh Damping Factors' pertaining
to 'Soil', then the soil masses will also be automatically accounted for in the system
damping matrices.
Mass
Consistent (distributed) mass is used in FB-MultiPier.
Load Functions/Spectrums
The various load function and spectrum input options are described in "Time Functions".
2.5 Lateral Stability Page
Pushover
Click on the "Run Pushover Analysis" checkbox to activate the pushover analysis mode,
detailed here.
Minimum Pile Tip Embedment

Click on the "Run Minimum Pile Tip Embedment" checkbox to activate the pile tip
embedment analysis mode, detailed here. Note that this feature can be utilized
simultaneously with the "Pushover" analysis feature.
Figure: 2.5.a Lateral Stability Page

2.5.1 Pushover Analysis
Click on the "Run Pushover Analysis" checkbox to activate the pushover analysis mode.
Two load cases must be defined: 1) The first load case is used to apply permanent loads
that will not be incremented (e.g., self weight); and, 2) The second load case is used to
specify loads that will be incremented.
Input Options
The following inputs are needed for making use of the Pushover analysis feature:
1. Enter the number of pushover steps. This is the number of times that the incremental
loads from load case 2 will be compounded on top of the permanent loads from load
case 1.
2. The load increment factor multiplies the loads in the second load case to create an
accumulating load that is applied until convergence cannot be achieved, or the number
of steps is completed. For example, a load increment factor of 1.0 would add 100% of
the original load to each incremental load case. If the original load increment was 10
kips, then the second load increment would be 20 kips, and the third load increment 30
kips, and so forth for the number of load steps. The failure load is printed to the output
file when a load is reached that cannot converge to a solution.
Figure: 2.5.b Lateral Stability Page with Pushover analysis controls
Return to the Lateral Stability Page.

2.5.2 Minimum Pile Tip Embedment Analysis
Minimum Pile Tip Embedment (MPTE) analysis facilitates automated assessment of

lateral stability and determination of minimum pile tip embedment lengths. The process
involves running a series of trial embedments, each involving incremental model
changes relative to a designated base model, and cataloging design-pertinent results
(pile lateral displacements, pile axial forces) across the analysis set. Results obtained
from MPTE are useful in determining the embedment at which a structure begins to
become laterally unstable under an arbitrary set of loads or load cases, and can be
accessed via the Design Tables window, by clicking the "Minimum Pile Tip Embedment"
button within the Full Tables window-region.
Figure: 2.5.c Lateral Stability Page with Minimum Pile Tip Embedment controls
Input Options
The following inputs are needed for making use of the MPTE feature:
1. Run Minimum Pile Tip Embedment Analysis – check this checkbox to invoke the MPTE
feature set. When this checkbox is not checked, all other MPTE controls on the Lateral
Stability Page will be unavailable.
2. Model Embedment Length – the pile embedment length for each pile that is used in
the first analysis. This field is not editable, but rather calculated from the current model
dataset. Note that the "current" model is designated as the starting point (or "base"
model) from which all other trial embedment lengths stem. As a convenience and
reference point, the Model Embedment Length is displayed on the Lateral Stability Page
in a read only text box. The displayed value is the pile length embedded within soil,
which is a function of the soil elevations input on the Soil Page and the pile segment
lengths input from cross section dialogs within the Pile Page.
3. Final Embedment Length – The pile embedment length used in the final analysis. This
length can be either greater than or less than the "base" Model Embedment Length. A
Final Embedment length that is less than the "base" Model Embedment length will cause
the pile to shorten over the series of trial embedment analyses. A Final Embedment
length that is greater than the "base" Model Embedment length will cause the pile to
lengthen over the series of trial embedment analyses.
4. Number of Trial Embedments – The number of trial embedments that will be
analyzed between the "base" model embedment length and Final Embedment Length
(inclusive). For example, if the Number of Trial Embedments is six (6), then a total of six
analyses will be conducted, where each analysis operates on a model of unique pile
embedment length.
Feature Guidelines
The following guidelines should be considered when employing the MPTE feature:
1. Final Embedment length must be such that the pile tip falls within an existing soil
layer.
2. Final Embedment length must be greater than zero (0).
3. Final Embedment length cannot be equal to the "base" Model Embedment Length.
4. Frame element lengths within embedded pile portions of the "base" model are held
constant (as much as possible) as the program progresses through each trial
embedment. In so doing, the number of embedded nodes on each pile may differ from
the "base" model, increasing as the pile embedment length increases, and decreasing as
the pile embedment length decreases.
5. The minimum number of embedded nodes per pile is five (5), and the maximum
number of embedded nodes per pile is two hundred (200). If the MPTE input causes
these node count requirements to be violated, the MPTE analysis will not run.
Adjustment of the number of embedded nodes per pile is handled on the Pile Page. It
may also be necessary to adjust the Final Embedment Length on the Lateral Stability
Page so as to remain compliant with the aforementioned node count requirements.
6. The recommended input for Number of Trial Embedments is between six (6) and
thirty (30). Six (6) is thought to be a reasonable minimum in order to begin to observe
design-relevant trends among plotted results. Thirty (30) is thought to be a reasonable
maximum at which the time it takes to run an analysis is balanced by the resolution of
the plotted data points not significantly improving the ability to see the trend.
Step-by-Step Guide
The following is a step-by-step guide for making use of the MPTE analysis feature:
1. Build or load an existing model, which will be automatically designated as the "base"
model.
2. By default, MPTE is not enabled. To enable the feature, click the Model Data → Lateral
Stability → "Run Minimum Pile Tip Embedment Analysis" checkbox.
3. Enter the Final Embedment Length. An individual analysis will be automatically
performed for the number of steps (trial embedments) between the "base" Model
Embedment Length and the Final Embedment Length (inclusive).
4. Enter the Number of Trial Embedments. This defines the previously mentioned
number of steps (trial embedments) from "base" model embedment to final
embedment. Ultimately, this input value dictates the total number of analyses that will
be conducted.
5. Click the Run Analysis toolbar button on the main toolbar. During the iterative
analysis, the Analysis dialog’s title bar indicates the trial embedment being analyzed.
Figure: 2.5.d Analysis window display during analysis of MPTE models
Return to the Lateral Stability Page.
2.6 Pile Cap Page

Figure: 2.6.a Pile Cap Page.
The number of piles in the Xp and Yp directions is used to create a grid for positioning
the piles. Piles not shown at a grid position are labeled as missing.
Enter data for the pile cap in the following fields:
Mesh Generation
Enter the number of grid points in the Xp and Yp directions. The program will prompt
you to choose whether you want to place piles at all new grid points or not.
Note: For modeling hammerhead configurations (non-redundant foundations) using
the "Pier" model type, please ensure that the pile cap grid size is set to 1x1.
For the constant and variable spacing options Click "Grid Spacing Table". This will open
the "Grid Spacing Table".
Elevations
Pile Cap elevation – this is the elevation at the centerline of the pile cap.
Top of Layer 1 (Soil Set 1) - This is a read-only display of the elevation at the top of the
soil set that is currently selected in the Soil Edit Window. It can be used on the Pile Cap
Page as a reference when inputting the Pile Cap elevation.
Pile Cap Properties

Enter the following properties for the pile cap:
1. Young’s Modulus
2. Poisson’s Ratio
3. Thickness
4. Unit Weight
Pile Cap Dimensions

Xp-dir dimension – this is a read-only display of the current pile cap grid size in the Xp
direction. This measurement does not account for any removed pile cap elements. It is
the sum of all grid spacings in the Xp direction.
Yp-dir dimension – this is a read-only display of the current pile cap grid size in the Yp
direction. This measurement does not account for any removed pile cap elements. It is
the sum of all grid spacings in the Yp direction.
Soil-Cap Interaction
Check the checkbox to activate the pile cap "Vertical Bearing Resistance" feature. User
can input custom vertical bearing springs using "Custom" button. Note that the Bearing
Resistance feature can only be utilized if the mid-surface of the pile cap is at or below
the elevation at the top of soil layer 1 (i.e. for embedded pile cap).
Additional soil weight (soil load) is applied on the top of pile cap, when the soil elevation
is higher than the elevation of the physical top of pile cap. This soil load is calculated
using the user specified "Unit Weight of Soil on Cap".
2.6.1 Grid Spacing Table
If constant spacing is selected, then only the "Constant Spacing" text box is editable.
Enter the variable spacing in both directions in the tables.
Otherwise, if variable spacing is selected, then the "Constant Spacing" text box is "grayed
out".
Figure: 2.6.b Grid Spacing Table

Return to the Pile Cap Page.
2.6.2 Vertical Bearing Resistance
Check the checkbox to activate the pile cap Vertical Bearing Resistance feature. When
activated, FB-MultiPier assigns vertical soil springs to each of the nodes in the pile cap.
The Bearing Resistance feature can only be utilized if the mid-surface of the pile cap is at
or below the elevation at the top of soil layer 1 (i.e. for embedded pile cap). Note that
any number of soil sets can be applied to the cap elements for the purposes of using the
Bearing Resistance feature.
Based on bearing pressure vs displacement curves for each vertical soil spring, vertical
reaction forces are calculated for a given vertical displacement. Note that vertical
springs are active at all cap nodes that do not correspond to pile head nodes. In
particular, this process is driven by the current vertical pressure acting at a given pile
cap node, and the corresponding tributary bearing area associated with that pile cap
node:
Eqn: 2.6.A
where,
F is the vertical pressure at a pile cap node for a given vertical displacement
Z is the vertical displacement inducing the pressure at the pile cap node
K is the subgrade modulus of soil at the mid-surface of pile cap
Q is the ultimate bearing resistance of the soil at the mid-surface of pile cap
u
Note that the vertical pile cap bearing springs only act in compression.
Subgrade modulus (K) provides the initial slope of the bearing pressure versus
displacement curve, whereas the ultimate bearing resistance (Q ) provides the curve
u
asymptote. Subgrade modulus (K) and ultimate bearing resistance (Q ) values are
u
calculated as described below.
For Sand:
a) Subgrade modulus (K) –
For sand, subgrade modulus is directly input from within the Soil Page.
b) Bearing capacity (Q ) -
u
The ultimate bearing capacity for pile caps in Sand (ϕ ≠ 0 and c = 0) is calculated by the
general bearing capacity equation, Eqn: 2.6.B, by Meyerhof (1963)
Eqn: 2.6.B
For zero cohesion (c = 0) Q becomes:

u
Eqn: 2.6.C
where,
N , N and N are bearing capacity factors (Table 1)
c q ɣ
S , S and S are shape factors (Table 1)
c q ɣ
D , D and D are depth factors (Table 1)
c q ɣ
Table 1
Factors (ϕ > 0) Values
N
c
N
q
N
ɣ
S
c
S and S
q ɣ
D
c
D and D
q ɣ
ϕ is angle of internal friction (rad), and is equal to zero for cohesive soils.
ɣ is total unit weight of sand
σ’ is effective vertical stress at the mid-surface of the pile cap.
v
B is width of pile cap
L is length of pile cap
z is vertical distance of mid-surface of pile cap from the ground surface.
For Clay:
a) Subgrade modulus (K) –
For clay, subgrade modulus is selected from the table (Reese, 1984) below, based on the
directly input value of undrained shear strength (Cu):
Cohesive
U- Very
Soil Soft Medium Stiff Hard
nit Stiff
Properties
(C-
u, 250 - 500 - 1000 - 2000 - 4000 -
Shear Strength
ps- 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
f)
Subgrade
(k,
Modulus
pc- 30 100 500 1000 2000
(Static
i)
Loading)
Subgrade
(k,
Modulus
pc- - - 200 400 800
(Cyclic
i)
Loading)
b) Bearing capacity (Q ) -
u
The ultimate bearing capacity for pile caps in Clay (ϕ = 0 and c ≠ 0) is calculated by the
general bearing capacity equation, Eqn: 2.6.D, by Meyerhof (1963)
Eqn: 2.6.D
For zero internal friction angle (ϕ = 0) bearing factor N is zero. Accordingly, Q

ɣ u
becomes:
Eqn: 2.6.E
where,
N , N and N are bearing capacity factors (Table 2)
c q ɣ
S , S and S are shape factors (Table 2)
c q ɣ
D , D and D are depth factors (Table 2)
c q ɣ
Table 2
Factors (ϕ = 0) Values
N N = 5.14
c c
N N =1
q q
N N =0
ɣ ɣ
S S = 1 + 0.2·(B/L)
c c
S and S S =S =1
q ɣ q ɣ
D D = 1 + 0.2·(z/B)
c c
D and D D =D =1
q ɣ q ɣ
Note: No bearing springs are generated for Limestone or Custom P-Y lateral soil
types.

2.6.3 Custom Vertical Bearing Springs
Check the checkbox "Vert. Bearing Resistance" to activate the pile cap Vertical Bearing
Resistance feature. When activated, FB-MultiPier assigns vertical soil springs to each of
the nodes in the pile cap except the pile head nodes. For a given soil set that
encompasses the midplane of the pile cap, a custom pressure versus vertical
displacement curve can be defined by checking the 'Use Custom Curve' checkbox, and
supplying values within the table. Additionally, the ultimate bearing pressure associated
with the custom curve can be defined. This input value is included among the text
output to facilitate comparisons between the ultimate bearing pressure and the
maximum computed bearing pressure.
Figure: 2.6.c Custom Pressure vs Displacement Curve dialog.
The soil spring data must begin at the origin (0,0).
Note: No bearing springs are generated at the pile head nodes.
2.7 Pile Page
Enter data for the pile in the following fields:
1. Pile Section Description

2. Pile to Cap Connection
3. Pile Length Data
4. Pile Type and Batter Data
Figure: 2.7.a Pile Page
2.7.1 Pile Section Description
A different edit dialog appears depending upon the "Pile Behavior" option selected on
the Analysis Settings page.
If "Linear - Gross" is selected and the "Edit" button is clicked, then the Gross Pile
Properties dialog will appear. Note that gross section properties can only be specified in
association with linear behavior. Further, D/C ratios are not computed for members
defined using gross properties, and only values of 0.0 are listed among the analysis
results.
If the "Pile Behavior" option selected on the Analysis Settings page is "Linear" or
"Nonlinear", then the Full Cross-Section Pile Properties dialog will appear. For linear
analysis, the program calculates linear elastic properties from the detailed cross section
descriptions.
Return to the Pile Page.
2.7.1.1 Gross Cross Section Pile Properties

Figure: 2.7.b Gross Pile Properties Dialog
Pile members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp axes. The local
axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of members.
Modify the properties of a gross cross section in the following fields:
Pile Type Info

Add and remove pile sets (types). This allows the user to use different pile types for each
pile. → Pile Sets Tutorial
Use Pile Segment List to Add and remove pile segments of the selected pile type.
Database Section Selection

If the "Use Database Section" option is selected, the user can select from a predefined
set of cross-sections.
In the Gross Pile Properties page, there is only one option (Linear Pile) when you click
on the "Retrieve Section" button.
If the "Customize Current Section" option is selected, the user can customize the current
cross section.
Furthermore, the user can also save custom cross sections by clicking the "Add To
Database" button. The user can also delete the Database section by clicking the "Delete
Section" button
Section Type
Select a cross section type from the following:
1. Circular Pile
2. Square Pile
3. H-Pile
Note: this option is only available if the "Customize Current Section" option is
selected.
Segment Dimensions
Enter the following data for the dimensions of the segment:
1. Length
2. Area
3. Diameter — Only available for a circular pile
4. Width — Only available for a square pile
5. Depth — Only available for a square pile
6. [Unit] Weight
Note: except Length, other options are only available if the "Customize Current
Section" option is selected.
Section Properties
1. Inertia 2 Axis—The moment of inertia about the 2-axis
3. Torsional Inertia
5. Shear Modulus
selected.
Return to Pile Section Description page.
2.7.1.2 Full Cross-Section Pile Properties

Figure: 2.7.c Full Cross Section Properties Dialog
Modify all of the properties of a pile cross section in the following fields:
Pile Type Info

Add and remove pile sets (types). This allows the user to use different pile types for each
pile. -> Pile Sets Tutorial
Use Pile Segment List to Add and remove pile segments of the selected pile type.

When you click on the "Retrieve Section" button, there are the following options:
Figure: 2.7.d Pile Database Options
cross section.
Section" button
Section Type
The "Edit Section Contents" button yields different windows depending upon the type of
cross section selected.
1. Circular Pile
2. Rectangular Pile
3. H-Pile
4. Pipe Pile
5. Pipe Pile (Concrete Filled)
Note: this option is only available if the "Customize Database Section" option is
selected.
Section Constitutive Properties

Choose between a "Default Stress Strain Curve" option and a "User-Defined Stress Strain
Curve" option.
Depending upon the stress-strain selection, the "Edit Properties" and "Plot Stress Strain"
buttons will yield different windows.
Note: when using "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option the user should input the
elastic modulus (ksi) using material properties panel on the "Detailed Cross Section"
dialog.
Section Dimensions
The fields in which one can enter data depend upon the type of cross section selected.
Circular Section:
1. Length
2. Diameter (d)
3. Unit Weight
Rectangular Section:
1. Length
2. Width (w)
3. Depth (h)
4. Unit Weight
H-Pile:
1. Length
2. Unit Weight
Pipe Pile / Pipe Pile (Concrete Filled):
1. Length
2. Diameter (d)
3. Thickness
4. Unit Weight
Detailed Cross Section

By clicking the "Detailed Cross Section" button, one can edit the bar groups and material
properties of the cross section in a table format. Select a segment from the "Section List"
and a pile set from the "Pile Type" list to edit. Pile members have unique local (1-2-3)
axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp axes. The local axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting
internal forces for elements of members.
Figure: 2.7.e Detailed Cross Section Table
Return to Pile Section Description page.

Circular Section Properties
Figure: 2.7.f Circular Cross Section Properties Dialog
Enter the data for a Full Circular cross section in the following fields:
Edit Bar Groups

Add or remove rebar groups to or from the cross section.
Note: The bar group data must be entered using one of the Allocation Methods.
Longitudinal Reinforcement
Choose between Mild steel or Prestressed for the type of steel in the bar groups. If
Prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.
For the type of Shear Reinforcement, the user can select either spiral or tied.
Casing
Casing can be added by checking "Casing" checkbox. Click "Edit Casing" to enter the
Casing Thickness.
Figure: 2.7.g Casing Thickness
Hollow Section
Hollow Section can be added by checking "Hollow Section" checkbox. Click "Edit Void" to
enter the void diameter of the Hollow Section.
Figure: 2.7.h Circular Void Diameter
H-Section
Embedded H-Section can be added by checking "H-Section" checkbox. Click "Edit H-
Section" to enter the H-Section depth, web thickness, width, and flange thickness.
Figure: 2.7.i Circular Embedded H-Section Dialog
Allocation Methods
There are two methods for entering bar group data; Custom and Percentage.
Custom:
1. Select or add a Bar Group in the Bar Groups list box.
2. Select a Longitudinal Reinforcement type (Mild or Prestressed).
3. Assign a number of bars in the group and a bar area.
4. Select a Bar Group shape (Circular of Rectangular). For Circular group, input a Group
Diameter. For Rectangular group, select an orientation (parallel to the 2 axis or 3 axis)
and staring coordinates. Bars are uniformly spaced fro staring coordinate to opposite
corner in the specified orientation.
5. Click the Generate Layout button to apply bar group to cross section.
6. Repeat steps 1-4 to add more groups of bars/strands..
Percentage: (Percentage Steel Tutorial)

1. Enter a Bar Area Reinforcement (% of the cross section area that is steel)
2. Enter the cover thickness.
3. Enter the Minimum Spacing (minimum distance between two steel bars).
4. Click the Generate Layout button to display the available bar options.
5. Select a bar layout from the Layout list, and click the OK button.
For both methods:

Choose between mild steel or prestressed for the type of steel in the group.
If prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.
Confined Concrete
If no casing is modeled for the cross section, choose between "None" for no
confinement or "Shear Reinforcement" for confinement of cross section portions that
fall within the diameter of the outermost reinforcement group.
If a casing (i.e., jacket) is modeled for the cross section, choose between "None" for no
confinement, "Shear Reinforcement and Casing", or “Shear Reinforcement and Confine-
Only Casing” for confinement of cross section portions that fall within the casing
diameter. Those portions of the cross section that are used for demand and capacity
calculations are illustrated below. Refer to the "Confined Concrete Model" section for
additional details concerning the constitutive relationships used for each cross section
component.
Figure: 2.7.j Confined Concrete Options
Note: 1. Confinement is not utilized if the "None" option is selected.

2. The confinement option "Shear Reinforcement" can only be selected when no
casing is modeled for the cross section.
3. A non-zero casing thickness must be entered in the "Edit Casing" dialog to
enable the "Shear Reinforcement and Casing" or “Shear Reinforcement and Confine-
Only Casing” confinement options.
Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties
page.
Rectangular Section Properties

Figure: 2.7.k Rectangular Cross Section Properties Dialog
Enter the properties for a Full Rectangular cross section in the following fields:
Edit Bar Groups

If the cross section contains taper, then define the four corner bars individually. For
example, the upper left bar could be defined in 'Group 1'. The upper right bar could be
defined in 'Group 2'. The lower left bar could be defined in 'Group 3'. The lower right
bar could be defined in 'Group 4'.
Hollow Section
enter the diameter for a circular void, or the length and width for a rectangular void of
the Hollow Section.
Figure: 2.7.l Rectangular Void Data
H-Section
Figure: 2.7.m Embedded H-Section Dialog
Allocation Methods
Custom:

For both methods:

page.
H-Pile Properties
Figure: 2.7.n H-Pile Cross Section Properties Dialog
Enter the properties of the H-Pile in the following fields:
Section Dimension
Enter the depth, width, web thickness, and flange thickness of the H-pile in the text
boxes.
Section Orientation
Select the orientation of the H-pile (web horizontal or web vertical).
Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties page.
Pipe Pile Properties
Enter a section length, diameter, shell thickness, and unit weight in the "Section
Dimension" Panel.
Concrete is not included in this cross section. (f’c and Ec are set to zero.)
Pipe Pile (Concrete Filled)
Enter a section length, diameter, shell thickness, and unit weight in the "Section
Dimensions" Panel.
Concrete is included in this cross section. To set the section constitutive properties for
concrete and steel, click the "Edit Properties" button.
For more information on inputting data for the pipe pile (concrete filled) section, see the
"circular section" type.

Curve" option.
Default Stress/Strain Curve

Depending upon the type of cross section chosen, the user can edit the individual
material properties, if the "Default Stress Strain Curve" option is selected, and the "Edit
Properties" button is clicked.
First choose a material type on the left, and then enter the properties for that material in
the text boxes.
Figure: 2.7.o Default Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog
User-Defined Stress/Strain Curve

The user can edit the stress-strain data of the materials present, if the "User-Defined
Stress Strain Curve" option is selected, and the "Edit Properties" button is clicked. First
choose a material type on the left, and then enter the stress-strain data for that material
in the table. Click the "Clear" button to clear the table of the current curve values.
Note: when making use of the "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option, the
engineer should input the elastic modulus for constituent materials of the pile cross
section using the "Detailed Cross Section" button located in the "Full Cross-Section Pile
Properties" dialog. For pier members, the "Detailed Cross Section" button is located
within the "Full Cross-Section Pier Properties" dialog.
Figure: 2.7.p User-Defined Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog

Material Stress-Strain Plot
If the "Plot Stress Strain" button is clicked, or the "Plot" button in the "Default Stress
Strain Curve", or "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" window is clicked, then a stress-
strain plot will appear.
One can view the stress-strain plot for each material present in the problem, by
selecting that material from the options at the top.
Figure: 2.7.q Graph of Material Stress/Strain Properties

Figure: 2.7.r Stress-Strain Properties Table.
Note: Extrapolation is used to calculate stresses for strain levels beyond those
provided in the stress-strain curve.
Return to the Full Cross-Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties
page.
2.7.2 Pile to Cap Connection
Choose to use either a "Pinned" or "Fixed" pile to cap connection.

2.7.3 Pile Length Data
The Tip Elevation on the "Pile Page" is not editable. It is a function of the pile cap
elevation, which is assigned on the "Pile Cap Page", and the pile length, which is
assigned on the pile cross section dialog. For example, if the pile cap elevation is 0, and
the pile length is 50', the pile tip elevation would be -50'. If the pile cap elevation is 100',
and the pile length is 50', the pile tip elevation would be +50'. To change the 'Tip
Elevation', click the "Edit Cross Section" button on the "Pile Page" and change the length
(s) of the pile segment(s).
"Free Length Nodes" - Enter the number of nodes in the pile free length above the soil.
"Embedded Nodes" - Enter the number of nodes in the pile embedded below the soil
(below ground level).
Figure: 2.7.s Free Length of Pile Above Soil

2.7.4 Pile Type and Batter Data
The Pile Type and Batter Data frame has the following features:
1. Pile – use the up and down arrows of this Pile spin control to select a pile. The
selected pile’s cross sections display in the list box immediately under the Pile spin
control, and an image of the pile cross section displays on the right side of the Pile page.
In this example, the cross section is a 24” square pile.
Figure: 2.7.t Pile Type Batter Data section.
If the selected pile has multiple cross sections, the selected cross section (highlighted in
blue) will display. The selected pile also highlights (in dark red) in the Pile Plan View
window.
Figure: 2.7.u Pile Plan View Window.
2. Pile Type – use this combo box to assign a Pile Type to the currently selected pile. The
currently selected pile is the pile number that displays in the Pile spin control. Additional
Pile Types can be defined by entering the cross section dialogs, by clicking the “Edit”
button on the Pile Page. In this example, Pile Type 2 has been selected for Pile 1. Unlike
Pile Type 1, which is a 24” square cross section, Pile Type 2 is a 36” round cross section.
Figure: 2.7.v Pile Type Batter Data Circular.
The applied Pile Type is immediately reflected in the Pile Plan View window.
Figure: 2.7.w Pile Plan View Window Circular Pile.

3. Soil Set – use this combo box to assign a soil set to the currently selected pile. The
currently selected pile is the pile number that displays in the Pile spin control. Additional
Soil Sets can be defined on the Soil Page, by selecting the “Add Set” menu item inside
the “Soil Set” combo box. In this example, soil set 2 has been selected for Pile 1. One soil
set must be defined for each pile type. More than one soil set can be applied to the same
pile type, but the same soil set cannot be applied to more than one pile type.
Figure: 2.7.x Pile Type Batter Data Soil Set.
The applied soil set is immediately reflected in the Pile Plan View window (see Figure:
2.7.y). To view this Soil Set change in the Pile Plan View window, the window must be in
“Assign Soil Sets to Piles” mode.
Figure: 2.7.y Pile Plan View Window Soil Set Assigned.
4. Batter – use the X Batter and Y Batter input boxes to enter batter information for the
currently selected pile. The currently selected pile is the pile number that displays in the
Pile spin control. In this example, an X Batter of 0.1 has been input, and a Y Batter of 0.1
has been input.
Figure: 2.7.z Pile Type Batter Data Batter Applied
The applied batter immediately is reflected in the Pile Plan View window.
Figure: 2.7.aa Pile Plan View Window Batter Pile 3.

2.8 Soil Page
Edit the soil with the following options:
1. Soil Layer Data

2. Soil Layer Models
a. Additional Soil Properties ("Edit")
b. Printable Soil Graph ("Plot")
c. Pile Group Factors ("Group")
d. Soil Table ("Table")
3. Soil Importing and Exporting
4. Soil Strength Criteria
5. Elevations
Figure: 2.8.a Soil Page
Choose Soil Set, Soil Layer and a Soil Type.

For this soil selected, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of the option
(Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip) and then clicking the button explained below:
The "Edit" button will activate "Additional Soil Properties" dialog.
The"Plot" button will activate the "Printable Soil Graph" dialog which allows the user to
view and print the various soil curves (load vs. deflection graph) based upon the
selected options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip).
The "Group" button will activate the "Pile Group Factors" dialog to specify for the soil
model. The user can specify the P-Multipliers.
The "Table" button will activate the "Soil Table" dialog for entering soil properties. This
feature allows the user to view/modify multiple soil sets and layers at the same time
and quickly enter properties for each. See "Soil-Structure Interaction" for details on the
soil properties.
The "Soil Importing and Exporting" can be done using the "Import" and "Export" buttons.
For static analysis, the "Cycling Loading" in the "Soil Strength Criteria" panel can be only
activated for "Cohesive" soil type.
2.8.1 Soil Layer Data
Create a new soil set or select an existing one from the "Soil Set" drop-down list. The
selected soil set in the "Soil Set" combo box is displayed in the "Soil Edit" window below
the "Soil Page", along with the currently selected pile. This pile selection is made in the
"Pile Plan View" window OR in the "Pile Page". In "Soil Edit" window, the pile nodes in
soil can be clicked to view the soil curves. However, if the selected soil set is not
assigned to the selected pile, the pile nodes will not draw.
One soil set must be defined for each pile type. More than one soil set can be applied to
the same pile type, but the same soil set cannot be applied to more than one pile type.
When adding a new soil set to the model, the soil set is not automatically applied to a
pile grid point. To assign the soil set to piles, visit the "Pile Page" OR the "Pile Edit"
window. For more information on the integration between the selected pile and the
selected soil set, see "Soil-Structure Interaction".
Create a new soil layer or select an existing one from the "Soil Layer" drop-down list.
Select the type of soil from the following options in the "Soil Type" drop-down list:
1. Cohesionless
2. Cohesive
3. Rock
Then from the "Soil Layer Models" panel, select the Lateral, Axial, Torsional and Tip (only
for soil layer containing pile tip) layer models for each soil layer
Enter the unit weight for the current soil layer in the "Unit Weight" text box.
Note: The unit weight is the total unit weight of the soil. The program will
automatically subtract the unit weight of water to get the effective unit weight
Return to the Soil Page.

2.8.2 Soil Layer Models
Choose Soil Set, Soil Layer and a Soil Type.
Select the layer models for each soil layer:

1. Lateral
2. Axial
3. Torsional
4. Tip (only for soil layer containing pile tip)
Depending on the Soil Type selected, FB-MultiPier has the following built-in lateral, axial,
torsional and tip Soil Models. The user can select one of the soil models from the drop-
down lists.
1. Lateral
A. Cohesionless
i. Sand (O'Neill)
ii. Sand (Reese)
iii. Sand (API)
iv. Liquefied Sand (Rollins)
v. Hybrid Liquefied Sand (Franke and Rollins)
vi. Piedmont Residual
vii. C-Phi
viii. Linear (Subgrade)
ix. Custom P-Y
B. Cohesive
i. Clay (O'Neill)
ii. Clay (Soft, Matlock)
iii. Clay (Stiff, with free water)
iv. Clay (Stiff, without free water)
v. Clay (API)
vi. Loess
vii. Piedmont Residual
viii. C-Phi
ix. Linear (Subgrade)
x. Custom P-Y
C. Rock
i. Limestone (McVay)
ii. Limestone (McVay) Uncoupled
iii. Weak Rock (Reese)
iv. Strong Rock
v. Massive Rock
vi. Sand (O'Neill)
vii. Sand (Reese)
viii. Sand (API)
ix. Clay (O'Neill)
x. Clay (Soft, Matlock)
xi. Clay (Stiff, with free water)
xii. Clay (Stiff, without free water)
xiii. Clay (API)
xiv. Linear (Subgrade)
xv. Custom P-Y
2. Axial
A. Cohesionless
i. Driven Pile
ii. Drilled Shaft Sand
iii. Driven Pile Sand (API)
iv. Custom T-Z
B. Cohesive
i. Driven Pile
ii. Drilled Shaft Clay
iii. Driven Pile Clay (API)
iv. Custom T-Z
C. Rock
i. Driven Pile
ii. Drilled Shaft IGM
iii. Drilled Shaft Limestone (McVay)
iv. Custom T-Z
3. Torsional
A. Hyperbolic
B. Custom T-θ
4. Tip
A. Driven Pile (McVay)
B. Driven Pile Sand (Mosher)
C. Drilled Shaft Sand
D. Driven Pile Sand (API)
E. Driven Pile Clay (Skempton)
F. Drilled Shaft Clay
G. Driven Pile Clay (API)
H. Drilled Shaft IGM
I. Custom Q-Z
For a selected soil type, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of the options
(Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip) and then clicking the button explained below:
The "Edit" button will activate "Additional Soil Properties" dialog. Clicking the "Dynamic
Properties " button will open the Soil Dynamics Dialog which will allow the user to input
additional soil properties that pertain only to dynamic type analysis.
The"Plot" button will activate the "Soil Resistance Plots" dialog which allows the user to
view and print the various soil curves (load vs. deflection graph) based upon the
selected options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip).
The "Group" button will activate the "Advanced Soil Data" dialog to specify for the soil
model. The user can specify the P-Multipliers.
The "Table" button will activate the "Soil Table" dialog for entering soil properties. This
feature allows the user to view/modify multiple soil sets and layers and the same time
and quickly enter properties for each. See "Soil-Structure Interaction" for details on the
soil properties.
When using a custom soil curve, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of
the options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip) and then clicking the "Edit" button.
The "Specify Top and Bottom Layer Props" checkbox allows you to enter different soil
properties at the top and bottom of each layer. The values will be interpolated across the
layer.
2.8.2.1 Additional Soil Properties
One can edit the Soil properties by selecting one of the options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional
or Tip) and then clicking the "Edit" button. This will open the "Additional Soil Properties"
dialog below.
Figure: 2.8.b Additional Soil Properties Dialog
Clicking the "Dynamic Properties" button on "Additional Soil Properties" dialog will
open the "Dynamics Soil Properties" dialog which will allow the user to input additional
soil properties that pertain only to dynamic type analysis. Please refer to "Dynamics Soil
Properties" section for more details. This option will only be available in dynamic type
analysis. These properties are for lateral behavior only.
Figure: 2.8.c Dynamic Soil Properties Dialog
When using a Custom P-Y curve, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of
the options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip) and then clicking the "Edit" button. For
example, the custom P-Y curve is shown below.
Note: Specific to Custom P-Y curves, if no value is supplied for Pu, then the maximum
value of "p" from the user-defined curve will be assigned as Pu.
Figure: 2.8.d Custom Soil Properties Dialog
The "Import Data" button retrieves custom curves data from a text (.txt) file, and replaces
the current curve data in the table.
"Table PDF" button will save the Custom P-Y curve table in a PDF format. The "Save to
File" button saves the Custom P-Y curve data from the table to a text (.txt) file, in the
format below.
Number of Curve Points in File

XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
Return to the Soil Layer Models page.
2.8.2.2 Soil Resistance Plots
The ‘Plot’ button on the Soil page actives the Soil Resistance Plots Dialog which allows
users to plot the different types of load vs. deflection curves for multiple nodes of a pile.
All plot types (P-Y, T-Z, T-θ, Q-Z) may be viewed (one at a time) by changing the selected
Plot Type radio button.
1. P-Y (Lateral) - Plots the lateral reaction per unit length vs. lateral deflection
2. T-Z (Axial) - Plots the axial stress vs. axial displacement
3. T-θ (Torsional) - Plots torsional stress vs. rotational displacement
4. Q-Z (Tip) - Plots the tip force vs. tip displacement
Figure: 2.8.e Soil Resistance Plots dialog
The properties of the selected Soil Layer are displayed on the right hand side for easy
reference, and the exact plot values for the plot are displayed in a table below this. Each
displayed plot and its corresponding data table may be printed or saved.
The Soil Set may be changed and will affect both the Soil Layers and Piles settings
available. The only available Soil Layers will be those that exist in the selected Soil Set.
Only Piles currently in the selected Soil Set will be available and will control the nodes
(elevations) available for display.
The elevations available are based on the selected Soil Layer and the location of nodes
with in the selected pile. Elevations are listed from top down and will include the top of
layer, all the nodes within the layer and then the bottom of layer. Each selection displays
both the node number and elevation of the selection. Once these selections are
completed press the ‘Update Plot’ button to show the new plot and table data.
Soil Plot Tutorial
2.8.2.3 Pile Group Factors
Select the type of P-Multipliers to use from the following:
1. Use Custom P-Multipliers

- User defined P-Multipliers.
2. Use 3D P-Multipliers
- Auto generated assuming 3D pile spacing (D is the diameter of pile). Check "Group
Interaction" for more details.
3. Use 5D P-Multipliers
- Auto generated assuming 5D pile spacing (D is the diameter of pile). Check "Group
Interaction" for more details.
4. Use P-Multipliers all equal to 1
- All the P-Multipliers are set equal to 1.0.
Use explicitly defined P-Multipliers for motions in the +Xp and -Xp directions.
- Only available for "Pile Bent" models
The user can enter the Axial Group Factor for skin and tip.
Figure: 2.8.f Pile Group Factors Dialog
2.8.2.4 Soil Table
The Soil Table feature is a series of five property pages used to input and display soil
data in tabular form. All available program soil data can be created and input using the
Soil Table. The Soil Table feature was developed at the request of engineers to facilitate
tabulated review of soil data for a particular soil model (lateral, axial, torsional, and tip)
across all soil layers in a soil set in one program window.
To launch the Soil Table, click the ‘Table’ button on the ‘Soil’ page (Figure: 2.8.g).
Figure: 2.8.g Soil page ‘Table’ button to launch Soil Table
The Soil Table opens with the Global page selected by default. The tabs to select the
desired page are located in the top left of the Soil Table interface (see Figure: 2.8.h). The
page options are as follows: Global, Lateral, Axial, Torsional and Tip.
Figure: 2.8.h Soil Table tabs
The Global page features two tables.

The Soil Set Table (Figure: 2.8.i) is used to input the following data:
• Number of soil sets
• Number of soil layers per soil set
• Water table elevation per soil set
• Cyclic loading per soil set
• SPT data per soil set
Soil sets can also be added (created) by clicking the ‘Add Set’ button in ‘Soil Set’ table
column of the Soil Set Table.
Soil sets can be deleted by clicking the ‘Delete’ button in the ‘Delete Soil Set’ table
column of the Soil Set Table.
Figure: 2.8.i Soil Set Table on Global page
The Soil Layer Table is used to input various data per soil layer (Figure: 2.8.j), including
the following:
• Soil Type
• Top of Layer Elevation
• Bottom of Layer Elevation
• Lateral Soil Model
• Axial Soil Model
• Torsional Soil Model
• Tip Model
• Unit Weight
• Top and Bottom flag
The Top and Bottom flag dictates whether soil properties apply to the entire layer or
where distinct properties can be input for the top and bottom of each layer.
Soil layers can be added by clicking the ‘Add Layer’ button in the ‘Soil Layer’ table
column of the Soil Layer Table.
Soil layers can be deleted by clicking the ‘Delete’ button in the ‘Delete Layer’ table
column of the Soil Layer Table.
Figure: 2.8.j Soil Layer Table on Global page
The Lateral Model Table on the Lateral Page is used to input various per layer lateral
properties (Figure: 2.8.k). These properties include the following:
• Internal Friction Angle
• Subgrade Modulus
• Mass Modulus
• Stiffness Constant
• Undrained Shear Strength
• Major Principal Strain at 50%
• Average Undrained Shear Strength
• Unconfined Compressive Strength
• RQD
The accessibility of the various input fields is dictated by the currently selected Lateral
Model for a given layer.
Figure: 2.8.k Lateral Model Table on Lateral page
The Axial Model Table on the Axial Page is used to input various per layer axial
properties (Figure: 2.8.l). These properties include the following:
• Shear Modulus
• Poisson’s Ratio
• Unconfined Compressive Strength
• Mass Modulus
• Modulus Ratio
• Surface (type)
• Split Tensile Strength
• Shaft Concrete Unit Weight
• Slump
• Ultimate Unit Skin Friction
• Coefficient of Lateral Earth Pressure
The accessibility of the various input fields is dictated by the currently selected Axial
Figure: 2.8.l Axial Model Table on Axial page
The Torsional Model Table on the Torsional Page is used to input various per layer
torsional properties (Figure: 2.8.m). These properties include the following:
• Shear Modulus
• Torsional Shear
The accessibility of the various input fields is dictated by the currently selected Torsional
Figure: 2.8.m Torsional Model Table on Torsional page
The Tip Model Table on the Tip Page is used to input various set tip properties for the tip
layer in each soil set (Figure: 2.8.n). One tip model can be specified per soil set. These
properties include the following:
• Shear Modulus
• Poisson’s Ratio
• Axial Bearing Failure
• Uncorrected SPT
• IGM Mass Modulus
• Ultimate Unit End Bearing
• End Condition
• Displacement Exponent
• Maximum Tip Resistance
• Critical Displacement
• Relative Density Exponent
The accessibility of the various input fields is dictated by the currently selected Tip
Model for a given soil set.
Figure: 2.8.n Tip Model Table on Tip page
Additional features in the Soil Table

Soil curves can be viewed from within the Soil Table. Each of the four model pages
(Lateral, Axial, Torisonal, and Tip) has a ‘Plot’ column in its respective table. Clicking the
‘Plot’ button will launch the Soil Resistance Plots dialog (Figure: 2.8.o and Figure: 2.8.p).
Figure: 2.8.o Lateral page with Plot button

Figure: 2.8.p Soil Resistance Plots dialog showing P-Y (lateral) curves
For any active tab, Soil Table data can be exported to Excel and PDF formats. By default
the export option is ‘Excel’ (Figure: 2.8.q and Figure: 2.8.r).
Figure: 2.8.q Excel (export) button
Figure: 2.8.r Torsional Model Data exported to Excel
To change the export option to ‘PDF’, visit the ‘Program Settings’ dialog via the ‘Control’
menu.
To facilitate viewing more data rows in the Soil Table, click the ‘Expand Table’ button at
the bottom of the Soil Table window (Figure: 2.8.s). This increases the height of the Soil
Table window, allowing more rows of data (e.g. soil layers) to be viewed without
vertically scrolling. When the Soil Table has been expanded, the text on the ‘Expand
Table’ button will change to ‘Reduce Table’. Clicking the ‘Reduce Table’ button restores
the Soil Table to its default window size.
Figure: 2.8.s Expand Table option
Soil Table Tutorial

2.8.3 Soil Importing and Exporting
The “Import” button imports soil data from two types of files: a) FB-MultiPier input file
(.in), and b) soil data text files (.txt) that have been created via the “Export” button.
Importing soil will completely replace all existing soil data (all soil layers, all soil sets)
with the imported soil. The soil set assignments (to piles) will not be adjusted during the
import process. Thus it is a good idea to inspect the soil set assignments after using the
“Import” feature to ensure the desired soil sets are assigned to the appropriate piles. It is
also recommended to check the position of the pile tips within each imported soil set, to
ensure the tip layers are as expected.
The “Export” button saves the existing soil data (all soil layers, all soil sets) to a soil data
text file (.txt). This text file contains two headers: a) SOIL header, and b) CONTROL
header. The SOIL header in the soil data text file is identical in format to the SOIL header
saved in an FB-MultiPier input file. The CONTROL header is an abridged version of the
CONTROL header saved in the FB-MultiPier input file, containing two blank lines
followed by a third line containing the version number of the FB-MultiPier software
which was used to save the soil text file. The soil data text file must be of this described
format to be importable.

2.8.4 SPT Profile Data
A profile of SPT blow counts versus elevation can be input for each soil set. This dialog
can be accessed by navigating to the 'Soil' page, and clicking the 'Edit SPT' button. For
any soil set that contains an SPT versus elevation profile, the internal friction angles for
cohesionless layers within that soil set will be automatically calculated. Note that the
program corrects for overburden of the SPT blow counts during analysis.
Figure: 2.8.t SPT Data Dialog

2.8.5 Elevations
Enter the elevation of the water table, and the top and bottom elevation of each layer.
Note: Changes made to soil layer elevations AFTER extra members have been applied
to the model may cause extra members to shift position. The explanation 'Extra Member
Positioning with Respect to Model Changes' describes this further.
2.9 Pier Page
The 'Edit Cross Section' button allows for the selection and editing of structural
components.
To specify bearing locations, check the bearing location box, then click the Bearing Locs
button to specify the bearing locations. Bearing locations must be specified before
applying AASHTO loads.
To specify tapered sections, check the taper box and specify the number of uniform
sections.
This page is also the Wall Structure page for the Retaining Wall and Sound Wall options,
and the Bent Cap page for the Pile Bent option.
Edit the pier properties with the following options:
1. Pier Geometry
2. Pier Section Description
3. Taper Data
Figure: 2.9.a Pier Page
2.9.1 Pier Geometry
Enter the height of the pier, the cantilever length, the column spacing, the column offset,
and the number of pier columns.
Enter the number of column nodes, cantilever nodes, and beam nodes.
Choose to specify Bearing Locations for the pier.
Flooded columns may be checked if column sections are voided.
Figure: 2.9.b Pier Node Spacing Diagram

Figure: 2.9.c Pier Cap Slope
Return to the Pier Page.
2.9.1.1 Bearing Locations
Select either uniform or variable bearing spacing. You will only be able to enter data into
the appropriate field for your selection.
If the current model is a single pier model then the Bearing Layout options will be
visible. This allows one to select one or two rows of bearing locations. If the model type
is a Bridge model then this option will be located on the Bridge Page. The user interface
will automatically customize for the model type input data required.
Enter the number of Bearing Locations, the Column Offset of the starting location and
the spacing between locations. If more than one bearing row is present then the Bearing
Offset must also be entered.
Figure: 2.9.d Bearing Location Dialog
Return to the Pier Geometry page
2.9.1.2 Bearing Rotation Angle
The user may rotate the Pier and/or Bearing Pads on the Bridge Page. The rotation of
the bearings is independent to that of the Substructure rotation and is only available for
the Bridge Models.
Figure: 2.9.e Bearing Angle
2.9.2 Pier Section Description
A different edit dialog appears depending upon the "Pier Behavior" option selected on
the Analysis Settings page.
If "Linear - Gross" is selected and the "Edit" button is clicked, then the Gross Section Pier
Properties dialog will appear. Note that gross section properties can only be specified in
association with linear behavior. Further, D/C ratios are not computed for members
defined using gross properties, and only values of 0.0 are listed among the analysis
results.
If the "Pier Behavior" option selected on the Analysis Settings page is "Linear" or
"Nonlinear", the Full Cross Section Pier Properties dialog will appear. For linear analysis,
the program calculates linear elastic properties from the detailed cross section
descriptions.
By clicking "Table View" the "Pier Cross Section Table" appears. In the "Pier Cross
Section Table" the user can enter or view most of the cross-section data for column and
Pier cap in one table.
2.9.2.1 Gross Section Pier Properties

Figure: 2.9.a Gross Section Pier Properties
Column and Pier Cap members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp
axes. The local axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of
members.
Modify the properties of a linear pier cross section in the following fields:
Pier Component
Select the pier component to edit, or add and remove components.
Figure: 2.9.b Component Taper End Point Locations

In the Gross Pier Properties page, there is only one option (Linear 36" new round
concrete) when you click on the "Retrieve Section" button.
cross section.
Section" button.
Section Data
Enter the area and the unit weight of the section.
Taper Cantilever Properties

Enter the depths for a cantilever with a parabolic taper.
Figure: 2.9.c Cantilever Parabolic Taper Properties
Section Properties
3. Torsional Inertia
5. Shear Modulus
selected.
Return to the Pier Section Description page.
2.9.2.2 Full Cross Section Pier Properties

Figure: 2.9.d Full Cross Section Pier Properties Dialog
Modify all of the properties of a Pier cross section in the following fields:
Pier Component
Select the pier component to edit, or add and remove components.
Figure: 2.9.e Component Taper End Point Locations

When you click on the "Retrieve Section" button, there are the following options:
Figure: 2.9.f Pier Cross Section Options
cross section.
Section" button.
Section Type
The "Edit Section Contents" button yields different windows depending upon the type of
cross section selected.
1. Circular Section
2. Rectangular Section
3. H-Section
4. Bullet Section
selected.

Curve" option.
Note: when using "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option the user should input the
elastic modulus using material properties panel on the "Detailed Cross Section" dialog.
Section Dimensions
The fields in which one can enter data depend upon the type of cross section selected.
Circular Section:
1. Diameter (d)
2. Unit Weight
Rectangular Section:
1. Width (w)
2. Depth (h)
3. Unit Weight
H-Section:
1. Unit Weight
Bullet Section:
1. Diameter (d)
2. Width (w)
3. Unit Weight
Parabolic Taper Cantilever Properties

Enter the depths for a cantilever with a parabolic taper.
Figure: 2.9.g Cantilever Parabolic Taper Properties

Detailed Cross Section
By clicking the "Detailed Cross Section" button, one can edit the bar groups and material
properties of the cross section in a table format. Select a segment from the "Section List"
to edit.
members.
Figure: 2.9.h Detailed Cross Section Table
Return to the Pier Section Description page.

Circular Section Properties
Figure: 2.9.i Circular Cross Section Properties Dialog

Enter the data for a Full Circular cross section in the following fields:
Edit Bar Groups

For the type of Shear Reinforcement, the user can select either spiral or tied.
Casing
Casing can be added by checking "Casing" checkbox. Click "Edit Casing" to enter the
Casing Thickness.
Figure: 2.9.j Casing Thickness
Hollow Section
enter the void diameter of the Hollow Section.
Figure: 2.9.k Circular Void Diameter
H-Section
Figure: 2.9.l Circular Embedded H-Section Dialog
Allocation Methods
Custom:

For both methods:

Confined Concrete
If no casing is modeled for the cross section, choose between "None" for no
confinement or "Shear Reinforcement" for confinement of cross section portions that
fall within the diameter of the outermost reinforcement group.
If a casing (i.e., jacket) is modeled for the cross section, choose between "None" for no
confinement, "Shear Reinforcement and Casing", or “Shear Reinforcement and Confine-
Only Casing” for confinement of cross section portions that fall within the casing
diameter. Those portions of the cross section that are used for demand and capacity
calculations are illustrated below. Refer to the "Confined Concrete Model" section for
additional details concerning the constitutive relationships used for each cross section
component.
Figure: 2.9.m Confined Concrete Options
Note: 1. Confinement is not utilized if the "None" option is selected.

2. The confinement option "Shear Reinforcement" can only be selected when no
casing is modeled for the cross section.
3. A non-zero casing thickness must be entered in the "Edit Casing" dialog to
enable the "Shear Reinforcement and Casing" or “Shear Reinforcement and Confine-
Only Casing” confinement options.
page.
Rectangular Section Properties

Figure: 2.9.n Rectangular Cross Section Properties Dialog
Enter the properties for a Full Rectangular cross section in the following fields:
Edit Bar Groups

If the cross section contains taper, then define the four corner bars individually. For
example, the upper left bar could be defined in 'Group 1'. The upper right bar could be
defined in 'Group 2'. The lower left bar could be defined in 'Group 3'. The lower right
bar could be defined in 'Group 4'.
Hollow Section
enter the diameter for a circular void, or the length and width for a rectangular void of
the Hollow Section.
Figure: 2.9.o Rectangular Void Data
H-Section
Figure: 2.9.p Embedded H-Section Dialog
Allocation Methods
Custom:

For both methods:

page.
H-Section Properties
Figure: 2.9.q H-Section Cross Section Properties Dialog
members.
Enter the properties of the H-Section in the following fields:

Section Dimension
Enter the depth, width, web thickness, and flange thickness of the H-Section in the text
boxes.
Section Orientation
Select the orientation of the H-Section (web horizontal or web vertical).
Return to the Full Cross Section Pier Properties page.
Bullet Section Properties

Figure: 2.9.r Bullet Cross Section Properties Dialog
members.
Edit the properties of a bullet section in the following fields:
Edit Bar Groups

Cross Section Orientation
Select whether the cross section is oriented in the horizontal direction or the vertical
direction.
Void Data
enter the diameter for a bullet void, or the length and width for a rectangular void.
Figure: 2.9.s Bullet Void Dialog
Allocation Methods
Enter the number of bars in the group in the "Bars in Group" text box and the total area
of bar group in the 'Bar Area' text box.
If the "Parallel" bar group orientation is selected, enter the coordinates of the bar group
in the "Start 2 Coord" and "Start 3 Coord" text boxes. These are the starting coordinates
of the bar group. The "Parallel" groups are parallel to the straight edges of the bullet
cross section.
If the "Circular End" bar group orientation is selected, enter the group diameter in the
"Group Diameter" text box. The "Circular End" bar groups are positioned in the
semicircular ends of the bullet cross section.
Choose between mild steel or prestressed for the type of steel in the group. If
prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.
Return to the Full Cross Section Pier Properties page.
Curve" option.
Default Stress/Strain Curve

Depending upon the type of cross section chosen, the user can edit the individual
material properties, if the "Default Stress Strain Curve" option is selected, and the "Edit
Properties" button is clicked.
First choose a material type on the left, and then enter the properties for that material in
the text boxes.
Figure: 2.9.t Default Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog
User-Defined Stress/Strain Curve

The user can edit the stress-strain data of the materials present, if the "User-Defined
Stress Strain Curve" option is selected, and the "Edit Properties" button is clicked. First
choose a material type on the left, and then enter the stress-strain data for that material
in the table. Click the "Clear" button to clear the table of the current curve values.
Note: when making use of the "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option, the
engineer should input the elastic modulus for constituent materials of the pile cross
section using the "Detailed Cross Section" button located in the "Full Cross-Section Pile
Properties" dialog. For pier members, the "Detailed Cross Section" button is located
within the "Full Cross-Section Pier Properties" dialog.
Figure: 2.9.u User-Defined Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog

Material Stress-Strain Plot
If the "Plot Stress Strain" button is clicked, or the "Plot" button in the "Default Stress
Strain Curve", or "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" window is clicked, then a stress-
strain plot will appear.
One can view the stress-strain plot for each material present in the problem, by
selecting that material from the options at the top.
Figure: 2.9.v Graph of Material Stress/Strain Properties

Figure: 2.9.w Stress-Strain Properties Table.
Return to the Full Cross-Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties
page.
2.9.2.3 Pier Cross Section Table
The Pier Cross Section Table allows the user to enter and view most pier cross section
data in a single table. This makes double checking the data very easy. Each table column
represents one cross section. The properties available in the table depend upon the
cross section shape, behavior, type of steel, etc. For example, a round cross section
would only have the 'Diameter' dimension enabled, and not the 'Width' and 'Depth'
dimensions.
Tips for Using the Table:
1. If 'Material Properties' fields are not enabled, this is most likely due to a lack of steel
reinforcement in the cross section. Steel must be present in order to enable these fields.
To do so, click the 'Edit Steel' button in the 'Reinforcement' field, and enter steel data as
necessary. Then return to the table and the necessary material property fields will be
enabled.
2. To taper a cross section, check the appropriate 'Taper' checkbox. This will create
another column in the table, so that cross section data can be entered for each end of
the pier component. Example: column bottom, column top.
3. To create custom Stress/Strain Curves, select "Custom Stress/Strain" in the 'Material
Properties' field. Then click the 'Custom Curves' button in the 'Custom Curves' field.
Figure: 2.9.x Pier Cross Section Table Linear
Figure: 2.9.y Pier Cross Section Table NonLinear
Return to the Pier Section Description section.
2.9.3 Taper Data
Choose to apply a taper to the pier column, pier cap beam, and the pier cap cantilever.
Also, select whether the cantilever taper is linear or parabolic.
Figure: 2.9.z Pier Taper End Point Locations
For more detailed explanation, see the Taper Modeling page.

2.10 Wall Structure Page
The Wall Structure page is only active for the Retaining Wall model type.
By clicking "Table View" the "Pier Cross Section Table" appears. In the "Pier Cross
Section Table" the user can enter or view most of the cross-section data for the Wall
within a single table.
Figure: 2.10.a Wall Structure Page
Enter the wall height (it must be taller than the retained layer thickness). Note that the
base of the wall and the bottom of the retained soil layer are located at the centerline
elevation of the pile cap.
Enter the “wall offset”. This is the +x global distance from the edge of the pile cap
(footing) to the wall location.
Upon clicking "Edit", a unique dialog appears depending upon the "Behavior" option
selected on the Analysis Settings page.
If "Linear - Gross" behavior is selected on the Analysis Settings page and the "Edit"
button is clicked, then the Gross Section Wall Properties dialog will appear. If
"Gross" properties are specified, then a linear analysis approach is utilized for wall
members.
Otherwise, the Full Cross Section Wall Properties dialog will appear. When detailed
component properties are input non-linear analysis is an option and linear analysis also.
For linear analysis, the program calculates linear elastic properties from the detailed
cross section descriptions.
By clicking the "Table View" in Edit Cross section panel, opens the "Wall Cross Section
Table". In the "Wall Cross Section Table", the user can enter or view the most of the
cross-section data for Wall in one table.
2.11 Extra Members Page

Figure: 2.11.a Extra Members Page
Additional members (extra members) can be added to connect nodes in the model. To
create cross sections for use in extra member elements, click the "Edit Cross Sections"
button. This launches the cross sectional windows on which one or more cross sections
can be defined. Once defined, these cross sections can be applied to extra member
elements.
To create the extra member elements, click the "Add Element" button. This will add a
blank row in the table, in which to enter extra member data. Each extra member element
must be assigned an I-Node and J-Node value. The I-Node and J-Node values can be
typed directly into the table cells, or graphically selected in the 3D View window.
Custom end fixity conditions can be defined by entering the "Extra Member Custom End
Fixity" dialog (accessed by clicking the 'Custom Fixity' button). Any end fixity definitions
that are defined can then be assigned within the 'End Condition' column of the table.
Note that the 'Fix-Fix', 'I-Node Pin', 'J-Node Pin', and 'Pin-Pin' are also available within
the 'End Condition' column of the table.
The cross section of any currently selected extra member is rendered directly on the X-
Members Page. To apply a cross section to an extra member element, click the drop
down cell in the 'Cross Section' column of the table. This will display a list of available
extra member cross sections. The cross section type for extra members ("Gross
Properties" or "Full Cross Section") is dictated by the "Pier Behavior" selection on the
Analysis Settings page. For example, if "Pier Behavior" has been selected as "Linear -
Gross", then extra member cross sections are defined using "Gross" properties.
Changes made in the model AFTER extra members have been applied may cause extra
members to shift position. The explanation "Extra Member Positioning with Respect to
Model Changes" describes this further .
Note: Extra members are not available in the following models: Pile and Cap, Pile,
Stiffness, Column.
2.11.1 Extra Member Custom End Fixity
Custom end releases can be specified for the element-local rotational degrees of
freedom at the I-Node and J-Node ends of extra member elements The end fixity
process operates at the element-local level, and so, three columns are available for
release at the I-Node end (R1, R2, and R3), and three columns are available for the J-
Node end (R1, R2, R3). The definition of a custom end fixity condition consists of
populating one or more rows within the ‘End Fixity’ table with values of ‘0’ (release) or
‘1’ (do not release).
After defining one or more custom end fixity definitions within the ‘End Fixity’ table of
this dialog, the custom end fixity condition(s) can be assigned to one or more extra
member elements on the ‘X-Members’ page. Note that one custom end fixity definition
can be assigned to multiple elements, as the end fixity only dictates which rotational
degrees of freedom are to be released. Also, note that a maximum of sixty rows can be
stored.
Figure: 2.11.b Extra Member Custom End Fixity dialog
To add rows within the table of End Fixity definitions, specify the desired number of
rows to be added and click the 'Add Rows' button. This will add the new rows to the
bottom of the table.
To delete rows within the table of End Fixity definitions, highlight the number of rows
targeted for removal, and then click the ‘Delete Rows’ button.
Return to the Extra Members Page.
2.12 Load Page
To add a load at a node of interest:

1. Graphically select that node in the 3D View window, or directly input the node
number.
2. Then click the right 'Add' button to add the load to the node.
3. Enter load values for the 6 degrees of freedom.
Additional load cases can be added by clicking the left 'Add' button.
The 'Table' button shows a table of the loads for the selected load case.
If the preload option is selected (which would allow one to apply DL or other "built in"
loads to the pier structure) such loading is applied by the software before the transfer
beam is engaged. These built in loads, as is often the case with Segmental Bridges,
would thus exist in addition to any other loads being applied.
The self-weight and buoyant load factors are used to set the contribution of self-weight
and buoyancy for each load case. These are used for non-AASHTO loads.
For AASHTO load cases, self weight is included by adding a dead load type case and
buoyancy is included by adding a buoyancy type case. See the AASHTO Page to
automatically include self weight and buoyancy.
Edit the loads in the following areas:
1. Load Case
2. Buoyancy
3. Applied Nodal Loads
4. Loads
5. Load Table
6. AASHTO Load Table
7. Distributed Load Dialog
8. Load Case Generator
9. Edit Functions
10. Vessel Collision
In static analysis mode, the Load Page looks as follows:
Figure: 2.12.a Load Page Static Analysis Load
Click the "PreLoad" button to launch the "PreLoad" dialog. On the "PreLoad" dialog, in
the table, select (check) the checkbox in the "Include PreLoad" column for each desired
load case. PreLoad will be applied to each of the selected load cases. Preload is typically
used to model construction loads.
Figure: 2.12.b PreLoad
Check "Prescribed Displacement" to apply a displacement (rather than a load) to a node.

Loads and Displacements can not be applied at the same node in the same load case.
In AASHTO load mode, the Load Page looks as follows:

Figure: 2.12.c Load Page in AASHTO Analysis Mode
The ‘L’ and ‘R’ designations next to the bearing loads indicate a left and/or right bearing
row, respectively.
In dynamics analysis mode the Load Page looks as follows:

Figure: 2.12.d Load Page in Dynamic Analysis Mode
Nodal loads are marked as either static (S), or dynamic (D). Clicking on the S or D letter
toggles the load type from static to dynamic, and vice versa. For dynamic load types, the
load function number can be specified in the degree of freedom direction. A unique load
function can be applied to each degree of freedom. The load function can be specified
using the "Edit Functions" button on "Load" page.
Click the "Table" button to edit both static and dynamic loads.
Click the "Thermal Load" button to launch the "Thermal Load Cases" dialog. This dialog
is only available for bridge models in non-AASHTO mode (in AASHTO mode, thermal
loading is applied explicitly in the TU and TG load cases). Also, the "Thermal Load Cases"
dialog cannot be accessed until detailed superstructure cross-section and temperature
data are defined (Please navigate to "Bridge" Page -> "Edit Span" -> "Section Properties
and Temperatures" to supply detailed superstructure cross-section and temperature
data).
Figure: 2.12.e Thermal Load Cases
The table on the ‘Thermal Load Cases’ dialog displays one row per load case. Use the
checkboxes in the "Include Thermal Loadings" table column to apply thermal loading to
the desired load cases.
2.12.1 Load Case
Select a load case to view, modify, add, or remove new load cases.
Return to the Load Page.

2.12.2 Buoyancy
The buoyant force on the bridge substructure that is submerged, i.e., below the water
table, is automatically computed if a buoyancy factor greater than 0 is selected in non-
AASHTO mode or if buoyancy is activated (checked on) in AASHTO mode. The
computation includes piles, pile cap, pier columns. Partial buoyancy of the pile cap is
accounted for, where the volume of the pile cap that is submerged will be used to
determine the buoyant force acting on the pile cap. A convenient way to check buoyancy
and self-weight calculations is to include only these loads, run the program, and then
view the "Sum of Total Soil Spring Loads", Z direction in the output file.

2.12.3 Applied Nodal Loads
Select the node to which a load is applied. Add and delete a nodal load.
Alternatively, click the Table button to edit the loads in a table format.
If AASHTO load combinations are used, click the AASHTO Table button to edit the loads
in a table format.
Designate AASHTO load cases by selecting the type of load (nodal loads can be added in
addition to bearing loads).

2.12.4 Loads
Select whether or not pre-loading conditions (i.e. thermal stresses, construction loads,
shoring, etc.) are present. For the pre-loading situation, the equilibrium loads are found
from the pre-loading. Then, after equilibrium is established, the analysis uses the
equilibrium conditions to calculate the solution for the load cases.
Note that preloading can be applied (or not) for any load case of interest.
Enter point loads in the Xp, Yp, and Zp directions, and moments about the Xp, Yp, and Zp
axes.
Also, enter factors for self-weight and buoyancy (for non-AASHTO loads). Note that self-
weight corrections are made for overlaps between:
1) Pile portions that lie within the physical pile cap thickness;
2) Pier column portions that lie within the physical pile cap thickness; and,
3) Pier column portions that lie within the physical pier cap thickness.
Check ‘Applied Displacement’ to specify a displacement rather than a load for a node.

2.12.5 Load Table
Edit the loads in the table by selecting a text field to edit.
Alter the table with the following options:

1. Table Format
Select whether the table shows a "Single Load Case" or "All Load Cases". Click the
"Update and Sort" button to refresh the table.
2. Table Edit Options

Insert and delete rows to and from the table.
3. Load Case Options

Add and delete load cases to and from the table. Choose to duplicate an existing load
case.
The "Load Table" is used to define nodal loads in a table-style format. Static and
dynamic loads are separated into two separate tables that can be toggled using the
"Table Format" options.
Following are the Load Tables for Static and Dynamic analysis types.
Dynamic Analysis Type

The user can add Static as well as Dynamic load cases while in Dynamic analysis mode.
Enter the nodes and any applicable load function for each nodal degree of freedom.
Figure: 2.12.f Load Table in Dynamic Analysis Mode
Static Loads
Enter the load case, node, and load values.
Figure: 2.12.g Load Table in Static Analysis Mode

2.12.6 AASHTO Load Table
Edit the loads in the table by selecting a text field to edit.
Alter the table with the following options:
1. AASHTO Table Format

The AASHTO load cases are shown in the load tree. Click on the ‘+’ sign to expand the
case. Bearing loads are shown first, followed by the nodal loads
2. AASHTO Table Edit Options

With a load case expanded, right click the mouse on a nodal load to insert or delete
loads. The ‘Add Load’ and ‘Remove Load’ buttons can also be used.
Bearing location nodes cannot be removed.
3. AASHTO Load Case Options

Load cases are cannot be added using "AASHTO Load Table" dialog. To add load case,
go to "AASHTO" page -> "Load Case Manager"
Figure: 2.12.h AASHTO Load Table

2.12.7 Distributed Load Dialog
For a selected Load Case, the Distributed Load dialog helps to convert constant, uniform,
and linear load distribution types along an element length into nodal loads.
Figure: 2.12.i Distributed Load dialog
Select the member of interest from the following members (structural component) of
the pier using the 'Member' drop-down menu:
1. Pile
2. Pile Cap
3. Column
4. Pier Cap
The ‘3D View’ window (right side in the main program window) displays the nodes for
the selected structural member.
The user can also highlight an individual pile or pier column of interest using the
‘Highlight Member’ drop-down menu. For example, when the user selects ‘Pile 1’ from
the ‘Highlight Member’ drop-down menu, Pile 1 in the ‘3D View’ window will then be
highlighted. This feature facilitates location of a given pile or pier column of interest.
Select one of the following load distribution options from the ‘Load Types’ drop-down
menu.
1. Constant
2. Uniform
3. Linear
The ‘Constant’ load distribution option generates identical loads. The ‘Uniform’ load
distribution option generates loading based on tributary length. The ‘Linear’ load
distribution option generates loading based on the interpolation between the starting
and ending nodes’ load magnitudes and tributary length.
In the table, the starting and ending node numbers can be input for the element lengths
over which the distributed load is to be applied. The node numbers can be directly input
in the table, or the node numbers can be graphically selected by clicking nodes in the
‘3D View’ window. After selecting the nodes over which the distributed load will act,
input the Xp, Yp, and Zp components of the distributed load or moment in the table.
Note: Nodes can only be selected from among the nodes displayed in the ‘3D View’
window, and the selected nodes should be located along a straight line. For example, if
pile nodes are selected, both selected nodes must be on the same pile; if column nodes
are selected, both selected nodes must be on the same column; if pile cap nodes are
selected, both nodes must be in the same pile cap grid row or grid column.
The ‘Clear Load Generation Table’ button will clear all contents from the table.
Clicking the ‘Generate Load On The Selected Member’ button will generate nodal
loading on selected nodes using the distribution option, load magnitude entered, and
the tributary length.
The ‘Generate Load On Other Members’ button is active only for Pile and Column
members. Clicking the ‘Generate Load On Other Members’ button for the selected pile
member will generate equivalent loads on all ‘Other Member’ piles having the same pile
type, batter conditions and soil set. Similarly, clicking the ‘Generate Load On Other
Members’ button for the selected column member will generate equivalent loads on all
‘Other member’ columns having similar height. For example, a pier model consist of
two pile types (Pile Type 1, and Pile Type 2) with similar batter condition and soil set. If
nodes on the pile consisting of Pile Type 1 is selected, then the ‘Other Members’ are all
other pile consisting of Pile Type 1.
Note: The ‘Generate Load On Other Members’ button will NOT generate loads on
the selected pile’s nodes, but rather on the ‘Other Members’ of the selected pile/column
(if present) in the model.
Each time the ‘Generate Load On The Selected Member’ or ‘Generate Load On
Other Members’ button is clicked, the generated load is displayed in the ‘Generated
Load’ table. The ‘Generated Load’ table is viewable after clicking the ‘Show Table’
button (check Figure: 2.12.j) located at the bottom right of the dialog. The ‘Generated
Load History’ drop-down menu can be used to check the previously generated load
history. Users can clear the generated load history by clicking the ‘Clear Generated
Load History’ button. Clearing the load history does NOT delete the loading from the
model.
Figure: 2.12.j Expanded distributed load dialog
The generated loads will be applied to the model only after the user clicks the ‘OK’
button. Clicking the ‘Cancel’ button will not apply any of the loads generated as part of
using the ‘Distributed Load’ dialog.
Please check out "step-by-step guide" for using the Distributed Load dialog.

2.12.8 Load Case Generator
The "Load Case Generator" dialog can be used to add nodal forces from two or more
load cases. It can also be used to factor the nodal forces from a particular load case.
Figure: 2.12.k Load Case Generator dialog

The user needs to specify the load factors and use "Include" column to include the load
case to be combined. Click the "Generate Load Case" to add the new combined load
case. The new load case generated can subsequently be used in combination process
again. When finished, Click OK to include all the new load cases to the model.

2.12.9 Edit Load Functions
The Edit Load Functions dialog is used to define one or more load functions for a
dynamic analysis.
Figure: 2.12.l Edit Load Function Dialog
The "Select a Load Function" box contains the list of all defined load functions.
Click "Add" or "Delete" button to create a new load function, or delete an existing load
function, respectively. When the Applied Acceleration vs. Time (All Nodes) option is
specified on the "Dynamic" page, only one load function can be defined and is
automatically applied to the entire model.
Click the "Import" button to retrieve an existing load function from a text file. Predefined
load functions have the following extensions:
".dlf" Load vs. Time
".acc" Acceleration (ground) vs. Time
".spt" Acceleration vs. Period (response spectrum)
The format of the text file should contain paired data (time, load), (time, acceleration), or
(period, acceleration). The file can have between one and four pairs per line (maximum
80 characters per line).
The "Load Function Edit Table" displays the paired values used in the load function.
Rows can be inserted or deleted as needed. The "Update Table" button sorts the values
according to increasing time. You can drag and drop a range of data points from a
spreadsheet directly into the table. "Table PDF" displays the load function table in a pdf.
The user may print it or save it for record keeping.
Figure: 2.12.m Load Function Edit Table Dialog
2.12.10 Vessel Collision Dialog
For a given impact location, the associated vessel collision parameters can be defined
using the “Vessel Collision” dialog.
Figure: 2.12.n Vessel Collision dialog
Impact parameters pertaining to the vessel itself include Vessel Weight and Vessel
Velocity. Maximum separation time is the parameter which allows for the analysis to
terminate after collision has occurred and the vessel and impact location have became
separated for the selected amount of time. The Vessel Velocity is used by FB-MultiPier in
automatically determining the vessel orientation (i.e., the orientation of the impact load
that is generated as part of the analysis). Accordingly, activation of the respective degree
(s) of freedom (DOF) dynamic loading flags in the “Loads” page, are automatically
handled by FB-MultiPier. Please refer to Section 6.12 for more details.
Regarding the geometry (width, shape) of the contacted interface, the associated
parameters can be defined as part of the Impact Conditions input, namely, Collision
Type and Collision Width. Four options are available under the Collision Type drop-
down list: Collision on Flat Surface, Collision on Round Surface, User-Defined Elastic-
Plastic Curve, and User-Defined General Curve. The selected Collision Type dictates the
shape of the vessel bow force-deformation relationship, which can be either elastic,
perfectly-plastic or of arbitrary shape (if the User-Defined General Curve option is
selected). After selecting the Collision Type the Collision Width may also be input (note
that this parameter is not required if either the User-Defined Elastic-Plastic Curve or the
User-Defined General Curve options are selected). The Collision Width is the width of
the structural component that is directly impinged upon by the vessel, and this
parameter dictates the maximum vessel bow force that can be generated.
Correspondingly, the Vessel Bow Force-Deformation Relationship is automatically
computed for the Collision on Flat Surface and Collision on Round Surface options, in
accordance with Getter and Consolazio (2011).
Note that the “Wide View” check box allows for viewing the force-deformation curve
over a wider abscissa range.
Figure: 2.12.o Flow chart with empirical equations for calculating barge bow force-
deformation (Getter and Consolazio 2011)
User can input 'User-Defined Elastic-Plastic Curve', Or 'User-Defined General Curve'. For
'User-Defined Elastic-Plastic Curve', input the Yield Load and Crush Depth. For 'User-
Defined General Curve' enter the Crush Depth at Yield, the Loading and Unloading
Curves.
Figure: 2.12.p Load Function Edit Table
2.13 Spring Page

Figure: 2.13.a Spring Page
To add a spring to the substructure, graphically select a node in the 3D View window, or
directly input a node number. Then, click the 'Add' button to add the node to the "Spring
Node List". Enter spring stiffness values for the 6 degrees of freedom and use the check
boxes from the "Apply to Load Case" list to apply the springs to selected load case(s).
For models that make use of AASHTO loading, the springs can be enabled or disabled
for each Load Combination.
Edit the springs in the following areas:

1. Spring Stiffness
Enter the stiffness for each Xp, Yp, and Zp translation spring, and for each Xp, Yp, and Zp
rotational spring.
2. Spring Nodes List

As discussed above, click on a node in the 3D view window or select a node using the
text box and click the "Add" button to add a node to the "Spring Node List".
Also, use the "Del" button to delete a node from the list.
2.14 Mass/Damper Page
The Mass/Damper Page provides the capability of applying concentrated masses or

dampers to any pier node. To apply a concentrated mass or damper, click on the node in
the 3D View window and then click the "Add" button to place the node in the node list.
Concentrated mass values can be entered without concentrated damper values, and vice
versa. Concentrated damper values can only be entered if "Damping" is enabled in the
Dynamics Page.
Figure: 2.14.a Mass/Damper Page
Concentrated Mass/Dampers in 3D View Window

All concentrated masses and dampers are shown. Dampers are shown as a green
dashpot. Masses are shown as a gray sphere.
Figure: 2.14.b Concentrated Mass and Damper in 3D View (Thin Element Mode)
2.15 Retained Soil Page

Figure: 2.15.a Retained Soil
Enter the data for the retaining wall in the following fields:
Soil Layer
Select a soil layer to edit from the drop down menu, or add and remove a soil layer.
Wall and Layer Geometry

The wall, retaining the soil, is modeled as a cantilever (column) element. Enter Retaining
wall and soil layer parameters for each layer.
Each layer will cause a horizontal pressure to be applied to the wall in the –X global
direction.
Each layer is divided into a number of sub-layers. A minimum of 10 sub-layers is
recommended for each layer.
The weight of the retained soil is accounted for during the analysis as a distributed
vertical load acting on the footing.
Soil Layer Data
“At-Rest” OR "Active" OR "Passive" soil forces are calculated for cohesionless soil only.
Choose between "Pressure at Rest", "Passive Case", or the "Active Case" options, and
then click the Layer Data button to specify the data.
The horizontal earth pressure will be calculated depending on "At-Rest", "Active", or

"Passive" conditions considered. FB-MultiPier uses the Coulombs’ earth pressure theory
for active and passive earth pressure case.
The horizontal earth pressure is calculated as:
1. At-Rest Case:
2. Active Case:
3. Passive Case:
where,
P , P , and P – are at-rest, active, and passive horizontal earth pressure respectively.
o a p
P – vertical earth pressure.
v
K , K , and K – are at-rest, active, and passive coefficient of earth pressure respectively.
o a p
The coefficients of earth pressure are calculated as:

1. At-Rest Case:
2. Active Case:
3. Passive Case:
where,
θ – Inclination of the wall face on the back side
φ – Internal angle of friction
δ – Friction between back of wall face and backfill soil
β – Angle of sloping backfill
Wall Load Data

Select the case number and click "Surcharge".
Retaining Wall Explanation

Figure: 2.15.b Retaining Wall Explanation
Note: 1. The Weight of the retained soil is accounted for during the analysis as a
distributed vertical load acting on the footing.
2. Bouyancy effects on the pile cap take into consideration the Soil Water Table.
However, if a positive value is supplied for the Ground Water Height, then the
Ground Water Height will govern the pile cap bouyancy force calculations.
2.15.1 Retaining Wall Soil Layer Data
Enter the following properties of the retained soil layer:
1. Cohesion
2. Soil Angle of Friction
3. Soil-Wall Angle Friction
4. Unit Weight of Soil
5. Saturated Unit Weight of Soil
Return to the Retaining Page.

2.15.2 Surcharge
Depending upon the type of surcharge selected, different parameters will be required.
Click on the load case you want to associate the surcharge with using "Applicable Load
Cases" box.
Figure: 2.15.c No Surcharge

Figure: 2.15.d Uniform Surcharge
Figure: 2.15.e Line Load
Figure: 2.15.f Strip Load
Return to the Retaining Page.
2.16 Bridge Page
For a bridge model, the Bridge Page is used to generate and modify substructures (pier
foundations) and superstructures (bridge spans).
Figure: 2.16.a Bridge Page (Bridge model)
Substructure
Select a substructure from the Substructure list, "Add" to add a new substructure, "Del"
to remove the currently selected substructure, "Replace" to replace the substructure, or
"Insert" to insert a new substructure.
Figure: 2.16.b Add Substructure Dialog
Figure: 2.16.c Replace Substructure Dialog

Figure: 2.16.d Insert Substructure Dialog
For the Add Substructure, Replace Substructure, or Insert Substructure, engineers may
choose from any substructure within the current model. Also, the Default Pier, Default
Bent, or an imported substructure may be selected. The selected substructure
properties will be used for the newly created, inserted, or replaced substructure.
The Model Type can be either a General Pier or Pile Bent model. Both models are
capable of having bearing locations, which are essential for connecting the
substructures using bridge spans.
Global Coordinates for Substructure Origins

The Global X Coord and Global Y Coord are used to layout each substructure in the
bridge model. The origin of each pier substructure is positioned at the corner of the
respective pile cap. For pile bent substructures, the origin is located at the head of the
respective Pile 1.
Rotation Angles
The Pier Rotation Angle specifies a pier rotation about the vertical Z-axis. The pier
rotation is specified as clockwise positive in the FB-MultiPier coordinate system and is
typically used to model skew or radial piers on a curved alignment. The Bearing Angle
(rotation of the bearings) is independent of that of the Pier Rotation and is measured
about the vertical Z-axis.
Bearing Rows
Select the number of Bearing Rows and specify if the span should be continuous.
Specific boundary conditions can be selected and customized by clicking the Edit
Supports button.
Superstructure
Select a Span to edit from the span combo box. The "C/C Length" indicates the span
length from the center bearing line of one pier to the center bearing line of the next pier.
Click the "Edit Span" button to edit the span section properties.
One Pier Two Span (OPTS)

For OPTS model, the Bridge Page has an additional option where you can add the
OPTS Data.
Figure: 2.16.e Bridge Page (OPTS model)
2.16.1 Edit Supports
Custom bearing connections can be specified by selecting a boundary condition from

the combo box. Boundary conditions can be Released (free to move), Constrained
(prevented from movement), or Custom (user-defined load-displacement curve).
There are two versions of this dialog that are displayed based on the number of bearing
rows requested.
Single Row:
Figure: 2.16.f Custom Bearing Connection Dialog for Single Row
Two Rows: Left and Right Rows are specified

Figure: 2.16.g Custom Bearing Connection Dialog for Two Rows
Custom load-displacement curves

Click the "Edit Custom Bearings" button to define custom load-displacement curves for
the bearings. These curves can be applied to any of the six degrees of freedom for a
bearing connection. A maximum of 20 values can be used to define a custom bearing
load-displacement relationship. Values should be entered from smallest to largest
displacement. Click the "Add" button to add a new load-displacement curve. Click the
"Del" button to remove an existing load-displacement curve. Click the "Update Plot"
button to refresh the load-displacement plot.
If unsymmetrical curve behavior is desired, then caution should be exercised when
defining the quadrants of the custom bearing curves. For example, if no uplift forces are
to be modeled for vertical translations at the bearing locations, then a curve with only
nominal stiffness should be supplied for negative displacements and negative forces.
Further, representative load-deformation input should be supplied for positive
displacements and positive loads.
Figure: 2.16.h Custom Bearing Data Dialog
Return to the Bridge Page.

2.16.2 Edit Span
The Bridge Span Properties allows for specification of the geometry, cross sections,
temperature loading, and span end-conditions for each span in a bridge model.
Figure: 2.16.i Bridge Span Properties Dialog
A unique number of span nodes can be defined for each span: input the desired number
of 'Superstructure Beam Nodes' in the 'Nodal Coordinates' region of the dialog.
Span coordinates can be generated automatically by the program, in which case a
straight line of frame elements will connect one substructure to the next. Alternatively,
custom span coordinates (global X, Y, Z) can be defined for the nodes making up each
span. This latter modeling approach can be initiated by navigating to the 'Nodal
Coordinates' region of the dialog and:
1. Inputting the desired number of 'Superstructure Beam Nodes'.

2. Selecting the 'Custom' radio button.
3. Entering the 'Table'.
4. Supplying the global X, Y, and Z coordinates for each node.
Note:
1. The first and final two rows of coordinates within the ‘Span Coordinates’ dialog
are not editable, as these coordinates are necessary to position the span left-end and
right-end vertical link elements.
2. For OPTS models, the Begin Height is not input for Span 1, nor is the End Height
input for Span 2. Instead, the span outermost extents are dictated by the Span End
Local Coordinates.
Figure: 2.16.j Span Coordinates Dialog
After the span coordinates have been defined, the Transformed Section Properties for
the bridge superstructure can be input. There are two methods to do this. Method 1 is to
click 'Table' within the 'Cross Section' region of the dialog, and directly input Area, I2, I3,
J, E, G, and Unit Weight. Method 2 is to click the ‘Section Properties and Temperatures’
button, and have the program compute these properties based on explicitly input girder
and slab section properties on the ‘Section Properties’ dialog. The program uses these
properties to model frame elments with equivalent gross properties (i.e., a spine model)
that span between the two adjacent substructures. The Begin Height and End Height
parameters are used to offset the beam from the center of gravity of the pier cap to the
center of gravity of the span.
Section Area is the entire span area in the transverse direction, including girders,
roadway, and parapets. Transverse Area is the span profile area for wind load on the
structure application (usually computed as: [girder depth + roadway depth + parapet
depth] x span length).
Note: Begin Height and End Height are measured from the c.g. of the pier cap to
c.g. of the bridge span. Live Load Height is measured from the c.g. of the pier cap to
the c.g. of the Live Load (i.e. at 6 ft above the roadway per AASHTO).
Span End Conditions are set independently for each end of the span. Different end
conditions may exist based on the construction; FB-MultiPier can simulate these
conditions by assigning various properties to the Transfer Beam.
l Stiff – scaled (amplified) properties relative to the superstructure.

l Soft – unscaled properties relative to the superstructure.
l Custom – user defined custom properties.
Figure: 2.16.k Span Properties Table Dialog
The Span Properties Table displays section properties for each element along the bridge
section. Spans are divided into elements as dictated by the span coordinates. The 3D
Bridge Window will show each element’s size in proportion to the inertia 3 axis.
The ‘Copy’ button near the top of the Bridge Span Properties dialog launches the ‘Span
Copy’ dialog. This feature is intended only for use when the Base Span contains Default
generation of span Nodal Coordinates. The ‘Span Copy’ dialog is used to copy all span
properties between spans. This includes all properties in the Span Section Properties
frame and Span Profile Properties frame on the ‘Bridge Span Properties’ dialog, all
girder and slab data on the ‘Section Properties’ dialog, and all temperature data on the
’Temperatures’ dialog. To use the span copying feature, select a base span in the ‘Base
Span’ combo box and a target span in the ‘Target Span’ combo box. Then click the ‘Copy
Span’ button. The base span is the span from which properties will be copied, and the
target span is the span to which the base span’s properties will be copied. Select the
‘Mirror’ checkbox prior to clicking the ‘Copy Span’ button to mirror the base span’s
properties in the target span. Mirroring is of particular use when the ‘Variable’ section
properties option is selected on the ‘Bridge Span Properties’ dialog, as variable
properties allow for per-element span input. Mirroring the span properties will copy the
span properties from the first element of the base span into the last element of the
target span; the second element in the base span will be copied into the second to last
element in the target span, and so forth, making the target span a mirror of the base
span. Figure: 2.16.millustrates the mirror feature. Note that span two is a mirror image
of span one.
Figure: 2.16.l 3D Bridge View

Figure: 2.16.m Span Copy

2.16.3 Span End Condition
Span end conditions can either be automatically calculated by the program, or

alternatively, the end conditions can be specified on the Bridge Span Properties dialog.
In particular, each of the transfer beam, vertical link, and (if applicable) continuity link
properties can be input.
Clicking on "Transfer Beam" will open the Transfer Beam properties dialog and one can
select stiff (default), soft, or custom properties.
Figure: 2.16.n Transfer Beam Properties
Clicking on "Vertical Link" button will open the Vertical Link properties dialog and one
can select stiff (default) or custom properties.
Figure: 2.16.o Vertical Link Properties
Clicking on "Continuity Element" will open the Continuity Element at Right End of Span
properties dialog and one can select default or custom properties.
Figure: 2.16.p Span Continuity Element Properties

2.16.4 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Data Dialog
Figure: 2.16.q shows the OPTS data dialog for the default OPTS Model type in FB-
MultiPier. Please refer to Section 6.13 for step-by-step instructions related to building
OPTS models in FB-MultiPier.
Figure: 2.16.q “OPTS Data” dialog
Local Spring Coordinates

Please refer to the diagram on the OPTS Data dialog for the location of the local
coordinate axes. Enter the coordinates corresponding to the locations of the span end
springs.
Span End Boundary Spring and Span End Lumped Mass

Figure: 2.16.q shows the default spring stiffnesses and span mass values provided in the
default OPTS model type. Please refer to Section 6.13.1 for step-by-step details of
modeling using OPTS default model type.
The following scenarios can be used to update the span end spring stiffnesses and span
mass values:
1. The span end spring stiffnesses and span mass values can be automatically
generated when OPTS model is generated from a multiple-pier Bridge Model.
Refer to Section 6.14 for details.
2. User can manually calculate span end spring stiffnesses and mass values
depending on the bridge model. For more information on how to calculate the
span end spring stiffnesses and mass values, refer to section 6.14 .
3. The user can modify the span end spring stiffness and mass values by using
“Import Spring/Mass Data” button in the OPTS Data dialog. The spring stiffnesses
and mass values can be imported from an “.opt” file after clicking on the “Import
Spring/Mass Data” button. The imported values will then display in the “Span
End Boundary Spring” table and the “Span End Lumped Mass” text box.
The “.opt” file can be created using either of the following 2 scenarios:
a. The “.opt” file is created when the analysis to convert a bridge model to an
OPTS model occurs (Refer to Section 6.13.2 ). The “.opt” file is automatically
placed in a special folder called “OPTS_Formation” when the conversion
from a bridge to an OPTS model occurs. This “OPTS_Formation” folder is
located in the same directory as the bridge file that was converted to an
OPTS model. NOTE: In this scenario, all creation and processing of the .opt
file is automatically handled by FB-MultiPier.
b. It is also possible to manually create the “.opt” file without running the
analysis. To do so, follow the “.opt” file format (as described in the spring
and mass headers in the Help Manual) and manually type the values.
3 Model View Window
1. Soil Edit Window

2. Pile Plan View Window
3. 2D Bridge View
4. 3D View Window
5. 3D Bridge Window
6. Mouse Controls
3.1 Soil Edit Window
"Right Click" in the Soil Edit window to bring up the view edit menu with the following
options:
1. 2D View Control
a. See Mouse Controls
2. Pick Layer — Allows the user to pick a layer
3. Copy Layer—Replace properties of selected layer with those of layer selected from
submenu
4. Add Layer — Add a new soil layer to the model
5. Split Layer — Split the current layer in to two layers
6. Remove Layer — Delete the selected layer from the model
7. Thin Pile/Wall Elements — Show pile and wall as thin elements
8. Thin Pile Cap Elements - Show pile cap as thin elements
9. Reset View
Figure: 3.1.a Soil Edit Window
A partially embedded pile is displayed above. Nodes in the free length are displayed as
silver and nodes embedded in the soil are displayed as brown. Only the embedded (i.e.,
brown) nodes are clickable, and selecting one will bring up the Printable Soil Graph
dialog, showing the soil curve for the selected node. Please see Printable Soil Graph for
more details.
3.2
Pile Plan View Window
"Right Click" in the Pile Plan View window to bring up the view edit menu with the
following options:
1. 2D View Control
2. Pile Selection
3. Add/Remove Pile — Click on a grid point/pile to add or remove a pile. *
4. Add Piles (Drag Box)
5. Remove Piles (Drag Box)
6. Copy Pile Properties — Click on a pile to copy properties from the highlighted pile. *
7. Assign Pile Types to Piles — Assign a Pile Type to a Pile by clicking on this Grid. *
8. Assign Soil Sets to Piles — Assign a Soil Set to a Pile by clicking on this Grid. *
9. Assign Uniform Soil Sets to Piles — Click to change all of the Soil Sets at one time.
10. Scale Pile Drawing — Click to Scale Piles larger or smaller for better view.
11. Add/Remove Cap — Click on a portion of the pile cap to remove it.
12. Add Cap (Drag Box)
13. Remove Cap (Drag Box)
14. Edit Cap Thickness — Click on a portion of the pile cap to edit the Cap Thickness.
15. Custom Grid Spacing — Click on a spacing "element" to edit the Spacing.
16. Assign Soil Sets to Cap — Click to Assign a Soil Set to a Pile Cap element by clicking
on this Grid
17. Assign Uniform Soil Set to Cap — Click to change all of the Soil Sets at one time.
18. P-Multipliers — Allows the user to view the P-Multipliers in the Pile Plan View
window (to view go to the Soil Page and click the Group button).
19. Numbering — Allows the user to view the pile numbers.
20. Show Soil Set — Show or hide soil sets
21. Reset View — Returns the view back to the default.
*This action will change the currently selected pile. The currently selected pile is the pile
that is displayed on the 'Pile Page' and in the 'Soil Edit' window. In the 'Soil Edit' window,
the currently selected pile is displayed along with its assigned soil set. For more
information on the integration between the selected pile and the selected soil set, click
here.
Figure: 3.2.a Pile Plan View Window
Zoom Feature Tutorial

3.2.1 Assign Pile Types to Piles
This feature is used to assign Pile Types to grid locations. A “Pile Type” consists of one or
more cross sections used within a single pile. Access this feature via the “Assign Pile
Type to Piles” menu option in the Pile Plan View window. By default, Pile Type 1 will be
selected.
Figure: 3.2.b Assign Pile Types to Piles.
To choose a different pile, change the selected Pile Type (Figure: 3.2.c). Notice that the
list of cross sections associated with this pile type displays, and that the cross section
drawing is updated. In this example, Pile Type 2 consists of 1 cross section, a 36” Drilled
Shaft.
Figure: 3.2.c Assign Pile Types to Piles Circular.
To apply this selected Pile Type in the model, click a grid location in the Pile Plan View
window, such as pile 1.
Figure: 3.2.d Pile Plan View window Pile Grid.
Notice that Pile Type 2 is now applied to this grid location, replacing Pile Type 1.
Figure: 3.2.e Pile Grid with type 2 circular pile shown.

Additional grid points can be clicked to apply this Pile Type.
Figure: 3.2.f Pile Grid with several type 2 circular piles shown.
Additional Notes:
1. Pile Types are created on the Gross Pile Properties Dialog and the Full Cross-Section
Pile Properties Dialog.
Return to the Pile Plan View page.

3.2.2 Edit Cap Thickness
To edit cap thickness right click in the Pile Plan View window and select Edit Cap
Thickness. The pile cap elements will turn gray.
Figure: 3.2.g Select Edit Cap Thickness
You can then left click and select each cap element:
Enter the "first" thickness of the cap (not the actual thickness), which allows the user to
simulate different types of connections—very thin for a more pin-like connection, or
thick for a more rigid connection.
Enter the "second" thickness of the cap, which is the actual thickness to simulate the
weight of the cap.
Figure: 3.2.h Enter Element Thickness

3.2.3 Custom Grid Spacing
Enter the spacing of the row/column selected.
Alternatively, edit the grid spacing in a table format by pressing the Grid Spacing Table
button.
Figure: 3.2.i Custom Grid Spacing Dialog
Add a new row or column at the mid point of the column or row selected by pressing
the "Split Row/Column" button, or delete a row or column by pressing the "Delete
Row/Column" button.

3.2.4 Grid Spacing Table
Refer to "Grid Spacing Table".
3.3 2D Bridge View
Figure: 3.3.a Bridge Plan View Window
The current pier can be selected by clicking on the desired pier in the window.
Selecting a set of bearing locations depicted in the window will bring up the Custom
Bearing Connection dialog for the appropriate pier structure.
Selecting the span between piers brings up the Bridge Span Property dialog.
3.4 3D View Window
"Right Click" in the 3D View window to bring up the view edit menu with the following
options:
1. 3D View Control
2. Node Selection
3. Element Selection – Allows the user to select items in the view to edit in certain
dialogs
a. Pick end nodes in the extra members dialog
b. Pick the loaded nodes in the load dialog
c. Pick the node to apply springs to in the spring dialog
d. View the coordinates of the node in most dialogs
4. Add/Remove Pier Cap Element
a. Click on pier cap element to remove or to add it back to model after it has
been removed.
5. Piles – show or hide the piles in this window
6. Caps – show or hide the pile cap
7. Nodes – Hide or show the various types of model nodes
a. All Nodes
b. Bearing Nodes
c. Pier Cap Nodes
d. Cantilever Nodes
e. Column Nodes
f. Pile Cap Nodes
g. Pile Nodes
8. Node Numbering
9. Element Numbering
a. Structure Elements
b. Pile Elements
c. Pile Cap Elements
10. Pier – show or hide the pier structure
11. Loads – show or hide the loads
12. Springs – show or hide the springs
13. Dampers – show or hide the dampers (for models using dynamic analysis)
14. Masses – show or hide the masses (for models using dynamic analysis)
15. Soil – show or hide the soil
16. Show Soil Set – show or hide the soil sets
17. Retained Soil – show or hide the retained soil (for retaining wall models)
18. Axes (Local) – show or hide the local axis
19. Axes (Global) – show or hide the global axis
20. Pier Data – show or hide the pier global coordinates
21. Thin Elements – display the model in thin element mode
22. XZ Plane View – show the model as rotated in the XZ plane
23. YZ Plane View – show the model as rotated in the YZ plane
24. Reset View – restore the model view to the default rotation, zoom, and tilt
Figure: 3.4.a 3D View Window
3.4.1 Element Dialog
The 'Element Data Dialog' is a quick way to reference the properties of any pier element,
pile element or extra member element in the model. To launch the dialog, right-click in
the 3D View window. This will launch the window's popup menu. Make sure the window
is in 'Thin Elements' mode (this menu item should have a checkmark next to it). Then
select the menu item 'Element Selection'. Then click an element in the model. The dialog
will display, showing the element's data, including element number, location in the
model, dimensional data, and material properties. To change the selected element,
simply click another element.
Figure: 3.4.b Element Data Dialog
3.5 3D Bridge View

"Right Click" in the 3D View window to bring up the view edit menu with the following
options:
1. 3D Mouse Control
2. Piles – show or hide the piles in this window
3. Caps – show or hide the pile cap
4. Nodes – Hide or show the various types of model nodes
a. All Nodes
b. Bearing Nodes
c. Pier Cap Nodes
d. Cantilever Nodes
e. Column Nodes
f. Pile Cap Nodes
g. Pile Nodes
5. Node Numbering
6. Pier – show or hide the pier structure
7. Slab and Girders (Not available yet)
8. Loads – show or hide the loads
9. Springs – show or hide the springs
10. Dampers – show or hide the dampers (for models using dynamic analysis)
11. Masses – show or hide the masses (for models using dynamic analysis)
12. Soil – show or hide the soil
13. Show Soil Set – show or hide the soil sets per substructure
14. Axes (Local) – show or hide the local axis
15. Axes (Global) – show or hide the global axis
16. Pier Data – show or hide the pier global coordinates
17. Thin Elements – display the model in thin element mode
18. XZ Plane View – show the model as rotated in the XZ plane
19. YZ Plane View – show the model as rotated in the YZ plane
20. Reset View – restore the model view to the default rotation, zoom, and tilt
Figure: 3.5.a 3D Bridge View Window
3.6 Mouse Controls

The below listing of mouse controls applies to program 2D and 3D windows that
implement a View Control mouse action mode.
2D Windows
Soil Edit
Pile Plan View (Edit)
Pile Plan View (Results)
Bridge Plan View
Span Cross Section Plot
2D Mouse Controls
Left Mouse Button Down functionality (works while in View Control mode only):
[Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Pan model
[Ctrl] + [Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Zoom model
Middle Mouse Button functionality (works in any mouse action mode):

[Middle Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Pan model
[Mouse Wheel] = Zoom model
Note that 2D windows do not use the [Shift] modifier
3D Windows
3D View
3D Bridge View
Pier Element Selection
Pier Member Selection
Pile Element Selection
3D Results
3D Mouse Controls
Left Mouse Button Down functionality (works while in View Control mode only):
[Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Rotate model
[Shift] + [Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Pan model
[Ctrl] + [Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Zoom model
Middle Mouse Button functionality (works in any mouse action mode):

[Middle Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Pan model
[Shift] + [Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Rotate model
[Mouse Wheel] = Zoom model
4 Program Results
1. Pile Results
2. Pier/Bent Results
3. Pile Interaction Diagrams
4. Pier Interaction Diagrams
5. 3D Results
6. XML Report Generator
4.1 Pile Results
Use the following windows to view the results of the analysis:
1. Pile Selection
2. Plot Display Control
3. Graphs
4. Printable Forces Dialog
4.1.1 Pile Selection
"Right Click" in the Pile Selection window to bring up the view edit menu with the
following options.
1. 2D View Control
2. Select / Unselect Pile
3. Select / Unselect Piles (Drag Box)
4. Reset View
Select the piles to view in the Graphs.
Figure: 4.1.a Pile Selection Window
Return to the Pile Results page.

4.1.2 Plot Display Control
Figure: 4.1.b Plot Display Control Dialog

Choose the type of data to be displayed in the graphs:
Member Forces:
Shear 2 (kips)
Shear 3 (kips)
Moment 3 (kip-ft)
Moment 2 (kip-ft)
Axial (kips)
Demand/Capacity Ratio
Soil Forces (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Soil Vertical Zp (kips)
Soil Lateral Xp (kips)
Soil Lateral Yp (kips)
Soil Torsional (kip-ft)
Displacement (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Lateral X (in)
Lateral Y (in)
Rotation About X (in)
Rotation About Y (in)
Click the ‘Force’ combo box to view the maximum and minimum data in the ‘Max’ and
‘Min’ edit boxes, among the currently drawn curves of this selected force type. This
window shows the elevation and pile number of the maximum and minimum values of
the selected piles.
Click the ‘Current Load Case’ radio button to display force curves for the load case that
is currently selected in the ‘Load Case’ control on the toolbar. Curves will display for all
currently selected piles, columns, or the pier cap / bent cap. The maximum and
minimum values for the force currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box will display in
the ‘Max’ and ‘Min’ edit boxes. These maximum and minimum values are determined
from the currently selected piles, columns, or pier cap / bent cap.
Click the ‘Max for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces’ radio button to
automatically select the pile, column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MAXIMUM
force occurs (of the force type currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box), across all
load cases. The corresponding forces will also be drawn for this pile, column or pier cap
/ bent cap that contains the MAXIMUM force, at the specified load case.
Click the ‘Min for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces’ radio button to
automatically select the pile, column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MINIMUM force
occurs (of the force type currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box), across all load
cases. The corresponding forces will also be drawn for this pile, column or pier cap /
bent cap that contains the MINIMUM force, at the specified load case.
Click the ‘Max and Min For All Forces Across All Load Cases’ radio button to
automatically select all piles, columns, or pier cap / bent cap that possess a MAXIMUM
or MINIMUM value across all load cases. The only curves that display in the plot
windows when this option is selected are the MAXIMUM and MINIMUM values.
Click the ‘Max D/C For Limit State’ radio button, and select a limit state in the
accompanying combo box, to view the maximum load combination for the selected limit
state.
Click the ‘Redraw Curves’ button to update the drawing in the plot windows. This button
should be clicked after changing which forces are selected among the various force
checkboxes.
For a time step analysis, select a member force combo box item to display the maximum
member force, location, and corresponding time step.
Click on one of the plot windows to display the maximum and minimum values.
Return to the Pile Results or the Pier/Bent Results page.

4.1.3 Graphs
Graphs are plotted corresponding to the colored piles on the Pile Selection view or Pier
Member Selection view.
Figure: 4.1.c Pile Results Graphs
Right click a selected graph and select the option ‘Printable Graph' to open the printable
graph dialog.
Return to the Pile Results or Pier/Bent Results page.

4.1.4 Printable Forces Dialog
This dialog is reached by right clicking in any plot window that contains data on the Pile
Results Page or Pier/Bent Results Page.
Figure: 4.1.d Printable Forces Dialog (I/J Nodal Data in Separate Columns)

Figure: 4.1.e Printable Forces Dialog (I/J Nodal Data in Same Column)
This dialog displays the forces plots of each pile/column/pier cap that is selected on the
Pile or Pier Results Forces dialog, as well as a table listing of the forces in numeric form
at each node along the member.
Graph Options:
- Customize: customize the appearance of the graph, i.e. change the font size, curve
colors, graph range, etc.
- Save as Bitmap: save the graph (not the entire dialog) as a bitmap (.bmp) file.
Table Options:
- Toggle the I/J Nodal Data in Same or Separate Columns.
- Save Data: saves the table data to a text file.
Excel/PDF:
- Prints the graph and table contents in Excel or PDF format.
*If more than one pile/column is graphed, the member with the maximum value will be
displayed in the graph title. For example, (max at Pile 1).
**The colors used to plot the curves are identical to the colors used on the Pile/Pier
Forces Dialog.
Printable Forces Tutorial
4.2 Pier Results
Use the following windows to view the results of the analysis:
1. Pier Member Selection

2. Plot Display Control
3. Graphs
4. Printable Forces Dialog
4.2.1 Pier Member Selection
"Right Click" in the Pier Member Selection window to bring up the view edit menu with
the following options.
1. 3D View Control
2. Member Selection
3. Nodes
4. Reset View
Select the piers to view in the Graphs.

Figure: 4.2.a Pier Member Selection Window
Return to the Pier/Bent Results page.

4.2.2 Plot Display Control
Figure: 4.2.b Plot Display Control Dialog

Choose the type of data to be displayed in the graphs:
Member Forces:
Shear 2 (kips)
Shear 3 (kips)
Moment 3 (kip-ft)
Moment 2 (kip-ft)
Axial (kips)
Demand/Capacity Ratio
Soil Forces (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Soil Vertical Zp (kips)
Soil Lateral Xp (kips)
Soil Lateral Yp (kips)
Soil Torsional (kip-ft)
Displacement (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Lateral X (in)
Lateral Y (in)
Rotation About X (in)
Rotation About Y (in)
Click the ‘Force’ combo box to view the maximum and minimum data in the ‘Max’ and
‘Min’ edit boxes, among the currently drawn curves of this selected force type. This
window shows the elevation and pile number of the maximum and minimum values of
the selected piles.
Click the ‘Current Load Case’ radio button to display force curves for the load case that
is currently selected in the ‘Load Case’ control on the toolbar. Curves will display for all
currently selected piles, columns, or the pier cap / bent cap. The maximum and
minimum values for the force currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box will display in
the ‘Max’ and ‘Min’ edit boxes. These maximum and minimum values are determined
from the currently selected piles, columns, or pier cap / bent cap.
Click the ‘Max for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces’ radio button to
automatically select the pile, column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MAXIMUM
force occurs (of the force type currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box), across all
load cases. The corresponding forces will also be drawn for this pile, column or pier cap
/ bent cap that contains the MAXIMUM force, at the specified load case.
Click the ‘Min for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces’ radio button to
automatically select the pile, column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MINIMUM force
occurs (of the force type currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box), across all load
cases. The corresponding forces will also be drawn for this pile, column or pier cap /
bent cap that contains the MINIMUM force, at the specified load case.
Click the ‘Max and Min For All Forces Across All Load Cases’ radio button to
automatically select all piles, columns, or pier cap / bent cap that possess a MAXIMUM
or MINIMUM value across all load cases. The only curves that display in the plot
windows when this option is selected are the MAXIMUM and MINIMUM values.
Click the ‘Max D/C For Limit State’ radio button, and select a limit state in the
accompanying combo box, to view the maximum load combination for the selected limit
state.
Click the ‘Redraw Curves’ button to update the drawing in the plot windows. This button
should be clicked after changing which forces are selected among the various force
checkboxes.
For a time step analysis, select a member force combo box item to display the maximum
member force, location, and corresponding time step.
Click on one of the plot windows to display the maximum and minimum values.
Return to the Pile Results or the Pier/Bent Results page.

4.2.3 Graphs
Graphs are plotted corresponding to the colored piles on the Pile Selection view or Pier
Member Selection view.
Figure: 4.2.c Pile Results Graphs
Right click a selected graph and select the option ‘Printable Graph' to open the printable
graph dialog.

4.2.4 Printable Forces Dialog
This dialog is reached by right clicking in any plot window that contains data on the Pile
Results Page or Pier/Bent Results Page.
Figure: 4.2.d Printable Forces Dialog (I/J Nodal Data in Separate Columns)

Figure: 4.2.e Printable Forces Dialog (I/J Nodal Data in Same Column)
This dialog displays the forces plots of each pile/column/pier cap that is selected on the
Pile or Pier Results Forces dialog, as well as a table listing of the forces in numeric form
at each node along the member.
Graph Options:
- Customize: customize the appearance of the graph, i.e. change the font size, curve
colors, graph range, etc.
- Save as Bitmap: save the graph (not the entire dialog) as a bitmap (.bmp) file.
Table Options:
- Toggle the I/J Nodal Data in Same or Separate Columns.
- Save Data: saves the table data to a text file.
Excel/PDF:
- Prints the graph and table contents in Excel or PDF format.
*If more than one pile/column is graphed, the member with the maximum value will be
displayed in the graph title. For example, (max at Pile 1).
**The colors used to plot the curves are identical to the colors used on the Pile/Pier
Forces Dialog.
Printable Forces Tutorial
4.3 Pile Interaction
Clicking the "Pile Interaction" on the menu opens a drop down list where the user can
select the type of interaction diagram to view AND selection mode (Thick/Thin)
Type of Pile Interaction Diagram:

1. Biaxial Moment Interaction
2. Uniaxial Moment..2 Axis
Please see "Interaction Diagrams" for more information.
Elements can be selected using:

1. Element Selection Mode (Thin) - Select the element (from "Pile Element Selection"
window) to display on the interaction diagram.
4.3.1 Pile Element Selection
Select the pile element from the model to view its interaction diagram.
Figure: 4.3.a Pile Element Selection Window

Return to the Pile Interaction page.
4.3.2 Pile Interaction Diagram
"Right Click" in the Pile Interaction window to bring up the view edit menu with the
following options:
1. Data Table
2. Data Points
3. Data Numbering
4. Show Points Notes - Displays a note stating "(right- click for point table)" under the
interaction diagram title
View the interaction diagram for the selected segment.

Figure: 4.3.b Pile Interaction Diagram
Return to the Pile Interaction page.
4.3.2.1 View Data Table

The Data Table shows a list of all points along a Pile Interaction Diagram curve. To
display the table, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will launch a popup
menu. Then select the 'Data Table' menu item.
Figure: 4.3.c Data Table Interaction Diagram
Return to the Pile Interaction Diagrams page.
4.3.2.2 View Data Points
To display the Data Points, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will
launch a popup menu. Then select the 'Data Points' menu item. The Data Points will
display along the Interaction Diagram.
Figure: 4.3.d Data Points Interaction Diagram
4.3.2.3 View Data Point Numbering

To display the Data Point Numbering, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This
will launch a popup menu. Then select the 'Data Numbering' menu item. The 'Data Point
Numbers' will display along the Interaction Diagram.
Figure: 4.3.e Data Point Numbers Interaction Diagram

4.4 Pier Interaction
Clicking the "Pier Interaction" on the menu opens a drop down list where the user can
select the type of interaction diagram to view AND selection mode (Thick/Thin)
Type of Pier Interaction Diagram:

1. Biaxial Moment Interaction
Please see "Interaction Diagrams" for more information.
Select the element (from "Pier Element Selection" window) to display on the interaction
diagram.
4.4.1 Pier Element Selection
Select the pier element from the model to view its interaction diagram.
Figure: 4.4.a Pier Component Element Selection Window

Return to the Pier Interaction page.
4.4.2 Pier Interaction Diagram
"Right Click" in the Pier Interaction window to bring up the edit menu with the following
options:
1. Data Table
2. Data Points
3. Data Numbering
4. Show Points Notes - Displays a note stating "(right- click for point table)" under the
interaction diagram title.
View the interaction diagram for the selected segment.

Figure: 4.4.b Interaction Diagram
Return to the Pier Interaction page.
4.4.2.1 View Data Table

The Data Table shows a list of all points along a Pier Interaction Diagram curve. To
display the table, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will launch a popup
menu. Then select the 'Data Table' menu item.
Figure: 4.4.c Data Table Interaction Diagram
Return to the Pier Interaction Diagrams page.
4.4.2.2 View Data Points
To display the Data Points, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will
launch a popup menu. Then select the 'Data Points' menu item. The Data Points will
display along the Interaction Diagram..
Figure: 4.4.d Data Points Interaction Diagram
4.4.2.3 View Data Point Numbering

To display the Data Point Numbering, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This
will launch a popup menu. Then select the 'Data Numbering' menu item. The 'Data Point
Numbers' will display along the Interaction Diagram.
Figure: 4.4.e Data Point Numbers Interaction Diagram

4.5 3D Results
View the three-dimensional results of the analysis using the following windows:
1. 3D Display Control
2. 3D Results Window
4.5.1 3D Display Control
Control and view the display data numerically in the following fields:
1. Display Control
2. Contours Dialog
3. Max Min Forces Dialog
4. Node Displacement
5. Results Plotting
Figure: 4.5.a 3D Display Control Window
Return to the 3D Results page.
4.5.1.1 Display Control

Select the output to view in the Display Window from the following:
1. Displaced Shape — Shows a displaced wire-frame model

2. Contours Dialog — Distinguishes high displacement areas and high stress
concentration
3. Pier Max and Min Forces — Highlights Max and Min locations of selected stress
a. Displacement X
b. Displacement Y
c. Displacement Z
d. Rotation About X
e. Rotation About Y
f. Shear 2
g. Shear 3
h. Moment 2
i. Moment 3
j. Axial
k. D/C Ratio
l. Allow Multiple Forces – see Max Min Forces Dialog
4. Pile Max and Min Forces — Highlights Max and Min locations of selected stress
a. Displacement X
b. Displacement Y
c. Displacement Z
d. Rotation About X
e. Rotation About Y
f. Shear 2
g. Shear 3
h. Moment 2
i. Moment 3
j. Axial
k. D/C Ratio
l. Soil Axial
m. Soil Torsional
n. Soil Lateral X
o. Soil Lateral Y
p. Allow Multiple Forces – see Max Min Forces Dialog
5. Mode Shape — Eigenvectors used in modal analysis
Return to the 3D Display Control page.
4.5.1.2 Contours Dialog
This option is accessed via the following:
- Click 3D Results on the menu -> In "3D Display Control" window -> "Display Control"
panel.
- Select the "Contours" on the Display Control panel to open the Contours Dialog
(Figure: 4.5.b).
Figure: 4.5.b Contours Dialog
Select the Contour Type "Stress" or "Displacement".

For Stress Contour, select one of the following Stress Types:
a. M1
b. M2
c. M12
d. S13
e. S23
f. S1
g. S2
h. S12
Check "Custom Range" to launch the "Custom Range for Stress Contours" dialog, to
specify the range for the selected type of Stress Contour.
Figure: 4.5.c Custom Range for Stress Contours
For Displacement Contour—select one of the following Displacement Types:

a. X Translation
b. Y Translation
c. Z Translation
d. X Rotation
e. Y Rotation
f. Z Rotation

4.5.1.3 Max Min Forces Dialog

- Click 3D Results on the menu -> In "3D Display Control" window -> "Display Control"
panel
- Select the "Pier Max and Min Forces" or "Pile Max and Min Forces" on the Display
Control panel and select the desired force.
- If "Allow Multiple Forces" is selected, the Max and Min Forces dialog will display.
* if more than one force is selected, each element that contains a maximum or minimum
force will be highlighted in the 3D Results Window.
** if a single element contains both the max and the min force (common when all forces
of a certain type are 0.00), the text "MaxMin" will display next to that element.
*** if a single element contains more than one maximum force (or more than one
minimum force), the element's color will match the selected force that is closest to the
bottom of the "Max and Min Forces" dialog. For example, an element contained the
maximum Shear2 force, and the maximum Axial force, the element would be colored to
match the Axial force.
Figure: 4.5.d Max and Min Forces Dialog for Piles (Left) and Piers (Right)
Max Min Tutorial
4.5.1.4 Nodal Displacement

View the data for a node in the following areas:
1. Node Number — Select the node to view.

2. Scale Factor — Select the scale factor for the displaced shape.
3. Translation (Global) — Displays the translation in the X, Y, Z directions of the selected
node as a result of the loading.
4. Rotation (Global) — Displays the rotation about the X, Y, Z directions of the selected
node as a result of the loading.
5. Nodal Coordinates (Global) — Displays X, Y, Z coordinates of the selected node prior
to loading.
4.5.1.5 Results Plotting (Dynamic Results)
The "Results Plotting" section handles the graphical display of dynamic results. The
"Results Time Plot" allows the user to see the variation of displacement with time for a
selected node.
There are two types of results plots:
1. Displacement vs. Time. This includes graphs for X Translation, Y Translation, and Z
Translation.
2. Rotation vs. Time. This includes X Rotation, Y Rotation, and Z Rotation.
Select the node you want to plot the results for. Then use the "Results Plotting" combo
box to select the desired graph. Then click the "Plot" button.
Figure: 4.5.e Results Time Plot Dialog
Dynamic Animation is a toolbar option that allows the user to animate the displaced
model when a dynamic analysis has been run using Time Step Integration. Click the Play
button on the left to begin animation. Click the Pause button on the right to pause the
animation. The "Select Time Step" slider control between the Play button and Pause
button will move, as the time steps are cycled thru. The displaced model will be drawn in
the 3D Results window, corresponding to the current time step shown on the "Select
Time Step" slider and the "Time Step" edit box. The displacement values for the currently
selected node on the 3D Display Control dialog will match the time step that is currently
being drawn in the 3D Results window. The time that corresponds to the currently
drawn time step will display in the "Time" edit box. The speed with which the animation
draws is dictated by the "Animation Speed" control. The maximum (fastest) speed is 25,
the minimum speed is 1, and the default speed is 24. To view the model for a specific
time step, ensure the animation is paused (by clicking the Pause button). Then, use the
"Select Time Step" slider to select a time step. The model will draw in the 3D Results
window for the selected time step, and the displacements for the selected node will be
shown in the 3D Display Control dialog.
Figure: 4.5.f Dynamic Results Animation Control Dialog

4.5.2 3D Results Window
View the results of the analysis. Elements that have a demand/capacity (D/C) ratio
exceeding 1.0 are shown with a red (highlight) marker.
"Right Click" in the 3D Result window to bring up the view edit menu with the following
options:
1. 3D View Control
a. Hold the left mouse button down and drag to rotate the view
b. Hold the left mouse button and the shift key down and drag to pan the view
c. Hold the Control key and the left mouse button down to enable zooming
i. With the key and button pressed down move forward to zoom in
ii. With the key and button pressed down move backward to zoom out
2. Node Selection – Allows the user to select items in the view to edit in certain dialogs
a. Pick end nodes in the extra members dialog
b. Pick the loaded nodes in the load dialog
c. Pick the node to apply springs to in the spring dialog
d. View the coordinates of the node in most dialogs
3. Element Selection – Allows the user to view result forces for selected element.
4. Nodal Displacements
5. Nodal Displacements Plot
6. Nodal Results Export
7. Element Forces
8. Pile Cap Force Plot
9. Bridge Span Force Plot
10. Nodes
a. All Nodes
b. Transfer Beam Nodes - (Left Row and Right Row)
c. Bearing Nodes - (Left Row and Right Row)
d. Pier Cap / Column Nodes
e. Cantilever Nodes
f. Pile Cap Nodes
g. Pile Nodes
11. Node Numbering
12. Material Property Numbering
13. Element Numbering
a. Connector Elements
b. Structure Elements
c. Pile Elements
d. Pile Cap Elements
14. Element Highlighting
a. Connector Elements
b. Bearing Connector Elements
c. Pile Elements
d. Column Elements
e. Pile Cap Elements
f. Pier Cap / Bent Cap
15. Axes (Local)
16. Axes (Global)
17. Pier Data
18. Plastic Hinge Zones
a. None
b. Undisplaced Only
c. Displaced Only
d. Undisplaced and Displaced
19. Undisplaced Model
20. Bridge View – Display the full bridge structure
21. Reset View – Return the view back to the default setting
Return to the 3D Results page.
4.5.2.1 Nodal Displacements Plot
This feature plots displacements and rotations for any node, across all load cases (across
all load combinations in AASHTO mode, and across all time steps in Dynamics mode).
Access this via the “Nodal Displacements Plot” menu item in the 3D Results Window.
After selecting this menu item, left-click any node in the model to launch the plot
window.
Figure: 4.5.a Nodal Displacement Plot.
By default, Displacement X is the selected data type for which a curve is generated. To
change the data type, choose from one of the five data type radio buttons inside the
Data Type frame. These include Displacement X, Displacement Y, Displacement Z,
Rotation About X, and Rotation About Y. The plotted data can also be viewed in tabular
form by clicking the “Show Table” button, in the bottom right corner of this dialog.
Figure: 4.5.b Nodal Displacement Plot Table.
Other features on this dialog include the following:

1. Show Curve Line - This is a tool to help view the plotted data. When this feature is
selected (checked), the curve line is drawn. When it is not selected (unchecked), the
curve line is not drawn.
Figure: 4.5.c Nodal Displacement Plot Points.
2. Show Point Values - This is a tool to help view the plotted data. When selected
(checked), the displacement (or rotation) values display next to their corresponding
point.
Figure: 4.5.d Nodal Displacement Plot Point Values.
Return to the 3D Results Window page.
4.5.2.2 Nodal Results Export
This feature saves results data to a text file, for any pile node or structure node, across
all load cases (across all load combinations in AASHTO mode, and across all times steps
in Dynamics mode). For structure nodes, the File Types (data types) are as follows (see
Figure: 4.5.e): Displacement X, Displacement Y, Displacement Z, Rotation About X,
Rotation About Y, Shear 2, Shear 3, Moment 2, Moment 3, Axial, and D/C Ratio.
Figure: 4.5.e Nodal Results Export.
For pile nodes, the File Types (data types) are as follows (see Figure: 4.5.f): Displacement
X, Displacement Y, Displacement Z, Rotation About X, Rotation About Y, Shear 2, Shear 3,
Moment 2, Moment 3, Axial, D/C Ratio, Soil Lateral X, Soil Lateral Y, Soil Axial, and Soil
Torsional.
Figure: 4.5.f Nodal Results Data Piles.
By default, no File Types are selected when the dialog is opened. File Types can either be
selected individually, by clicking (checking) the desired File Type checkbox, or by clicking
the “Select All” button, which selects (checks) all File Types (see Figure: 4.5.g). This
button can also be used to deselect all selected File Types (when the button text reads
“Deselect All”).
Figure: 4.5.g Nodal Results Data Piles.
To save the data to a file(s), click the “Save to File” button. It is important to note that
only one data type is saved per file. This makes the data more easily portable to other
applications. For example, displacement X data is saved in one file, displacement Y data
is saved in another file, etc. The default file name has the following format: “NodeXI_
DataType.txt”, where “X” is the selected node number, and I is the selected Node Type
(either I or J). An example of this file name format for all available File Types using node
119 as an I node, is as follows:
Node119I_DisplX.txt,
Node119I_DisplX txt,
Node119I_DisplY txt,
Node119I_DisplZ txt,
Node119I_RotX txt,
Node119I_RotY txt,
Node119I_Shear2 txt,
Node119I_Shear3 txt,
Node119I_Moment2 txt,
Node119I_Moment3 txt,
Node119I_Axial txt,
Node119I_DCRatio txt,
Node119I_SoilLatX txt,
Node119I_SoilLatY txt,
Node119I_SoilAxial txt,
Node119I_SoilTors txt.
By default, these files are saved at the same location as the input file. The contents of
each file can easily be copied into another application for further use, such as EXCEL. The
format of the text file is shown below. Each line in the file contains the load case and its
corresponding value (displacement, rotation, force, etc). The number of lines in the file
equals the number of load cases / load combinations / time steps (this particular
example has 5 load cases):
1 0.0225
2 0.0667
3 0.1385
4 0.2604
5 0.5097
Other features on this dialog include the following:

1. Node Type - Many nodes in the model occupy both an I node position on one
element, and a J node position on an adjacent element. The I node and J node buttons
are used to specify which of these node types is desired for the currently selected node.
(Some exceptions to a node being both an I node and a J node would be pile tip nodes
and cantilever tip nodes).
2. Element Type - Pier Cap nodes that are positioned at the top of a column exist as both
a pier cap element node and a column element node. Thus a choice must be made as to
which element type the selected node’s forces are desired. The same is true for pile head
nodes in Pile Bent models, which exist as both a pile element node and a bent cap
element node.
Additional Notes:
1. This feature is not currently available for Pile Cap nodes. Pile Head nodes are NOT
considered pile cap nodes; they are pile nodes, and thus can be used with this dialog.
2. The Soil Axial forces saved by this dialog do NOT include the Pile Tip Spring Force, as
shown in the output (.out) file in the “Near Field Soil Resistance” section.
4.5.2.3 Element Forces

- Right click in the 3D Results Window, and select "Element Forces".
- Then click on any pile or pier element in the 3D Results Window. (Pile cap elements
and bridge span elements are not included in this feature).
- The selected element will become highlighted, and the dialog will launch, displaying all
relevant forces in the selected element.
"Export" button will print to EXCEL the forces for a given (selected) element (at both the I
and j node) for EVERY load case.
Figure: 4.5.h Element Forces Dialog showing Column forces
*Element # (in Column) is the 1-based index of the element within the column,
beginning at the column base.
**Element # (in Pile) is the 1-based index of the element within the pile, at the pile head.
***Element # (in Model) is the 1-based index of the element in the model. This element
number can be referenced in the .out file.
Element Forces Tutorial

4.5.2.4 Pile Cap Force Plot
Figure: 4.5.i "Pile Cap Forces" dialog.

This feature helps to quantify the governing forces and moment values on the pile cap,
which in turn, can be used for determining pile cap reinforcement layouts. The “Pile Cap
Forces” dialog generates the maximum and minimum moment (about Xp or Yp) and
maximum magnitude shear (parallel to Zp) along the selected nodes on the pile cap
across all load cases. Importantly, positive bending moments correspond to tension on
the bottom face of the pile cap elements. The dialog also provides, per unit length,
maximum and minimum moment plots along the selected nodes.
Use of the “Pile Cap Forces” feature generally proceeds as follows:

1) Open and run an analysis with a model that contains a pile grid size of 2x2 or greater
(e.g., the default General Pier model).
2) Click the “3D Results” button on the top toolbar, and right-click within the “3D
Results” window. Then select the “Pile Cap Forces” option from the popup menu (Figure:
4.5.i).
3) Left-click on a node of interest in the “3D Results” window to select it. Press and hold
the ‘Ctrl’ key to select any number of additional nodes along a pile cap gridline.
Alternatively, to automatically select all nodes along a gridline, check the “End Point
Nodal Selection” checkbox on the “Pile Cap Forces” dialog. Then, left-click on the first
node of interest and (while holding the ‘Ctrl’ key) left-click on the last node on the
gridline. To ensure meaningful results, please refrain from skipping any nodes along the
gridline while making multiple-node selections.
4) Select the desired moment (about Xp or Yp) (e.g., as shown for the pier model in
Figure: 4.5.j). The maximum and minimum moments in the desired direction can be
found across all load cases (or load combinations), or for a selected individual load case
(combination). The current load case (combination) can be changed using the “Load
Case” edit box on the program toolbar. Note that selection of Xp is associated with use
of M2 and selection of Yp is associated with M2.
5) Select the desired option from the "Moment" the pulldown list. The options are
"Capacity (Top Steel)", "About Xp [or Yp]", or "Capacity (Bot. Steel)". For the "Capacity
(Top Steel)" selection, cross-moments (M12, see Plate Element) are added to the M1 or
M2 moments, where the maximum value of M12 used for this purpose is 0.0. For the
"Capacity (Bot. Steel)" selection, cross-moments are added to the M1 or M2 moments,
where the minimum value of M12 used for this purpose is 0.0.
Note: The pulldown list items “Capacity (Top Steel)” and “Capacity (Bot. Steel)” lead to
estimates of the moment capacities associated, respectively, with placement of top and
bottom steel along the currently selected line of nodes and about the selected bending
direction. This approach is adopted from MacGregor and Wight (2005). The signs of
moments generated using the Pile Cap Forces feature are such that positive moment
values contribute to tension in the bottoms of shell elements, while negative moment
values contribute to tension in the tops of shell elements.
6) Click the “Generate” button to display the maximum and minimum moment plots.
Absolute maximum shear parallel to Zp is also calculated along the axis on which the
moments (Xp or Yp) are acting (Figure: 4.5.j).
Figure: 4.5.j Maximum and minimum moment (about Xp) plots along the gridline at
the base of columns of the default general pier.
4.5.2.5 Bridge Span Force Plot
The ‘Bridge Span Force Plot’ menu item launches the ‘Bridge Span Force Plot’ dialog
(Figure: 4.5.k). This feature is only available for bridge (multiple pier) models, when the
‘Bridge View’ menu item is also selected on the ‘3D Results’ popup menu. This dialog
works in conjunction with the ‘3D Results’ window, as selections made on this dialog
are drawn correspondingly in the ‘3D Results’ window. The bridge span is used to
represent the 0-axis, with positive force values drawn above the span, and negative
force values drawn below the span (Figure: 4.5.l). The maximum and minimum values
are given on the plot for the currently selected force type. A light blue shading is used to
indicate positive force values, and a red shading used to indicate negative force values.
Figure: 4.5.k Bridge Span Force Plot

Figure: 4.5.l Span Force Plot
The ‘Span’ combo is used to specify the desired span for which to view force plots. This
combo box also includes an ‘All Spans’ option at the bottom of the list. Choose the ‘All
Spans’ option to simultaneously view the currently selected force plot for all spans in
the model.
The ‘Force’ combo is used to specify the type of force plot. Force options are as follows:
Axial, Shear 2, Shear 3, Moment 3, and Moment 2.
The ‘Scale Plot’ edit box and spin control are used to scale the size of the plot area. This
does not affect the results data. It simply makes the size of plot area bigger or smaller,
and thus can be useful in managing the amount of window space used for the plot area
when a particular model uses a very large or very small area. Thus, scaling would make
the plot easier to read in these extreme cases.
The ‘Show Piers’ checkbox is used to show or hide the piers in the ‘3D Results’ window.
Hiding the piers can help visually isolate the force plots, making them easier to see.
Figure: 4.5.m demonstrates the force plot in the ‘3D Results’ window, when the ‘Show
Piers’ checkbox is not selected.
Figure: 4.5.m Span Force Plot (bridge piers not shown).
4.5.2.6 Material Property Numbering
The Material Property Numbering option shows the material property numbers of all
pier, pile, and connector elements. To display numbering, right click in the 3D Results
Window. This will launch a popup menu. Then select the "Material Property Numbering"
option. Because the pile and pier elements use separate numbering systems, it is
possible that pile and pier elements can share the same property numbers. This is
despite the fact that the pile and pier elements have different cross sections. To view the
specific properties of these elements, consult the "Stage 1" region of the text output
(.out) file.
Figure: 4.5.n Material Property Numbering
4.6 XML Report Generator

The XML Report Generator is an Internet Explorer based interactive data retrieval
system. Based on the XML output created by FB-MultiPier, the report generator presents
the user with a menu of available data. To use the XML Report Generator you need to
check the “XML Data Printing” option under the “Print Control” on the Analysis page to
generate the .XML file.
Figure: 4.6.a XML Data Printing
After you run the analysis, the XML output can be viewed. To do so, click on the XML
Report Generator toolbar button.
Figure: 4.6.b XML Report Generator Toolbar Button
You will be prompted to “Allow blocked content”. Click the “Allow blocked content”
button to allow the blocked content.
Figure: 4.6.c Allow Blocked Content
The XML file will be selected. Click “Yes” to allow the ActiveX control interaction. If
prompted, click the “Allow blocked content” button to allow the blocked content.
Figure: 4.6.d Allow ActiveX Interaction
There are two web pages from which to customize the data to be viewed. The first page
is the “Model Data Report”, where the data you have selected is displayed.
Figure: 4.6.e Model Data Report
The second page is called the “Model Data Menu”, where you select the data you want
to display by checking the checkboxes (for example, the “Print Text Report” checkox).
Then click the “Click to Update Display” button which updates the data on the “Model
Data Report” page.
Figure: 4.6.f Model Data Menu
5 Design Tables
Design Table can be accessed on the toolbar as shown in Figure: 10.1.d. The Design
Table Generator is as shown in Figure: 5.6.g.
Figure: 5.6.g Design Table Generator
The design tables represent a summary of the pertinent force results required for the
design of the bridge pier(s) modeled. Various tables and a full report are available for
convenient review and are suitable for reporting results to clients. Controlling forces
and load cases are identified, as well as structural element identification and location in
the structure. For the pier cap, design force envelopes are plotted for convenient review
and checking.
1. File Options
2. Condensed Tables
3. Pier Cap Envelopes
4. Extended Tables
5. Full Tables
6. User Walkthrough
5.1 File Options
The “Design Load Table” can be viewed in three different file formats, namely, pdf, text
and excel spreadsheet document. The File Options can be viewed in the “Design Load
Table” dialog box as shown below. User can select a particular file format by clicking on
the respective radio-button.
Figure: 5.1.a File options in Design tables
For “Pier Cap (Bent Cap) Shear Design” and “Pier Cap (Bent Cap) Moment Design”
tables, Excel file format has an extra worksheet showing the Coordinates of the points
on the Pier Cap where the shear and moment values are calculated. This is to facilitate
the user to prepare their own shear and moment envelopes.
Specific page footers can also be added to the “Design Load Table”. The options that can
be added (to the page footer) are Date and Time of the file creation, Version Number of
FBMP used to create the results, and Filename of the input (.in) file. The default file name
for the “Design Load Table” files will be the input (.in) filename followed by the title of
the respective table.
Note: ‘*.pdf’(Acrobat Reader required), ‘*.txt’(Notepad required) and ‘*.xlsx’

(Microsoft-Excel required).
5.2 Condensed Tables
1. Maximum Axial Forces at Pile Heads

2. Maximum Demand Capacity Ratio for All Pile Sections
3. Maximum Demand Capacity for All Column Sections
4. Piercap Shear Design
5. Piercap Moment Design
5.2.1 Maximum Axial Forces at Pile Heads
Displays the maximum compression and maximum tension at every pile or shaft head
location. These results would typically be compared to pile/shaft capacities as presented
by the Geotechnical Engineer.
Figure: 5.2.a Maximum Axial Forces at Pile Heads

5.2.2 Maximum Demand Capacity Ratio for All Pile Sections
Displays the Max D/C ratio for every unique pile (or shaft) cross section and lists all 6
concurrent forces at these locations.
Note: The demand/capacity ratio is based on the strength axial-biaxial moment
interaction and when the program is run with the non-linear structural option P-delta
effects are included in the demand forces for piles, columns and pier cap.
Figure: 5.2.b Maximum Demand Capacity Ratio for All Pile Sections

5.2.3 Maximum Demand Capacity for All Column Sections
Similar as for piles above. Displays the Max D/C ratio for the columns. If the columns are
tapered this can include many different section locations.
Note: The longitudinal reinforcement in tapered columns is constant in area and bar
number.
Figure: 5.2.c Maximum Demand Capacity for All Column Sections

5.2.4 Piercap Shear Design
This table of force envelopes identifies the maximum vertical shear F22 and all
concurrent forces in the pier cap at all critical sections: to left and right of every bearing
location, at face of supports and at centerline of supports. Note that bearings must be
specified.
Figure: 5.2.d Pier Cap Shear Design
5.2.5 Piercap Moment Design
Moment envelope of the M33 moments created by the F22 shear. The moments are
shown at centerline of all bearings and faces of supports and centerline of supports.
Figure: 5.2.e Piercap Moment Design
5.3 Piercap Envelopes
1. Moment Envelope
2. Shear Envelope
5.3.1 Moment Envelope
Figure: 5.3.a Moment Envelope

5.3.2 Shear Envelope
.
Figure: 5.3.b Shear Envelope
5.4 Extended Tables
1. Maximum Forces for All Pile Sections

2. Maximum Forces for All Column Sections
3. Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Sections
5.4.1 Maximum Forces for All Pile Sections
This table shows, in turn, the maximum and minimum forces for axial load, shear 2,
shear 3, moment 2, moment 3, torque and Max Demand Capacity Ratio for all Pile
sections. All coexisting forces and demand capacity ratios are listed.
Figure: 5.4.a Maximum Forces for All Pile Sections

5.4.2 Maximum Forces for All Column Sections
shear 3, moment 2, moment 3, torque and Max Demand Capacity Ratio for all column
sections. All coexisting forces and demand capacity ratios are listed.
Note: Currently there is only one column section unless the columns are tapered.
Figure: 5.4.b Maximum Forces for All Column Sections

5.4.3 Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Sections
shear 3, moment 2, moment 3, torque and Max Demand Capacity Ratio for all Extra
Members. All coexisting forces and demand capacity ratios are listed.
Note: Extra Members have only two nodes, one at each end.
Figure: 5.4.c Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Sections
5.5 Full Tables

1. Internal Forces at Pile Heads
2. Minimum Pile Tip Embedment Results
5.5.1 Internal Forces At Pile Heads
This full table option is available in Excel format, and allows for instant tabulation of
internal forces at the pile heads for each load case.
Figure: 5.5.a Internal Forces at Each Pile Head

5.5.2 Minimum Pile Tip Embedment Results
Minimum Pile Tip Embedment (MPTE) analysis facilitates assessment of lateral stability
and identification of design-relevant pile/shaft embedment lengths for deep foundation
systems. This feature can be enabled on the Lateral Stability page, and operates on a
user-defined range of Trial Embedment Lengths to compute a parametric set of lateral
(or otherwise) responses. The MPTE results dialog can be accessed via the Design Tables
window, by clicking the "Minimum Pile Tip Embedment" button within the Full Tables
window-region.
Figure: 5.5.b Minimum Pile Tip Embedment results dialog

Results Display Options
The following display controls can be used to view and catalog MPTE analysis results:
1. Load Case / Combination pull-down list – The load case (or, for AASHTO analyses,
load combination) of interest.
2. Plot pull-down list – The plot type of interest. Selection options include maximum
Lateral (resultant) Displacement, Lateral X displacements, maximum Lateral Y
displacements, Maximum Axial Force, or Minimum Axial Force. Note that displacement
quantities are taken from pile head nodes while force quantities are taken from across
all pile nodes.
3. Plot – A visual plot of MPTE results data for the selected load case/combination and
plot type.
4. Table – A table of MPTE results data for the selected load case/combination and plot
type.
Step-by-Step Guide
The following is a step-by-step guide for viewing MPTE analysis results:
1. Click the Design Tables icon on the main toolbar in order to bring up the Design
Tables dialog.
2. If you plan to export the MPTE results data to EXCEL or PDF, then select the desired
output format from the Excel and PDF radio buttons. The default selection is Excel.
3. Click the button labeled "Minimum Pile Tip Embedment".
4. Use the controls on this dialog to: 1) Investigate various load case or load
combination results; and, 2) Export results in the desired format (EXCEL, PDF).
Pile Element Length

In order to generate the characteristic asymptote in the MPTE plots, pile element lengths
should be comparable to the incremental length change from one trial embedment to
the next. For example, if 20 trial embedments are assessed for a pile embedded in the
range of 30 ft to 50 ft, then the element length would need to be approximately less
than or equal to (50 ft - 30 ft)/20 trials, or a pile element length of ~1 ft. These
considerations promote adequate element mesh density and consistent positioning of
p-y springs across the set of trial embedment models. Otherwise, there is a risk of
lumping artifacts from lack of mesh convergence and inconsistent placement of
boundary conditions (soil springs) into the plotted MPTE results summaries.
Directory Structure for MPTE Analyses

Conduction of MPTE analyses involves generation of several unique models: a "base"
model; and, one additional model for each Trial Embedment Length. Input and output
files associated with the "base" model are generated and stored in an ordinary manner.
In contrast, for each Trial Embedment Length, a unique set of input and output files are
created and stored within a corresponding sub-directory. These sub-directories are
located within the same directory as the "base" model input file. Because the "base"
model is designated as the first trial embedment, the convention for naming sub-
directories follows the pattern "MPTE2", "MPTE3", etc. The contents of each sub-
directory include an input file describing the state of the model at that particular Trial
Embedment Length as well as the results files from that particular analysis.
5.6 User Walkthrough
The Design Tables are a series of tables that summarize analysis data for various parts
of the model for a particular force or demand capacity ratio, across all load cases or load
combinations. To access the Design Tables feature, run the analysis for a General Pier or
Pile Bent model. Then click the Design Tables button on the toolbar, as shown in Figure:
10.1.d.
The Design Tables Generator dialog will then be displayed, as shown in Figure: 5.6.a.
Figure: 5.6.a Design Table Generator
Design tables can be displayed in three file formats: printable document format (.pdf),
text (.txt), and EXCEL spreadsheet (.xls). These formats are available in the “File Options”
frame, as shown in Figure: 5.6.b.
Figure: 5.6.b File Options frame.
To generate a design table, click one of the “Condensed Tables” buttons or one of the
“Extended Tables” buttons. The following is a list of the available tables:
1) Maximum Axial Forces at All Pile Heads – this table displays the maximum
compression and maximum tension forces at the pile head nodes, across all load cases.
It is used to compare to pile drive capacity.
2) Maximum Demand/Capacity Ratio For All Pile Properties (Cross Sections) – this table
displays the maximum demand capacity ratio for each pile property across all load
cases, and the corresponding forces in this load case.
3) Maximum Demand/Capacity Ratio For All Column Properties (Cross Sections) - this
table displays the maximum demand capacity ratio for each column property across all
load cases, and the corresponding forces in this load case.
4) Pier Cap Shear F22 Design – there are two sub tables of this type. The first table
displays the maximum (+) shear forces at the left and right of the bearings and at the
left face, right face and centerline of supports. The second table displays the minimum
(-) shear forces at the left and right of the bearings and at the left face, right face and
centerline of supports.
5) Pier Cap M33 Moment Design – there are two sub tables of this type. The first table
displays the maximum (+) moment forces at the bearings and at the left face, right face
and centerline of supports. The second table displays the minimum (-) moment forces at
the bearings and at the left face, right face and centerline of supports.
6) Maximum Forces for All Pile Properties (Cross Sections) - this table displays the
maximum and minimum axial force for each pile property across all load cases, and the
corresponding forces in this load case. This table also repeats this process for the
maximum and minimum Shear 2, maximum and minimum Shear 3, maximum and
minimum Moment 2, maximum and minimum Moment 3, and maximum and minimum
Torque.
7) Maximum Forces for All Column Properties (Cross Sections) - this table displays the
maximum and minimum axial force for each column property across all load cases, and
the corresponding forces in this load case. This table also repeats this process for the
maximum and minimum Shear 2, maximum and minimum Shear 3, maximum and
minimum Moment 2, maximum and minimum Moment 3, and maximum and minimum
Torque.
8) Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Properties (Cross Sections) - this table
displays the maximum and minimum axial force for each extra member property across
all load cases, and the corresponding forces in this load case. This table also repeats this
process for the maximum and minimum Shear 2, maximum and minimum Shear 3,
maximum and minimum Moment 2, maximum and minimum Moment 3, and
maximum and minimum Torque.
To view the Piercap envelopes, click the “Piercap Envelope” button. The “Envelopes”
dialog will be displayed, as shown in Figure: 5.6.c.
Figure: 5.6.c Envelopes Dialog.
To choose a type of envelope plot, choose a plot type from the “Select Envelopes”
combo box, as shown in 5.6 . For non-AASHTO models, there are two plot types: F22
Shear Envelope and M33 Moment Envelope. For AASHTO models, there are several plot
types, including F22 Shear Envelopes for Strength, Service, Extreme, as well as M33
Shear Envelopes for Strength, Service, Extreme, and Fatigue.
Figure: 5.6.d Select Envelopes combo box.
The envelope plots report the maximum and minimum shear and moment data across
all load cases, for the following locations in the model: shear forces are reported at the
left and right of the bearings and at the left face, right face and centerline of supports;
moment forces are reported at the bearings and at the left face, right face and centerline
of supports. The coordinate system used in the plot is the distance in the X direction
from the left tip of the pier cap (or bent cap, for pile bent models). This is illustrated in
Figure: 5.6.e. Note that the first coordinate shown is 2.500. This is directly under the
leftmost column’s left face (Col 1 LF). This indicates that this column face is 2.5’ from the
left tip of the pier cap. Note that the last coordinate shown is 17.500. This is directly
under the rightmost column’s right face (Col 2 RF). This indicates that this column face
is 17.5’ from the left tip of the pier cap.
Figure: 5.6.e Envelope plot orientation.
The “Show Columns” checkbox can be selected to draw the columns directly on the plot
window, to improve perspective, as shown in Figure: 5.6.f.
Figure: 5.6.f Envelope Plots with 'Show Columns' option selected.
6 General Modeling
1. Column Connection to the Pile Cap

2. Taper Modeling
3. Node Numbering
4. Span Length Calculation
5. Preliminary Soil Values
6. Buried Pile Cap
7. Bearing Positioning Troubleshooting
8. Extra Member Positioning with Respect to Model Changes
9. Soil and Pile Integration in Program Windows
10. Step-By-Step Guide (Distributed Load Dialog)
11. Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)
12. Defining the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) Collision Scenario
13. One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Modeling
14. Automatic Span-End Spring Stiffness and Mass Data Calculation
15. CVIA-OPTS Case Study
6.1 Column Connection to the Pile Cap
In FB-MultiPier loads are transferred between pier columns and foundation members
(e.g., piles) via the pile cap. However, the pier column bases in FB-Multipier are modeled
so as to prevent the generation of unrealistic stress concentrations, as load is
transferred from the pier column base into the pile cap nodes. Namely, internal forces
that develop in pier column bases are spread across four adjacent pile cap nodes, as
shown in the figure below. Accordingly, the propensity for numerical, fictitious stress
concentrations is reduced.
The load-spreading process is carried out internally by the program: based on the
coordinates of the column base node, the four nodes adjacent to the base node are
automatically identified, and "connector" elements are defined between the four pile cap
nodes and the column base node. In this way, the load is distributed to the pile cap in
the form of a column "footprint". The connector elements that are created are "rigid"
elements, where the connector element properties are automatically assigned relatively
large constitutive and geometric properties.
In particular, the connector element stiffnesses are proportional to the properties of the
columns, where the connector element stiffnesses are amplified (relatively) by a factor
of 10,000. Importantly, the weight of the connectors are maintained at nominal levels so
as not to unduly influence the system configuration. For pile-and-cap models that
contain stiffness nodes (i.e., where no pier columns are present), the connector element
stiffnesses are assigned in proportion to the pile cap, where again, a stiffness
amplification factor of 10,000 is used. The end conditions at the connectors are defined
so that there is no moment transfer at the ends of the connectors. Therefore, the
connectors facilitate manifestation of column-end bending behavior without generating
localized moments at the connector-ends. Salient properties associated with the nodes
that the "connector" elements frame into are listed in the output file in the paragraph
"PROPERTIES FOR CONNECTOR ELEMENTS".
Figure: 6.1.a Column Connection to Pile Cap
6.2 Taper Modeling
FB-MultiPier allows for the modeling of tapered columns, pier caps and pier cantilever
elements (Figure: 6.2.a). The taper can be either linear or parabolic. The user is required
to enter the properties at the ends of each element (column, pier cap, pier cap
cantilever) and also the number of sections in each element. The program then
discretizes each element into the number of specified sections and generates a series of
elements each of which having varying cross section properties to define the taper
(Figure: 6.2.b). The axis of the parent element remains the same (Figure: 6.2.c). During
the analysis, the analysis engine treats each of the sections as individual elements with
the specified material properties and the results are provided for each of them.
Figure: 6.2.a Solid View of Model
Figure: 6.2.b Engine Model Discretization (Solid View) based on taper input data
Figure: 6.2.c Engine Model (Thin View) of Structure
6.3 Node Numbering
The conventions for node numbering of substructure frame elements are shown in
Figure: 6.3.a.
Note: These frame elements possess element local coordinates (1-2-3) that are taken
relative to the substructure coordinate system (Xp-Yp-Zp).
Figure: 6.3.a Node Numbering
The numbering scheme for the pile cap (thick) shell elements is as follows:
1. Pile head nodes are assigned node numbers first.
2. Corner nodes of shell elements are assigned next.
1. The first corner node to be assigned a node is located along the Yp axis, at a
maximum distance from the substructure origin.
2. Shell element corner nodes are then assigned sequentially by traveling along
the Xp axis while holding Yp constant.
3. After all corner nodes are assigned, mid-side and center nodes are assigned, starting
along the Yp axis, at a maximum distance from the substructure origin.
1. Shell element mid-side nodes are assigned sequentially by traveling along the
Xp axis while holding Yp constant.
2. If any center nodes are encountered during step 3, then they are also assigned
a node number.
Note: If pile cap (thick) shell elements are removed, the removed element does not
affect the node number assignments.
6.4 Span Length Calculation
Two examples are discussed in this article:

1. Example 1: A three pier configuration with mixed bearing rows.
2. Example 2: A bent-pier-bent configuration with mixed bearing rows.
Example 1
Figure: 6.4.a Bearing Offset Measured from the Centerline of the Pier Pile Cap to the
Centerline of the Bearings
In Figure: 6.4.a, y1, y2, y3 are local pier origins. Y Coordinate can be specified by the user
on the "Bridge Page".
Span length between two piers each with single row of bearings:
L = (y2 - y1) - (Pier1's pile cap width / 2) + (Pier2's pile cap width / 2)
Span length between two piers (eg. Pier 2 and Pier 3) each with double row of bearings:
L = (y3 - y2) - (Pier2's pile cap width / 2 + Pier2's bearing pad offset (right row)) +
(Pier3's pile cap width / 2 - Pier3's bearing pad offset (left row))
Example y1 = 0ft; y2 = 60ft; y3 = 120ft; Pile caps = 16ft x 16ft; Bearing offset = 0.75ft.
Single row of bearings pier 1, double row bearing pier 2 and 3. So Span 1 Length is
given as:
L1 = (y2 - y1) - (Pier1's pile cap width / 2) + (Pier2's pile cap width / 2 - Pier2's bearing
pad offset (left row))
= (60ft - 0ft) - (16ft /2) + (16ft / 2 - 0.75ft) = 59.3 ft
Span 2 Length is given as:

L2 = (Pier2's pile cap width / 2 + Pier2's bearing pad offset (right row)) + (Pier3's pile
cap width / 2 - Pier3's bearing pad offset (left row))
= (120ft - 60ft) - (16ft /2 + 0.75ft) + (16ft / 2 - 0.75ft) = 58.5 ft
Example 2
In the following, span length calculations are given for models containing mixed
configurations of bents and piers. In this example, two coordinate systems are pertinent:
Xp, Yp, and Zp coordinates, which are local to each substructure; and, X, Y, and Z, which
are global coordinates. For bent substructures, the substructure-local origin is
positioned at the pile head of Pile 1. For pier substructures, the substructure-local origin
is positioned at the pile cap corner, as indicated below. While pile head and pile cap
elevations can be selected on the “Bent Cap” and “Pile Cap” model data pages (for bents
and piers, respectively), the X and Y positioning of each substructure origin can be input
on the "Bridge Page".
Figure: 6.4.b Bearing Offset Measured from the Centerline of the Pier Pile Cap to the
Centerline of the Bearings
As illustration, consider a three-substructure configuration: a bent containing a single

row of bearings; a pier containing two rows of bearings; and, a bent containing two
rows of bearings. These three units are referred to as Substructure 1 (bent), Substructure
2 (pier), and Substructure 3 (bent), respectively.
Given that the Xp, Yp, Zp origin for Substructure 1 at the head of Pile 1, and that the Xp,
Yp, Zp origin for Substructure 2 is at the pile cap corner, the span length between the
two substructures is:
L1 = Y2 - Y1 + Substructure 2 pile cap width / 2 - Substructure 2 bearing pad offset (left
row)
Further, the span length between Substructure 2 (a pier) and Substructure 3 (a bent),
each possessing two rows of bearings is:
L2 = Y3 - Y2 - Substructure 2 cap width / 2 - Substructure 2 bearing pad offset (right
row)) - (Substructure 3 bearing pad offset (left row))
For example:
Y1 = 0 ft; Y2 = 45 ft; Y3 = 100 ft; Substructure 2 pile cap longitudinal dimension = 16 ft;
Substructure 2 bearing offsets = 0.8 ft; Substructure 3 bearing offset =0.75 ft
Span 1 Length is:

L1 = 45 ft - 0 ft + 6 ft / 2 - 0.8 ft
L1 = 47.2 ft
Span 2 Length is:

L2 = 100 ft - 45 ft - 6 ft/2 - 0.8 ft - 0.75 ft
L2 = 50.45 ft
6.5 Preliminary Soil Values
Preliminary soil values can be found here.
6.6 Buried Pile Cap
For the case where the pile cap is buried as shown in figure below, FB-Multipier will
automatically calculate dead load due to the soil weight applied to the pile cap and
buoyancy as indicated by the respective soil and water elevations defined by the
engineer.
Note that the “self weight factor” and “buoyancy factor” will be applied to the soil above
the cap in the same way as it is applied to the structural and pile components. For
example (shown below for a non AASHTO load case), if both the “self weight” and
“buoyancy” factors are equal to one, then the program will calculate the weight of the
structural and pile components, the weight of the soil above the top surface of the pile
cap, and the effect of buoyancy.
Figure: 6.6.a Buried Pile Cap
For AASHTO load combinations, the program uses user-defined unit weight of soil on
“Soil on Cap” to generate uniformly-distributed loads and includes them as addition to
the self weight of the pile cap. That is, although the AASHTO load factors for the load
case of DC (i.e., components and attachments) are different from those for the load case
of EV (i.e., vertical earth pressure), the program would still apply the load factors of DC
to the uniformly-distributed loads of the soil weight applied to the pile cap. Therefore,
the engineer would adjust the user-defined unit weight of soil on “Soil on Cap” in order
to consider the difference of the load factors between the load cases of DC and EV.
6.7 Bearing Positioning Troubleshooting
When the user-inputted bearing spacings cannot be accommodated by FB-Multipier, the

following error message displays: "Error Generating Nodes for the Bearings." The
specific cause of this error is most often the result of the close proximity of bearings in
one row versus the other row, such that an unacceptably small element would need to
be created between the two bearings (see Figure 2). So the question arises “What is the
smallest allowable element length”? This is a model-specific value. It is determined as
follows: the maximum number of pier cap (bent cap) nodes for any model is 256. Thus,
the maximum number of pier cap (bent cap) elements is 255. The minimum allowable
bearing spacing is the pier cap length divided by 255. Positioning bearings closer than
this length results in an element length that is unacceptably short.
The figures below help to better explain these concepts. The figure below illustrates
“Bearing Spacing”, a term specifically defined as the user-inputted spacing between
bearings within the same row (ie, bearings within the left row, or bearings within the
right row).The figure below also illustrates a case where the column offset is zero in
both rows, as the first bearing in both the left and right row are aligned with the
centerline of column 1.
Figure: 6.7.a Bearing Positioning.
Given the following input data, the figure below illustrates a case where the “Error
Generating Nodes for the Bearings” error message is caused by too small a distance
between bearings, thus creating an element length that is unacceptably small.
Pier Cap Length = 50.000 feet
Number of Left Row Bearings = 3
Number of Right Row Bearings = 4
Left Row Bearing Spacing, Uniform = 20.000 feet
Right Row Bearing Spacing, Uniform = 13.333 feet
Distance From First Bearing in Left Row to Leftmost column = 0.000 feet
Distance From First Bearing in Right Row to Leftmost column = 0.000 feet
Bearing Xp coordinates in the Left row = 0.000 feet, 20.000 feet, and 40.000 feet
Bearing Xp coordinates in the Right row = 0.000 feet, 13.333 feet, 26.666 feet, and
39.999 feet
Figure: 6.7.b Bearing Positioning Zoom.

Note: The last bearing in the left and right rows do NOT have the same Xp
coordinate. Instead, these bearings are 0.001 feet apart. Given the maximum number of
pier cap elements (255), the minimum pier cap element length in this model is 50.000
feet / 255 = 0.196 feet. The bearing spacing of 0.001 feet would therefore create an
element that is smaller than the minimum allowable length of 0.196 feet. The analysis
therefore could not be run, given this bearing spacing condition. The solution is to move
the location of the bearing in the right row, from an Xp coordinate of 39.999 feet to and
Xp coordinate of 40.000 feet This can be accomplished by using “Variable Spacing” for
the right row of bearings, and entering spacings as 13.333’, 13.333’, and 13.334’.
6.8 Extra Member Positioning with Respect to Model Changes
When modeling changes are made after an extra member has been applied, it is
possible that the position of the extra member could be automatically adjusted by FB-
MultiPier. If and how the extra member is repositioned depends upon the type of
modeling change that has been made. There are two types of modeling changes that are
relevant to extra member positioning: a) changes to the total number of nodes in the
model, and b) changes that require nodal positioning adjustments but do not affect the
total number of nodes in the model.
Changes to the total number of nodes in the model: There are numerous modeling
changes of this type. Some changes are obvious, such as changing the number of
column nodes, beam nodes, pile nodes, or free length nodes. Other changes that affect
the number of nodes are less explicit, such as changing the number of piles, eliminating
a free length, or converting from one bearing row to two bearing rows. When changes
of this type are made, FB-MultiPier attempts to retain the original position of the extra
member, by changing the extra member nodal assignments (ie, the node numbers used
for the extra member’s i-node and j-node). Specifically, the extra member’s previously
assigned i-node and j-node are replaced with the nodes that are now closest to the extra
member element’s original position. How much the extra member is shifted away from
its original position depends on how far away the closest nodes are to the extra
member’s original position. Figure: 6.8.a and Figure: 6.8.b illustrate an example of this
(all pile cap and pile nodes have been hidden in these figures to simplify the viewing of
the model). A user has applied an extra member to the structure between columns 1
and 2. The user has assigned the extra member an i-node of 85 and a j-node of 95 (see
Figure: 6.8.a).
Figure: 6.8.a Extra Member is assigned to i-node 85 and j-node 95.

The user then manually adjusts the number of column nodes in the model (on the Pier
Page), changing the column node count from 3 nodes per column to 5 nodes per
column. This action changes the total number of nodes in the model, increasing the
node count by 4 (2 new nodes for each of the 2 columns). Because of this influx of 4
new nodes, the original extra member nodes 85 and 95 have been moved significantly
(see Figure: 6.8.b). Thus, FB-MultiPier, in an attempt to maintain the extra member
position in the model, reassigns two new nodes to the extra member, i-node 86 and j-
node 98. This is because node 86 is the closest node to the original position of node 85,
and node 98 is the closest node to the original position of node 95.
Figure: 6.8.b Column Node count has been increased, and i-node and j-node are
reassigned.
Changes that require nodal positioning adjustments but do not affect the total number
of nodes in the model: There are numerous model changes of this type as well. For
example, changing the pile free length or cantilever length, changing the column height,
changing the pile length, etc. These types of changes do not create or delete nodes. FB-
MultiPier simply redistributes the existing nodes, thereby keeping the total number of
nodes constant. When this type of modeling change is completed, the extra member
maintains its nodal assignments. This means that the extra member’s position in the
model could change, because the extra member’s i-node and j-node could change
position. Figure: 6.8.c and Figure: 6.8.d illustrates an example of this. In this model, the
pile free length is 10’. The pile free length is the distance from the pile cap centerline to
the top of the soil. An extra member has been applied at the bottom of the free length,
at an elevation of -10’ (see Figure: 6.8.c). There are 6 free length nodes and 5 nodes in
the soil.
Figure: 6.8.c Pile Free Length is 10’.

The model is then modified by a user. The user modifies the model by removing the top
soil layer. This soil layer had a top of layer elevation of -10’ and a bottom elevation of -
30’. Thus, removing the soil layer extends the pile free length down to an elevation of -
30’ (see Figure: 6.8.d). The free length nodes are then redistributed over the now-larger
free length. Note that the number of free length nodes has NOT changed, nor has the
number of nodes in the soil. There are still 6 free length nodes 5 nodes in the soil.
However, the element lengths have increased in the free length because these nodes
must now evenly divide a 30’ free length instead of the original 10’ free length.
Conversely, the element lengths have decreased on the portion of the pile that is in the
soil, because the 5 soil nodes are now divided over a shorter portion of the pile. The
extra member’s i-node and j-node shift downward to an elevation of -30’ (the new
elevation at the bottom of the free length). Because the extra member maintains its i-
node and j-node assignments, the extra member also moves down to an elevation of -
30’.
Figure: 6.8.d Pile Free Length is 30’.
When these types of modeling changes occur, it is advisable to double-check the extra
member positions to ensure they are desirable. Another alternative is to apply extra
members to the model only after all other modeling changes are complete. Doing so
ensures that neither the total number of nodes will change, nor will the existing nodes
need to be redistributed.
6.9 Soil and Pile Integration in Program Windows
There are several program windows in which a pile or soil set can be selected. These
windows are the Soil Edit window, Pile Plan View window, Pile Page, and Soil Page.
Regardless of which window the selections are made, the Soil Edit window will display
the currently selected pile within its assigned soil set. See Figure: 6.9.a ‘Pile 1’ is the
selected pile and ‘Soil Set 1’ is the selected soil set. The soil set number is displayed in
the window’s title bar, and in the soil layer itself. The selected pile number is displayed
in the top left corner of the window, along with the pile type used in that pile.
Figure: 6.9.a Soil Edit Window
When the selected soil set is changed, the Soil Edit window will immediately update to
display this newly selected soil set. The following is a list of ways to set/change the
selected soil set:
a) On the Soil Page, make a selection in the ‘Soil Set’ combo box.
Figure: 6.9.b Soil Page (Soil Set combo box)
When this action is taken, if the currently selected pile uses the selected soil set, then the
pile will also display in the Soil Edit window, along with its nodes. Clicking on these
nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog. However, if the
currently selected pile does NOT use the selected soil set, then nodes will not be drawn
on the pile. This indicates the pile does not use the displayed soil set.
Figure: 6.9.c Soil Edit Window
Note in this figure that ‘Pile 1’ is the selected pile, but ‘Soil Set 2’ is the selected soil set.
Because soil set 2 is NOT assigned to pile 1, the pile nodes are not drawn, and therefore
soil curves would not be generated for this pile-soil combination. It is common when
building up the a model, such as creating multiple soil sets one right after another, that
the Soil Edit window will not draw the pile nodes, because these newly created soil sets
have yet to be applied to any piles. Once the soil sets have been assigned to piles and a
pile selection is made, the pile nodes will be drawn.
b) On the Pile Page, make a selection in the ‘Soil Set’ combo box.
Figure: 6.9.d Pile Page (Soil Set combo box)
When this action is taken, the currently selected pile will also display in the Soil Edit
window, along with its nodes. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in the
Printable Soil Graph Dialog.
c) In the Pile Plan View window, use the ‘Assign Soil Sets to Piles’ menu option.
Figure: 6.9.e Pile Plan View Window (Assign Soil Sets to Piles)
Using this mode, soil sets are assigned to pile. After each soil set is assigned, it will
display in the Soil Edit window, along with the pile that is located within the assigned
soil set in the pile grid. Note in Figure: 6.9.f that soil set 2 has just been applied to pile 5.
The Soil Edit window now displays ‘Pile 5’ and its assigned soil set, which is ‘Soil Set 2’.
Figure: 6.9.f Pile Plan View Window (Assign Soil Sets to Piles)
Figure: 6.9.g Soil Edit Window
This pile’s nodes will also display. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in
the Printable Soil Graph Dialog.
When the selected pile is changed, the Soil Edit window will display it, along with the
pile’s assigned soil set. The following is list of ways to set/change the currently selected
pile:
a) On the Pile Page, make a selection in the ‘Pile’ edit box. See Figure: 6.9.d blue arrow.
When this action is taken, the currently selected pile will display in the Soil Edit window,
along with its nodes, as well as this pile’s assigned soil set. The assigned soil set for this
pile also is displayed on the Pile Page, in the ‘Soil Set’ combo box.
b) In the Pile Plan View window, use the ‘Add/Remove Pile’ menu option.
Figure: 6.9.h Pile Plan View Window (Add/Remove Piles)
When this action is taken, if a pile has just been added, then this pile will become the
selected pile. This selected pile will then be displayed in the Soil Edit window, along with
the soil set that is assigned to that pile. This pile’s nodes will also display. Clicking on
these nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog. (If a pile has
just been removed using the ‘Add/Remove Pile’ option, then pile 1 will automatically
become the selected pile and display in the Soil Edit window, along with its assigned soil
set).
c) In the Pile Plan View window, use the ‘Pile Data/Batter’ menu option.
Figure: 6.9.i Pile Plan View Window (Pile Data/Batter)
When this action is taken, the pile that has just been selected will be displayed in the Soil
Edit window, along with the soil set that is assigned to that pile. This pile’s nodes will
also display. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil
Graph Dialog. Note in Figure: 6.9.j that pile 3 has just been selected. It has thus become
highlighted in the Pile Plan View window. The Soil Edit window now displays ‘Pile 3’ and
its assigned soil set, which is ‘Soil Set 2’.
Figure: 6.9.j Pile Plan View Window (Pile Data/Batter)
When this action is taken, the pile that has just been selected will then be displayed in
the Soil Edit window, along with the soil set that is assigned to that pile. This pile’s nodes
will also display. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil
Graph Dialog.
e) In the Pile Plan View window, use the ‘Assign Soil Sets to Piles’ menu option. (See 6.9
). When this action is taken, the soil set that has just been assigned will display in the
Soil Edit window, along with the pile that is located within the assigned soil set in the
pile grid. This pile’s nodes will also display. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil
curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog.
6.10 Step-by-step guide (Distributed Load dialog)
A convenient feature is available that facilitates generation and application of distributed

loads to FB-MultiPier models. Namely, the Distributed Load feature allows for the
generation of constant value loads, uniform loads, or linearly varying loads, which can
then be applied to piles, pile caps, columns, and pier caps.
As a step-by-step demonstration of this feature, consider Figure: 6.10.a, which is a

model view of a single pile located in a stream bed. For this scenario, the horizontal load
associated with the stream is taken into consideration, and the distributed load
generator is used in creating and applying the loads to the model. For the remainder of
this article, the series of steps taken within the FB-MultiPier graphical user interface are
listed to showcase how such loads are generated and applied. Please refer to the
“Distributed Load” page for additional details about the graphical user interface
components in the Distributed Load dialog.
Step-by-step preliminaries: Consider a pier with nine driven piles, which are partially
embedded in the ground, and where free standing water is present above the ground
surface. Now, temporarily focus upon a single pile within the pier (Figure: 6.10.a), and
assume that the height of the water head above the ground surface is 30 ft and that the
pile diameter is 3 ft. The water is subject to a current, and therefore, horizontal loading
acts upon the pile as a function of height below the waterline (linearly varying from 0
kip/ft to 5.62 kips/ft at the ground surface). The Distributed Load dialog greatly
facilitates creation and application of the linearly varying load on the pile nodes
positioned above the ground surface. Follow the steps below to apply the load using
‘Distributed Load’ dialog.
Figure: 6.10.a A single pile excerpted from the pier scenario, partially embedded in soil
and subjected to horizontal loading from water currents
Step 1: Open a model in FB-MultiPier and model the pier, ground surface, and
waterline.
Step 2: Click the ‘Distributed Load’ button on ‘Load’ page. This will open the dialog
shown in Figure: 6.10.b.
Figure: 6.10.b Distributed Load dialog
Step 3: Within the ‘Distributed Load’ dialog, make sure that ‘Pile’ is selected from the
‘Member’ pull-down list and ‘Linear’ is selected from the ‘Load Types’ pull-down list.
Step 4: Within the ‘3D View’ window, select the starting node and ending node upon
which the uniform distributed loads are to be applied. Nodes 113 (starting) and 123
(ending) are selected in this scenario.
Step 5: Within the ‘Distributed Loads’ dialog, supply Xp load magnitudes at the starting
and ending nodes. The Xp starting load (per ft) is input as 0.0 kip/ft and the ending load
(per ft) is input as 5.62 kip/ft in this scenario.
Step 6: Click the ‘Generate Load On The Selected Member’ button (Figure: 6.10.c). The
load vectors will then be seen in the ‘3D View’ window for the selected member. Note
that FB-MultiPier has generated these concentrated forces based on the uniform load
magnitudes and the model-specific nodal spacing.
Step 7: The ‘Generate Load On Other Members’ can then be selected , which for this
case, automatically assigns the same load group to the respective nodes along each of
the other piles in the pier model (Figure: 6.10.d).
Step 8: Click ‘OK’ to apply the loads that have been generated.
Figure: 6.10.c Generation of load along the selected pile length

Figure: 6.10.d Generation of load along all other piles of the same type
6.11 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)
Modeling of vessel collision loads requires consideration of nonlinear structure-

foundation response within a dynamic analysis regime, which can be quite
cumbersome. The Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) module in FB-MultiPier
enables engineers to analyze structural demands in a time-dependent step-by-step
manner, and transforms a practical bridge design application into a streamlined analysis
tool. Below is a walkthrough for model development, and for making use of CVIA in FB-
MultiPier:
1. Open FB-MultiPier, and click the “New” icon to open the “Select New Model Type”
dialog. Select the default General Pier by clicking on "Pier" radio button, and then
clicking OK.
Figure: 6.11.a Open new model type
2. The CVIA feature is a dynamic analysis method. To enable use of CVIA, select the
“Dynamic” analysis option in the Analysis Type panel on the “Analysis” Page.
Figure: 6.11.b Select Dynamic analysis type
3. The warning message will pop-up saying All the load case data except load case one
will be lost. Click Yes.
Figure: 6.11.c Message warning about the loss of all load data except the load case one.
4. Dynamic analysis parameters are considered as shown in Figure: 6.11.d. On the

“Dynamics” Page, select the “Vessel Collision” dynamic loading option.
Figure: 6.11.d Selecting vessel collision option in dynamic analysis
5. Selecting “Vessel Collision” will clear the existing load function data (for dynamic
loads). Click Yes.
Figure: 6.11.e Message warning about the loss of existing load function data
6. Navigate to the Load Page (Figure: 6.11.f), to apply the dynamic vessel collision load
Figure: 6.11.f Open the “Vessel Collision” dialog
7. Click on the “Vessel Collision” button to open the “Vessel Collision” dialog (Figure:
6.11.g).
Figure: 6.11.g “Vessel Collision” dialog
8. Within the “Vessel Collision” dialog enter the vessel weight and velocity components.
Additionally, select the collision type and the estimated collision width of the vessel that
will be engaged in the “Impact Conditions” panel. The Vessel Velocity is in the global X
and Y directions. To model the stiffness of the vessel bow, a force-deformation curve
can be automatically created (or user-defined, if so desired). In this example, the impact
parameters and conditions are selected as shown in Figure: 6.11.h. Note that the “Wide
View” check box allows for viewing the force-deformation curve over a wider abscissa
range.
Figure: 6.11.h Inputting Vessel-Collision conditions
Note that the vessel bow force-deformation curve is calculated in the “Vessel Collision”
dialog, in accordance with Figure: 6.11.i (Getter and Consolazio 2011). Additionally, note
that the applied vessel collision impact load-history is generated automatically during
CVIA analysis by the FB-MultiPier analytical engine. Alternatively stated, bridge pier
response is calculated simultaneous to calculation of the vessel collision impact load-
history. If it is of interest, the load-history can be viewed upon completion of the
analysis (please refer to Step 10).
Figure: 6.11.i Flow chart with empirical equations for calculating barge bow force-
9. Click OK at the bottom of the “Vessel Collision” dialog to return to the Load Page.
Within the “3D View” located to the right of the Load Page:
1. Select the node on the pier that corresponds to the impact location (Node 28);
2. Click the “Add” button on the Load Page to add the impact location to the load table;
3. Click on the letter 'S' just to the left of the newly added node number to toggle the
load type from static (S) to dynamic (D).
Note that the direction in which the vessel collision will be generated and applied is
automatically determined, given the vessel velocity data previously defined above in
Figure: 6.11.h. For more details, please refer to Section 6.12
Also, note that for vessel collision analysis, all other applied nodal loads are treated as
static (S) loads. Along these lines, note that the Dynamic Relaxation feature is typically
activated and is utilized to initialize the system in equilibrium with permanent (static)
loading, while minimizing non-physical system vibrations due to the presence of
permanent loads.
Figure: 6.11.j Applying the vessel collision load at the point of vessel impact
10. The CVIA model is ready to run. After carrying out the analysis, the user can check
structural demand/capacity ratios on pier components of interest.
11. The vessel impact load-history is generated by the analytical engine and stored in
the .VES file (Figure: 6.11.k) and is saved in the same folder as the input file. An excerpt
of the .VES file is shown in Figure: 6.11.l.
Figure: 6.11.k .VES file with impact load-history (for first 6 time steps only)
Figure: 6.11.l Vessel collision impact load-history
For a detailed case study for making use of the CVIA-OPTS features, please refer to
Section 6.15 .
6.12 Defining the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)

Collision Scenario
The following discussion assumes that the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis has already
been activated. If this is not the case, then please first refer to the step-by-step guide for
activating CVIA within FB-MultiPier models.
Navigate to the Load page to define the vessel collision scenario.

1. Select the node on the pier that corresponds to the impact location (e.g., Node 28 as
shown in Figure: 6.12.a);
2. Click the “Add” button on the Load Page to add the impact location to the load table;
3. Click on the letter 'S' just to the left of the newly added node number to toggle the
load type from static (S) to dynamic (D).
Figure: 6.12.a Defining the impact location (node)
4. Click on the “Vessel Collision” button to open the “Vessel Collision” dialog (Figure:
6.12.b).
Figure: 6.12.b “Vessel Collision” dialog
Within the “Vessel Collision” dialog, enter the vessel impact parameters and conditions.
For example, a Vessel Weight of 11,432 kips and (global) Vessel X Velocity of 10.5 ft/sec
is defined as shown in Figure: 6.12.c and Click OK.
Figure: 6.12.c Inputting Vessel Collision conditions
One of the main advantages of using the CVIA feature is that it alleviates the burden of
having to determine the impact load-history prior to carrying out the analysis. Instead,
the impact load-history is computed automatically during the analysis, based on the
vessel collision scenario and the bridge-pier-soil characteristics. Alternatively stated,
bridge pier response is calculated simultaneous to calculation of the vessel collision
force history. In this way, emphasis can remain on characterizing bridge response to
vessel collision loading, rather than on forming an appropriate impact load-history.
However, in case it is of interest, the impact load-history is printed to an ACSII file with
extension .VES, where this file is located in the same directory as all other analysis
output.
As a further convenience to engineers wishing to make use of the CVIA feature, only the
initial vessel X and Y (global direction) velocity components (Figure: 6.12.c) need to be
specified to define the vessel orientation. Other orientation-related inputs, such as
activation of the respective degree(s) of freedom (DOF) dynamic loading flags, are
automatically handled by FB-MultiPier. For example, as shown in Figure: 6.12.c, a non-
zero Vessel X Velocity is defined, and accordingly, FB-MultiPier automatically activates
the “X dir” DOF dynamic loading flag (Figure: 6.12.d).
Figure: 6.12.d Flags to indicate loaded degree(s) of freedom (handled automatically by

FB-MultiPier)
5. As further demonstration, consider a scenario where both (global) X and Y velocity

components are needed to define the vessel collision scenario. Accordingly, click on the
“Vessel Collision” button again, and within the “Vessel Collision” dialog, enter a non-
zero Vessel Y Velocity as shown in Figure: 6.12.e and Click OK.
Figure: 6.12.e Adding Vessel Y Velocity
Consequently, the vessel initial velocity is now the resultant of two components, with
magnitudes in both the (global) X and Y directions. Given that non-zero values are
present for both the X and Y direction velocity components, FB-MultiPier automatically
activates the “X dir” and “Y dir” DOF dynamic loading flags (Figure: 6.12.f)
Figure: 6.12.f Flags to indicate loaded degree(s) of freedom (handled automatically by
FB-MultiPier)
6.13 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Modeling
The One Pier Two Span (OPTS) model can be modeled using two scenarios as follows:
A. Default One Pier Two Span Model Type
B. Automatic Generation, Using Pre-Existing Bridge Models
6.13.1 Default One Pier Two Span Model Type
The following steps can be taken to form the OPTS model using the New Model Type,
“One Pier Two Span”:
1. Open FB-MultiPier, and click the “New” icon to open the “Select New Model Type”
dialog. The default OPTS model can be selected by clicking on "One Pier Two Span"
radio button, and then clicking OK.
Figure: 6.13.a “Select New Model Type” dialog
Figure: 6.13.b shows the 3D view of the default OPTS model.

Figure: 6.13.b 3D-view of the default OPTS model
2. Navigate to the “Bridge Page”. Click the “Edit” button to open "OPTS Data” dialog for
viewing or updating the OPTS span-end springs and masses.
Figure: 6.13.c Bridge Page with “Edit” button to open "OPTS Data” dialog
3. Figure: 6.13.d shows the "OPTS Data” dialog. The user can see the default spring
stiffnesses placed at the ends of Span 1 and Span 2.
The default spring stiffnesses located at each end of the default OPTS model are
generated so as to mimic Span 1, Span 2, and Pier 2 of the default FB-MultiPier bridge
model. For more information on how the spring stiffnesses and mass values were
calculated, refer to section 6.14 .
Figure: 6.13.d “OPTS Data” dialog
4. In addition to updating the spring stiffness and mass values as discussed above, the
user can update the structural members in the pier and soil properties as needed.
5. The OPTS model is now fully prepared for analysis. After carrying out the analysis, the
structural demand/capacity ratios that develop across the pier components of interest
can be cataloged as with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.
6.13.2 Automatic Generation, Using Pre-Existing Bridge Models
In addition to opening the default One Pier Two Span (OPTS) model in FB-MultiPier, one
can also generate an OPTS model from an existing multiple-pier bridge model. Note
that multiple-pier bridge models must contain three or more piers in order to be
converted to OPTS models.
The following steps can be taken to form the OPTS model from an existing multiple-pier
bridge model:
1. Open any existing multiple-pier bridge model. Open FB-MultiPier program and Click
on icon to open browsing window. Select and open the multiple-pier bridge model
of interest.
For this particular case we will open a default bridge model in FB-MultiPier. Open FB-
MultiPier, and click the “New” icon to open the “Select New Model Type” dialog. The
default bridge model can be selected by clicking on "Bridge (Multiple Piers)" radio
button (Figure: 6.13.e). Click OK.
Figure: 6.13.e “Select New Model Type” dialog
Figure: 6.13.f shows the 3D view of the default bridge model.

Figure: 6.13.f 3D-view of the default bridge model
2. For demonstration purposes, Pier 2 will be selected to be used in the generation of an

OPTS model. Navigate to the Model Page and click on the “One Pier Two Span” radio
button.
Figure: 6.13.g Selection of "One Pier Two Span" (OPTS) Model Type
3. A message will pop up asking if you want to save the current bridge model. Click Yes,
if you want to. Then, the OPTS conversion dialog presents a listing of all piers that are
eligible to be used in generating an OPTS model. Note that the end-most piers are not
permitted for conversion to OPTS models. For this demonstration, Pier 2 is selected
from the list.
Figure: 6.13.h Message for saving Bridge Model

Figure: 6.13.i OPTS Conversion dialog
4. After selecting Pier 2, a special analysis is carried out to automatically calculate the
span end spring stiffnesses and mass values. The resulting OPTS model is automatically
saved as a stand-alone input file (with format: [Original FileName]_OPTS_Pier#.in). For
the present demonstration, the automatically generated file name is: “defaulte_OPTS_
Pier2.in”. Automatic generation of a stand-alone model input file prevents unintended
deletion/modification of the pre-existing bridge model. The spring stiffness and mass
values are calculated considering the adjacent pier properties and boundary conditions.
For more information on how to calculate the spring stiffnesses and mass values, refer
section 6.14 . Please refer to step 6 and 8 for instructions on how to view/edit these
values.
Figure: 6.13.j Special analysis for computing span end spring stiffnesses and mass
values
5. The OPTS model generated, after the analysis, is as shown below in Figure: 6.13.k.
Figure: 6.13.k OPTS model extracted from default bridge (multiple-pier) model
6. For the OPTS model, the “Bridge Page” has an additional option where you can
view/edit the OPTS Data. Click the “Edit” button to open "OPTS Data” dialog.
Figure: 6.13.l Bridge Page
7. Figure: 6.13.m shows the "OPTS Data” dialog. The user can see the span end springs
stiffnesses placed at the ends of Span 1 and Span 2. These were generated by the
program during the analysis described in Step 4.
Figure: 6.13.m “OPTS Data” dialog
8. The OPTS model is now fully prepared for analysis. After carrying out the analysis, the
structural demand/capacity ratios that develop across the pier components of interest
can be cataloged as with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.
6.14 Automatic Span-End Spring Stiffness and Mass Data

Calculation (For One Pier Two Span Model)
Calculation of span end spring stiffness and mass data for OPTS model type in
FB-MultiPier:
When a One Pier Two Span (OPTS) model is extracted from a full bridge model, the
spring stiffness and mass data at the ends of span 1 and span 2, relative to the selected
pier, are calculated automatically.
The following is the process used by the analytical engine to form the span end spring
stiffnesses in OPTS model:
Consider a five pier bridge model as shown below. Select the pier of interest to be
converted to an OPTS model (In this case, Pier 3). As shown below, the program splits
the bridge into three distinct portions (Figure: 6.14.a).
Figure: 6.14.a Splitting the Bridge to form the OPTS model
An equivalent stiffness matrix is calculated, for left and right end bridge portions, as
follows:
1. Isolate the extreme bridge portion (e.g., Left portion of bridge as shown in Figure:
6.14.b)
2. The node at which the bridge is split is the selected node of interest (Figure:
6.14.b). The program calculates the flexibility matrix of the structure at the
particular equilibrium state, following general principles. To do that the program
internally applies unit forces at the selected node of interest. The unit forces are
applied successively in all six possible directions (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz).
3. The displacements from each solution at the selected node comprise the columns
of the flexibility matrix (e.g., the displacements from the solution under the
application of the Fx unit load comprise the first column of the flexibility matrix).
4. After the flexibility matrix is obtained, the program calculates the matrix inverse,
which constitutes the equivalent stiffness at the node of interest.
This calculated equivalent stiffness matrices, for both left and right portion of the bridge,
is applied to the respective span ends of the OPTS model as shown in Figure: 6.14.b.
Figure: 6.14.b Applying equivalent spring stiffnesses at the two span ends of OPTS
model.
The following is the process used by the analytical engine to form the span end mass
data in OPTS model:
As another example, consider a five pier bridge model as shown below. Select the pier of
interest to be converted to an OPTS model (In this case, Pier 3). Lumped masses are
calculated for half of the span to the left and right of the pier of interest as illustrated in
Figure: 6.14.c.
Figure: 6.14.c Applying the lumped mass at the two span ends of OPTS model.
6.15 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis - One Pier Two Span (CVIA-
OPTS) Case Study
Application of the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) module and One
Pier Two Span (OPTS) Modeling Technique for Dynamic Finite Element
Analysis of Vessel-Bridge Collisions
In the following, an example is developed in a step-by-step manner using the Coupled
Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) module and the One Pier Two Span (OPTS) modeling
technique for an in-service bridge configuration. Collision between an aberrant barge
and a bridge pier is investigated, for which FB-MultiPier is showcased as a state-of-the-
art design-oriented bridge modeling tool for analyzing dynamic bridge response to
vessel collision loads. Namely, the SR-20 at Blountstown Bridge located in northwest
Florida is selected for this example. The SR-20 at Blountstown Bridge is 1.6 miles long
and spans the Apalachicola River in northwest Florida. Vessel navigation is permitted
within a 150 ft channel. A six-span portion of the bridge is modeled in FB-MultiPier
(Figure: 6.15.a), with Pier 59 as the pier of interest (i.e., the impacted pier).
Figure: 6.15.a SR-20 at Blountstown FB-MultiPier bridge model
The structural configuration (geometry, material properties) of the bridge are based on
structural drawings, and soil-modeling parameters are evaluated from boring site data.
The input data are available upon request by current users. Given the site-specific model
input, the FB-MultiPier finite element (FE) model of Pier 59 is shown in Figure: 6.15.b.
The following walkthrough explains how to use the CVIA module to facilitate
streamlined vessel collision analysis of bridge-pier-soil systems.
Figure: 6.15.b Finite element (FE) model of Pier 59
Subsequent to supplying all pier and soil properties, CVIA is performed using the
following steps:
1. Select the “Dynamic” analysis option in the Analysis Type panel on the “Analysis” page
(Figure: 6.15.c).
Figure: 6.15.c Select Dynamic analysis type
2. On the “Dynamics” page, select the “Vessel Collision” dynamic loading type. For this
example, Rayleigh damping parameters are specified (Figure: 6.15.d) such that
approximately 5% of critical damping is achieved over the first five system vibration
modes. Also shown in Figure: 6.15.d is the time step size (0.0025 sec). Note that, when
no other data are available, a time time-step size of 0.0025 sec is recommended for use
of the CVIA feature in FB-MultiPier. Additionally, when making use of the CVIA feature,
the program automatically halts the analysis after the vessel and impacted pier have
separated for a period equal to 2.25 sec.
Figure: 6.15.d Select the Vessel Collision option on the “Dynamics” page
3. Select Pier #3 and navigate to the “Load” page (Figure: 6.15.e) to apply the dynamic
vessel collision load.
Figure: 6.15.e Open the “Vessel Collision” dialog
4. Open the “Vessel Collision” dialog by clicking on the “Vessel Collision” button.
Figure: 6.15.f “Vessel Collision” dialog
5. Enter the vessel-collision conditions and type of vessel in the “Vessel Collision” dialog.
The collision conditions include specification of the vessel weight and vessel velocity in
the global X and/or Y direction(s). To model the stiffness of the vessel bow, a force-
deformation curve can be automatically created (or user-defined, if so desired). For the
current demonstration, the vessel collision scenario is based on a static vessel collision
load of 2,550 kips on Pier 59 (as listed in the structural drawings). Using this static
vessel collision load and the empirical load determination equations given in the
American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Guide
Specifications and Commentary for Vessel Collision Design of Highway Bridges
(AASHTO 2009), the collision conditions shown in Figure: 6.15.g are back-calculated.
Figure: 6.15.g Define vessel collision conditions
Note that the barge bow force versus deformation curve is calculated in the “Vessel
Collision” dialog, in accordance with Figure: 6.15.h (Getter and Consolazio 2011).
Additionally, note that the applied vessel collision impact load-history is generated
automatically during CVIA analysis. Alternatively stated, bridge response is calculated
simultaneous to calculation of the impact load-history. In this way, computed pier
response is coupled to elastic loading, crushing, unloading, and reloading of the vessel
bow. Please refer to Step 8 for instructions on accessing the computed impact load-
history.
Figure: 6.15.h Flow chart with empirical equations for calculating barge bow force-
6. From the “Load” page, select the impact location (node), using “3D View” and the
“Load” page:
1. Select the node that best represents the impact location on Pier 59 (Node 12 in
this case).
2. Click the “Add” button to add the impact node to the Node Applied list.
3. Click on the letter 'S' just to the left of the newly added node number to toggle
the loading type at the impact location from static (S) to dynamic (D).
Note that the direction in which the vessel collision load will be generated and
applied is automatically determined, given the global X and Y components of initial
vessel velocity, which were previously input within the “Vessel Collision” dialog. For
more details, please refer to Section 6.12
Also, note that for vessel collision analysis, only a single impact location can be
defined throughout the model. All other applied nodal loads are considered to be static
(S) loads.
Figure: 6.15.i Applying the vessel collision load at the point vessel impact
7. The model input necessary to make use of the CVIA feature is now complete, and the
dynamic vessel collision analysis is now ready to be carried out. Upon completion of the
analysis, the structural demand/capacity ratios on pier components of interest can be
checked in a manner consistent with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.
8. The vessel impact load-history is generated automatically by FB-MultiPier during the

analysis and stored in the .VES file (Figure: 6.15.j). This file (the .VES file) is saved in the
same folder as the input file. The full impact load-history, excerpted from the .VES file
generated as part of the current example, is shown in Figure: 6.15.k.
Figure: 6.15.j First thirty lines of .VES file

Figure: 6.15.k Vessel collision impact force history
The impacted pier considered above (Pier 59 from the SR-20 bridge) is now used to
create an OPTS model. The OPTS modeling technique increases computational efficiency
by transforming the bridge model (multiple-pier, multiple-span model) to an equivalent
model with one pier and two spans. Concentrated spring stiffnesses and masses,
connected at the ends of the two retained spans, are used to represent the stiffness and
inertial resistance of the multiple-pier, multiple-span bridge model. The OPTS modeling
technique is intended to substantially reduce computational costs associated with
conducting implicit nonlinear dynamic analysis (e.g., CVIA) of bridge models while
maintaining accuracy to within an acceptable margin of error.
The following is a step-by-step guide for creating an OPTS model, which makes use of
the previously discussed SR-20 bridge model.
1. Open the SR-20 full bridge model in FB-MultiPier and navigate to the “Model” page
(Figure: 6.15.l).
Figure: 6.15.l Open the Model Page
2. On the “Model” page, click on the “One Pier Two Span” model type (Figure: 6.15.m).
Figure: 6.15.m Select the of "One Pier Two Span" (OPTS) model type
3. When the “OPTS Conversion” dialog opens, select Pier 3 (which corresponds to Pier
59 of the SR-20 bridge), and click the “OK” button (Figure: 6.15.n).
Figure: 6.15.n OPTS Conversion dialog
4. As part of the OPTS model formation, a special analysis is automatically carried out to
calculate the span end concentrated stiffness and mass values. The resulting OPTS
model is shown in Figure: 6.15.o.
Figure: 6.15.o OPTS model (with Pier 59), created from the SR-20 full bridge model
5. For the OPTS model, the Bridge Page has an additional option where engineers can
modify the stiffness and mass data at the model extents, if so desired. Such
modifications are made by navigating to the Bridge Page, and then clicking the “Edit”
button to open the "OPTS Data” dialog. Recall that the spring stiffness and mass data at
the ends of span 1 and span 2, relative to the selected pier, were calculated
automatically, and so, care should be taken if it is elected to modify these values. For
more information on how to calculate the spring stiffnesses and mass values please
refer section 6.14 .
Figure: 6.15.p “OPTS Data” dialog

6. The CVIA-OPTS model is now fully prepared for analysis. After carrying out the
analysis, the structural demand/capacity ratios that develop across the pier components
of interest can be cataloged as with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.
Demonstration of Computational Robustness of the OPTS Modeling Approach

On an ordinary desktop PC*, the computational time required for carrying out CVIA
using the full bridge model is 40 min. In contrast, when using the same ordinary
desktop PC* to analyze the CVIA-OPTS model, only 0.5 min. are required. Figure: 6.15.q
shows the resultant shear force in global X-direction at the base (Node 1 in Figure:
6.15.o) of the impacted column. The vessel collision impact-load history (Figure: 6.15.k)
shows two slightly different stiffnesses during unloading from 1.34 sec. to 1.78 sec.
Similar behavior can be seen for resultant shear force at Node 1 in global X-direction
(6.15 ).
* The analysis was performed using Windows 7© desktop PC with specification of 16
GB of RAM and use of an Intel® Core™ i7 3.4 GHz processor.
Figure: 6.15.q Resultant shear force in global X-direction at the base of the impacted
column (Node 1)
The maximum Demand/Capacity (D/C) ratio occurs at Node 148 (refer to Figure: 6.15.o).
In Figure: 6.15.r to Figure: 6.15.u, displacements and forces at Node 148 are compared
between the full- bridge and OPTS models. While the displacements are generally
conservative among the OPTS model results, computed time-histories of axial force,
shear force, and moment show good agreement between both models. Such agreement
demonstrates the advantages of using the OPTS model over the full bridge model when
the user is interested in checking the response local to a given pier or pile bent, while
still capturing full bridge resistance. After carrying out the analysis, the structural
demand/capacity ratios that develop across the pier components of interest can be
cataloged as with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.
Figure: 6.15.r Global X-Displacement at Node 148

Figure: 6.15.s Resultant axial force at Node 148
Figure: 6.15.t Resultant shear force in global X-direction at Node 148

Figure: 6.15.u Resultant moment about global Y-direction at Node 148
7 Bridge Span Modeling
1. Deck Modeling
2. Bridge Span Overview
3. Bridge Span Node Numbering
4. Span Length Calculation
5. Section Properties and Temperatures
6. Compute Transformed Section Properties
7. Section Properties Dialog
8. Vertical Link Properties
9. Transfer Beam Properties
10. Bearing Properties
11. Pier Cap to Bearing, Rigid Link Properties
12. Bridge Wind Load Generator
13. Temperatures Dialog
7.1 Deck Modeling
There are six basic components employed to model the deck (superstructure) in FB-
MultiPier:
1. The span (deck) element is used to simulate the behavior of the bridge deck. This
is modeled as a series of linear frame elements (default = 10) with properties
specified by the user.
2. The Vertical Link transfers loads from the span (deck) to a transfer beam. The
vertical link is used to account for the eccentricity of the centerline of the bridge
deck relative to the centerline of the pier cap. Also, the vertical link properties
can be user defined, or automatically computed based on the span (deck) end
properties.
3. The transfer Beam transfers load between the bearings and the vertical link. The
transfer Beam properties are either based on custom user input or are
generated by the program based on the span end conditions.
4. The bearings are modeled as six springs to represent the response of the
bearing in all degrees of freedom. The spring properties are either based on
custom user input or are generated by the program based on the span end
conditions.
5. The offset rigid links are used to model the offsets between the bearings to the
pier cap centerline. For piers that are modeled with two rows of bearings, the
offset distance is user defined.
6. The continuity element is a linear frame element employed when the deck is
continuous.
Figure: 7.1.a Deck Modeling Components

Note: The deck is always linear elastic.
7.2 Bridge Span Overview
The deck of the bridge and its connection to the supporting pier is modeled with a
combination of elements shown in the Figure: 7.2.a below. The superstructure (Span)
element is modeled with a series of linear discrete elements. With either constant or
varying (tapered) cross sections. These element properties are input by the user, and are
intended to simulate the behavior of the bridge deck.
Since the span element is located at a distance from the bearings and essentially the pier
cap centerline, FB-MultiPier generates and uses a vertical rigid link element. This
element is required to be rigid and therefore FB-MultiPier internally assigns its
properties. These properties are calculated based on those of the span element to
ensure the rigidity of the vertical rigid link.
Figure: 7.2.a Bridge Span Components
The transfer beam is used to connect the bearings to one another, and therefore, plays a
significant role in loads that travel between the superstructure and substructure
interface. The properties that are assigned to the transfer beam are such that they can
simulate different span end conditions.
The bearing elements are used to simulate the response of the bearings on the pier cap
and possess six degrees of freedom at each end. Each degree of freedom can either be
‘constrained’, ‘released’ or defined using ‘custom’ properties. The ‘constrained’
condition implies that the bearing will behave much like a rigid link for motions in the
associated degree of freedom. The ‘release’ condition simulates no resistance to
motions in the associated degree of freedom. Finally, the response of the bearing in a
particular direction can be determined based on user-defined load displacement and/or
moment-rotation curves.
Span End Conditions

Span end conditions must be assigned at each span end. A variety of span end-
conditions can be simulated by assigning pre-defined or user-defined cross sectional
properties to the Transfer Beam. The ‘Stiff’ condition assigns scaled (amplified)
properties to the Transfer Beam elements, so that the transfer beam behaves in an
effectively rigid manner. The ‘Soft’ condition makes use of unscaled properties to allow
for a relatively more flexible Transfer Beam. Additionally, 'Custom' properties can be
assigned for the Transfer Beam to simulate other conditions of interest.
Note: For any models containing spans, a special pre-analysis feature is available
(and enabled by default) for ensuring that the superstructure self-weight induces
uniform vertical bearing reactions.
7.3 Bridge Span Node Numbering

Figure: 7.3.a Bridge Span Node Numbering
7.4 Span Length Calculation

For Span Length Calculation, refer to: Span Length Calculation.
7.5 Section Properties and Temperatures
The "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog is available for bridge models only.
This dialog is used to access the "Section Properties" dialog and "Temperatures" dialog
for the currently selected span (this span number is displayed in the dialog’s title bar).
This dialog is also used to compute transformed section properties.
Figure: 7.5.a Section Properties and Temperatures dialog
The "Compute Transformed Section Properties" check box must be checked (selected) to
compute transformed section properties. These properties are computed based on the
girder and slab dimensional and material property input on the "Section Properties"
dialog. The computation of the transformed section properties occurs when the ‘OK’
button is clicked on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog. The computed
transformed section properties are displayed on the "Bridge Span Properties" dialog,
and thus using this feature will replace the existing transformed section properties for
the currently selected span.
The "Section Properties" button launches the "Section Properties" dialog. This button is
only enabled when the "Compute Transformed Section Properties" check box is checked
(selected).
The "Analysis for Temperature Effects" check box is used to apply the temperature data
to the analysis. When this check box is checked, the "Temperatures" button becomes
enabled. The "Compute Transformed Section Properties" check box must be selected
(checked) to access the "Analysis for Temperature Effects" check box.
The Temperatures button launches the "Temperatures" dialog. This button is only
enabled when the "Analysis for Temperature Effects" check box is checked (selected).
7.6 Compute Transformed Section Properties
The “Compute Transformed Section Properties” feature automatically calculates span

element transformed section properties based on data input on the “Section Properties”
dialog.
Using the input values of slab and girder elastic moduli, this calculation feature
determines the modular ratio (based on the elastic modulus of the slab), and then
quantifies transformed span element cross section properties. The as-quantified
transformed section properties include area, moments of inertia, and unit weight.
As illustration of the feature, consider Figure: 7.6.a. The span cross section shown
consists of a 656 in. wide by 9 in. thick concrete slab and four steel plate girders (Figure:
7.6.a). The four identical girders are collectively centered beneath the slab, and are
spaced horizontally at 13.5 ft.
Figure: 7.6.a Cross-section Dimensions (for clarity, only a single girder is displayed)
The series of dialogs that are accessed in making use of the transformed section
properties feature are described as follows. For any bridge model, navigate to the
“Bridge” page and click “Edit Span”. On 'Bridge Span Properties' click on “Section
Properties and Temperatures” (Figure: 7.6.d). Next, click the “Compute Transformed
Section Properties” checkbox to enable access to the “Section Properties” dialog (Figure:
7.6.b).
Figure: 7.6.b Section Properties and Temperatures Dialog
Figure: 7.6.c Section Properties Dialog
Please see "Section Properties" dialog for instructions on inputting the cross section
data into FB-MultiPier (FBMP) and Click OK. Subsequent to populating the detailed span
section properties, and clicking “OK” on the “Section Properties and Temperatures”
dialog, a notification will appear to confirm that the transformed section properties for
the span will indeed be overwritten.
Click the 'Table' on the 'Bridge Span Properties' dialog. Shown in Figure: 7.6.c is the
'Span Properties Table' dialog, are the transferred sectional details.
Figure: 7.6.d Span Properties Table Dialog
As demonstration of this feature, assume that the steel girder components (flanges,
webs) from " Cross-section Dimensions (for clarity, only a single girder is displayed)"
are transformed to concrete components based on the modular ratio n, where n =
Egirder / Eslab = 29,000/3,625 = 8. Accordingly, the transformed section (in this
scenario) utilizes an elastic modulus value of 3,625 ksi. For the remainder of this
discussion, automated calculations of transformed section properties are compared to
corresponding manual calculations.
The manually calculated transformed section properties are:
Transformed Cross Section Area:

Area of Single Steel Girder, As = (3.25 in*26 in+0.69 in*108 in + 3.25in *26in) = 243.52
in^2
Area of Concrete Slab, Ac = 9 in *656 in= 5904 in^2
Transformed Area, A = Ac + 4* As*n = 5904 in^2+ 4*243.52 in^2 *8 = 13696.64 in^2
The manual calculation of transformed area “A” matches the corresponding value
generated using FBMP (Figure: 7.6.d).
Transformed Cross Section Moment of Inertia about 2 Axis (I2):

Moment of Inertia of Steel Girder,
Is2 = (3.25 * 26^3 /12) + (0.69 * 108^3 /12) + (3.25 * 26^3 /12) = 9,523.29 in^4
Moment of Inertia of Concrete Slab,
Ic2 = 9 * 656^3 /12 = 211,725.31 in^4
Transformed Moment of Inertia, I2 = (Is2) *n *4 + (Ic2) + 2 *(As)*n * (13.5 * 12/2)^2 + 2
*(As)*n* (13.5*12+13.5*12/2)^2
I2 = 467,667,612.5 in^4
The manual calculation of “I2” matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP
(Figure: 7.6.d).
Transformed Cross Section Moment of Inertia about 3 Axis (I3):

Moment of Inertia of Steel Girder about 3 Axis,
Is3 = (26 * 114.5^3 /12) - ((26-0.69) * 108^3 /12) = 595,491.96 in^4
Moment of Inertia of Concrete Slab about 3 Axis,
Ic3 = 656 * 9^3 /12 = 39,852 in^4
Centroid (from Girder Base): ybot = 83.867 in
Transformed Moment of Inertia, I3 = (Is3) *n *4 + (Ic3) + 4 *(As)*n * (ybot -114.5/2)^2
+ (Ac)*(119-ybot)^2
I3 = 31,903,875.69 in^4
The manual calculation of “I3” matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP
(Figure: 7.6.d).
Transformed Cross Section Torsional Inertia (J):

Note that the calculation of “J” is carried out using equations given in “Roark's Formulas
for Stress & Strain”, 7th Edition, Warren C. Young & Richard G. Budynas.
We know that, J = 1/3*b*t^3
For Transformed Cross-section
J = 1/3 * (656) * 9^3 + 1/3 * (26*n) * (3.25)^3 + 1/3 * (108) * (0.69*n)^3 + 1/3 *
(26*n) * (3.25)^3
J = 202,669 in^4
The manual calculation of “J” matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP
(Figure: 7.6.d).
Transformed Cross Section Unit weight:

Note that the unit weight of the transformed cross section is modified such that the
unit-length weight of the transformed section (i.e., the product of the transformed area
and unit weight) remains equal to the physical unit-length weight of the corresponding
span portion.
ɣTransformed * (Transformed Cross Section Area) = ɣs * (Steel Girder Area) + ɣc *
(Concrete Slab Area)
ɣTransformed = [ɣs * (Steel Girder Area) + ɣc * (Concrete Slab Area)] / (Transformed
Cross Section Area)
= [ɣs * (As*4) + ɣc * (Ac)] / (A)
= [490pcf * (243.52 in^2 *4) + 150pcf * (5904 in^2)] / (13696.64 in^2)
= 99.506 pcf
The manual calculation of “ɣ” matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP
(Figure: 7.6.d).
7.7 Section Properties Dialog
The "Section Properties" button on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog
launches the "Section Properties" dialog (Figure: 7.7.a). This dialog is available for bridge
models only. This dialog is used to input dimensional and material property data for
girders and the slab, for each span in the model.
Figure: 7.7.a Section Properties
The span for which data will be input is set on the "Bridge Span Properties" dialog, and
displays in the title bar of the "Section Properties" dialog.
The "Type" drop-down list is used to specify the type of girder used on the selected
span. There are three girder types available: Steel, Concrete and Box. When changing the
selected girder type, default properties can be automatically assigned to the new girder
type selection.
The "Schematics" image displays the schematics of the dimensional inputs for each
girder type.
The "Uniform Shape" check box dictates whether all girders in the selected span are
uniform. The "Constant" and "Variable" section property radio buttons on the "Bridge
Span Properties" dialog are used to specify whether girder dimensional data varies
along the length of the girder. There are four possible girder configurations: a) Uniform
Shape with Constant Height, b) Non Uniform Shape with Constant Height, c) Uniform
Shape with Variable Height, and d) Non Uniform Shape with Variable Height.
The "Bearings Per Girder" option is available only when the selected girder type is ‘Box’.
Select either "One" or "Two' bearings per box girder. This value will be applied to all box
girders on the selected span. To utilize the ‘Two’ bearings option, the number of bearing
locations in the model must be equal to twice the number of girders.
The "Girder Spacing Typical Section" button launches the dialog shown in Figure: 7.7.b.
The "Girder Spacing Typical Section" dialog displays the spacing between the girders.
Spacings are measured from the center-line of each girder. The girder spacings should
be set via this dialog.
Note: The girder spacing provided in the "Girder spacing Typical Section" is
independent of the bearing spacings, which are set via the "Bearing Locations" dialog
launched from the "Pier" page.
Figure: 7.7.b Girder Spacings
The "Slab" material properties frame is used to input the following slab material
properties: Young’s Modulus, Shear Modulus, and Unit Weight.
The "Girder" material properties frame is used to input the following girder material
properties: Young’s Modulus and Unit Weight.
The "Slab" dimensions frame is used to input the following slab dimensional properties:
Width and Height.
The "Girders" table in the ‘Dimensions’ frame is used to input girder dimensional data.
Which girder type is selected (see section on "Type" above) dictates how much girder
data will need to be input in the "Girders" table. The dimensional input is also dictated
by the girder type.
The "Girder Dimensions (Expanded View)" is launched via the “Expand Table” button.
This dialog is used to expand the viewable size of the "Girders" table, making viewing
large sets of data with many table rows easy. This expanded table also helps illustrate
the input data required for each girder configuration, as follows:
When girders have uniform shape and constant height, one set of girder dimensional
data is input, and this set of data is applied to all elements in all girders. Note there is
one (1) row of input data (Figure: 7.7.c).
Figure: 7.7.c Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Uniform Girder Configuration
When girders have non-uniform shape and constant height, one set of girder
dimensional data is input per girder. Note there are two (2) rows of input data, as this
model contains 2 girders on the span (Figure: 7.7.d).
Figure: 7.7.d Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Non Uniform Girder Configuration
When girders have uniform shape and variable height, one set of girder dimensional
data is input per element. Note there are ten (10) rows of input data, as this model
contains 10 span elements (Figure: 7.7.e).
Figure: 7.7.e Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Uniform Variable Height
When girders have non-uniform shape and have variable height, one set of girder
dimensional data is input per girder per element. Note there are twenty (20) rows of
input data, as this model contains 10 span elements and 2 girders on the span (Figure:
7.7.f).
Figure: 7.7.f Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Non Uniform Variable Height
The "Table PDF" button creates a .PDF file of the data displayed in the "Girders" table.
The "Plot" button draws the 2-dimensional image of the slab and girders in the "Plot"
window (Figure: 7.7.g). It is recommended to click the "Plot" button after making
changes to the dimensional input, to ensure the image is based on the most current
input.
Figure: 7.7.g Plot Window
On the "Plot" dialog, the "Print" button prints the 2-dimensional image of the slab and
girders.
On the "Plot" dialog, the "Element" drop-down list is used with variable height girders to
specify for which element the girders be drawn.
7.8 Vertical Link Properties
Properties of the Vertical Link match the axes between the Span (S) and the Vertical Link
(VL). The VL properties can be user defined. Alternatively, if the VL properties are to be
automatically calculated by the program, then the goal is to select properties that are
proportional to the ends of the span. The default program models make use of a special
pre-analysis feature that ensure uniform vertical bearing reactions due to span self-
weight.
Figure: 7.8.a Axis for Vertical Link and Span
Eqn: 7.8.A
Eqn: 7.8.B
Eqn: 7.8.C
Eqn: 7.8.D
Eqn: 7.8.E
Eqn: 7.8.F
Where,
L – Length of the vertical link element.
VL
A – Cross sectional area of the vertical link element.
VL
J – Torsional constant of the vertical link element.
VL
I – Moment of inertia (I3) of the vertical link element.
3VL
I – Moment of inertia (I2) of the vertical link element.
2VL
E – Young’s modulus of the vertical link element.
VL
G – Shear modulus of the vertical link element.
VL
L – Length of the attached total bridge span.
S
A – Cross sectional area of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
S
J – Torsional constant of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
S
I – Moment of inertia (I3) of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
3S
I – Moment of inertia (I2) of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
2S
E – Young’s modulus of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
S
G – Shear modulus of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
S
7.9 Transfer Beam
The "Transfer Beam" is used to connect the bridge superstructure (which is modeled
using linear elastic frame elements) to the substructure bearings.
The "Transfer Beam" is made up of elastic frame elements, and continuity effects due to
a continuous superstructure are calculated as the analysis is conducted.
It is imperative that neoprene bearings are modeled because their stiffness provides for
the best and most realistic, distribution of forces between superstructure and
substructure. This is important for loads applied in both horizontal and vertical
directions to the transfer beam. For example: in order to obtain an even distribution of
Dead Load forces the vertical long term neoprene bearing stiffness should be included
(use the custom bearing feature). Otherwise span Dead Loads may "migrate" to the
bearings that are closest to the stiffest parts of the pier cap (such as a bearing located
directly above a pier column). The custom bearing stiffnesses are very easy to input and
typically require just 3 lines of data to describe the linear stiffness of these bearings.
A paper in the August 2000 Journal of Bridge Engineering, "Effect of Bearing Pads on
Precast Prestressed Concrete Bridges" provides stiffness values for typical bridge
neoprene pads. The publication "Construction and Design of Prestressed Concrete
Segmental Bridges", by Jean Muller and Walter Podolny , page 245, provides an
excellent reference for calculating neoprene bearing stiffness and also discusses the
need to use the long term shear modulus for sustained loads.
Note in Figure: 7.9.a that the node on the Transfer Beam and the corresponding node on
the pier cap are "master and slave nodes" that share the same coordinates in space, but
are linked by 6 springs that control relative motions between the superstructure and
substructure.
The stiffness of the Transfer Beam can be input by the Engineer or for preliminary
design the Engineer may elect to use the stiff or soft Transfer Beam option provided by
the program. Additionally, the transfer beam properties can be automatically computed
so that the bearing reactions due to span self-weight are uniform.
If the preload option is selected (which would allow one to apply "built in" loads to the
pier structure) such loading is applied by the software before the transfer beam is
engaged. These built in loads, as is often the case with Segmental Bridges, would thus
exist in addition to any other loads being applied.
Figure: 7.9.a Transfer Beam
The node numbering system for superstructure nodes, including Transfer Beam nodes,
is depicted above. The sequence is as follows per bridge span: node 1 is located at the
base of the left elevation beam; node 2 is located at the top of the left elevation beam;
the bridge deck is divided into 10 elements of equal length, with a node separating each
element (nodes 3 through 11); node 12 is located at the top of the right elevation beam;
node 13 is located at the base of the right elevation beam. The number and location of
the remaining superstructure nodes depend on the number of bearing locations. Node
14 is the first bearing location on the left rigid transfer beam. There is one transfer beam
node per bearing location (nodes 14 through 19 as depicted in Figure: 7.9.a). The right
transfer beam nodes then follow (nodes 20 through 25 as depicted in Figure: 7.9.a).
The transfer beam is used to model the end conditions of the span and to transfer the
load to the bearings. The transfer beam’s properties are dependent on the properties of
the vertical link.
The user can select from one of the three descriptions for the transfer beam:
1. Stiff (default)
2. Soft
3. Custom
Figure: 7.9.b Axis for Transfer Beam and Vertical Rigid Beam
Equation used to generate the transfer beam properties for the stiff (default) and soft
options are described below.
Stiff (default) properties:
Eqn: 7.9.A
Eqn: 7.9.B
Eqn: 7.9.C
Eqn: 7.9.D
Eqn: 7.9.E
Eqn: 7.9.F
Soft properties:
Eqn: 7.9.G
Eqn: 7.9.H
Eqn: 7.9.I
Eqn: 7.9.J
Eqn: 7.9.K
Eqn: 7.9.L
Where,
L – Length of the transfer beam element.
TB
A – Cross sectional area of the transfer beam element.
TB
J – Torsional constant of the transfer beam element.
TB
I – Moment of inertia (I3) of the transfer beam element.
3TB
I – Moment of inertia (I2) of the transfer beam element.
2TB
E – Young’s modulus of the transfer beam element.
TB
G – Shear modulus of the transfer beam element.
TB
L – Length of the nearest vertical link element.
VL
A – Cross sectional area of the nearest vertical link element.
VL
J – Torsional constant of the nearest vertical link element.
VL
I – Moment of inertia (I3) of the nearest vertical link element.
3VL
I – Moment of inertia (I2) of the nearest vertical link element.
2VL
E – Young’s modulus of the nearest vertical link element.
VL
G – Shear modulus of the nearest vertical link element.
VL
7.10 Bearing Properties
The properties of the bearings are calculated by the software (1,2) or manually input (3).
1) Based on properties of the Transfer Beam (TB)
2) Based on properties of the Rigid Links (RL)
3) Based on user defined force-deformation and/or moment-rotation curves
For any bearing degrees of freedom that are input as "Constrained", the program will
use properties that are effectively rigid (based on the transfer beam and rigid link
properties noted above). For any bearing degrees of freedom that are input as
"Release", the program makes use of nominal stiffness terms, based on
"EWEAKSPRING", which is defaulted to a value of 1E-05.
Each bearing pad element is defined with a 12x12 stiffness matrix.
Method 1 - Bearings based on transfer beam properties

Figure: 7.10.a Axis for Bearing and Transfer Beam
Eqn: 7.10.A
Eqn: 7.10.B
Eqn: 7.10.C
Eqn: 7.10.D
Eqn: 7.10.E
Eqn: 7.10.F
Method 2 - Bearings based on rigid link properties
Figure: 7.10.b Axis for Bearing and Offset Rigid Link
Eqn: 7.10.G
Eqn: 7.10.H
Eqn: 7.10.I
Eqn: 7.10.J
Eqn: 7.10.K
Eqn: 7.10.L
7.11 Pier Cap to Bearing, Rigid Link Properties
The properties of the Rigid Link (RL) are based on those of the Pier Cap (PC), where the
rigid link is effectively defined as rigid relative to the pier cap.
Figure: 7.11.a Axis for Offset Rigid Link and Transfer Beam
Eqn: 7.11.A
Eqn: 7.11.B
Eqn: 7.11.C
Eqn: 7.11.D
Where,
L –User input pad offset from pier cap centerline; 1 inch for single row; 1 inch if no
RL
offset is specified.
A – Cross sectional area of the rigid link element.
RL
J – Torsional constant of the rigid link element.
RL
I – Moment of inertia (I3) of the rigid link element.
3RL
I – Moment of inertia (I2) of the rigid link element.
2RL
E – Maximum Young’s modulus among all the pier cap elements (excluding cantilever).
G – Maximum Shear modulus among all the pier cap elements (excluding cantilever).
L – Distance from the first column centerline to last column centerline.
PC
A – Maximum cross sectional area among all the pier cap elements (excluding
PC
cantilever).
J – Maximum Torsional constant among all the pier cap elements (excluding
PC
cantilever).
I – Maximum Moment of inertia (I3) among all the pier cap elements (excluding
3PC
cantilever).
I – Maximum Moment of inertia (I2) among all the pier cap elements (excluding
2PC
cantilever).
7.12 Bridge Wind Load Generator

This dialog appears for the Bridge problem type.
Figure: 7.12.a Bridge Wind Load Generation Dialog.
A wind angle of zero degrees applies all of the wind in the transverse direction. The
equations used in the wind load generation are found here.
Note: For the bridge model type the engineer must input the wind loads on
substructure manually.
7.13 Temperatures Dialog
The "Temperatures" button on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog

launches the "Temperatures" dialog (Figure: 7.13.a). This dialog is available for bridge
models only, for both AASHTO and non-AASHTO mode. In non-AASHTO mode, the
temperature data input on this dialog is applied to every load case, though load cases
can be excluded from the application of thermal loading via the "Thermal Load’ button
on the ‘Load Page’.
The "Temperatures" dialog is only available when the "Span Temperature Loading"
check box is checked on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog. In AASHTO
mode, this check box is labeled the "Force Effects Due to Superimposed Deformations
(TU, TG)" check box.
Figure: 7.13.a Temperatures Dialog

The "Temperatures" dialog is used to input temperature data for the slab and girders,
for each span in the model. In non-AASHTO mode, this temperature data is applied to
the model as thermal loading on a per-load-case basis. To assign the thermal loading to
specific load cases, use the "Thermal Loading" dialog, launched from the ‘Load Page".
The span for which data will be input on the "Temperatures" dialog is set on the "Bridge
Span Properties" dialog. This span number is displayed in the title bar of the
"Temperatures" dialog.
The "Reference Temperature" input is used to input a baseline temperature to which all
other temperature data is referenced. For example, if the inputted reference temperature
is -100 degrees F, and the inputted slab "Top Temperature" is 225 degrees F, the
analysis will treat the slab top temperature as 325 degrees F (225 - (-100) = 325).
The "TU" and "TG" radio buttons are used to specify the type of AASHTO loading used.
These two buttons "TU" (Uniform Temperature) and "TG" (Thermal Gradient) are only
enabled in AASHTO mode.
The "Schematics" section displays a schematic of the temperature inputs and the
location within the girder for each input. There are three different schematics, one for
each girder type (steel, concrete, and box). The girder type is set on the "Section
Properties" dialog (see the "Type" section in the "Section Properties" dialog topic).
Figure: 7.13.b, Figure: 7.13.c, and Figure: 7.13.d show the schematics for each girder
type.
Figure: 7.13.b Girder Concrete Temperatures

Figure: 7.13.c Girder Steel Temperatures
Figure: 7.13.d Girder Box Temperatures
The "Thermal Elastic Properties" section is used to input the following values for the
girders: Girder Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, and Slab Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion.
The "Slab Temperatures" section is used to input the following values for the slab: Top
Temperature (temperature at the top of the slab), Temperature 4 inches from the Top (of
the slab), and Bottom Temperature (temperature at the bottom of the slab).
The "Girder Temperatures and Heights" table is used to input girder temperature data.
The schematic in the "Schematics" section (described above) is useful in understanding
the locations on the girder at which the temperature inputs are applied.
The "Temperatures (Expanded View)" is launched via the "Expand Table" button. This
dialog is used to expand the viewable size of the temperature and heights table, making
viewing large sets of data with many table rows easy. This expanded table also helps
illustrate the input data required for each girder configuration, as follows:
When girders are uniform with constant height, one set of girder temperature data is
input, and this set of data is applied to all elements in all girders. Note there is one (1)
row of input data (Figure: 7.13.e).
Figure: 7.13.e Temperatures (Expanded View) Uniform Girder Configuration
When girders are not uniform with constant height, one set of temperature data is input
for each girder. Note there are two (2) rows of input data, as this model contains 2
girders on the span (Figure: 7.13.f).
Figure: 7.13.f Temperatures (Expanded View) Non Uniform Girder Configuration
When girders are uniform with variable height, one set of temperature data is input per
element. Note there are ten (10) rows of input data, as this model contains 10 span
elements (Figure: 7.13.g).
Figure: 7.13.g Temperatures (Expanded View) Uniform Variable Height
When girders are not uniform and have variable height, one set of temperature data is
input per girder per element. Note there are twenty (20) rows of input data, as this
model contains 10 span elements and 2 girders on the span (Figure: 7.13.h).
Figure: 7.13.h Temperatures (Expanded View) Non Uniform Variable Height
The "Table PDF" button creates a .PDF file of the data displayed in the "Girder
Temperatures and Heights" table.
The "Plot" button launches the "Plot" dialog.
The "Plot" dialog displays the plot of the temperature data for the selected girder on the
selected span (Figure: 7.13.i).
Figure: 7.13.i Thermal Gradient Plot
The "Element" combo box specifies the element for which the thermal gradient plot is
displayed. This combo box is not active when the "Constant" radio button is selected on
the "Bridge Span Properties" dialog, because with "Constant" properties, all elements
within a girder share the same set of temperature data.
The "Girder" combo box specifies the girder for which the thermal gradient plot is
displayed. This combo box is not active when the "Uniform (across all girders)" property
is selected on the "Section Properties" dialog is selected (checked), because with this
property selected, there is only one (1) set of temperature data per span.
The "Show Slab Temperatures" check box specifies whether to display the slab
temperatures on the plot. This check box does not change the curve line; it merely
controls whether the slab temperatures are visible or hidden. It is useful when slab
temperatures and the uppermost girder temperatures are very close together such that
they overlap. Hiding the slab temperatures in this instance makes viewing the girder
temperature data easier to see.
The "Show Girder Temperatures" check box specifies whether to display the girder
temperatures on the plot. This check box does not change the curve line; it merely
controls whether the girder temperatures are visible or hidden. It is useful when slab
temperatures and the uppermost girder temperatures are very close together such that
they overlap. Hiding the girder temperatures in this instance makes viewing the slab
temperature data easier to see.
The "Print" button creates a printout of the thermal gradient plot.

8 Program Settings
1. Expanding Memory
2. Program Settings Dialog
8.1 Memory Allocation
The amount of memory allocated for running analyses using FB-MultiPier can be
increased as needed. If an analysis requires more memory than is currently allocated,
then the analytical engine will generate an error message:
STORAGE EXCEEDED BY ******** UNITS

Not enough memory is available for the analysis
To change the available memory settings goto
Control -> Program Settings -> Analysis Settings
The memory allocated for an analysis can be increased using the Program Settings
Dialog, within in the Control menu, in the interface. Specifically, supply a larger value for
the ‘Memory for Current Analysis’, and repeat the incremental increases until the
analysis is able to complete. Note that older computers may not possess sufficient
memory for analyzing relatively large models.
8.2 Program Settings Dialog

Figure: 8.2.a Program Settings Dialog
Memory Settings
‘Memory for Current Analysis’ is the amount of memory used when the current input
file is analyzed and this value will be saved with input data.
‘Memory for Subsequent Analysis’ is the amount of memory used with each new model
created.
Export Format
'Export Format' can be used to setup the format which will be used to export data out of
FB-MultiPier windows. The exported data format can be Excel or PDF.
Message Options
Generation of message boxes for various conditions can be enabled/disabled here: 1)
When 'Auto-compare soil sets vs. pile batter / type configuration' is enabled (checked),
then a message box will be issued in the event that there are fewer soil sets assigned
than there are pile batter / type conditions; 2) When 'Show Server Hosted Input File
Message' is enabled (checked), then a warning message will be issued anytime a model
is attempted to be analyzed when said model is located on a server.
Span Dead Load Staging

Checking the "Uniform Bearing Forces due to Span Dead Load" checkbox is applicable
for any models containing spans, and will result in the program carrying out a special
pre-analysis to facilitate uniform bearing reactions due to the weight of the
superstructure. This process involves conducting a static pre-analysis, where the only
loading is due to span self-weight. The intermediate superstructure element properties
are then adjusted to ensure that the span self-weight induces uniform bearing reactions.
This process involves updating the vertical link cross sectional area scale factor to "96"
(from "9600"), and updating the scale factors of "800" (I3) and "68" (I2) to unity for the
transfer beam elements.
Dynamics Print Options

"Node List" feature is available for single substructure models that use dynamic time
history analysis. The nodes supplied to this table will correspond to the generation of
three separate text output files for each node, as follows: displacement time history,
velocity time history, and acceleration time history.
Figure: 8.2.b Dynamics Print Node List Dialog
9 License Installation
1. License File
2. License Installation Help
3. Update a License on a Stand Alone Workstation
4. Update/Install a License on a Network Server
5. Set Path for a License File on a Stand Alone Workstation
6. Set Client Path for a License File on a Network Server
7. Transfer License to a Different Computer
9.1 License File
FB-MultiPier operates using a license file to determine its status. All shipped versions
run in Demo mode as the default. The program can be "unlocked" into various modes
including full version and student version, networked or stand-alone. This unlocking can
be done by hand, through phone contact with the Bridge Software Institute ( http://bsi-
web.ce.ufl.edu ) or automatically through an internet connection to the BSI web server.
The program requires a license file to be installed. This license file is linked to the
computer on which it is installed.
NOTE: You must have administrator rights to install FB-MultiPier or the license
file on a server.
The following describes the modes and processes required:
Stand-Alone
A stand-alone or fixed license version is locked to run on a single machine and only that
machine. The license file is installed on the individual machine.
Network Version
A network version is a floating license version that allows a fixed number of machines to
run the program at any one time. For example, a three-seat installation allows three
computers to run the program at the same time. The program is actually installed on
any number of machines. For example, you can install the program on 20 computers in
your network. However, only three of the 20 can use the program at the same time.
This installation requires a network server that shares a directory with all the computers
wishing to run FB-MultiPier. The shared directory is where the license file is installed. All
client machines must have read and write permissions for the shared directory in order
for the program to run.
There is a separate install program for installing the license file on the server. If your
network installation has multiple servers, you will need to purchase multiple server
versions.
Updating the license

Any installed version can have its permissions changed by entering encrypted numbers
into the license file. This is done by choosing the Control->Update license option from
the main menu. The update can be done by hand or automatically through the Internet.
E-mail/Fax/Phone License Update

This option is for installations that do not have an Internet connection. To do this
installation, call the BSI support number (check the web for the phone number) and you
will be stepped through the process. Numbers from your computer need to be given to
the BSI representative and we can Fax or E-mail the encoded numbers you will need to
type into the program.
Internet License Update

This option requires the computer on which you are installing the license file be
connected to the Internet. Then, all numbers are communicated through the Internet
and the license updated automatically. The computer can either be a stand-alone system
or the network server for a multiple seat license.
Transfer License
There is a built in function that allows you to transfer you license to another machine.
This allows you to move the license file from your current server or workstation to a
new machine.
Troubleshooting
The license file (both for servers and individual workstations) is locked to a machine
based on hardware components contained in the machine. If you change or modify your
hardware (drives, motherboards etc) your installation may not function. To do this, you
should first transfer the license, then modify your hardware, and then re-install the
license on the machine.
Novell systems: Be sure that the directory where the license file is saved is accessible to
any user. The user must have read, write, modify, erase and create rights for that
directory.
License Update Tutorial
9.2 License Installation Help
Before updating the program license for the first time, the program will run in demo
mode. While running in demo mode, the model size is limited to a 5x5 pile group and
the program execution is limited to 30 days. After purchasing the program, these
limitations can be removed by using the License Configuration Wizard.
To update the software license at any time, select Update Software License from the
Control menu while viewing the intro Logo window. Doing so brings up the License
Configuration Wizard.
The initial License Configuration Wizard screen shows four options for updating the
software license. The options are shown below:
Figure: 9.2.a License Configuration Wizard
9.3 Update a License on a Stand Alone Workstation
This option is used for a single installation of the software that does not rely on network
to run the program. A license of this type is individually purchased per machine.
Figure: 9.3.a Stand Alone icense Configuration Wizard
Click the Next button to continue. The next screen allows the user to update the license
by Email (bsi@ce.ufl.edu).Click Next. Please contact the BSI for assistance if needed.
Figure: 9.3.b Update Methods

License File Update by Email
This option requires to send an email to the BSI. To update a license by Email, select
Update by Email and click the next button to continue. The next screen shows a series of
edit boxes for entering license data. The Session Code and Machine ID need to be given
to the BSI representative. EMAIL this Session Code and Machine ID to bsi@ce.ufl.edu.
After validating the user’s account information and status, the BSI representative will
then Email the user with a series of numerical codes that will modify the configuration
of the license file. If the numerical codes are entered correctly, the program will be
unlocked and will run without any limitations. If any of the numerical codes are entered
incorrectly, the wizard will prevent the user from advancing to the next screen.
Click Next after entering the numerical codes.
Figure: 9.3.c License Codes
The Update Complete screen will then be shown after successfully entering the
numerical codes. In order to apply the changes to the program configuration, the FB-
MultiPier program needs to be restarted. Clicking the Finish button will update and
automatically close the program. The program will now run in an unlocked state.
9.4 Update/Install a License on a Network Server
This option is used for a single installation of the software on a network server. This
license update is identical to stand alone workstation update, except that the license is
configured on the network server. This option would be used to run the program
directly on the server to take advantage of the server hardware configuration (i.e. more
memory, hard disk space, etc.). A license of this type is individually purchases per
machine.
Select Update a License on a Network Server from the initial screen and follow the steps
outline for Updating a License on a Stand Alone Workstation.
Figure: 9.4.a Network License Configuration Wizard

9.5 Set Path for a License File on a Stand Alone Workstation
This option is used to set the license file path to the license on a Stand Alone
Workstation. Once this path has been established it will be saved so that the client
machine will automatically find the license file each time the program is run.
Figure: 9.5.a Set License Path (Stand Alone)
Click the Next button to continue. The next screen asks the user to browse to the license
file path on the Stand Alone Machine. The user can either type the path or preferably
click the Browse button to locate the file. The license file is named "FB-MultiPier.lf". Click
the Browse button, locate the license file on the client machine.
Figure: 9.5.b Browse to License File
Click the Next button after locating the license file. The Update Complete page is now
shown. In order to apply the changes to the program configuration, the FB-MultiPier
program needs to be restarted. Clicking the Finish button will update and automatically
close the program. The program will now run in an unlocked state.
9.6 Set Client Path for a License File on a Network Server
This option is used by the network client computer after a server license file has been
configured and successfully installed on the network server (see LicServe Wizard). When
a floating network license is purchased, the limiting factor is the number of network
seats. The FB-MultiPier program can be installed on any number of client machines,
however, the number of clients that can run the program at one time is limited by the
number of network seats purchased. In order for the client machine to run the program
using this scenario the client must locate the license file that has already been installed
on the network server. Once this path has been established it will be saved so that the
client machine will automatically find the license file each time the program is run.
Figure: 9.6.a Set License Path (Network)
Click the Next button to continue. The next screen asks the user to browse to the license
file path on the network server. The user can either type the path or preferably click the
Browse button to locate the file. The license file is named "FB-MultiPier.lf". Click the
Browse button, locate the license file on the network server, and click Open to continue.
You must browse through the network to locate the license file. You can not use a
mapped drive letter.
Figure: 9.6.b Browse to the License File
Click Next after locating the license file on the network server. The Update Complete
page is now shown. In order to apply the changes to the program configuration, the FB-
MultiPier program needs to be restarted. Clicking the Finish button will update and
automatically close the program. The program will now run in an unlocked state.
Figure: 9.6.c Press Finish (Update Complete)
9.7 Transfer License to a Different Computer
This option is used to transfer a valid software license to another computer if the user
no longer wishes to have the license on the current computer. Please note that selecting
this option will invalidate the license file on the current machine. Also, this option is only
valid for a stand along workstation installation of FB-MultiPier. Floating network
installations are not applicable since the license is stored on the network server.
To proceed, select Transfer License to a Different Computer and click the Next button.
Figure: 9.7.a Transfer Existing License
Because this process can not be reversed, the user must check the box to confirm the
remove the license from the current computer before proceeding. Doing so will enable
the Next button. Click the Next button to remove the license.
Figure: 9.7.b Check to Transfer
The next screen informs the user that the license has been successfully removed. A
verification code is displayed on the screen (and written to the file "LicRemoval.txt" in
the application directory). This code must be given to a BSI representative in order to
complete the license transfer process and activate the license on another computer.
Figure: 9.7.c License Transfer Code
Click the Next button to continue. The Update Complete page is now shown. In order to
apply the changes to the program configuration, the FB-MultiPier program needs to be
restarted. Clicking the Finish button will update and automatically close the program.
The program will now run in an unlocked state.

10 Toolbar Icons
1. Description of Toolbar Icons
10.1 Description of Toolbar Icons
The buttons in the toolbar at the top of the screen control the accessed to different
modules within the program. Some of the menu items can also be accessed using the
buttons instead for convenience. The purpose of each button in the toolbar is described
below.
Figure: 10.1.a Toolbar Icons
Figure: 10.1.b File Option Icons
Figure: 10.1.c Model Data and Analysis Icons

Figure: 10.1.d Analysis Results Control Icons
Figure: 10.1.e Pier and Load Case Menus
Figure: 10.1.f Pier and Time Step Menus (Dynamic Analysis)

Figure: 10.1.g 3D Control Bar Icons (if activated)
11 Batch Analysis
1. Batch Mode
2. Running FB-MultiPier in Batch Mode
11.1 Batch Mode
A batch of input files can be analyzed interactively in Batch Mode.
Figure: 11.1.a Batch Mode Dialog
Get Input Files:

Click "Add Input File(s)" to add input files by using a windows browser. One or more
files can be added at a time by using the Ctrl key while selecting files in the Open file
dialog.
Click "Import Batch File" to retrieve an existing set of input file from a batch (".bat") files.
Click "Export Batch File" to save the set of input files in the table to a new or existing
batch files.
Select Run Mode:

Select "Run Without Interruption" to analyze all input files without pausing for
modeling errors or convergence failures.
Select "Pause on Analysis Failure" to have the program pause to display modeling
errors or convergence failures for a particular model.
Analysis Options:
Click "Run" to analyze all input files from the table.
Click "Show Analysis Window" to see the analysis window while the input files are
running or paused.
Click "Resume Analyses" to start the analysis process again after the pause caused due
to analysis failure for an input file.
Click "Stop Analyses" to halt all analyses.
Check the "Include" box to include the input file in the analysis.
Select the memory size for each input file. Most normal size models only require 8MB of
memory. Larger models may require more memory. The program will provide a
notification if the memory size is exceeded. At this time, FB-MultiPier does not
automatically determine the memory requirements in advance of the analysis.
The Completion Status indicates a successful or unsuccessful analysis for each model.
11.2 Running FB-MultiPier in Batch Mode
The FB-MultiPier engine can be run in batch mode. This allows a number of input files to
be run sequentially. Any collection of input files can be analyzed in this manner by
taking the following steps:
1. Create a file with extension ".bat";
2. Populate the lines of the batch file, adhering to the format listed below:
""[path to engine]"" I:""[path to input file]"" O:""[path to output file]"" m:[memory]
There can be as many lines as required for the number of input files.
The format of each line is as follows:
[path to engine] This is the full (or relative) path to the .exe file. In addition, if there are
spaces in the path name, the entire executable must be enclosed in two pairs of quotes.
[path to input file] This the full (or relative) path to the input (.in) file. Note that the file
extension must be included. Also, the path should be enclosed in two pairs of quotes.
[path to output file] This the full (or relative) path to the output (.out) file. Note that the
file extension must be included. Also, the path should be enclosed in two pairs of quotes.
[memory] This is the amount of memory (in MB) to allocate for the analysis
3. Save the file as run.bat (run is an arbitrary name, the extension must be .BAT).
4. Double-click on the run.bat file to start execution.
12 Soil-Structure Interaction
This section defines input parameters and soil models available for lateral, axial,
torsional, rotational, and tip resistance. Lateral soil-structure interaction is modeled with
nonlinear p-y curves. Axial interactions are modeled with hyperbolic t-z curves.
Coupling can be included between axial and lateral resistance. Tip resistance is modeled
with compression-only non-linear q-z curves as presented in the Axial Soil Resistance
section. Four of the p-y models are the same as those presented in FHWA's COM624P
manual (Wang and Reese 1993). All soil resistance curves can also be input as custom
curves by the engineer. All soil-structure interaction calculations pertain to immediate
settlement.
1. Group Interaction
2. Considerations for Battered Piles
3. Soil Properties
4. Lateral Soil Resistance
5. Axial Soil Resistance
6. Torsional Soil Resistance
7. Soil Resistance Due to Shaft Rotation
12.1 Group Interaction
When a group of piles are subject to a vertical or lateral load (i.e. wind, earthquake, etc.)
their vertical or lateral resistance is generally not equal to the sum of the individual pile
resistance. Generally the group resistance is less than the individual pile resistance and
is a function of pile location within the group, and pile spacing.
Consider lateral loading of the variable groups (3x3, 4x3, to 7x3) in dense sand shown
below:
Experimental testing (centrifuge) on pile groups has resulted in the following shear
distribution in each of the individual rows:
Table: 12.1.A Average Pile Shear (kN) - Medium dense Sand (Dr = 55%)
Layout 3x3 4x3 5x3 6x3 7x3 Average
Lead Row 245 294 294 302 285 284

2nd Row 178 205 222 205 222 206
3rd Row 142 151 160 178 178 167
4th Row 142 151 142 151 148
5th Row 142 142 142 142
6th Row 142 142 142
7th Row 142 142
Group 1664 2375 2909 3336 3790

(Measured)
Group 1898 2398 2843 3270 3697

(Predicted)
Error (%) 14 1 2.3 2 2.5
Note that the individual row contributions, with the exception of the trail row, appear to
be only a function of row position. Also, using the average for the row (with exception of
trail row) does a good job of predicting the measured group response. Consequently,
the approach recommended by Hannigan et. al. (2006) with P-Multipliers listed in
AASHTO 2012 has been implemented in the program. The program defines unique
springs in the Xp and Yp directions. Separate listings of p-multipliers can then be
specified for lead/trail rows in the Xp direction and lead/trail rows in the Yp direction.
The program identifies the lead/trail rows in each direction (with unique collections of
p-multipliers assigned to Xp springs and Yp springs), as part of the equilibrium
iterations, based on the computed motions of the pile head nodes under the applied
loading.
The following P-Multipliers are recommended for lateral loading at 3D pile spacing:
0.8, 0.4, 0.3, 0.3, …..0.3 where 0.8 is the lead row and 0.3 is the trail row value
For 5D pile spacing the following P-Multipliers are recommended:

1.0, 0.85, 0.7, 0.7, …, 0.7 where 1.0 is the lead row and 0.7 is the trail row value.
These P-Multipliers generally represent group efficiencies of 70-75% for 3D spacings

and 95% for 5D pile spaced groups. Also, the P-Multipliers were found to be
independent of soil density (sands).
Note: The program will apply the P-Multipliers to the correct pile rows (lead to trail)
based on the direction the piles move. The P-Multipliers are always given in trail to lead
order. This does NOT depend on the direction of the applied load.
In the case of battered piles (A frame) as shown below:
Figure: 12.1.a Pile Group Plan and Layout

Centrifuge Tests were conducted on both 3D and 5D groups shown in loose and dense
sands. Presented is one of the comparisons of plumb vs. battered response:
Figure: 12.1.b Lateral Load Vs Displacement Curves
Based on the centrifuge results the same P-Multipliers are recommended for battered (A
frame) as plumb pile groups. Presently there is little, if any data on other batter layouts.
Pile Bents
For pile bent models, P-Multipliers can be specified for each pile in both the local Xp and
Yp directions. Note that for pile bent models with P-Multipliers specified in the Xp
direction, the P-Multipliers are applied, by the software, in the same manner as that
used for pier models.
Axial Efficiency
The program also provides for an axial group efficiency factor. This is a factor that
affects the force displacement in the axial direction. Provisions for the axial efficiency
factor are found on the "Soil Page", under the group button. For more information, see
Sayed (1992).
12.2 Considerations for Battered Piles
Modeling of pile inclination (batter) is available in FB-MultiPier, as indicated in Figure:

12.2.a for a pile with horizontal (H) versus vertical (L) slope. Instructions for making use
of the FB-MultiPier UI to incorporate pile batter into piles are listed here.
Figure: 12.2.a Schematic of battered pile
Lateral
Lateral soil-structure interaction in FB-MultiPier is such that lateral (horizontal) soil
resistance (i.e., P-Y springs) is NOT rotated for battered piles. Stated alternatively, the P-
Y soil springs always remain parallel to the Xp axis (or Yp axis, as applicable), regardless
of the batter of the attaching pile node. However, the tributary length supplied in
integrating the lateral soil resistance force does reflect P-Y spring force along the pile
length. Consequently, the tributary length used for integrating the soil P-Y springs along
battered piles reflects the total horizontal soil resistance available to battered piles.
Vertical
Vertical soil-structure interaction in FB-MultiPier is such that vertical soil resistance (i.e.,
T-Z springs for skin friction; Q-Z springs for end bearing resistance) is NOT rotated for
battered piles. Stated alternatively, the T-Z and Q-Z soil springs always remain parallel
to the Zp axis, regardless of the batter of the attaching pile node. However, the tributary
length supplied in integrating the vertical soil resistance force does take into account the
vertical spring (T-Z, Q-Z) force along the pile length. Consequently, the tributary length
used for integrating the soil vertical soil resistance springs along battered piles partially
captures the total vertical soil resistance available to battered piles. Likewise, the nodal
displacement component (resolved) along the axial battered direction is supplied when
integrating to calculate the vertical soil resistance spring forces.
Critically, subsequent to calculating the soil resistance forces (using batter-oriented
tributary lengths and batter-oriented, axial nodal displacements), ONLY the vertical
component of the forces is retained for use in forming the vertical soil resistance
stiffness.
Torsional
Torsional (rotation about the pile axial direction) soil-structure interaction in FB-
MultiPier is such that torsional soil resistance (i.e., T-θ springs) is NOT rotated for
battered piles. Stated alternatively, the T- θ soil springs are always oriented such that
torsion aligns with rotation about the Zp axis, regardless of the batter of the attaching
pile node. However, the tributary length supplied in integrating the torsional soil
resistance does take into account the length along the battered pile. Consequently, the
tributary length used for integrating the soil torsional soil resistance springs along
battered piles partially captures the total torsional soil resistance available to battered
piles. Likewise, the nodal rotation component (resolved) along the axial battered
direction is supplied when integrating to calculate the torsional soil resistance spring
forces
Critically, note that ONLY the rotation and corresponding component of torsional
resistance for rotation about Zp is used in forming the torsional soil resistance stiffness.
Orientation of Pile-Local Axes

The FAX axis aligns with the longitudinal axis of the pile, the F22 axis will deviate
primarily from the Xp axis as Xp batter increases, and the F33 axis will deviate primarily
from the Yp axis as Yp batter increases.
12.3 Soil Properties
Following are the important soil properties required as input parameters.
1. Preliminary Soil Parameters

2. Buoyancy
3. Young's Modulus
4. Poisson's Ratio
5. Shear Modulus
6. Angle of Internal Friction
7. Undrained Strength
8. Subgrade Modulus
12.3.1 Preliminary Soil Parameters
Tables of soil parameters that may facilitate preliminary design can be found online at
Soil Parameters Table
If no internet connection is available, the soil parameters tables can be downloaded
directly by right clicking here and selecting "Save Target As..."
12.3.2 Buoyancy
The buoyant force on the submerged bridge substructure components is automatically

computed if a buoyancy factor greater than 0 is selected in non-AASHTO mode or in
AASHTO mode when WA (water load) is selected from the AASHTO Load Case Manager.
The computation includes piles, pile cap, pier columns. Partial buoyancy of the pile cap is
accounted for, where the volume of the pile cap that is submerged will be used to
determine the uniform buoyant force acting on the pile cap. A convenient way to check
buoyancy and self-weight calculations is to include only these loads, run the program,
and then view the "Sum of Total Soil Spring Loads", Z direction in the text output file.
12.3.3 Young's Modulus
The young’s modulus, of soils, can be obtained from following empirical equations:
For Sand
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.A
where
= 5 for sands with fines
10 for clean normally consolidated sand
15 for clean overconsolidated sand
= atmospheric pressure (≈ 2000 psf)
= corrected SPT blow-count (blows/ft)
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.B
where
= subgrade modulus (pcf)
= width of pile (ft)

= poisson’s ratio
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.C
where
= depth below ground surface (ft)
For Clay
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.D
where
= range of beta is shown in the table below
= undrained shear strength (psf)
Range of β for Clay

12.3.4 Poisson's Ratio
The following typical values may be used for the Poisson's ratio ν for soils:
ν = 0.2 to 0.45 for sand
= 0.4 to 0.5 for clay
or a spatial average, for the values of ν over depth may be used for soils consisting of
both sand and clay.
12.3.5 Shear Modulus
The shear modulus of soils, G, is a function of soil type, past loading, and geological
history. It is recommended that G be obtained from insitu tests such as dilatometer, CPT,
and/or SPT. Note that the equations presented below constitute relatively broad
descriptions of estimating soil shear modulus, drawing upon theory of elasticity and
empirical methods. Engineering judgment should be used in deciding on applicability of
the specific formulations listed below, or one of many available alternative formulations.
For example, for relatively undisturbed soils, Table 6-6 of Kramer (1996) may be of use
in estimating representative values of shear modulus. Additional discussion of shear
modulus estimation for relatively undisturbed soils is included in relation to modeling
soil torsional resistance.
G can be computed from Young's Modulus , E and Poisson's ratio , v, from the following
correlation:
Eqn: 12.3.E
For Sand
(ksf)
Eqn: 12.3.F
where
= maximum shear modulus (ksf)

When applicable, use values of Young's Modulus, E from Eqn: 12.3.A, Eqn: 12.3.B, and
Eqn: 12.3.C in Eqn: 12.3.E to calculate shear modulus for sand. Note that alternative
formulations may be more applicable, depending on soil/site conditions (e.g., empirical
formulations listed in Table 6-6 of Kramer, 1996).
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.G
where
= 5 for sand fines
10 for clean normally consolidated sand
15 for clean overconsolidated sand
= atmospheric pressure(≈ 2000 psf)
= width of pile (ft)

= poisson's ratio
= depth below ground surface (ft)
For Clay
When applicable, use values of Young's Modulus, E from Eqn: 12.3.D in Eqn: 12.3.E to
calculate shear modulus for clay. Alternative formulations, such as the empirical
relationships listed in Table 6-6 of Kramer, 1996 may also be applicable.
(psf)
Eqn: 12.3.H
where
= range of beta shown in Eqn: 12.3.D
= undrained shear strength (psf)

12.3.6 Angle of Internal Friction
Angle of internal friction, φ', can be computed from SPT N values using the following
empirical correlation:
Eqn: 12.3.I
where
C = correction for overburden pressure
N
FHWA 96 uses the correction by Peck, et al. (1974):
Eqn: 12.3.J
valid only for σ’ ≥ 0.25 tsf (24 kPa) (Bowles, 1977)

v
Normalizing for atmospheric pressure (pa): (1 atm = 101.3 kPa = 1.06 tsf )
Eqn: 12.3.K
Larger values should be used for granular material with 5% or less of fine sand and silt.
For numerical implementation, the average correlation can be expressed as
Eqn: 12.3.L
where
12.3.7 Undrained Strength
Estimates of undrained shear strength, c can be made using the correlations of q with
u u
SPT N-values (see the figure below).
Eqn: 12.3.M
where
q = unconfined compressive strength
u
Figure: 12.3.a Correlations between SPT N-value and Unconfined Compressive

Strength
12.3.8 Subgrade Modulus
Subgrade modulus, k (F/L3) of cohesionless soil can be estimated from empirical

correlations.
Correlations for submerged cohesionless soils located in Florida

For submerged cohesionless soils located in Florida, use SPT-N values to find k [Figure
12.3.8a; FDOT SFH (Appendix B) 2017].
Figure: 12.3.b SPT-N versus k (pci) for submerged cohesionless soils in Florida (FDOT
2017)
Correlations for cohesionless soils (general)

If Figure 12.3.8a is not applicable, use relative density to find k, as listed in the tables
below (FHWA COM624P 2.0 Manual, 1993).
Table: 12.3.A Representative values of k for submerged sand (static and cyclic loading)
(FHWA 1993)
Relative density Loose Medium Dense
Recommended k (pci) 20 60 125
Recommended k
5429 16287 33931
(kN/m3)
Table: 12.3.B Representative values of k for sand above water table (static and cyclic
loading) (FHWA 1993)
Relative density Loose Medium Dense
Recommended k (pci) 25 90 225
Recommended k
6786 24430 61076
(kN/m3)
12.4 Lateral Soil Resistance
The following p-y models are available for modeling lateral soil resistance:
1. Sand (O'Neill)
2. Sand (Reese)
3. Sand (API)
4. Liquefied Sand (Rollins)
5. Hybrid Liquefied Sand (Franke and Rollins)
6. Piedmont Residual
7. C-Phi
8. Clay (O'Neill)
9. Clay (Soft, Matlock)
10. Clay (Stiff, with free water)
11. Clay (Stiff, without free water)
12. Clay (API)
13. Loess
14. Limestone (McVay)
15. Limestone (McVay) Uncoupled
16. Weak Rock (Reese)
17. Strong Rock
18. Massive Rock
19. Linear (Subgrade)
20. Custom P-Y
12.4.1 Sand (O'Neill)
SOIL=1, is O'Neill (1984) recommended p-y curve for sands:
Eqn: 12.4.A
where
η = a factor used to describe pile shape;
= 1.0 for circular piles;
A = 0.9 for cyclic loading;
= 3-0.8 z/D ≥0.9 for static loading;
D = diameter of pile;
p = ultimate soil resistance per unit of depth;
u
k = modulus of lateral soil reaction (lb/ft3 or N/m3);
z = depth;
y = deflection.
The ultimate soil resistance p in equation Eqn: 12.4.A is determined from the lesser
u
value given by equations Eqn: 12.4.B, and Eqn: 12.4.C.
Eqn: 12.4.B
Eqn: 12.4.C
where z = depth in soil from ground surface;

γ = effective unit weight of soil;
K = Rankine active coefficient;
a
= (1 - sin φ )/(1 + sin φ)
K = Rankine passive coefficient;
p
= 1/K ;
a
K = at-rest earth pressure coefficient;
o
= 1 - sin φ;
φ = angle of internal friction;
β = 45o + φ/2 .
The p-y relationship given in equation Eqn: 12.4.A depends on the soil parameters k
(lb/in3 or N/m3) and φ (deg).
A comparison between O'Neill's p-y curve for sand and Reese et. al. (1974) is shown in
Figure: 12.4.a for φ=35° k=150 lb/in3, and γ =52.6 lb/ft3 at a depth of 25 ft.
buoyant
Evident from the figure, O'Neill's curve fits Reese's initially, but differs for P (generally
u
the case).
Figure: 12.4.a Comparison of O’Neill’s and Reese, Cox, and Koop’s P-Y Curves
12.4.2 Sand (Reese)
SOIL=2, Reese, Cox, and Koop (1974) developed p-y curves for static and cyclic loading
of sands based on an extensive testing of pipe piles in Texas. The p-y curves shown
below and a complete description of curves are available in FHWA's COM624P (1993)
manual. The user must supply the soil angle of internal friction , φ , subgrade modulus,
K, and the sand's buoyant unit weight, γ ' .
Figure: 12.4.b P-Y Curves for Static and Cyclic Loading of Sand (after Reese, et al, 1974)
12.4.3 Sand (API)
API Sand Model p-y Curve (refer to Section G.8.6 and G.8.7 API RP2A LRFD)
The ultimate lateral bearing capacity for sand at a given depth is selected as the smaller
of the two following values: p (ultimate lateral resistance at shallow depths) and p
us ud
(ultimate lateral resistance at greater depths), which are determined from the following
equations (Eqn: 12.4.D, and Eqn: 12.4.E).
Eqn: 12.4.D
Eqn: 12.4.E
where z = depth below ground surface

p' = effective overburden pressure in stress units
o
D = diameter of the pile
C1,C2,C3 = coefficients determined from Figure: 12.4.c, which is a function of φ’
φ’ = effective internal friction angle
The variation of coefficients of C1,C2,and C3 with φ’ are given in the graph below.
Figure: 12.4.c Variation of coefficients C1, C2 and C3 with φ’
Using the ultimate lateral resistance, the lateral soil resistance – deflection (p-y)
relationship for sand is approximated as
Eqn: 12.4.F
p ultimate bearing capacity, which is defined as smaller value from the Eqn:
where =
12.4.D, and Eqn: 12.4.E.
u
subgrade modulus, force per volume units, is determined from 12.3.8 , which
k =
is a function of φ’
φ' = effective internal friction angle
z = depth below ground surface
y = lateral deflection
A = factor to account for cyclic or static loading conditions, which is defined as
For cyclic
loading,
For static loading,

12.4.4 Liquefied Sand (Rollins)
Rollins, et al. (2005) proposed empirical relationships for modeling lateral resistance of
liquefied sands. The lateral resistance curve is based on load tests, only requiring input
of pile/shaft width, b. The following equation is only valid for pile/shaft diameters, b,
from 12 in (0.3 m) to 102.4 in (2.6 m).
The p-y curve can be computed by using the following equation:
Eqn: 12.4.G
where P is corrected diameter; and, A, B, and C are constants.

d
Note that pile/shaft diameter, b, is used to determine a corrected diameter, P , based on

d
the range of test data obtained in Rollins, et al. (2005). The corrected diameter, P ,
d
consists of dividing the actual pile/shaft diameter, b, by 0.3 m when the actual pile/shaft
diameter is less than 0.3 m. Also, for diameters, b, greater than 2.6 m, the adjusted
diameter, P , is limited to 2.6 m. Otherwise, the following equation is used:
d
Eqn: 12.4.H
The constants A, B, and C are given as:
Eqn: 12.4.I
Eqn: 12.4.J
Eqn: 12.4.K
Per Rollings, et al (2005), the p-y curve has a max value, P , of 15 kN/m.
u
The general shape of the p-y curve is shown below.
Figure: 12.4.d p-y curve for liquefied sand

12.4.5 Hybrid Liquefied Sand
The hybrid liquefied sand p-y curve was proposed by Franke and Rollins (2013), and is
comprised of the minimum envelope of two separately computed p-y curves: liquefied
sand and soft clay. The manner by which the respective p-y curves can be constructed is
detailed in the respective articles.
The general shape of the hybrid liquefied sand p-y curve is shown below.
Figure: 12.4.e p-y curve for hybrid liquefied sand

12.4.6 Piedmont Residual
Simpson and Brown (2003) proposed empirical relationships for modeling lateral
resistance of Piedmont Residual soils based on input values of pile/shaft diameter, b,
and soil test data to determine modulus E . The equation is divided into three portions:
s
initial slope, transition, and ultimate resistance.
There are four different input types of soil test data that are used to generate the p-y
curve:
1. Standard penetration test blow count;

2. Cone penetration test tip resistance;
3. Dilatometer modulus; and,
4. Pressuremeter modulus.
The initial soil modulus, E , is calculated using input values, V , from any of the four
si test
soil test types listed above and an input factor, F , dictated by the test type.
test
Eqn: 12.4.L
Input factors, F , for each soil test type are:

test
• Standard penetration test blow count: 22 when in blows/30cm;
• Cone penetration test tip resistance: 0.118 when in kPa;
• Dilatometer modulus: 0.076 when in kPa; and,
• Pressuremeter modulus: 0.235 when in kPa.
The p-y curve can then be generated as a piecewise function, where λ is equal to 0.216:
for
Eqn: 12.4.M
for
Eqn: 12.4.N
for
Eqn: 12.4.O
The general shape of the p-y curve is shown below, where P is the ultimate resistance
u
value.
Figure: 12.4.f Simpson and Brown (2003) p-y curve for Piedmont Residual soils
12.4.7 C-Phi
Ismael (1990) proposed empirical relationships for modeling lateral resistance of soils
possessing both cohesive and cohesionless qualities (C-phi soils). The lateral resistance
(p-y) relationship implemented in FB-MultiPier is divided into four regions: initial slope;
transition; softening slope; and, ultimate resistance.
The p-y relationship is constructed by first computing ultimate resistance, p . As

u
precursors, the following terms are calculated:
Eqn: 12.4.P
Eqn: 12.4.Q
Eqn: 12.4.R
Eqn: 12.4.S
where ϕ is the angle of internal friction; and, b is the pile/shaft diameter. Note that once
p has been reached, the p-y curve ordinate is held constant, and p is taken as the
u u
minimum value of p + and p :
u_sand1a pu_sand1b u_sand2
Eqn: 12.4.T
Eqn: 12.4.U
Eqn: 12.4.V
where σ is effective vertical stress; and, z is current depth. The ultimate resistance, p , is
v u
then:
Eqn: 12.4.W
where A is a constant associated with the p-y curve of Reese et al. (1974). Note that this
constant is a function of depth (z), diameter (b), and type of loading (static, cyclic).
The displacement at which p is reached is taken as:

u
Eqn: 12.4.X
As the next major step in p-y curve formation for C-phi soils, peak resistance (p ) is
m
computed, which is a function of both the cohesive and cohesionless components of
ultimate resistance.
Eqn: 12.4.Y
where c is undrained shear strength, and:
Eqn: 12.4.Z
The peak resistance, p , is then:

m
Eqn: 12.4.AA
The displacement at which peak resistance, p , is reached is taken as:

m
Eqn: 12.4.AB
where the resistance values between peak (p ) and ultimate (p ) values follow a linear
m u
trend of slope m .
m_u
The transition portion of the curve, which lies between the initial curve portion and peak
resistance, is calculated next. In particular, a curve fitting scheme is utilized, where the
curve portion exponent, f , is:
fit
Eqn: 12.4.AC
and a term referred to as is computed as:

Eqn: 12.4.AD
The displacement, y , at which the p-y curve enters the transition region is then:
k
Eqn: 12.4.AE
where k is the initial curves stiffness. Note that p is expressed as:

k
Eqn: 12.4.AF
Having determined displacement and resistance values at the extents of the p-y curve
segments, the p-y curve can be expressed as:
for
Eqn: 12.4.AG
for
Eqn: 12.4.AH
for
Eqn: 12.4.AI
for
Eqn: 12.4.AJ
Figure: 12.4.g p-y curve for C-phi soils

12.4.8 Clay (O'Neill)
SOIL=3, is O'Neill's P-Y method for static and cyclic loading of clays. Shown in the
figures below are both the static and cyclic curves. The user must supply the undrained
strength, c, the strains (in/in) at 50% failure, ε and 100% of failure, ε , from an
50 100
unconfined compression test.
Figure: 12.4.h O'Neill's Integrated Method for Clay - Cyclic Loading Case

Figure: 12.4.i O’Neill’s Integrated Method for Clay - Static Loading Case
12.4.9 Clay (Soft, Matlock)
SOIL=4 is Matlock's (1970) p-y representation of soft clays. The p-y curves for both the
static and cyclic response are shown below. The user must supply the soil's unit weight,
γ, undrained strength, c, and the strain, ε at 50% of the failure stress in an unconfined
50
compression test. A complete description of the curves are given in the FHWA's
COM624 manual, as well as recommended soil values.
Figure: 12.4.j P-Y Curve for Clay (Soft, Matlock)- Static Loading
Figure: 12.4.k P-Y Curve for Clay (Soft, Matlock)- Cyclic Loading

12.4.10 Clay (Stiff, with free water)
SOIL=5 is Reese et al. (1975) p-y model for stiff clay with free water. The p-y curves for
both the static and cyclic response are shown below. The user must supply the soil's
subgrade modulus, k, unit weight, γ, undrained strength, c, the strain, ε at 50% of the
50
failure stress in an unconfined compression test, and the average undrained strength
c for the whole clay layer. A complete description of the curves are given in the
avg
FHWA's COM624 manual, as well as recommended values if no triaxial tests are
performed.
Figure: 12.4.l Reese et al (1975) Cyclic P-Y Curve for Clay (Stiff, with free water)
Figure: 12.4.m Reese et al (1975) Static P-Y Curve for Clay (Stiff, with free water)
12.4.11 Clay (Stiff, without free water)
SOIL=6 is Reese and Welch's (1975) p-y model for stiff clay without free water. The p-y
curves for both the static and cyclic response is shown below. The user must supply the
soil's unit weight, γ, undrained strength, c, the strain, ε at 50% of the failure stress in
50
an unconfined compression test, and the average undrained strength c for the whole
avg
clay layer. Since this model is a function of the number of load cycles, the variable, KCYC
on line 7 of the input is used. A complete description of the curves is given in the
FHWA's COM624 manual, as well as recommended values if no triaxial tests are
performed.
Figure: 12.4.n Welch and Reese (1972) Static P-Y Curve for Clay (Stiff, without free
water)
Figure: 12.4.o Welch and Reese (1972) Cyclic P-Y Curve for Clay (Stiff, without free
water)
12.4.12 Clay (API)
API Clay Model p-y Curve (refer to Section G.8.2 to G.8.5 API RP2A LRFD)
The ultimate unit lateral bearing capacity, p , for soft clay under static lateral loads can
u
vary between 8c to 12c except at the shallow depths. In the absence of more definitive
criteria, use the empirical equation given by API RP2A LFRD:
Eqn: 12.4.AK
Eqn: 12.4.AL
where c = undrained shear strength of undisturbed clay soil samples, in stress units
p'
= effective overburden pressure in stress units
o
z = depth below ground surface
D = diameter of the pile
J = dimensionless empirical constant
depth from the ground surface to the bottom of reduced resistance zone,
X =
R which is defined as;
Eqn: 12.4.AM
where γ' = effective unit weight of soil in weight density units

In FB-MultiPier analysis, the value of J is set equal to 0.5, which is recommended for
Gulf of Mexico clays. The data used in piecewise linear p-y curves of API clay are given in
the table:
Figure: 12.4.p p-y Curve for API Clay (z < X )

R
Figure: 12.4.q p-y Curve for API Clay (z ≥ X )
R
Notation used for axis labels is defined as

P = actual lateral resistance in stress units
P = ultimate lateral bearing capacity in stress units
u
y = actual lateral deflection
y = defined as;
c
Eqn: 12.4.AN
ε strain occurring at one-half the maximum stress on laboratory undrained

where =
compression tests of undisturbed soil samples
c
12.4.13 Loess
Johnson, et al. (2006) proposed empirical relationships for modeling the lateral
resistance of Loess soils based on cone tip resistance, q . The p-y relationship is of
c
hyperbolic form.
First, the ultimate lateral resistance, p , is calculated using the following parameters and
u
equations:
q = cone tip resistance

c
N = Number of cycles for cyclic loading (=1 for static; =10 for cyclic)
b = pile/shaft diameter
Eqn: 12.4.AO
Where cone tip resistance values are scaled by 0.5 at the ground surface and 1.0 at
depths of 2b or greater (with linear variation of the scale factor between 0 and 2b).
Next, the initial modulus ,E , is calculated, based on a reference displacement ,y , of

i ref
0.0029718 m (0.117 in).
Eqn: 12.4.AP
A mapping to hyperbolic displacements, y , is also determined:

h
Eqn: 12.4.AQ
The mapped displacement, y , and initial modulus, E , allow for the secant modulus, E ,
h i s
to be determined anywhere along the p-y curve domain:
Eqn: 12.4.AR
The p-y curve is then computed as:
Eqn: 12.4.AS
The general shape of the p-y curve for Loess soil is shown below.
Figure: 12.4.r p-y curve for Loess soil
12.4.14 Limestone (McVay) for Axial and Lateral Coupling
When a shaft that is embedded in rock strata is laterally loaded then the lateral response
at any elevation along the shaft length is a function of the lateral resistance of the rock
and the side shear (skin friction) that is developed at the shaft/rock interface. The
commonly used back calculated P-Y curves do not account for the contribution of the
side shear explicitly. Rather the skin friction contribution is implicitly accounted for in
the method of back calculating the P-Y curves. However as the diameter of the shaft
becomes larger together with the high shear stress that is developed at the shaft/rock
interface this effect can become very significant and the explicit determination of the
side shear contribution may be justified. Such effort will involve the inclusion of the side
shear contribution to the lateral response mechanism of the soil and thus it will reflect
in the P-Y curves. Figure: 12.4.s shows a free body diagram of an element of the shaft of
length dz. Based on force equilibrium we can calculate the lateral response of the soil
per shaft unit length either neglecting or including the contribution the side shear
forces. If the contribution of side shear T, is included in the calculation then we see that
there is a moment Ms due to the side shear.
Ms = TD/dz
This will result in a lateral force component, dP, which acts to reduce lateral demand.
dP = - d(M )/dz

s
The skin friction in the shaft interface causes the reduction.

Figure: 12.4.s Forces acting on a shaft element of length dz
p-y curves for Florida Limestone, which are intended for use with axial and lateral
coupling effects, are given below. The curves are derived from McVay et al. (2004). Note
that the curves are unit dependent, where length units are ft and force units are kips.
Note that the program automatically performs unit conversion during analysis for
SI models.
Eqn: 12.4.AT
Eqn: 12.4.AU
where:
D = Pile diameter
q = Unconfined Compressive strength
u
y = Pile Displacement
Note that p is held constant for values of y/D exceeding 0.1
FB-MultiPier can generate p-y curves for Florida limestone that either include or exclude
the effect of the side shear contribution during analysis. This option is activated when
choosing "Coupled Axial and Lateral Soil Resistance" from the Analysis page. More
information is available here. When the side shear contribution is included within the
lateral response modeling, the program calculates an additional term dP. If on the other
hand. the option is not selected, then the effect of side shear is not calculated. Based on
the discussion above, the user should use this feature with the necessary caution and
only where the use is justified.
The Limestone (McVay) model can be selected among the Lateral models on the Soil
page.
Figure: 12.4.t Limestone (McVay) model on Soil Page
Figure: 12.4.u Limestone (McVay) Soil Properties

12.4.15 Limestone (McVay) Uncoupled
The data for the p-y curves presented below is based on (McVay et. Al. (2004). The data
for the back computed curves were obtained from 12 lateral load tests performed in the
centrifuge with diameters of 6 and 9 ft, embedment (L/D) of 2, 3, and 4 and rock
strengths of 10 and 20 tsf. (The report recommends that full scale field tests be
employed to validate the curves presented). Each lateral load test gave multiple p-y
curves, which were averaged to obtain a representative curve.
Note: The "Coupled Axial and Lateral Soil Resistance" feature found on the Analysis
Settings page should NOT be made use of when this lateral soil model is applied.
Presented in Figure: 12.4.v are back-adjusted p-y curves for all twelve-centrifuge tests
with side shear considerations; i.e., two shaft diameters (6’ and 9’), three embedment
lengths (L/D = 2, 3, and 4) and two rock strengths (10 tsf and 20 tsf). Also shown in the
figure are the predicted P-Y curves for soft and stiff clay models.
Figure: 12.4.v P-Y curves from 12 lateral tests corrected for side shear.
Evident from the figure, even though the lateral resistance is normalized with rock
strength and diameter, there is quite a bit of variability in the p-y curves. Therefore the
curves were normalized even further to be represented by a single trend-line. The P
values are normalized with q 0.15 D0.85. Figure: 12.4.w shows the normalized P-Y curves
u
for Florida Limestone corrected for side friction. Note that the curves are valid for all the
experimental results (i.e., 6’ and 9’ diameter shafts, different rock strengths, etc.). Note
also that the p-y curves are unit dependent. That is for the English system, input units
are kips (for force) and feet (for length). Note that the program automatically performs
unit conversion during analysis for SI models.
Eqn: 12.4.AV
Eqn: 12.4.AW
where:
D = Pile diameter
q = Unconfined Compressive strength
u
y = Pile Displacement
Figure: 12.4.w Normalized P-Y curves corrected for side shear.

12.4.16 Weak Rock (Reese)
Reese (1997) proposed empirical relationships for modeling lateral resistance of rock
layers with unconfined compressive strengths ranging from 10440 psf (500 kPa) to
104400 psf (5000 kPa). The equation is divided into three portions: initial slope,
transition, and ultimate resistance.
,
Eqn: 12.4.AX
, ,
Eqn: 12.4.AY
otherwise.
Eqn: 12.4.AZ
where
p = horizontal resistance force
K = initial slope
ir
y = horizontal displacement
y = horizontal displacement at end of linear curve portion
a
p = ultimate resistance
ur
y =k B
rm rm
k = constant with values ranging from 0.0005 (more conservative) to 0.00005
rm
B = shaft diameter
The initial slope is calculated as:

Eqn: 12.4.BA
where
E = initial rock mass modulus
m
k = dimensionless constant
ir
for
Eqn: 12.4.BB
for
Eqn: 12.4.BC
Additionally, the horizontal displacement at end of linear curve portion (y ) is expressed

a
as:
Eqn: 12.4.BD
In turn, the ultimate resistance (p ) is expressed as:

ur
for
Eqn: 12.4.BE
for
Eqn: 12.4.BF
where
α = strength reduction factor (linearly varying; 1.0 when RQD = 0%; 0.333 when RQD
r
= 100%)
q = unconfined compressive strength
u
x = depth below rock surface
r
Collectively, the above expressions lead to the following curve for horizontal resistance
of weak rock.
Figure: 12.4.x Reese (1997) p-y curve for weak rock

12.4.17 Strong Rock
Empirical relationships for modeling lateral resistance of strong rock layers (with
uniaxial strengths equal to or greater than 144100 psf, 6900 kPa) are given in NCHRP
(2006). The equation is given as bilinear with: initial slope and secondary slope up to
ultimate resistance. If the ultimate resistance (pu) is reached, then brittle fracture is
assumed to occur.
,
Eqn: 12.4.BG
, ,
Eqn: 12.4.BH
where
p = horizontal resistance force
S = one half of the unconfined compressive strength
u
y = horizontal displacement
b = shaft diameter
p = ultimate resistance = b • S
u u
Collectively, the above expressions lead to the following curve for horizontal resistance
of strong rock.
Figure: 12.4.y p-y curve for strong rock (adapted from NCHRP 2006)
12.4.18 Massive Rock
Liang et al. (2009) proposed empirical relationships for modeling lateral resistance of
massive rock. The relationship for massive rock layers is expressed using a single
nonlinear equation.
The p-y curve is constructed by first computing initial stiffness, K :

i
Eqn: 12.4.BI
where b is shaft diameter, b is equal to 0.3048 m (12 in); v is Poisson’s ratio

ref
associated with the layer; E is the shaft elastic modulus; I is the shaft moment of
shaft shaft
inertia; and, E is the soil mass modulus:
m
Eqn: 12.4.BJ
where E is rock intact modulus; and, GSI is the geological strength index.
i
The remaining major thrust is to compute the ultimate lateral resistance, p , which is the
u
minimum of the ultimate resistance at the current depth, p , and the ultimate
u_depth
resistance at the centroid of the failure wedge within the layer, p .
u_wedge
As precursors, Hoek-Brown constants (mb, s, and a) are computed (assuming a

disturbance factor of 0):
Eqn: 12.4.BK
Eqn: 12.4.BL
Eqn: 12.4.BM
where m is the material index.

i
The term p is computed next:

l
Eqn: 12.4.BN
where σ is effective vertical stress at the current depth and qu is unconfined

v
compressive strength.
The supporting terms ϕ , τ, ϕ, c, K , p , and τ are next calculated at the current depth,
n a a max
as precursors for calculation of the ultimate resistance at depth, p :
u_depth
Eqn: 12.4.BO
Eqn: 12.4.BP
Eqn: 12.4.BQ
Eqn: 12.4.BR
Eqn: 12.4.BS
Eqn: 12.4.BT
Eqn: 12.4.BU
where, for τ , the value of q is in units of MPa.

max u
The ultimate resistance at depth, p , is then:

u_depth
Eqn: 12.4.BV
As the next major step in computing the p-y curve, the ultimate resistance at the
centroid of the failure wedge within the layer, p , is determined. First, the terms
u_wedge
ϕ , τ, ϕ, c, K , and p are recomputed at a depth equal to the centroid of the failure
n a a
wedge in the layer. In addition, the following terms are also computed at a depth equal
to the centroid of the wedge:
Eqn: 12.4.BW
Eqn: 12.4.BX
Eqn: 12.4.BY
Eqn: 12.4.BZ
where σ is the effective vertical stress at the top of the layer, and γ is effective unit
v_top eff
weight.
The expression for the ultimate lateral resistance (p ) at the wedge centroid is
u_wedge
comprised of five components (c through c ):
1 5
Eqn: 12.4.CA
Eqn: 12.4.CB
Eqn: 12.4.CC
Eqn: 12.4.CD
Eqn: 12.4.CE
Having determined equation components c through c , the ultimate resistance at the

1 5
wedge centroid, p , is given as:
u_wedge
Eqn: 12.4.CF
Finally, the p-y curve for massive rock is computed as:

Eqn: 12.4.CG
Figure: 12.4.z p-y curve for massive rock

12.4.19 Linear (Subgrade)
For applications where a linear p-y curve formulation is appropriate, the Linear
(Subgrade) model can be utilized. The equation of the p-y curve is based on the input
initial stiffness, k, and pile/shaft diameter, b.
Eqn: 12.4.CH
The general shape of the Linear (Subgrade) p-y curve is shown below.
Figure: 12.4.aa p-y curve for Linear (Subgrade) model

12.4.20 Custom P-Y
When the points of p-y curves are already known, the "Custom P-Y" curve option can be
utilized to apply user-defined P-Y curves to subsurface pile nodes that fall within a given
soil layer.
The user defined curves are specified by a set of ten pairs of p and y values, as well as a
user-defined Pu value. The custom curve can be defined for one or more layers of
interest from within the Soils page. For more information, see "Additional Soil
Properties".
Note: Only one custom p-y curve can be assigned to a given layer. If linearly varying
soil resistance (with depth) is desired for a given depth range, then linear variation of
properties in that region may possibly be mimicked by subdividing the depth range into
several layers and assigning a unique custom p-y curve to each subdivided layer.
Note: If no value is supplied for Pu, then the maximum value of "p" from the user-
defined curve will be assigned as Pu.
To facilitate use of table features of copying/pasting, the custom P-Y data can be pre-
formatted as indicated below and then pasted into the input table from within the Soils
page.
Y1 P1
Y2 P2
Y3 P3
... ...
Y10 P10
Where
Yi is the ith Y (lateral deflection) value on the user specified P-Y curve.
Pi is the ith P (lateral resistance) value on the user specified P-Y curve.
12.5 Axial Soil Resistance
Axial soil modeling is comprised of side friction and tip resistance. Respective
component forces are obtained from the following curves:
1. Axial T-Z Curve for Side Friction

2. Q-Z Curve for Tip Resistance
12.5.1 Axial T-Z Curve for Side Friction
The following axial T-Z curves are available for modeling side friction:
1. Driven Piles
2. Limestone (McVay)
3. Driven Pile Sand (API)
4. Driven Pile Clay (API)
5. Drilled and Cast Insitu Piles/Shafts
6. Custom T-Z
12.5.1.1 Driven Piles
The axial T-Z curves used in modeling the pile-soil interaction along the length of the
driven pile is shown in following figure (McVay, 1989) and given as
Eqn: 12.5.A
where
Eqn: 12.5.B
At a particular location on the pile, τ is the shear stress being transferred to the soil for
o
a given z displacement, where r is the radius of the pile and r is the radius out from
o m
the pile where axial loading effects on soil are negligible, assumed to be initially equal to
the product of the pile length, (1- soil's Poisson's ratio), and the ratio of the soil's shear
modulus at the pile's center to the value at its tip. The user must supply G , the initial
i
shear modulus of soil, v, Poisson's ratio of soil, and τ , the maximum shear stress
f
between the pile and soil at the depth in question. Evident from the equation above, the
side springs are highly nonlinear.
Figure: 12.5.a Axial T-Z Curve for Pile
Note: Due to limited availability of data, use of the "Coupled Axial and Lateral Soil
Resistance" feature found on the Analysis Settings page is recommended ONLY for
drilled shaft axial models.
12.5.1.2 Limestone (McVay)
The following data is based on tests which were performed on 6 ft diameter shafts
embedded 18 ft (L/D = 3) into rock, as described in "Development of Modified T-Z
curves for large diameter piles/drilled shafts in limestone for FBPIER" (McVay et al.
2004). Shown in Figure: 12.5.b through Figure: 12.5.d are the axial displacement versus
load plots, which indicate significant mobilization of axial resistance with relatively small
displacements (e.g., 80% of capacity is reached at 0.5% of diameter).
Figure: 12.5.b Axial load vs. displacement in 10 tsf strength rock
Figure: 12.5.c Axial load vs. displacement in 20 tsf strength rock.
Figure: 12.5.d Axial load vs. displacement in 40 tsf strength rock.

The load applied at the top of each shaft was subsequently converted into shear stress
(skin friction, fs) on the shaft/rock interface by dividing by the shaft area. Styrofoam was
placed at the shaft tip so the entire load was transferred to the rock through skin
friction. Plots of fs vs. axial displacement (T-Z curves) for each strength rock are shown
in Figure: 12.5.e.
Figure: 12.5.e T-Z curves for 10, 20 and 40 tsf rocks.
From the T-Z curves, the ultimate unit skin frictions were established from the
horizontal tangents. Ultimate unit skin friction values of 53 psi, 92 psi, and 160 psi were
found for rock strengths of 10 tsf, 20 tsf, and 40 tsf, respectively. Shown in Figure: 12.5.f
are the normalized T-Z curves : fs values were normalized with respect fsmax (ultimate
unit skin friction) and vertical displacement, Z, was normalized with respect to D
(diameter).
Figure: 12.5.f Normalized T-Z curves for synthetic rock.
The three normalized curves are represented by a single curve, with the following
equations:
0 ≤ R ≤ 0.5
Eqn: 12.5.C
0.5 < R ≤ 3
Eqn: 12.5.D
R > 3
Eqn: 12.5.E
where:
R = 100(z/D)
z = vertical displacement
D = shaft diameter
f = skin friction
s
f = ultimate unit skin friction
smax
For each of the equations above, f cannot exceed f .
s smax
Kim (2001) analyzed data from 33 axial load tests (Osterberg) from various bridge sites
throughout Florida and recommended the normalized T-Z curve for the natural Florida
Limestone given in Figure: 12.5.g. A comparison of Kim’s normalized T-Z curve with the
synthetic rock curve, Figure: 12.5.f is also shown in Figure: 12.5.g. Evident from the
figure there is a very good agreement between the normalized T-Z behavior of the
natural limestone and the synthetic rock.
Figure: 12.5.g Comparison of normalized T-Z curves.
12.5.1.3 Driven Pile Sand (API)
API Sand Model t-z Curve (refer to Section G.4.3 and G.7.2 API RP2A LRFD)
For pipe piles in cohesionless soils, the unit skin friction is calculated for API sand as
Eqn: 12.5.F
where K = dimensionless coefficient of lateral earth pressure (ratio of horizontal to

vertical normal effective stress(for unplugged K=0.8 and for plugged K=1.0)
p'
= effective overburden pressure in stress units
o
δ = friction angle between the soil and pile wall, which is defined as
Eqn: 12.5.G
where φ = internal friction angle
It is recommended that the ultimate (limiting) values of unit skin friction, f , be

ult
considered, which are given in Table G.4.3-1 API RP2A LRFD In FB-MultiPier analysis, the
t-z curves are generated using piecewise linear function based on the data given in the
table:
Figure: 12.5.h Normalized t-z curve for API Sand
t = mobilized skin friction

tmax = maximum unit skin capacity accordingly to Eqn: 12.5.F
z = local pile deflection
12.5.1.4 Driven Pile Clay (API)
API Clay Model t-z Curve (refer to Section G.4.2 and G.7.2 API RP2A LRFD)
For pipe piles in cohesive soils, the skin friction can be calculated by the equation.
Eqn: 12.5.H
where c = undrained shear strength of the soil in stress units

α = a dimensionless factor, which is defined as
Eqn: 12.5.I
Eqn: 12.5.J
Eqn: 12.5.K
where p' = effective overburden pressure in stress units

o
The data used in piecewise linear t-z curves of API clay are given in the table:
Figure: 12.5.i Normalized t-z curve for API Clay
t = mobilized skin friction

tmax = maximum unit skin friction capacity according to Eqn: 12.5.H
z = local pile deflection
D = diameter of pile
Note: The ratio of residual stress to ultimate stress is equal to 0.9
12.5.1.5 Drilled and Cast Insitu Piles/Shafts

The T-Z curves used for drilled and cast insitu piles/shafts are based on the
recommendations found in Wang and Reese (1993). In particular, the curves are based
on the trend lines and are computed for each node. Trend lines of stress transfer for
axial end bearing and side resistance are provided for the following materials:
1. Sand
2. Clay
3. Intermediate Geomaterial
Sand
Valid for φ ≥ 30°
Eqn: 12.5.L
Eqn: 12.5.M
Eqn: 12.5.N
valid for depths ranging from 5 to 87.5 ft (1.5 to 26.7 m)
The immediate settlements are computed using non-linear t-z springs, with the shape
presented in following Figure: 12.5.j. The equations are provided but it should be
referred that there is a considerable scatter around the trend line.
Side friction mobilization (trendline)
for R ≤ 0.908333
Eqn: 12.5.O
for R > 0.908333

Eqn: 12.5.P
where
Eqn: 12.5.Q
Figure: 12.5.j Trend Lines for Drilled Shaft Side Friction in Sand
Clay
unless tests prove otherwise
Eqn: 12.5.R
From ground surface to depth of 5 ft (1.5 m) α = 0

Bottom 1 diameter of drilled shaft or 1 stem diameter above top of bell α = 0
All other points along the sides of the drilled shaft α = 0.55
The immediate settlements are computed using non-linear t-z springs, with the shape
presented in following Figure: 12.5.k. The equations are provided but it should be
referred that there is a considerable scatter around these trend lines.
Side friction mobilization (trendline)

f /f = 0.593157*R/0.12 for R ≤ 0.12
s smax
f /f = R/(0.095155+0.892937*R) for R ≤ 0.74
s smax
f /f = 0.978929-0.115817*(R-0.74) for R ≤ 2.0
s smax
f /f = 0.833 for R > 2.0
s smax
where
Eqn: 12.5.S
Figure: 12.5.k Trend Lines for Drilled Shaft Side Friction in Clay
Intermediate Geomaterial
The design of drilled shafts founded in intermediate Geomaterials draws upon the
FHWA report: Load Transfer for Drilled Shafts in Intermediate Geomaterials .
Intermediate Geomaterials are characterized as one of the following three types:
1. (Type 1) Argillaceous geomaterials: Heavily overconsolidated clay, clay shale, saprolite

and mudstone.
2. (Type 2) Calcareous Rock: Limestone and Limerock
3. (Type 3) Very Dense Granular Geomaterials: residual, completely decomposed rock,
and glacial till.
Note: Types 1 and 2 are considered to be cohesive materials with an undrained
strength, q in the range of 0.5 to 5.0 MPa.
u
Type 3 is primarily cohesionless and has Nspt from 50 to 100.
Method 1, documented in the FHWA report on Load Transfer for Drilled Shafts in
Intermediate Geomaterials, is applicable for Type 1 and 2 materials. Further, Method 1
has been implemented in FB-MultiPier.
l Valid for IGM Type 1 and 2; 0.5 < q < 5.0 Mpa; Recovery > 50 %;
u
l Appropriate for very short sockets (L/D <2) or very long sockets (L/D>20);
l Where there is strong layering in the formation, or where part of the socket is
artificially roughened and part is smooth
E is the Young’s modulus for the intact sample.

i
E can be taken as 115 q for Type 2 IGM’s and 250 q for Type 1 IGM’s for design
m u u
purposes if modulus measurements are not made, provided that soft seams and open
fractures are not present. – Load Transfer for Drilled Shafts in Intermediate
Geomaterials, pp. 80
A range of typical E values for limestone is 50,000 psi to 300,000 psi.
m
Table: 12.5.A Estimation of E /E based on RQD

m i
RQD E /E E /E
m i m i
(percent) (closed joints) (open joints)
100 1.00 0.60
70 0.70 0.10
50 0.15 0.10
20 0.05 0.05
Note: Values of E /E for RQD values between those shown can be estimated by linear
m i
interpolation on RQD.
Required Data for Drilled Shaft IGM soil type in FB-MultiPier:

l Number of layers
l Thickness
l Unconfined compressive strength, q (MPa)
u
l Mass modulus - E
m
l Modulus ratio (E /E )
m i
l Total unit weight of soil, γ (pcf)
l Type of surface (rough or smooth)
l Drilled shaft diameter
l Young’s modulus of drilled shaft
l Unit weight of concrete in drilled shaft
l Slump of concrete in drilled shaft
Step-by-step procedure for T-Z curve computation of Drilled Shaft IGM in FB-
MultiPier:
1. Find the total socketed length along the pile (L).
2. Find the average E and f along the side of the rock socket.
m su
where,
E is user defined mass modulus
m
f is side friction.
su
For “smooth” sockets, failure occurs at the interface (α values, computed based on
O'Neill et al. 1996)
For “rough” sockets failure occurs through the rock.
Apply the reduction factor αE as shown in Table: 12.5.B.
Table: 12.5.B Reduction Factor

E /E αE
m i
1.00 1.00
0.50 0.80
0.30 0.70
0.10 0.55
0.05 0.45
References: Table B.6 (pg. 627) of FHWA-IF-99-025 (O'Neil and Reese 1999), also used
in Table 10.8.3.5.4b-1 of AASHTO LRFD 2012
3. Find n
For “rough” sockets;
where,
σ is normal stress of concrete, σ = γ ·Z ·M
n n c c
γ is the unit weight of the concrete
c
Z is the distance from the top of the completed column of concrete to the point in the
c
borehole at which σ is desired (usually the middle of the socket).
n
M can be calculated using the Figure: 12.5.l.
Figure: 12.5.l Values of M
Table: 12.5.C Values of M (In Table Format)

Slump (mm)
Socket Depth (m)
125 175 225
0 1.00 1.00 1.00
4 0.50 0.95 1.00
8 0.45 0.75 1.00
12 0.35 0.65 0.90
If a water table is present, then
where,
Z = Depth to water table.
c
For "smooth" sockets, n is estimated from Figure: 12.5.m.

Figure: 12.5.m n Factors for Smooth Sockets
4. Calculate Ω
5. Calculate Γ
6. Calculate Θ and K
f f
7. Calculate the side shear load transfer - deformation as
Also ,
K = 1.0 when, K < n
f f
12.5.1.6 Custom T-Z
User can select the "Custom T-Z" curve option for applying user-defined T-Z curves to
subsurface pile nodes that fall within a given soil layer.
The user defined curves are specified by a set of TEN points. Please enter the data set in
two columns.
User defined T-Z data

Z1 T1
Z2 T2
Z3 T3
... ...
Z10 T10
Where
Zi is the ith Z (axial pile deflection) value on the user specified T-Z curve.
Ti is the ith T (shear stress) value on the user specified T-Z curve.
12.5.2 Q-Z Curve for Tip Resistance
Q-Z curves for tip resistance are categorized for the following cases:
1. Driven Pile (McVay)

2. Driven Pile Sand (Mosher)
3. Driven Pile Sand (API)
4. Driven Pile Clay (Skempton)
5. Driven Pile Clay (API)
6. Drilled and Cast Insitu Piles/Shafts
7. Custom Q-Z
12.5.2.1 Driven Pile (McVay)
The nonlinear pile's tip spring, i.e. Q-Z curve for driven pile is shown in the following
figure and given as (McVay 1989):
Eqn: 12.5.A
where Q is the ultimate tip resistance (force), G and v are the initial shear modulus and
f i
Poisson's ratio of the soil at the pile tip. r is again the radius of the pile, and Q is the
0 b
mobilized tip resistance.
Figure: 12.5.a Q-Z Curve for Driven Pile
12.5.2.2 Driven Pile Sand (Mosher)
Pile tip spring (Q-Z) curves can be automatically generated for piles that are tipped in
sand layers, and where the work of Mosher (1984), Castello (1980), and Vijayvergiya
(1977) are applicable. The tip load versus tip (vertical, compressive) displacement
relationship is defined by Vijayvergiya (1977) as:
Eqn: 12.5.B
where Q is tip resistance force; Z is the tip displacement (vertical, compressive); Z is

tip c
the critical tip displacement (vertical, compressive) displacement upon first reaching the
ultimate tip load of Q ; and, n is an exponent which may be selected based on soil
max
relative density (loose, medium-dense, dense).
Critical displacement (Z )
c
Mosher (1984) assumed a value of 0.25 in (0.006352 m) for Z . Other values have been
c
suggested as well, for example, Vijayvergiya (1977) recommended relating Z to the pile
c
width.
Exponent (n)
The default value given by Vijayvergiya (1977) for n (in the format displayed above) of
1/3. However, Mosher (1984) also listed the following values of n for various sand
relative densities:
Table: 12.5.A Pairing of Q-Z equation exponent with soil relative density and internal
friction angle (Mosher 1984, Table 6, Eqns. 49a-c)
Internal friction angle
Relative density n
(deg)
Loose 28-31 1/2
Medium-dense 32-34 1/3
Dense 35-38 1/4
Ultimate tip load (Q )

max
If the ultimate tip load (Q ) is not known, Castello (1980), Figure 72 in Mosher (1984),
max
give curves relating relative depth, internal friction angle, and Q .
max
12.5.2.3 Driven Pile Sand (API)
API Sand Model q-z Curve (refer to Section G.4.3 and G.7.3 API RP2A LRFD)
The unit end bearing, in stress units, can be calculated by the equation
Eqn: 12.5.C
where p' = effective overburden pressure, in stress units, at the pile tip
o
N = dimensionless bearing capacity factor, which is defined as
q
Eqn: 12.5.D
where φ' = effective internal friction angle
Based on a total unit weight of soil, an effective unit weight, i.e.γ = γ – γ is

soil soil water
calculated for p' that is subsequently used to compute the unit end bearing in Eqn:
o
12.5.C.
It is recommended that the ultimate (limiting) values of unit end bearing q be

ult
considered, which are given in Table G.4.3-1 API RP2A LRFD.
The ultimate end bearing capacity, in force units, may be calculated by the equation
Eqn: 12.5.E
=
where sectional area at tip of pile and is calculated, based on pile end condition
A
Plugged – a gross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing
capacity
Unplugged – a cross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing
capacity
The q-z curves are generated using piecewise linear function based on the data given in
the table:
Figure: 12.5.b Normalized q-z curve for API Sand
Q = mobilized end bearing capacity

Qp = total end bearing capacity according to Eqn: 12.5.E
z = axial deflection of pile tip
12.5.2.4 Driven Pile Clay (Skempton)
Pile tip spring (Q-Z) curves can be automatically generated for piles that are tipped in
clay layers, and where the work of Skempton (1951) is applicable (e.g., Coyle and Reese,
1966). The tip load versus tip (vertical, compressive) displacement relationship is
defined as:
Eqn: 12.5.F
where Q is tip resistance force; N is the bearing capacity factor (equal to 9.0 in
tip c
Skempton 1951); C is undrained shear strength; A is the cross sectional area of the
u tip
pile tip; B is the pile diameter corresponding to A ; e is the strain at 50% maximum
tip 50
stress; n is an exponent (taken as 0.5 for clay); Z is the tip displacement (vertical,
compressive).
12.5.2.5 Driven Pile Clay (API)
API Clay Model q-z Curve (refer to Section G.4.2 and G.7.3 API RP2A LRFD)
The unit end bearing of pipe pile founded in cohesive soil is given by
Eqn: 12.5.G
= undrained shear strength of the soil, in stress

where c
units, at the pile tip
The ultimate end bearing capacity is then calculated
Eqn: 12.5.H
=
where A sectional area at the tip of pile, which is based on the pile end condition
Plugged – a gross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing

capacity
Unplugged – a cross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing
capacity
In FB-MultiPier analysis, q-z curves of API clay are defined as a piecewise linear
function based on the data given in the table:
Figure: 12.5.c Normalized q-z curve for API Clay
Q = mobilized end bearing capacity

Qp = total end bearing capacity according toEqn: 12.5.H
z = axial deflection of pile tip
12.5.2.6 Drilled and Cast Insitu Piles/Shafts
The Q-Z curves used for drilled and cast insitu piles/shafts are based on the
recommendations found in Wang and Reese (1993). In particular, the curves are based
on the trend lines and are computed for each node. Trend lines of stress transfer for
axial end bearing and side resistance are provided for the following materials:
1. Sand
2. Clay
3. Intermediate Geomaterial
Sand
Valid for N > 10

SPT
if B > 50 in (1.27 m):

b
Eqn: 12.5.I
The immediate settlements are computed using non-linear Q-Z springs, with the shape
presented in the figure shown below. The equation is provided but it should be noted
that there is a considerable scatter around the trend line.
End bearing mobilization (trendline)
Eqn: 12.5.J
Figure: 12.5.d Trend Lines for Drilled Shaft End Bearings in Sand
Clay
unless tests prove otherwise

Eqn: 12.5.K
Eqn: 12.5.L
c average undrained shear strength of the clay (computed 1 to 2 diameters
where =
below the shaft)
ub
for B > 75 in (1.90 m)
b
Eqn: 12.5.M
Eqn: 12.5.N
Eqn: 12.5.O
Immediate Settlements (trendline)

The reference curve is presented in the following Figure. The marks represent the values
proposed by Wang and Reese (1993) and the solid line is the adopted curve. It should
be observed that a considerable scatter is present around the curve.
Reference curve (trendline)
for R ≤ 6.5
Eqn: 12.5.P
for R > 6.5

Eqn: 12.5.Q
Figure: 12.5.e Trend Lines for Drilled Shaft End Bearings in Clay
Intermediate Geomaterial
The design of drilled shafts founded in intermediate Geomaterials draws upon the
FHWA report: Load Transfer for Drilled Shafts in Intermediate Geomaterials .
Intermediate Geomaterials are characterized as one of the following three types:
1. (Type 1) Argillaceous Geomaterials: Heavily overconsolidated clay, clay shale,

saprolite and mudstone.
2. (Type 2) Calcareous Rock: Limestone and Limerock
3. (Type 3) Very Dense Granular Geomaterials: residual, completely decomposed rock,
and glacial till.
Note: Types 1 and 2 are considered to be cohesive materials with an undrained
strength, q in the range of 0.5 to 5.0 MPa.
u
Type 3 is primarily cohesionless and has Nspt from 50 to 100.
Method 1, documented in the FHWA report on Load Transfer for Drilled Shafts in
Intermediate Geomaterials, is applicable for Type 1 and 2 materials. Further, Method 1
has been implemented in FB-MultiPier.
l Valid for IGM Type 1 and 2; 0.5 < q < 5.0 Mpa; Recovery > 50 %;
u
l Appropriate for very short sockets (L/D <2) or very long sockets (L/D>20);
l Where there is strong layering in the formation, or where part of the socket is
artificially roughened and part is smooth
E is the Young’s modulus for the intact sample.

i
E can be taken as 115 q for Type 2 IGM’s and 250 q for Type 1 IGM’s for design
m u u
purposes if modulus measurements are not made, provided that soft seams and open
fractures are not present. – Load Transfer for Drilled Shafts in Intermediate
Geomaterials, pp. 80
A range of typical E values for limestone is 50,000 psi to 300,000 psi.
m
Table: 12.5.B Estimation of E /E based on RQD

m i
RQD E /E E /E
m i m i
(percent) (closed joints) (open joints)
100 1.00 0.60
70 0.70 0.10
50 0.15 0.10
20 0.05 0.05
Note: Values of E /E for RQD values between those shown can be estimated by
m i
linear interpolation on RQD.
Required Data for Drilled Shaft IGM soil type in FB-MultiPier:

l Number of layers
l Thickness
l Unconfined compressive strength, q (MPa)
u
l Mass modulus - E (@ Skin)
m
l Mass modulus - E (@ Tip)
m_tip
l Modulus ratio (E /E )
m i
l Total unit weight of soil, γ (pcf)
l Type of surface (rough or smooth)
l Drilled shaft diameter
l Young’s modulus of drilled shaft
l Unit weight of concrete in drilled shaft
l Slump of concrete in drilled shaft
Step-by-step procedure for Q-Z curve computation of Drilled Shaft IGM in FB-
MultiPier:
Please follow step 1 to 5 as described in the Drilled Shaft IGM T-Z Curve to calculate the
Ω and Γ.
6. Calculate Λ
7. Calculate the tip resistance vs deformation as

12.5.2.7 Custom Q-Z
User can select the "Custom Q-Z" curve option for applying user-defined Q-Z curves to
two columns.
User defined Q-Z data

Z1 Q1
Z2 Q2
Z3 Q3
... ...
Z10 Q10
Where
Zi is the ith Z (axial deflection of pile tip) value on the user specified Q-Z curve.
Qi is the ith Q (end bearing) value on the user specified Q-Z curve.
12.6 Torsional Soil Resistance
Torsional soil resistance is modeled using T-θ springs, where T is the torque applied to
the pile and θ is the angle of twist, in radians. The springs are located at the nodal
points. T-θ springs can be modeled as follows:
1. Hyperbolic Curve
2. Custom T-θ
12.6.1 Hyperbolic Curve
Non-linear T-θ behavior of soil is modeled using a hyperbolic curve formulation, which
smoothly transitions from an initial stiffness (initial slope) and an ultimate resistance
(asymptote). General descriptions for each curve component are given below, followed
by specific equations (including those implemented in FB-MultiPier).
Initial Stiffness
The initial slope of the hyperbolic curve is (in part) a function of shear modulus G.
Engineering judgment should be used when selecting a representative value of shear
modulus, and in-situ test data should be taken into consideration whenever possible.
For scenarios involving relatively undisturbed soils, the small-strain shear modulus
(commonly referred to as G ) might be considered as a candidate for use in modeling
max
soil resistance. Several empirical formulations for estimating G can be found
max
in references such as Kramer (1996), including those specific to cohesive and
cohesionless soils.
Ultimate Resistance
The maximum ordinate value (i.e., the curve asymptote, T ) of the hyperbolic curve is
ult
strongly influenced by the ultimate shear stress (τ ) available at the soil-pile contact
ult
interface. Values for this parameter can be estimated using procedures similar to those
associated with axial skin friction.
Figure: 12.6.a Hyperbolic representation of T- θ curve
For a length of pile ΔL, torque is given by
Eqn: 12.6.A
where:
r = radius of the pile
o
τ = shear stress along ΔL
o
For a long rigid pile embedded in a soil with shear modulus G, Randolph (1981)
deduced the expression for the torque per unit length
Eqn: 12.6.B
This expression does not consider pile tip stiffness. For a long pile, the tip contribution
may be considered negligible.
In FB-MultiPier the following hyperbolic form is used to relate torque (T) to rotation (θ)
Eqn: 12.6.C
where the coefficients a and b are given by
Eqn: 12.6.D
Eqn: 12.6.E
12.6.2 Custom T-θ
User can select the "Custom T-θ" curve option for applying user-defined T-θ curves to
two columns.
User defined T-θ data

θ1 T1
θ2 T2
θ3 T3
... ...
θ10 T10
Where
θi is the ith θ (pile rotation) value on the user specified T-θ curve.
Ti is the ith T (axial stress) value on the user specified T-θ curve.
12.7 Soil Resistance Due to Shaft Rotation
Coupling between axial and lateral soil resistance can be modeled in FB-MultiPier. Soil
resistance due to drilled shaft rotation about the 2 axis and 3 axis operates on t-z data,
and is available for all "Axial" soil model types. However, this feature is recommended
for use in modeling large-diameter drilled shafts (as opposed to relatively more narrow
driven piles) and accounts for the rotational resistance due to the substantial side
friction developed as the shaft bends about the 2 axis and/or 3 axis.
Note: This feature should NOT be used if the lateral soil model "Limestone (McVay)
Uncoupled" is applied. However, this feature may be used if the "Limestone (McVay)"
model is applied. In addition, the axial-lateral coupling feature is ONLY recommended
for use with drilled shaft axial models.
Calculation of bending strains

At each location along the length of the shaft, the total strain consists of an axial and a
bending component. Of interest is the bending strain, ε at any given section of the
b
shaft,
Eqn: 12.7.A
where: ε and ε are the values of the strain on the opposite sides of the shaft.
1 2
Figure: 12.7.a shows in detail how the bending strains are obtained from the measured
strains.
Figure: 12.7.a Total, axial and bending strains on cross-section.
Soil Lateral Resistance P(F/L) from Bending Moments and Skin Friction
The difference in the moment at two different elevations is caused by soil’s lateral (P
force/length) and axial force (T force/length) resistance at the soil-shaft interface. The
contribution to moment in the case of the latter is a function of shaft diameter, and the
soil’s T-Z curve as well as the rotation of the shaft. Shown in the figure below are the
forces acting on a buried element of length dz.
Eqn: 12.7.B
Consequently, from lateral force equilibrium, Figure: 12.7.b, the soil lateral P
(force/length) is found as
Eqn: 12.7.C
If the side shear, T (Figure: 12.7.b), is taken into account, then moment equilibrium
results:
Eqn: 12.7.D
OR
Eqn: 12.7.E
Figure: 12.7.b Forces acting on a buried element of length dz.
where: M = moment on the cross-section

Ms = moment per unit shaft length from the side shear force, T
Evoking horizontal force equilibrium,
Eqn: 12.7.F
Substituting Eqn: 12.7.E into Eqn: 12.7.F, then the soil lateral resistance, P, is obtained:
Eqn: 12.7.G
Evident from Eqn: 12.7.G vs. Eqn: 12.7.C, the side shear on the buried element will act to
shed load away from the lateral resistance, P. The moment/unit length, M , of the side
s
shear is obtained from the T-Z curve for the soil. The value of T requires the
displacement, Z, at a point on the shaft.
Moment Due to Side Shear, M

s
Lateral loading causes a rotation of the shaft at any given cross section. The shaft
rotation is resisted through skin friction, T, and lateral soil resistance, P, acting on the
sides of the shaft. In the case of the unit skin friction, a Moment/length resistance, M ,
s
may be computed at any cross-section. The value of M is a function of the unit skin
s
friction at the periphery of the shaft, which varies around the shaft’s circumference. To
estimate the moment due to side shear (M ), the shaft cross section was divided into
s
slices as shown in Figure: 12.7.c, R is the distance from the center of shaft to the center
i
of slice i. For example R , is the distance from the center of the shaft to the middle of
1
slice 1.
Figure: 12.7.c Shaft cross-section divided into slices to calculate M .

s
The value of shear stress, τ , is a function of vertical displacement, Z , which is a function

i i
of the rotation, θ, and the distance from the center of cross-section to the center of the
slice, R . If Z is the average axial displacement of slice 1 and τ (obtained from T-Z curve
i 1 1
knowing Z ) and C the arc length of slice 1 then the side shear force/unit length, T ,
1 1 1
acting on slice 1 is given by
Eqn: 12.7.H
The moment per unit shaft length about O, M , is found by multiplying T by the
s1 1
distance to the cross-section centroid, R , as
1
Eqn: 12.7.I
The total moment per unit length may be found by summing the moments acting on all
the slices:
Eqn: 12.7.J
where: n = number of slices
13 Pile Cap and Footing Elements
Thick shell finite elements are used in modeling pile caps and footings in FB-MultiPier.
These specialized elements exhibit linear behavior, yet are capable of accounting for
both shear deformations and the drilling degree-of-freedom. The elements derive from
the considerations detailed in the articles listed below.
1. Membrane Element
2. Plate Element
3. Flat Shell Element
4. Mindlin Theory
5. Generalized Stress and Strain
6. Special Element for FB-MultiPier
7. Mesh Correctness and Convergence
13.1 Membrane Element
The membrane element is a flat, constant thickness element. It can be triangular,

rectangular or have curved sides. The element can have configurations of three, four, six,
eight or nine nodes. Whatever the shape or number of nodes, the element has two
translational DOF per node. These DOF must lie in the plane of the element. The results
from the element consist of two normal stresses and a shear stress in the plane of the
element, (see Figure: 13.1.a below). The stress results are given at each corner node in
the element in FB-MultiPier.
Figure: 13.1.a Membrane Stress Sign Convention
Note:
S and S represent in-plane normal stresses. Positive S (as shown in Figure: 13.1.a)
1 2 1
causes tension along the local 1-axis in the membrane element . S and S represent in-
1 21
plane shear stresses along the edges perpendicular to the local 1- and 2-axis,
respectively. Unit of S , S , and S is force per unit area, e.g., ksi.
1 2 12
The difference between element behavior is dictated by the choice of the number of
nodes and hence the number of DOF for the element. The three node triangle has linear
shape functions and hence constant strain and stress. This element is referred to as the
constant strain triangle. The four node element has slightly better response than the
three node element. The six node triangle has quadratic shape functions and linear
stress and strain. The eight and nine node element has better response than the six node
element. FB-MultiPier uses a nine node version for the membrane (in-plane) stresses.
13.2 Plate Element
True plate elements do not include in-plane effects. In-plane effects are handled by
membrane elements. Similarly in a beam element the bending and axial effects are un-
coupled. This is the same in two dimensions. These two elements are commonly merged
to get a complete in and out-of plane element referred to as a Flat Shell Element. We will
discuss a true plate element before discussing the flat shell elements used in FB-
MultiPier. To do this we must cover a small amount of theory.
There are two common versions of plate theory used in finite elements: Kirchoff and
Mindlin. Kirchoff plate bending theory is derived in a similar fashion to beam bending
but includes bending in both directions. The derivation assumes that the normal
displacement, vertical displacement w, controls. In Kirchoff theory the rotation, Θ, in the
plate is the derivative of w. This is the same as beam theory. This means that shear
deformations are ignored. In Mindlin theory, shear is included and the rotation is the
sum of the derivative of w and the shear angle. FB-MultiPier uses a Mindlin formulation.
The results from all plate elements consist of moments. Some plate elements also give
the transverse shear, Q, as a result. It is important to note that the moments and shear
results are per unit length of plate. The following figure (Figure: 13.2.a) gives the sign
convention for moment and shear results.
Figure: 13.2.a Plate Bending Moment Sign Conventions
Note:
M represents flexural moment about the local Y -axis where bending occurs. Positive
1 p
M (as shown in Figure: 13.2.a) causes tension at the top surface of the plate. S
1 13
represents shear force acting out-of-plane along the edges parallel to the local Z -axis.
p
Unit of M , M , and M is moment per unit length, e.g., in-kip/in. Unit of S , and S is
1 2 12 13 23
force per unit length, e.g., kip/in.
Flat Plate elements can be found in three to nine node versions, just like the membrane
elements (see Figure: 13.2.b below). The same concepts of shape function order are true
for the plates as well as for the membrane. Three node triangular plates model
constant moments exactly. Nine node elements model linear moments with some
second order effects. It is important to note that in plates, moments are equivalent to
stress and curvature is equivalent to strain, in terms of modeling. In other words,
we need more elements in a high moment gradient area for plates.
Figure: 13.2.b Common Flat Plate Configurations
13.3 Flat Shell Elements
Shell elements combine the effects of plate bending and in-plane (membrane) effects.
There exist formulations for both flat and curved shell elements. The curved element
formulation is a much more complicated derivation. The flat shell however can be
considered to be merely the addition of the membrane and flat plate elements (see
Figure: 13.3.a below). This is the most common form of shell element found.
Figure: 13.3.a Flat Shell Element as a Combination of Membrane and Plate Element
The flat shell element can be used to model structures where both bending and
stretching effects need to be considered. Many small flat shell elements can be used to
form curved surfaces. The modeling of bridge decks, wide flange beams and curved
shell structures are three such structures where flat shell elements are commonly used.
Figure: 13.3.b Common Applications of Flat Shell Elements
FB-MultiPier uses nine node Mindlin flat shell elements for the pile cap.
13.4 Mindlin Theory
Mindlin theory includes shear deformations. As a result, the normal to the surface
shear does not remain normal. Likewise, the derivative of the shape function for the
normal displacement w(x,y) is not equal to the slope. In Mindlin theory the slope of the
surface is the sum of the derivative of w(x,y) and the shear angle change. Figure: 13.4.a
below shows the relationship between the displacement w(x,y), shear angle γ and the
derivative of the displacement.
Figure: 13.4.a Mindlin Plate Theory

This sum of angles to get the total rotation implies that different shape functions can
be used for the displacement w and the rotations (Θx , Θy). This is the most common
formulation found in flat plate and shell elements used in current computer programs.
This means there will not be rotational continuity across elements boundaries (since
shear exists). Hence the elements are considered to be C elements. The following figure
0
(Figure: 13.4.b) shows this lack of continuity across elements.
Figure: 13.4.b Lack of Rotational Continuity for Mindlin Plate Theory
In either case, the pure plate bending element has three DOF per node; the normal
displacement w and the out of plane rotations (Θx , Θy). These are shown in Figure:
13.4.c below.
Figure: 13.4.c Plate Degrees of Freedom

13.5 Generalized Stress and Strain
In plate theory, most derivations refer to the equations for generalized stress and
strain. This is because the equations for plate behavior can be converted to the form:
Eqn: 13.5.A
Where E* is a modified constitutive matrix. Notice that this is just like the equation for
stress and strain except we have moments and curvature. In plates, the displacement
unknowns are the normal displacement and the two rotations. Following the analogy of
generalized stress, moments are equivalent to stress and curvature is equivalent to
strain. This means when using these elements in modeling, we treat the moment
gradient like we would stress to determine the level of shape function and number of
elements required for an accurate analysis. In addition, the difference in moment at a
common node between two elements indicates the adequateness of the mesh.
13.6 Special Element for FB-MultiPier
Neither the membrane nor the plate element offer normal rotational stiffness. This
means that pile torsion would not be transmitted to the pile cap using a standard
element formulation. To account for this torsional force transfer, special normal
rotational stiffness terms have been incorporated into the shell element formulation.
The stiffness is calculated based on an equivalent beam formulation using the tributary
area of the pier cap over each pile. This is an approximate method offering good
transfer for thick pile caps.
Using the above formulation, the Zp rotational degree of freedom becomes active for
corner nodes of pile cap shell elements. Note, however, that the Zp rotation degree of
freedom is not active for the mid-side and center nodes of pile cap shell elements.
The second enhancement is the use of an eight point gauss integration scheme for the
element. The eight point scheme is a reduced integration scheme offering good shear
integration while avoiding locking problems. The eight point scheme is tuned for the
pile problem so that zero energy modes are removed while still retaining good element
flexibility.
13.7 Mesh Correctness and Convergence
The accuracy of a finite element solution depends on the number of elements and the
order of the shape functions. As the number of elements increase, the piece-wise
displacement approximation approaches any true displacement field. Recall that two
linear elements provided a better response than a single linear element. Also, a single
quadratic element performs even better.
The stress results also follow the same pattern. More elements provide better stress
results. However, since we only guarantee the continuity of the displacements, the
stresses are discontinuous. This means that at a node where two elements meet, the
stresses do not match. However, as the number of elements increase, the stresses
between elements get closer. As an example, below is a plot of the stress along the top
of the cantilever beam. The results are plotted for the four - four node membranes, the
two nine node membranes and the 40 - four node membranes.
Figure: 13.7.a Stress Plot for Cantilever Beam
Notice that for the four - four node elements, the difference between the elements is
28%. This large percentage error indicates a poor mesh (or not enough elements).
Looking at the two - nine node model we see a closer difference. Here the error is
14.0%. This indicates that the mesh is marginal but probably sufficient. Finally we look
at the 40 element model. Here the error is much better and only 3%. The 40 element
model is very good.
The difference in element stresses at a node is an important measure of model

correctness. In general, we do not have the exact displacements in order to check our
model. Hence, the stress check is necessary to verify convergence of our model. If the
difference in stresses between elements is small the finite element mesh is good.
14 Nonlinear Behavior
A discrete element formulation is used to model the nonlinear behavior of piles, pier
columns, and pier cap members in FB-MultiPier. The discrete element accounts for both
constitutive (i.e., material) and kinematic (i.e., geometric) nonlinear behavior. The
nonlinear material behavior is modeled by integrating stress-strain curves over the
cross-section that is applicable to each element. The nonlinear geometric behavior is
modeled using P-delta moments (the product of the axial force and relative
displacements that occur across a given element). Additionally, because pile, pier
column, and pier cap members are discretized into a number of sub-elements, P-y
moments (the product of axial force and bending-induced internal displacements within
a given element) are also accounted for in the discrete element formulation.
1. Discrete Element Model

2. Stress-Strain Curves
3. Confined Concrete Model
4. Bi-axial Interaction Diagram
5. Nonlinear Solution Strategies
14.1 Discrete Element Model
The discrete element model (Mitchell 1973 and Andrade 1994) can be represented as a
mechanical model as shown in Figure: 14.1.a. The center bar can both twist and extend
but is otherwise rigid. The center bar is connected by two universal joints to two rigid
end blocks. The universal joints permit bending at the quarter points about the y and z
axes. Discrete deformational angle changes ψ , ψ , ψ , ψ occur corresponding to the
1 2 3 4
bending moments M2, M1, M4, M3, respectively. A discrete axial shortening
corresponds to the axial thrust T and the torsional angle ψ corresponds to the torsional
5
moment in the center bar M5.
Figure: 14.1.a Discrete Element Model
Salient aspects of the discrete element model are discussed in the links provided below.
1. Element Deformation Relations

2. Integration of Stresses
3. Element End Forces
4. Element Stiffness
14.1.1 Element Deformation Relations
In Figure: 14.1.a, w - w and w - w represent displacements in the x, y and z directions

1 3 7 9
at the left and right ends respectively, w and w represent axial twists (twists about the
4 10
x -axis) at the left and right ends, respectively, and w -w and w - w represent the
5 6 11 12
angles at the left and right end blocks about the x and z axes, respectively. Based on a
small displacement geometric analysis:
Eqn: 14.1.A
Eqn: 14.1.B
The elongation of the center section of the element is calculated as follows:
Eqn: 14.1.C
The angle changes for the center section about the z and y-axes are then defined below:
Eqn: 14.1.D
Eqn: 14.1.E
The discretized vertical and horizontal angle changes at the two universal joints are
then:
;
Eqn: 14.1.F
;
Eqn: 14.1.G
and the twist in the center part of the element is defined as:
Eqn: 14.1.H
Thus, the internal deformations of the discrete element model are uniquely defined for
any combination of element end displacements.
The curvature for small displacements at the left and right universal joints about the y
and the z axes are defined as follow:
At the left joint,
;
Eqn: 14.1.I
At the right joint,
;
Eqn: 14.1.J
The axial strain at the center of the section is given by:
Eqn: 14.1.K
14.1.2 Integration of Stresses
Consider a beam subjected to both bending and axial loads. It is assumed that the
strains vary linearly over the area of the cross-section. This assumption enables the
strain components due to bending about the z and y-axes, and the axial strain, to be
separated or combined using superposition. Examples of these three components are
represented separately in Figure: 14.1.b -(a-c) and combined in Figure: 14.1.b -d. Also
shown in Figure: 14.1.b -d is a differential force, dF , acting on a differential area, dA .
i i
Finally Figure: 14.1.b-e represents the stress-strain relationship for the material.
Figure: 14.1.b Linear Strain Distribution over Square Cross-Section
Then
Eqn: 14.1.L
And, to satisfy equilibrium:
Eqn: 14.1.M
Eqn: 14.1.N
Eqn: 14.1.O
The relationship for strain at any point in the cross-section is:
Eqn: 14.1.P
The stress at any location in the section is found using the appropriate material stress-
strain curve described subsequently.
Numerical integration of equations is done using Gaussian Quadrature. To use the

method of Gaussian Quadrature, the function being integrated must be evaluated at
those points specified by the position factors. These values are then multiplied by the
appropriate weighting factors and the products accumulated. Figure: 14.1.c shows a
square section with 25 integration points (a 5x5 mesh). The number of defaults
integration points for square pile is set at 49 (a 7 by 7 mesh). For circular sections, the
section is divided into circular sections (12 radial divisions and 5 circumferential
divisions as shown in Figure: 14.1.d). The sections are integrated at the centroid of each
sector using weighting factors of 1.0. The stress in all steel bars is evaluated at the
centroid and a weighting factor of 1 is used for each bar.
Figure: 14.1.c Section Integration Divisions - Cross Section of square pile showing
integration points
Figure: 14.1.d Section Integration Divisions - Circular pile cross section showing steel
rebars
When a circular void is encountered in a square section, the force is first computed on
the un-voided section and then the force that would be acting on the voided circular
area is computed and subtracted from the force computed for the non-void section.
Circular sections with voids are divided into sectors omitting the voided portion.
Even for nonlinear material analysis, the torsional moment M is assumed to be a linear
5
function of the angle of twist, Ψ , and the torsional stiffness GJ, where J is the torsional
5
constant and G is the shear modulus as shown next
Eqn: 14.1.Q
14.1.3 Element End Forces
From equilibrium of the center bar (see Figure: 14.1.a):
Eqn: 14.1.R
Eqn: 14.1.S
And from equilibrium of the end bars:
; ; ;
Eqn: 14.1.T
;
Eqn: 14.1.U
; ; ;
Eqn: 14.1.V
;
Eqn: 14.1.W
where f - f and f - f are the acting end forces, and f - f and f - f are the end
1 3 7 9 4 6 10 12
moments.
14.1.4 Element Stiffness
Using the standard definition, the stiffness of an element having n degrees of freedom
(d.o.f.) is a square matrix [K] of order n in which K is the force necessary in the i-th d.o.f.
ij
to produce a unit deflection of the j-th d.o.f. The secant stiffness computed is the
stiffness that the members would have if each of the integration points had the secant
stiffness defined by dividing the present stress by the present strain as shown in the
following figure.
Figure: 14.1.eSecant Stiffness for Nonlinear Stress-Strain
During the iteration process the element stiffness matrix is reevaluated in each new
deformed position. For each iteration, initially the secant stiffness is stored at all
integration points within an element. Then on 12 subsequent passes a unit displacement
is applied to each element degree of freedom in turn keeping all other displacements as
zero and the forces corresponding to that unit displacement are calculated by
integrating the stresses over the cross-section of the element as described earlier. The
previously stored secant moduli at each of the Gaussian integration points are used in
this integration of stresses. The element end forces thus computed would be the nth
column of the stiffness matrix corresponding to a case where the nth degree of freedom
has a unit displacement imposed, all other displacements being held to zero.
14.2 Stress-Strain Curves
The user may define their own stress strain curves for concrete and steel or use the
default values described below.
1. Concrete
2. Mild Steel
3. High Strength Prestressing Steels
4. Adjustment for Prestressing
14.2.1 Concrete
The figure below shows the default stress-strain curve used by FB-MultiPier in
determining internal demands for concrete portions of member sections in nonlinear
analyses. The function values are dependent upon f' and E , as input by the user. Note
c c
that this stress-strain model incorporates tension stiffening, and is applicable for
unconfined normal weight concrete with compressive strengths of approximately 41
MPa (6,000 psi) or less (MacGregor and Wight 2005).
The tensile portion of the curve is assumed as linear up to a stress of f . Piece-wise linear
r
tension softening is modeled out to a tensile strain of 0.002, and no tensile stress
contribution is modeled for tensile strains greater than 0.002. The tension softening
portion of the stress-strain curve is intended to account for the uncracked portions of
in-tension concrete sections, which are capable of carrying some non-zero level of
tensile stress. The value of f is based on the fixed value of ε shown in the figure below,
r r
and the modulus of elasticity E input by the user. For English units this will give a value
c
of f of 7.5 √f' .
r c
The compression portion of the concrete curve is highly non-linear, and is defined by
the Modified Hognestad parabola. For compressive strains bounded between the strain
at peak compressive stress (ε ) and the ultimate compressive strain (ε ), a linear
0 cu
descending curve segment is employed. For any members that generate compressive
strain levels exceeding ε , the stress level is estimated using linear extrapolation. For
cu
instances where such large compressive strain levels are reached (or for other instances
where the default curve may not be applicable), users are recommended to supply a
user-defined stress-strain curve. Additionally, confined concrete model is available.
Figure: 14.2.a Default Stress-Strain Curve for Concrete
14.2.2 Mild Steel
For mild steel reinforcement the stress-strain relationship is assumed to be elastic-

plastic and similar in both tension and compression. A yield strain ε is computed based
y
on the yield stress, f and the modulus of elasticity input E ,
y s
Eqn: 14.2.A
The default relations for the mild steel stress-strain curve are given by,
Eqn: 14.2.B
Eqn: 14.2.C
Eqn: 14.2.D
The default stress-strain curve generated for steel with f' =60 ksi and E =29600 ksi is
y c
shown in the figure below.
Figure: 14.2.b Mild Steel Stress-Strain Curve for F = 60 ksi.
y
14.2.3 High Strength Prestressing Steels
The figure in mild steel shows reinforcing as rebars. However, the user may select high
strength reinforcing strands as well as rebars. The stress-strain curves for prestressing
steels generally do not have a definite yield point as illustrated by the curve for f =
su
270 ksi in the figure below. The most common values of f used in prestressing
su
practice are f = 250 ksi and 270 ksi. For these two input values when using standard
su
(English) Units, the curves defined by the PCI Design Handbook (PCI 1992) will be used.
For other strengths or when using nonstandard units, the default curves will be
obtained by using non-dimensional equations based on curve fitting the two cited
curves. These curves are not recommended for use for values of f that fall outside of
su
the range of standard values.
Figure: 14.2.c Prestressing Steel Stress-strain Curve for f = 270 ksi.

su
14.2.4 Adjustment for Prestressing
When piles are prestressed prior to installation, there are stresses and strains existing at
the time of installation due to the prestressing. The program shifts the origin of the
stress-strain curve for the steel by the amount of the prestressing stress in the steel and
the corresponding steel strain. Also, the program shifts the origin of the concrete stress-
strain curve by the amount of compression in the concrete and the corresponding
concrete strain. It is assumed that the prestressing is symmetrically placed and thus only
a constant compressive stress is developed in the concrete due to the prestressing.
14.3 Confined Concrete Model
Confinement options available in FB-MultiPier were introduced in "Circular Section

Properties".
Introduction
Effective confinement has been shown to considerably enhance the compressive
strength and ductility of concrete. The strength and ductility enhancement from
confinement of the concrete will of course cause corresponding increases in the axial
and flexural strength and ductility of reinforced concrete columns or piles. The confining
effect of the column or pile may be accomplished through the use of circular hoops,
spiral reinforcement, and an external steel jacket.
In the case of internal confinement i.e. spirals or circular hoops, the cover concrete will
be unconfined and will become ineffective after the maximum compressive strain of the
concrete has been attained, but the confined core will continue to carry stress at high
strains. The compressive stress-strain response used for the core and cover concrete are
those obtained by the Mander model (Mander et al. 1988) for confined and unconfined
concrete, respectively.
In the case of an external jacket, the jacket will provide confinement to the cover
concrete and the inner concrete will be doubly confined by the jacket and the internal
confinement due to the circular hoops or spirals. The compressive stress-strain
response used for the core and cover concrete are those obtained by the modified
Mander model. The Mander model was modified to account for confining effects
associated with steel jacketing, as documented in Priestly et al. (1996).
14.3.1 Mander Models for Confined Concrete
Both the Mander (Mander et al. 1988) and modified Mander (Priestley et al. 1996)
models use the following equation for the longitudinal compressive stress of confined
concrete:
Eqn: 14.3.A
where
f’ is the compressive strength of the of confined concrete
cc
x is given by:
Eqn: 14.3.B
The expression suggested for ε’ increases linearly with f ’ and is given by:
cc cc
Eqn: 14.3.C
where
f’ is the unconfined compressive stress of the concrete
co
ε’ is the unconfined concrete compressive strain, adopted as 0.002
co
The parameter r is given by:
Eqn: 14.3.D
Figure: 14.3.a Confining Effect on Compressive Response of Concrete
E is the tangent modulus of elasticity for unconfined concrete and is given by:
c
Eqn: 14.3.E
A linear tension region is included in the stress-strain relationship, which follows the
tangent modulus of elasticity, E , up to a tensile strain of 0.0001316, where this strain
c
level is consistent with the default concrete model in FB-MultiPier.
E is the secant modulus for confined concrete, defined with respect to f ’ and ε’
sec cc cc
and is given by:
Eqn: 14.3.F
For f ’ , the confined concrete strength, Mander used the five-parameter failure
cc
criterion proposed by William and Warnke and the tri-axial test data of Schickert and
Winkler. In the case of circular columns confined by circular hoops or spirals, the
confined concrete compressive stress has been shown to be:
Eqn: 14.3.G
where
f ’ is effective confining pressure, and may be obtained from the equilibrium of internal
l
forces acting on the dissected sections shown in Figure: 14.3.b.
For the cover concrete in columns, assuming uniform yield of the jacket, the equilibrium
of forces requires:
Eqn: 14.3.H
where
f’ is the lateral confining pressure acting on the cover concrete
lj
D is the outside diameter of the steel jacket
j
t is the thickness of the steel jacket
j
f is the yield strength of the steel jacket
yj
Figure: 14.3.b Confining Action of Steel Jacket and Internal Hoops [4]
The confining ratio for the steel jacket is defined as:
Eqn: 14.3.I
Substituting into Eqn: 14.3.H we obtain
Eqn: 14.3.J
By using f ’ = f ’ in Eqn: 14.3.G, the compressive strength of the cover concrete

l lj
confined by the steel jacket can be determined.
Additional confinement is provided to the concrete core by the transverse

reinforcement. The additional lateral pressure, f ’ , may also be determined from the
lh
equilibrium of forces. Assuming uniform yield of the transverse steel yields the
following equation:
Eqn: 14.3.K
where
d is the diameter of the concrete core defined along the center line of the confining
s
steel
s is the vertical spacing of the transverse steel
f is the yield strength of the transverse reinforcement
yh
A is the cross-sectional area of the transverse steel
sh
The confinement effectiveness coefficient, k , is defined as:

e
Eqn: 14.3.L
where
A is the area of an effectively confined concrete core
e
Eqn: 14.3.M
where
A is the core area of the section
c
ρ is the ratio of the area of longitudinal reinforcement to the confined area of the
cc
concrete core of the section A , i.e.:
c
Eqn: 14.3.N
where
A is the total longitudinal steel area .
s
By assuming an arching action between circular hoops in the form of a second -degree
parabola with an initial tangent slope of 45o, the confinement effectiveness ratio has
been shown to be:
Eqn: 14.3.O
where
s’ is the clear distance between the hoop.
Similarly, the confinement effectiveness coefficient for a circular spiral has been shown
to be:
Eqn: 14.3.P
By introducing ρ as the ratio of the volume of transverse confining steel to the volume
s
of confined concrete i.e.:
Eqn: 14.3.Q
Figure: 14.3.c Definition of Confinement Effectiveness Coefficient [4]
Eqn: 14.3.R
The lateral confining pressure due to transverse steel in Eqn: 14.3.J may be written as:
Eqn: 14.3.S
Thus using f ’ =f ’ + f ’ in Eqn: 14.3.G will allow the enhanced compressive strength of
l lj lh
the concrete core to be determined.
Basic assumptions for flexural resistance are given in AASHTO 5.6.2.1, with
considerations for confined sections. It is stated therein that the maximum usable strains
exceeding 0.003 may be used in computing nominal flexural resistance, if verified. For
the purposes of computing interaction diagrams of confined sections in FB-MultiPier, a
conservative approach is taken:
1. For sections that are confined using only hoops or spirals, the limiting strain value of
0.003 is utilized when forming load-moment interaction diagrams.
2. For sections that are confined using casing (both CFT and RCFT sections), the limiting
strain value recommended in Bjerkeli et al. (1990) is utilized when forming load-
moment interaction diagrams (Figure: 14.3.d). In the Bjerkeli et al. (1990) formulation, fu
is designated as the maximum compression stress achieved, and ε is designated as the
u
corresponding strain. In FB-MultiPier, the stress-strain curve associated with the
outermost concrete is utilized in defining the limiting compressive strain (again,
conservatively taken as ε ). The approach implemented in FB-MultiPier produces
u
limiting compressive strain values that agree with values computed using other
empirical formulations (e.g., Scott et al; 1982) for reinforcement ratios of approximately
1%.
Figure: 14.3.d Depiction of ε given in Bjerkeli et al. (1990)
u
Note: In contrast to formation of load-moment interaction diagrams, the full stress-

strain curve defined for a given material is utilized in solving for internal forces and
displacements.
14.3.2 Unconfined Concrete
For the concrete outside the inner core when a steel shell is not used , the unconfined
condition may be simulated by setting the lateral confinement pressure equal to zero, i.e
f’ = 0. The following simplifications can be made to the prior equations:
l
Eqn: 14.3.T
Eqn: 14.3.U
Eqn: 14.3.V
Eqn: 14.3.W
It is assumed that the stress-strain curve for unconfined concrete follows Eqn: 14.3.X
during the earlier stages of loading up to 2ε’ . Also, a linear tension region is included
co
in the stress-strain relationship, which maintains the same modulus as the initial
compressive portion of the curve, up to a tensile strain of 0.0001316. This limiting
tensile strain is consistent with the default concrete model in FB-MultiPier.
For compressive strains larger than 2ε’ , the strains are assumed to decrease linearly
co
with strains up to the spalling strain ε . A value of 0.005 has been adopted for ε . The
sp sp
longitudinal compressive stress for unconfined concrete may be written as:
For ε <= 2ε’ ,

c co
Eqn: 14.3.X
For 2ε’ < ε <= ε ,
co c sp
Eqn: 14.3.Y
For ε > ε
c sp
Eqn: 14.3.Z
14.3.3 Reinforcement
To avoid congestion of reinforcement, earlier design practices tended to use large

diameter bars, up to #14 or #18, however, such practice may lead to potential bond
problems in cases where the column main reinforcement were lapped at insufficient
length with starter bars in the plastic hinge regions. Consequently, such columns are
characterized by very rapid flexural strength degradation under the design seismic
loads. The current Caltrans (1981) approach has been to avoid lap splicing of the main
reinforcement in the potential plastic hinge region of bridge columns. The analytical
model developed here assumes full yield of the main reinforcement including strain
hardening.
14.3.4 Longitudinal Reinforcement
The monotonic uniaxial stress-strain curve of a typical reinforcing steel is shown by an

elastic region, a yield plateau, a strain hardening region, followed by a falling branch
after peak stress up to the strain at which fracture occurs. A typical stress-strain curve
for the reinforcing steel is shown in Figure: 14.3.e.
The monotonic uniaxial stress strain curve for reinforcing steel is defined by the
following equations:
For the elastic range, i.e. ε <= ε

s y
Eqn: 14.3.AA
Where
ε is the axial strain in the reinforcing steel
s
f is the stress in the reinforcing steel
s
E is the modulus of elasticity of the reinforcing steel
s
For the yield plateau, i.e. ε < ε < ε ,

y s sh
Eqn: 14.3.AB
where
ε is the axial strain at the on-set of strain hardening
sh
f is the yield stress of the reinforcing steel
y
Figure: 14.3.e Mild Steel Stress-Strain Curve (Priestley et al. 1996)
For the strain-hardening range, i.e. ε <= ε < ε

sh s su
Eqn: 14.3.AC
where
ε is the ultimate strain in the reinforcing steel
su
f is the ultimate stress in the reinforcing steel and
su
Eqn: 14.3.AD
Eqn: 14.3.AE
It has been shown by Mizra and MacGregor (1979) that the ratio of ultimate to yield
strength was f /f = 1.55. The steel model adopted for the program assumes a
su y
modulus of elasticity of 29,000 ksi and a slightly lower ultimate to yield strength ratio of
1.50. The other mechanical properties assumed for the stress strain model are:
For all grades of steel,
Eqn: 14.3.AF
Eqn: 14.3.AG
where
f is equal to 40 for ksi units. This would be converted to any other consistent set of
yl
units
The above equations are non-dimensional, allowing the model to be used with any
grade steel. They were obtained by interpolating from the values given by (Priestley et
al. 1996) for 40 and 60 ksi steel.
It should be noted that the tangent modulus at the onset of strain hardening may be
obtained by taking the derivative of Eqn: 14.3.AC with respect to steel strain, ε and
s
operated at the strain-hardening strain, ε :
sh
Eqn: 14.3.AH
14.3.5 Transverse Reinforcement
Closely spaced transverse reinforcement in regions of severe inelastic actions will

maintain the integrity of the concrete core and increase the rotational capacity of the
column. Maintaining the integrity of the core also allows higher shear forces to be
resisted by the concrete. The potential shear failure plane must intersect a large quantity
of transverse reinforcement, which increases the shear resistance. Lateral stability of the
longitudinal reinforcement is improved by the presence of the closely spaced hoops or
spiral reinforcement. The hoops or spiral acts as anti-buckling ties to allow full
compression yield of the mild steel to be developed. The integrity of the core and mild
steel ensures the vertical load carrying capacity of the column after a severe earthquake.
The effective use of the transverse reinforcement also requires careful detailing of
spirals or hoops. Current usage may entail welding at the lap splices of the spiral or
hoop, or bending back of these bars into the concrete core for anchorage in order to
develop full yield capacity. Design practice prefers the use of since fewer anchorages are
required for spirals when compared to hoops. The transverse reinforcement in earlier
design practice, however was often anchored with lap splices in the plastic hinge
regions where serious spalling of the cover concrete is expected. The loss of cover
concrete may initiate unwinding of the spirals or hoops and renders the transverse
reinforcement ineffective. The model used here assumes full development of the
transverse steel strength at the ultimate condition.
14.3.6 Steel Jacket
The role of the steel jacket for a column is similar to that of the transverse
reinforcement. The jacket prevents the spalling of cover concrete and allows the
development of large compressive strains in the mild steel without buckling. The shear
strength of the encased region is also enhanced.
Although the commercially available structural steel for steel jackets has yield strengths
ranging from 36 ksi to 50 ksi or higher, the level of confining pressure required does
not generally require yield strength greater than 36 ksi. Suitable steel for the jacket is
the A36 hot-rolled, which has relatively low carbon content (from 0.25 to 0.29%). The
low carbon content provides a good welding property, which is important for on-site
welding of the steel jacket.
Grout
The propensity for shafts with casing to robustly exhibit composite behavior is
supported by experimental research (NCHRP 2018). Therefore, it is assumed that the
steel jacket is fully bonded to the reinforced concrete column to facilitate composite
action. It is further assumed that the strength of the grout is the same as that of the
concrete column.
Voids in members
While voids are allowed in the general analysis procedures used in FB-MultiPier, the
reduction in the beneficial effects of confinement due to voids in columns and piles are
not considered in the Mander and modified Mander models used FB-MultiPier.
Examples
Several example columns are analyzed and comparisons are made between the
experimental results, the results obtained from FB-MultiPier program with those
produced by the COLRET computer program.
In the analysis performed with FB-MultiPier, to achieve the large post yield
displacements on the flat portion of the P-D curves, a spring was placed at the tip of the
column.
The force plotted is the force absorbed by the column attached to the spring. This is a
technique called displacement control.
14.3.7 Full-Scale Column without Steel Casing
The example used in the comparison was a full scale (60" diameter) flexure column
tested by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (Stone and Cheok, 1989).
The column represents the current ductile design for bridge columns. The design details
for the column are described in Table below. The test column was subjected to an axial
compression force of 1000 kips and a lateral cyclic displacement of increasing
amplitudes until failure of the column.
Table: 14.3.A Design details for Full-Scale Flexure Column

Diameter D 60"
Height L’ 30'
cover to main bar 4"
Concrete Strength f’ 5.2 ksi
co
Longitudinal Steel 25 #14
Yield Strength f 68.9 ksi
y
Transverse Steel #5 Spiral at 3.5"
yh
Axial Force 1000 kips
Figure: 14.3.f Force Deformation Curve for Full Scale Column
The force deformation curve for the full-scale column is given in the figure above. As
can be seen from the figure, the data from FB-MultiPier program is generally close to
both the COLRET values and the experimental data. For the majority of the curve the FB-
MultiPier values are less than the COLRET values. Also, it is noted that the initial stiffness
of the response is higher from the CORLET than obtained from the FB-MultiPier
Analysis and the measured response.
14.3.8 Half Scale Column With Steel Retrofitting Jacket
The second example analyzed for comparison purposes was a test column with a 24"
diameter. It is retrofitted with a steel sleeve that has a length of 48 inches. The design
details for the column are shown in the table below.
Table: 14.3.B Design details for Column With Steel Jacket

Diameter D 24"
Height L’ 12'
Cover to Main Bar 4"
Concrete Strength f’ 5.2 ksi
co
Longitudinal Steel 26 #6
y
Transverse Steel #2 hoops at 5 in.
yh
Length of Jacket 48"
Thickness of Jacket .188"
Yield strength of Jacket 47 ksi
Axial Force 400 kips
Figure: 14.3.g Force Deformation Curve for Jacketed Column
The force-deformation curve for the jacketed column is given in the figure above.
Looking at the results, we can see that FB-MultiPier provides a close estimation of the
experimental and COLRET curves until the post yield region of curve where we see a
reduction in the lateral load capacity predicted by FB-MultiPier in comparison to the
experimental and COLRET values. It is also noted that the CORLET program show
slightly greater strengths than that for the test.
14.3.9 Discussion
A model for the prediction of the non-linear response of circular concrete piles with
confinement has been presented. More details on the model are available in Stone and
Cheok (1989) .
This model has been incorporated into FB-MultiPier to facilitate modeling of concrete
members confined by hoops, spirals, and/or a steel jacket.
In the comparative studies conducted, the FB-MultiPier results show generally less of an
increase in strength and ductility than those given by the COLRET program. This is due
to the following differences between the FB-MultiPier program and the CORLET
program:
1. 14.3.1 computing the maximum concrete strain, ε , whereas COLRET uses a more
cu
complex procedure that was only documented for grade 40 and grade 60 steel. FB-
MultiPier is more conservative, and is applicable for any grade of steel.
2. The COLRET program assumes the entire area contained within a diameter ds is
confined in integrating the stresses over the column area, whereas FB-MultiPier
conservatively uses only the effectively confined area of the core.
3. In the case of an external steel jacket, the longitudinal stiffness of the jacket may (or
may not) be neglected, at the discretion of the engineer. For the analysis results
presented, the stiffness was neglected, whereas for the confined model in the COLRET
program, steel jacket stiffness is taken into account.
The above three differences promote conservatism in FB-MultiPier.
14.4 Interaction Diagrams
Assumptions and Features for the Biaxial Interaction Diagram

The strength routines compute section strength under axial force and internal bending
moments about the two principle axes for a prestressed or non-prestressed reinforced
concrete and steel cross sections which can be used for both columns or piles. The
analysis routine computes the section moments, M and M , and axial force, P and
nz ny n
multiplies these by the appropriate strength reduction (φ) factors which are discussed
later for steel and concrete.
It is assumed that the user inputs the appropriate factored loads (service-level loads
times load factors). The analysis routines then compute the factored moments, M and
uz
M , and axial force, P , acting at each section. The strength routines indicate whether
uy u
the section is adequate or not adequate. This information can be displayed graphically
on an interaction diagram of moments for a given level of axial force or found in the
output as a single factor, called a Demand/Capacity ratio, DC. The details of how the DC
is calculated will be discussed later. If the DC is less than or equal to one, this indicates
the section is safe for the applied factored moments and axial force.
The interaction diagram routines do not consider any long column or stability effects
that are important for slender members. However, if the nonlinear analysis option is
selected for the piles and the structure, then the slenderness effects through the P and
Δ
P moments are considered in the computation of the factored axial force and moments
y
as discussed earlier. Thus the direct use of the interaction diagrams using the linear
analysis option for the piles and structure could be very unsafe for slender members.
The option to use the interaction diagrams and linear analysis of the piles and structure
is provided for preliminary design phases and must not be used for a final design.
Also it should be noted that the nonlinear analysis procedures while very thorough may
not reflect all of the criteria required for design of slender structures in appropriate
codes. A list of factors that may affect the final design that are not considered in the
analysis are as follows:
1) Creep in concrete.
2) Initial imperfections or out of straightness of members.
3) Residual stresses.
4) A separate analysis phi factor to account for the possibility of undersized members.
All of the factors could potentially increase the defections and thus the P and P
Δ y
moments above those given by the nonlinear analysis routines and should be
accounted for by the designer as appropriate.
The routine operates by computing numerous horizontal slices of the P , M , M

n nx ny
(nominal strength) interaction surface. The result is a series of M , M interaction
nx ny
curves for various magnitudes of axial load, P . Next, each interaction curve is
n
represented in the form.
Eqn: 14.4.A
The moments M and M represent the nominal moment strength at axial load, P , for
0z 0y n
uni-axial bending about the z and y axes respectively. The exponents, α and β are
computed in by the least squares method. They enable the above expression to fit the
computed interaction curve, and vary with axial load. The actual DC is computed, by
interpolation for the axial force P /φ using the stored values of axial force and
u
exponents, α and β. The program then computes the parameter, DC, as; the ratio of the
length of the vector for the actual forces (in 3-d space – M , M and P) divided by the
ux uy
length of the vector with the same direction as the actual results but with that vector
touching the 3-D failure surface. This has the effect of assuming that the moments and
axial load will increase proportionally until failure.
Note that the routines handle square, rectangular or circular sections with prestressed
or non-prestressed steel and H-piles that themselves may be encased in concrete. The
capabilities and limitations of sections were discussed in detail earlier in the User Guide.
The interaction diagrams for all sections that contain concrete are handled in a similar
manner and will be discussed next. Then the case of the H-pile section without concrete
will be discussed last.
Sections with Reinforced or Prestressed Concrete.

The routine assumes a planar strain distribution across the section. The criterion for
section failure is that the concrete reaches the crushing strain ε (ε = -0.003 in/in) at
cu cu
one corner of the section. This conservatively ignores any effect of the ties or spiral
reinforcement on the compressive strength or crushing strain of the concrete.
All tensile stresses in the concrete are neglected. This includes both tension in uncracked
regions and tension stiffening in cracked regions.
AASHTO doesn’t permit the design of a perfectly axially loaded column. A certain
minimum eccentricity of load must always be included. This is accomplished by limiting
the applied factored axial force, P , to a factor times P , where P0 is the nominal capacity
u 0
of the section in an axially loaded column. For a tied column, this maximum load is
0.8φP , while for a column with spiral reinforcement the maximum load is 0.85φP .
0 0
When a factored load, P , larger than these limits is input to the routine, the routine
u
responds that the section is inadequate.
The routine also includes a maximum axial tension for a section based on all the mild
steel bars attaining the yield stress f for mild steel and all the prestressing strands
y
attaining the ultimate stress f . If the factored P exceeds this maximum tension force
su u
the routine responds that the section is inadequate.
Solutions for α and β for approximately 30 points between the maximum compressive
and tensile forces are attempted. The values of axial force are obtained for strains in the
extreme bar farthest away from the corner of the section where limiting (tensile and
compressive) reinforcement (mild and prestressed) strains are taken in accordance with
those values given in Sec. 5.7.2.1 of the AASHTO LRFD code.
The strength reduction factor, φ, is determined according to the unified requirements

for prestressed and nonprestressed concrete of AASHTO - LRFD. In these requirements,
the magnitude of φ is based on the net tensile strain occurring in the most heavily
strained steel bar or strand when the nominal strength of the section is attained (when
the concrete crushes). The net tensile strain is that portion of the steel strain associated
with the development of tensile strain in the concrete adjacent to the steel bar or strand.
For nonprestressed steel, the net tensile strain is exactly the total strain in the steel. For
prestressed steel, the net tensile strain is the total strain in the steel minus the sum of
the effective prestress strain in the steel and the effective prestress strain in the concrete
adjacent to the steel. The latter term can be thought of as the decompression strain.
The factor φ can be obtained for net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel in
nonprestressed reinforcement by linearly interpolating between 0.75 (at compression
controlled reinforcement strain limit ε ) to 0.90 (at tension controlled strain limit ε ).
cl tl
Whereas the factor φ for prestressed reinforcement can be obtained for net tensile
strain in extreme steel by linearly interpolating between 0.75 (at compression controlled
strain limit ε ) to 1.00 (at tension controlled strain limit ε ). (Refer to Sec. 5.5.4.2.1 in the
cl tl
AASHTO LRFD code).
H-piles embedded in concrete are treated as if fully bonded to the concrete and are thus
treated just as if they were an equivalent group of a large number of small rectangular
reinforcing bars.
H-piles without Concrete

Interaction diagrams for H-piles that are not embedded in concrete are calculated under
the following assumption: the cross section can undergo full plastic section behavior. As
a consequence of this assumption, the engineer should independently check that local
buckling effects will not adversely affect the behavior of the member under the applied
loads. Given the assumption of full plastic section, a range of axial forces (with 30 data
points) is obtained by locating the neutral axis in successive positions across the depth
of the section.
Steel-Only Sections
Interaction diagrams of steel sections such as H-pile and pipe pile sections are based on
development of the full plastic section. Steel code requirements for local buckling effects
must be checked for design purposes.
14.4.1 Demand/Capacity Ratio for Cross Sections
FB-MultiPier calculates the demand/capacity ratio for each cross section used in the
analysis. The Demand/Capacity ratio as well as the interaction diagram are only
calculated when full cross sections are specified (either linear with full cross section or
nonlinear). The Demand/Capacity ratio is an estimate of the percentage of the cross
sections' capacity that has been reached for that particular loading state. The
Demand/Capacity ratio is calculated as the length of the vector for the current load state
divided by the length of the vector when it pierces the failure surface.
Figure: 14.4.a Biaxial-Moment Interaction Diagram calculations for Demand/Capacity

Ratio
The actual result vector is the current set of forces that the cross section is experiencing
due to the applied load. The surface piercing vector length assumes that the applied
loads will be increased proportionally until the cross section fails. This assumption
implies that the result state (P,M ,M ) will also increase proportionally until the cross
x y
section fails. As a result, the surface piercing point is found by extending the length of
the result vector along its known direction until it pierces the failure surface.
Typically, a cross section Demand/Capacity ratio is calculated by taking the M -M
x y
diagram for a constant axial load P. This is equivalent to the shaded slice of the 3-D
failure surface. Then the Demand\Capacity ratio is calculated as the (M ,M ) vector
x y
length divided by the point at which the extended vector will touch the failure curve.
This assumes that the axial load will remain constant. While conservative, it is not very
realistic. In indeterminate structures, all forces interact and in order for the moments to
increase, the axial load must also increase. For pile groups, this is caused by the frame
action of the group which changes the axial load in the piles due to a changed lateral
load.
14.5 Nonlinear Solution Strategies
A program such as FB-MultiPier, which takes nonlinearity into account can be used to
provide some very good models of physical behavior. However, the use of nonlinear
analysis programs implies that the user understand the nonlinear models very
thoroughly. The nonlinear models are described in the program documentation and it is
assumed that the user is familiar with these. However, the user should also understand
that the use of the nonlinear characteristics of the program may cause the program to
be unable to converge on a solution for a particular loading and that in some cases
described later, nonlinear programs may converge on a mathematical solution that isn’t
physically reasonable.
A novice user may then be tempted to say that one should stick to linear programs and
avoid such difficulty. However, the counter argument can be made that a linear analysis
will almost always find a solution even if the user puts in a totally unreasonable loading.
For the sake of discussion, assume that a relatively simple structure is being modeled by
FB-MultiPier, perhaps even a single pile cap with one or two piles with some vertical
load applied which is held constant and then a lateral load is applied gradually. Several
different scenarios of lateral load versus lateral displacement are possible as shown in
the following figure.
Figure: 14.5.a Different Types of Load Displacement Response
The most desirable nonlinear response of the structure is shown as case 1. The load
displacement response starts to soften at about point a or b, reaches a peak load at c
and has an essentially flat top that show very good ductility. This is primarily due to
yielding of the structure at several locations in the piles possibly combined with similar
action in some of the supporting soil layers. However, if the user should put in a load
above that corresponding to point c, it is obvious that a solution will not be found.
Likewise if a load near c is tried, it is possible that the solution will be very slow to
converge and may fail if a large number of iterations are not allowed.
This failure to converge can be avoided by doing a preliminary linear pile analysis and
then checking the strength ratios of the pile to see if they are all less than 1. However,
the capacities of the soils springs should be considered as well. It should also be noted
that solutions may be found where the pile strength ratios are greater than 1.0. This is
primarily because the analysis program does not use capacity reduction factors as are
used in generating the strength ratios.
The response indicated by case 2 is not as good as shown in case 1. The difference is
that some element in the soil or the pile has a very limited ductility and causes the
collapse of the structure before sufficient ductility is obtained. As examples, a section of
the pile could be under reinforced and fail when cracking or a section could be over
reinforced and fail when the concrete fails in compression without adequate yielding of
the steel. Numerous other causes are possible such as premature shear failure and the
designer must insure that these failure modes do not prevent adequate ductile
response, since they are not considered in the analysis. As in the type 1 response the
user may encounter difficulties when trying to apply loads near the level of the capacity.
Suppose the designer wants to demonstrate that the behavior is indeed type 1 versus
type 2. A push over analysis could be done and this requires a displacement-controlled
solution. A large spring would be placed at the node where the lateral load is applied
and then a series of large loads would be applied. The spring would take the larger
amount of the load but by properly choosing the spring stiffness and load, the
displacements could be controlled and the load absorbed by the structure could be
found and the pushover results plotted.
In rare instances the response of a structure may resemble that shown for case 3. Here
at a load near d the curve flattens and may even decrease. However, for increasingly
large displacements the load may start to rise again. It will be very difficult to obtain
converged solutions for loads near d. However, if a much larger load is applied a
solution may be found on the curve well above d. This type of behavior generally occurs
when some type of local failure occurs. If the structure has sufficient ductility it may then
be able to find a new path to distribute the forces and carry some additional load, albeit
with a considerable reduction in stiffness. An example of this type of behavior is when
the gravity loading is small and because of a large lateral load a pull out occurs on one
of the piles. The question then arises, should the design based on the post pull out
behavior be used?
Clearly the use of nonlinear analysis programs do not remove the responsibility of the
designer to monitor the local responses of the structure. Fortunately the program
outputs detailed information about the behavior of the soil and pile that can and must
be reviewed before a structure can be said to be adequate.
Finally, case 4 in which the structure appears to move against the loads must be
considered. For very slender structures with very large gravity loading, the stiffness of
the structure will go negative when the elastic buckling loading of the structure is
exceeded. Again this is a rare case and would almost never happen for a designer
evaluating a real structure. However, someone trying the program out with arbitrary
dimensions and loads might create such a condition and then be disturbed that the
program is giving obvious unreasonable results. A linear analysis program would of
course produce even more possibly dangerous results; it would indicate a positive
displacement, which would then not give any indication that something was wrong with
the structure.
15 Dynamic Behavior
The dynamic behavior used in FB-MultiPier is explained in detail in the following topics:
1. Analysis Type
2. Time Stepping Parameters
3. Dynamic Relaxation
4. Damping
5. Global Mass
6. Time Functions
7. Dynamic Soil Properties
8. Structural Material Behavior
9. Seismic Soil-Structure Interaction
15.1 Dynamic Analysis Types
FB-MultiPier contains transient dynamic (time-history) analysis features for analyzing

structural response under time-varying loads. Transient dynamic analysis enables
structural response to be determined when inertial and/or damping effects are
considered to be significant. Correspondingly, the equation to be solved in dynamic
analysis contains mass and damping terms, in addition to those of stiffness and external
load :
Eqn: 15.1.A
where is the mass matrix; is the nodal acceleration vector; is the damping
matrix; is the nodal velocity vector; is the stiffness matrix; is the nodal
displacement vector; and, is the external force vector.
For a given structural system, the solution to Eqn: 15.1.A is necessary to determine
structural response to external loading . However, for systems that possess
kinematic nonlinearity; constitutive nonlinearity; many degrees-of-freedom (DOF); or
any combination thereof, the obtainment of a direct analytical solution to Eqn: 1.1.A is
not feasible. In place of a direct analytical solution, FB-MultiPier employs implicit time
integration algorithms to obtain a numerical solution of Eqn: 15.1.A. Specifically, in FB-
MultiPier, both the Newmark and Wilson-Theta methods are available for finding the
numerical solution to Eqn: 1.1.A at user-specified, discrete time increments (i.e., time-
steps, Δ ). See Fernandez (1999) for details regarding the theory and implementation of
t
these methods in FB-MultiPier.
Determination of time-step Δ :
t
An important property of the implicit dynamic time-integration methods in FB-MultiPier

is that these methods are implemented so as to be unconditionally stable: for a given
structural system, the numerical solution will not diverge solely due to the selection of a
very large time-step, Δ , for the analysis. It is important to note, however, that other
t
factors (e.g., loading a nonlinear system beyond the system capacity) can still result in a
lack of convergence for a given analysis. Furthermore, numerical stability in the
implemented time-integration methods does not guarantee a numerically accurate
solution. The following expression is recommended in Tedesco et al. (1999) for
determining an appropriate time-step for a given implicit time-integration analysis, with
consideration of accuracy:
Eqn: 15.1.B
where (sec) is the smallest period of interest in the analysis.
Transient loading
Transient loading can be specified as an arbitrary set of nodal load-histories, , in
FB-MultiPier. Such loading is readily handled by the time-integration methods
implemented in FB-MultiPier, given that a proper time-step Δ has been selected.
t
Modal Analysis
The Modal Response feature uses the static loads to determine a nonlinear equilibrium
state, and then feeds the corresponding stiffness matrix [K ] into an eigenanalysis
static
process, as part of the overall modal response analysis.
Importantly, none of the displacements from static loading {d }, internal forces from
static
static loading {F }, or applied static loads {F } are directly used in the eigenanalysis
i ext
process. These quantities are only used when determining the stiffness matrix that
equilibrates the applied static load.
The eigenanalysis takes ONLY the stiffness matrix from the static analysis [K ], the
static
system mass matrix [M], and solves for the mode shapes and frequencies. These mode
shapes and frequencies are then paired with the spectral acceleration values that are
supplied to build up the modal response. The only portion of the modal response that
"knows" about the static loading is the stiffness matrix. The displacements and modal
response forces determined from the modal analysis ONLY arise from pairing the mode
shapes and frequencies with the acceleration spectrum.
If the engineer wishes to account for both the response to the static loading and the
response due to the acceleration spectrum, then the displacements and internal forces
from the static analysis will need to be combined with the displacements and forces
from the modal analysis. For example, the square-root-sum-of-squares of a
displacement or internal force of interest could be combined at identical locations from
among the two analyses.
15.2 Structural Material Behavior
The user may define their own stress strain curves for concrete and steel or use the
default values described below.
1. Concrete (Nonlinear Elastic)

2. Concrete (Hysteretic)
3. Steel Reinforcement (Hysteretic - Bilinear)
4. Steel Reinforcement (Hysteretic - Strain Hardening; Bauschinger Effect)
15.2.1 Concrete (Nonlinear Elastic)
Overview
For nonlinear dynamic (time-history) analysis, frame element cross sections are divided
into fibers for the purposes of integrating stresses and calculating element internal
forces. The default constitutive behavior for concrete portions of cross-sections in
nonlinear dynamic analyses is that of nonlinear elastic behavior. Alternatively stated, the
default approach in mapping concrete strains to stresses is such that no deviation
occurs from the “backbone” curve. While this approach increases the likelihood of
convergence for a model, no hysteresis occurs within concrete fibers.
Stress-strain curve description

The default stress-strain curves for concrete portions of structural members are
described here (for unconfined concrete cross-sections) and here (for confined concrete
sections ). Alternatively, FB-MultiPier permits user-defined input of stress-strain curves
for concrete portions of frame element cross sections. In this latter case, the user-
defined stress-strain curve is treated as the “backbone” curve (but with no deviation
from the backbone curve).
Return to the Structural Material Behavior page.

15.2.2 Concrete (Hysteretic)
Overview
forces. Hysteretic behavior can be incorporated into the constitutive behavior of
concrete portions of cross-sections in nonlinear dynamic analyses. Alternatively stated,
an option is available to introduce behaviors such as unloading, reloading, and
softening of concrete fibers while conducting time-history analyses. Incorporating
hysteresis increases model fidelity with respect to that of physical systems containing
concrete members. However, the incorporation of concrete hysteresis may limit the
circumstances under which convergence can be reached.

The default stress-strain “backbone” curves for concrete portions of structural members
are described here (for unconfined concrete cross-sections) and here (for confined
concrete sections ). Alternatively, FB-MultiPier permits user-defined input of stress-
strain curves for concrete portions of frame element cross sections. In this latter case,
the user-defined stress-strain curve is treated as the “backbone” curve. The algorithm
governing deviations from the backbone stress-strain curve is adopted from Yassin
(1994) .
Accessing the feature in the User Interface (UI)

The concrete hysteresis option may be activated by navigating to the ‘Advanced’ dialog,
located on the ‘Dynamics’ page. From within the ‘Advanced’ dialog, check the ‘Concrete
Hysteresis’ option. Note that this option, when activated, applies to all nonlinear frame
elements in the model.

15.2.3 Steel (Hysteretic - Bilinear)
Overview
forces. The default constitutive behavior for steel portions of cross-sections in nonlinear
dynamic analyses is that of a bilinear approach to modeling hysteresis. Alternatively
stated, the default approach in mapping steel strains to stresses is such that deviations
from the input stress-strain curve (i.e., the “backbone” curve) adopt a slope that is equal
to the initial slope of the backbone curve.

The default stress-strain curves for longitudinal reinforcement within structural
members are described here (for mild steel bars) and here (for prestressed tendons).
Alternatively, FB-MultiPier permits user-defined input of stress-strain curves for steel
portions of frame element cross sections. In this latter case, the user-defined stress-
strain curve is treated as the “backbone” curve (where all deviations adhere to the initial
tangent stiffness of the backbone curve).

15.2.4 Steel (Hysteretic-Strain-Hardening; Bauschinger Effect)
Overview
forces. The option to incorporate relatively more advanced hysteresis behavior into steel
portions of cross-sections is available for nonlinear dynamic analyses. Specifically, in
contrast to the (default) Steel-Bilinear hysteresis modeling approach, phenomena such
as strain-hardening and the Bauschinger effect can be included among the simulated
steel unloading, reloading, and material evolution behaviors.

The stress-strain “backbone” curves for steel portions of structural members are
described in Filippou et al. (1983), where only the Young’s modulus and yield stress
need to be specified. Alternatively, FB-MultiPier permits user-defined input of stress-
strain curves for steel portions of frame element cross sections. In this latter case,
parameters that satisfy the curve given in Filippou et al. (1983) are derived from the
user-defined stress-strain curve.
Accessing the feature in the User Interface (UI)

This option may be activated by navigating to the ‘Advanced’ dialog, located on the
‘Dynamics’ page. From within the ‘Advanced’ dialog, check the ‘Steel Hysteresis (Strain-
Hardening and Bauschinger Effect)’ option. Note that this option, when activated, applies
to all nonlinear frame elements in the model.
15.3 Time Stepping Parameters
Three time step integration techniques are available in FB-MultiPier:

1. Average Acceleration (Newmark);
2. Linear Acceleration (Newmark) ; and,
3. Wilson-Theta.
See Tedesco et al. (1999) for details regarding each technique. For a selected time step
integration, the time step size (sec) and the number of time-steps must additionally be
input.
15.4 Dynamic Relaxation
When conducting a static analysis, the application of permanent loading, , is typically

trivial. During static analysis, the structure achieves static equilibrium between the
product of stiffness and displacements in response to the application of .
However, to analyze the structure dynamically, careful consideration of permanent
loads, , is necessary.
Dynamically, an abrupt application of self weight loading is unrealistic, and furthermore,
can lead to undesired dynamic response. In Figure: 15.4.a, an example of improper
dynamic self-weight load (w) application is given to demonstrate that instantaneous
application of permanent loads can lead to exaggerated structural response. Inertial
forces caused by motion of the single-degree of freedom (SDF) mass push the system
far beyond the static displacement, u . By applying the load w abruptly, the maximum
st
dynamic displacement, u , is 100% larger than that predicted by a static analysis.
max
Additionally, the excessive displacement leads to amplified internal forces, , and
potentially, unwarranted inelastic deformations.
Figure: 15.4.a Dynamic amplification due to instantaneous application of load (w).
When a bridge structure is loaded in this manner (i.e., through instantaneous application
of ), vertical oscillations result in amplified internal forces, , in the pier columns
and piles. Furthermore, if transient loads, , are additionally applied, vertical
oscillations due to the suddenly applied can exaggerate the dynamic structural
response. The erratic pier behavior caused by instantaneous application of renders
any assessment of structural response—such as determining maximum internal forces
or load-moment interaction—unreliable.
The dynamic relaxation feature is used in FB-MultiPier to facilitate staged loading in
transient dynamic analysis by initializing the dynamic system such that it is in
equilibrium with an arbitrary set of permanent, or static, loads (e.g., gravity loads), .
When dynamic relaxation is employed, the equation of motion (recall Eqn: 15.1.A) is
initialized as:
Eqn: 15.4.A
where is the initial nodal acceleration vector; is the initial nodal velocity vector;
is the stiffness matrix obtained from a static pre-analysis; is the nodal
displacement vector obtained from the same static pre-analysis; and, is the initial
transient load vector. It is important to note that and are assumed to be constant
throughout the analysis.
As expressed in Eqn: 15.4.A and shown in Figure: 15.4.b, for dynamic relaxation,
structural response to is initialized by means of a static pre-analysis. Meaning, two
distinct analyses are conducted—one static analysis (with only applied), and one
dynamic analysis, where both and are applied. Statically, once the structure
reaches equilibrium, the stiffness matrix and displacement vector are stored.
These quantities are then used to define the initial state for a time-domain analysis. In
the dynamic analysis, is applied instantaneously. However, because the dynamic
terms and are initialized to and , respectively, the abrupt application of
does not cause undesired vertical oscillations. It is important to note that
remains constant throughout the dynamic analysis, even though updated , , ,
, and quantities are present in the equation of motion after the first numerical
solution iteration.
Figure: 15.4.b Dynamic analysis using stiffness and displacements from

static pre-analysis to properly initialize structural response to
Examples of dynamic relaxation:

The emphasis of the following discussion is placed on the utility of employing the
dynamic relaxation feature as a means of introducing self-weight loading into a
dynamic structural analysis. Selected demonstration cases are presented to illustrate the
effectiveness of dynamic relaxation in mitigating structural response amplification
(when such amplifications should not be present). Models of a single pile, single pier,
and partial bridge configuration are used for the demonstration cases (shown in the
figures below). The models were analyzed (with only self-weight—gravity and
buoyancy—loading) using three methods: static analysis, dynamic analysis with
instantaneous gravity loading, and dynamic analysis with static pre-analysis.
In the following, displacements at pertinent locations within each structure are
compared for the three analysis types. Specifically, for the single pile model, vertical
displacements are compared at the pile head; for the pier/bridge models, vertical
displacements are compared at the pile cap center node of pier 1.
Single square pile:

Displacements for the 30”x 30” prestressed pile were found to be:
Figure: 15.4.c Single square pile displacements.
Single pier:
Displacements for the single pier model were found to be:
Figure: 15.4.d Single pier displacements
Three-pier partial bridge:

Displacements for the three-pier partial bridge model were found to be:
Figure: 15.4.e Three-pier model displacements (pier 1 is the rearmost pier).
For each of the above cases, employment of dynamic relaxation also produces system
axial forces that are in-line with those obtained statically. This is in contrast, however to
those obtained from a non-restart dynamic analysis, as shown in Figure: 15.4.f.
Figure: 15.4.f Total soil reaction (at analysis termination time) per model and analysis
type.
15.5 Damping
The following forms of damping can be defined:
1. Global Damping : The user can specify global damping through the Dynamic Page
For time step integration dynamic analysis:
Rayleigh damping coefficients are inputted.
The Rayleigh damping mass (i.e., alpha) and stiffness (i.e., beta) coefficients can be
supplied for each of:
a. Pier structural members;

b. Pile structural members; and,
c. Soil Springs
See Tedesco et al. (1999) for details regarding calculation of the Rayleigh damping
coefficients.
For modal response analysis:

Damping in proportion to critical damping is input. Damping can be incorporated into
the system by supplying the damping level.
where the damping level is the percentage of critical damping (between 0% and 100%)
for the fundamental vibration mode of the system.
2. Concentrated dampers. These dampers are applied using the Mass/Damper Page.
3. Hysteretic damping. This form of damping is available when gap modeling is enabled
for the lateral soil response as well as for nonlinear pile and pier material behavior.
Refer to "Dynamic Soil Properties" for more details.
15.6 Global Mass
Consistent Mass (distributed) mass is used in FB-MultiPier.
15.7 Time Functions
For a given time step integration analysis, one of four different types of load-time
functions can be utilized:
1. Applied Load vs Time;

2. Applied Acceleration vs. Time;
3. Applied Acceleration vs. Time (All Nodes);
4. Vessel Collision
For options 2, and 3, above, the acceleration through time is specified in relation to g
(e.g., 9.81 m/sec2 or 386.2 in/sec2). As a result, the acceleration for a given time (t) is
prescribed as:
Acceleration(t) = (g)*(Time Function Ordinate)
For options 2 and 3, ‘acceleration’ is a base excitation (i.e., support excitation). Recall the
externally applied transient force term, {F(t)}, within the equation of motion (see Section
15.1 ). For options 2 and 3, the term {F(t)} is formed as the product of the system mass
matrix [M] and -{z (t)}. In turn, {z (t)} is an array with entries populated using the defined
Acceleration Time Function(s) for the nodal DOF(s) in the model. For option 2, the
entries of {z (t)} are zero-valued, except for the DOF that have been assigned as being
subjected to base excitation. For option 3, all entries of the of {z (t)} vector are equal to
the Acceleration Time Function ordinates.
Note: For models utilizing the English unit system, and for instances where the RX,
RY, or RZ degrees of freedom are activated, then the units of the Load Function for these
degrees of freedom is kip-in/sec.
For response spectrum analysis, spectral acceleration is utilized:
1. Spectral Acceleration vs Period
15.8 Dynamic Soil Properties
The following parameters can be input for each soil layer of a model where transient
dynamic (time-history) soil behavior is anticipated.
1. Number of Cycles
Number of cycles is associated with modeling soil degradation of P-Y curves. This
parameter defines the number of loading cycles needed to reduce the P-Y curve
ordinate (i.e., P) values such that these ordinates fall 50% of the way between upper
bound values and lower bound values. In this context, the upper bound P values are
taken from the original input P-Y curve. The lower bound values are determined by
scaling the P-Y curve ordinates using the “Soil Degradation Factor”.
The input value of the “Number of Cycles” should be determined based on the soil type
and system natural frequencies. For details, see "Sudip Basack. 2007".
Note that the “Number of Cycles” parameter must be greater than 1, and requires input
of the "Soil Degradation Factor".
2. Soil Degradation Factor
The soil degradation factor is associated with modeling of soil degradation of P-Y
curves. This parameter is used to scale the ordinate (i.e., P) values of soil P-Y curves, and
establish a lower bound (or fully degraded) P-Y curve, to mimic fully degraded soil
behavior.
Note that the “Soil Degradation Factor” should be less than 1.0.
During time-history analyses, cyclic degradation of P-Y curves proceeds as follows:
During the first displacement response cycle of a P-Y curve, the original input P values
are utilized to model soil resistance. For each displacement response cycle subsequent
to the first, the P values of effected P-Y curves are scaled down in accordance with the
“Number of Cycles” and “Soil Degradation Factor”. More specifically, when the number
of displacement response cycles reaches the “Number of Cycles” value, then the P
values of effected P-Y curves will be taken as the average of the original input P-Y curve
P values (as an upper bound) and the P values scaled by the “Soil Degradation Factor”
(as a lower bound). At an infinite number of displacement response cycles, the P values
of effected P-Y curves will be scaled to match the fully degraded P-Y curve. For all other
displacement response cycles, the P values of the P-Y curve will gradually transition
from original, to 50% degraded, to fully degraded.
3. Shear Wave Velocity

Shear Wave velocity can be used in conjunction with Load Frequency to model load rate
effects (see Load Frequency below). Also, Shear Wave Velocity can be used in the
calculation of "Radiation Damping".
4. Load Frequency
When input along with shear wave velocity, then the methodology proposed by "El
Naggar and Bentley. 2000" will be used to account for load frequency effects.
Note: Restrictions within a given soil layer: If "Number of Cycles" and "Soil
Degradation Factor" are input, "Load Frequency" should not be used.
5. Force-Dependent Soil Damping Factor

The Soil Damping Factor is used to directly impose damping behavior into subsurface
nodes. At the end of any time step numbering two or greater, the global damping matrix
entries corresponding to degrees of freedom of subsurface nodes are updated by:
A. Cataloging the soil reaction forces and moments.

B. Scaling the cataloged soil reactions by the soil damping factor.
C. Cataloging the change in the step B products, between the current time step and the
previous time step.
D. Updating the corresponding entries of the global damping matrix using the
quantities obtained from Step C.
6. Soil Gap
Users can incorporate soil gapping into dynamic analyses. Refer to Chapter 9 of
"Consolazio et al. 2006" for details about how this feature incorporates hysteresis into
the soil behavior.
Radiation Damping:
Radiation damping of embedded nodes is utilized within the FB-MultiPier engine when
global damping is active (by checking the ‘Damping’ checkbox on the "Dynamics Page"),
but the mass and stiffness (Rayleigh) damping coefficients for the Soil are both defined
as ‘0.0’. Note that radiation damping is only imposed on horizontal translations using
"Boulanger et al. 1998". The damping coefficient (C) is calculated for each layer. Then,
the number of nodes that reside within each layer are determined. Finally, the damping
coefficient (per soil layer) is evenly distributed across those nodes that reside within
each layer.
C = 4·d·(ɣ / GF)·SW
Eqn: 15.8.A
where,
d = Effective diameter of the pile section.
ɣ = Unit weight of the soil.
GF = Gravity factor = g · (Scale Factor); g = 9.81 m/sec2 or 386.2 in/sec2; Scale Factor =
user input in the Dynamic Page.
SW = Shear wave velocity of soil.
15.9 Seismic Soil-Structure Interaction
Seismic soil-structure interaction can be modeled in an uncoupled manner using the

“substructure” procedure (Wolf 1985). In this context, “uncoupled” indicates that the
overall analysis is performed in two stages:
1) Computation of free field motions; and
2) Computation of pile-superstructure response.
During the first stage, free field motions are computed independently by performing
site response analysis using available software packages such as SHAKE (Schnabel et al.
1972). The computed ground motions (e.g., displacement-time histories) are then
prescribed at nodal locations in the foundation system model, corresponding to
nonlinear p-y elements. In turn, p-y elements consist of two major components:
1) Nonlinear p-y springs
2) Linear-viscous dashpots
The nonlinear p-y springs permit modeling of nonlinear soil-structure behavior and
associated hysteretic damping. As described below, the nonlinear p-y springs account
for soil gapping, cyclic degradation, and rate effects. A linear viscous dashpot is used to
model radiation damping. The rheology of the p-y element implemented in FB-MultiPier
is shown in Figure: 15.9.a. In this configuration, the dashpot is attached to the p-y spring
in a parallel configuration. In the sections below, it is described how the original static p-
y spring (backbone curve) evolves to account for possible soil gapping, cyclic
degradation, and rate effects.
Figure: 15.9.a Nonlinear p-y element components
Soil Gapping
Soil gapping is modeled based on the recommendations of O’Neill et al. (1997) and
Brown et al. (2001). The soil gapping component is shown in Figure: 15.9.a by opening
and closure springs. The original static p-y curve and the final evolved curve is
illustrated in Figure: 15.9.b. As the pile load is reversed at a given displacement level, the
soil reaction unloads along a path parallel to the loading path, which produces
hysteretic damping. When the soil reaction reaches zero, no further reaction is
generated until the displacement of the pile at that location (node) reverses.
Subsequently, the curve follows the loading path in the opposite direction. Then, upon
load reversal in the opposite direction, a mirror image effect is generated, except that no
further soil reaction is generated until the deflection reaches the value of deflection
corresponding to the width of the gap in the previous cycle. Then, loading occurs along
the previous soil. For more details on modeling the soil gapping in FB-MultiPier, refer to
Fernandes Jr. (1999) and Consolazio et al. (2006).
Figure: 15.9.b p-y Method for modeling cyclic degradation and hysteretic damping in
soil (Brown et al. 2001)
Cyclic Degradation
Increasing cyclic shear strains in soil reduces shear modulus and increases material
damping. Increasing the number of cycles in undrained cyclic loading further degrades
the overall stiffness and strength of soil with degradation rate increasing with cyclic
shear strain. Soil cyclic degradation can affect the strength properties of the soil and,
therefore, influence soil-structure interaction (Taghavi et al. 2017). In FB-MultiPier, the
effects of soil cyclic degradation on the p-y curves is considered through the use of Eqn:
15.9.A (Brown et al. 2001; O’Neill et al. 1997):
Eqn: 15.9.A
where,
λ is the soil degradation parameter specified by the user;
pc is the soil resistance for the current cycle of loading;
pp is the value of resistance corresponding to the present value of y on the previous
cycle of loading;
pd is the fully degraded value of p at the present value of y.
The fully degraded p-y curve can be obtained by multiplying a degradation factor (input
given by the user) by the initial p-y curve. A typical value for the soil degradation
parameter, λ, can be obtained using Eqn: 15.9.B (Fernandes Jr. 1999):
Eqn: 15.9.B
where,
N50 is the number of cycles that would be necessary to degrade the soil by 50 percent.
This parameter is site-specific and can be obtained through laboratory tests or from
cyclic lateral load tests on piles. The degraded p-y curve is shown in Figure: 15.9.b.
Strain Rate Effect

When soil is subjected to dynamic loading, cyclic degradation can occur simultaneously
with an increase in the apparent soil resistance caused by rapid rates of loading
(Ishihara 1996; Kramer 1996). In FB-MultiPier, once the cyclic degradation has been
accounted for, the rate effect can be computed using Eqn: 15.9.C (Brown et al. 2001;
O’Neill et al. 1997):
Eqn: 15.9.C
where,
pi is the instantaneous soil resistance considering both cyclic degradation and loading
rate effects;
pc is the resistance considering only cyclic degradation;
tr is the actual rate of loading in Hz;
ts is the corresponding rate of loading (in Hz) appropriate for standard slow cyclic
loading (typically 0.01 to 0.1 Hz);
F2 is a soil factor, which can be taken as 0.01 - 0.03 for sand, 0.02 - 0.07 for silts, 0.02 -
0.12 for clays, and 0.01 - 0.03 for calcareous soils.
Radiation Damping
Whenever the pile moves against the soil, outgoing stress waves are generated which
carry away some of the energy transmitted from the pile to the soil. The loss of this
energy is the mechanism of radiation damping. Radiation damping is modeled in FB-
MultiPier through the use of dashpots attached to the p-y springs in a parallel
configuration. Berger et al. (1977) assumed that the horizontally moving pile only
generates P-waves in the direction of moving (shaking) and SH-waves perpendicular to
the shaking. Based on this definition and the recommendations of Gazetas and Dobry
(1984), the viscous dashpot coefficient is defined by:
Eqn: 15.9.D
where,
vs is the shear wave
vp is P-wave velocities
Clay can be nearly incompressible in undrained loading conditions, and the P-wave
velocity can become large, leading to unrealistic excessive damping calculated from Eqn:
15.9.D. To avoid this, the Berger model is modified in Eqn: 15.9.E (Wang et al. 1998) and
implemented in FB-MultiPier:
Eqn: 15.9.E
16 Equivalent Stiffness Formulation
1. Equivalent Stiffness Generation

2. Coordinate System Conversion
16.1 Equivalent Stiffness Generation
FB-MultiPier can be used in two ways to calculate equivalent stiffness for models. The
most versatile method is to navigate to the “Analysis” page, and supply a node of
interest in the “Stiffness Options” region. In this way, FB-MultiPier can be used to
calculate system stiffness at a node of interest for pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, and pile
bent model types, and across load cases. The second method for calculating equivalent
stiffness for models is by selecting the “Stiffness” model from the “Model Type” list. This
second method is retained purely for backwards compatibility, and limits both the
loading and the node of interest to the (geometric) center pile cap node of a pile and cap
model. The following discussion emphasizes use of the more versatile method
(“Analysis” page → “Stiffness Options”) for calculating equivalent stiffness of a model.
The equivalent stiffness feature is typically used to estimate the collective, nonlinear
stiffness of a foundation structure, while capturing stiffness contributions from
structural members (pier columns, piles) and soil. The equivalent stiffness is reported in
the FB-MultiPier text output (.out) file for a single point (node), and therefore, consists of
a 6x6 matrix. The user can select any node within the pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, or
pile bent model for which the equivalent stiffness matrix is of interest, and the matrix
terms will be automatically calculated for each load case.
The equivalent stiffness at a node is calculated as follows:

1. The model (pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, or pile bent) is analyzed based on the
applied loading.
2. After the solution is obtained for the applied loading, the program uses the
equilibrium-state stiffness matrix to calculate a flexibility matrix at the location (node) of
interest, following general principles. To do that the program internally applies unit
forces at the selected node of interest. The unit forces are applied successively in all six
possible directions (F , F , F , M , M , M ).
x y z x y z
3. The displacements obtained from each successive unit-load application at the selected
node comprise the columns of the flexibility matrix (e.g., the displacements from the
solution under the application of the F unit load comprise the first column of the
x
flexibility matrix).
4. The off-diagonal terms are averaged to ensure symmetry.
5. After the flexibility matrix is obtained, the program calculates the matrix inverse,
which constitutes the equivalent stiffness at the node of interest.
6. Finally, the program reports both the flexibility and equivalent stiffness matrices.
It is worth repeating that the equivalent stiffness matrix is calculated after the
equilibrium state of the structure is obtained. This calculation order is necessary since
models generally contain nonlinear elements (e.g., soil springs). Therefore, the
equilibrium state is used as a “snapshot” of the system conditions under the applied
loads.
If the program were to obtain the equilibrium solution prior to calculating the
equivalent stiffness, then the calculation of the equivalent system stiffness would be
incorrect. This is because the program would be using information for a state of the
structure other than the load-induced equilibrium state.
For example, consider the pile and cap model shown below. If the center of the cap is
subjected to increasing horizontal loads, then the load-deformation curve generated
using FB-MultiPier is produced. Importantly, the slope of the load-deformation curve
produced using FB-MultiPier changes as the applied load changes. The slope changes
because FB-MultiPier accounts for the various kinematic and constitutive nonlinearities
of the system in using a secant stiffness approach to solve for system equilibrium.
Therefore, the system stiffness matrix that is supplied to the equivalent stiffness
algorithm is obtained from a secant stiffness approach. Accordingly, the equivalent
stiffness approach accounts for changes to system stiffness that arise from the applied
loading.
Figure: 16.1.a Comparison of load-deformation behavior obtained from FB-MultiPier
versus a constant stiffness approach.
Given below is a step by step guide to obtain a stiffness matrix for any node selected in
a pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, and pile bent model.
Step 1: Select new model type and click on "Pier" model type. This will open a default
pier model in FB-MultiPier (See Figure: 16.1.b)
Figure: 16.1.b Selecting New Model Type.
Step 2: Click on the stiffness node in "Stiffness Options" Panel on "Analysis" Page. For
this example, Node 17 is selected (see Figure: 16.1.c)
Figure: 16.1.c Activating the stiffness node option
Step 3: If the equivalent stiffness matrix output is desired to be oriented in a particular

manner, open the ‘Coordinate System’ dialog (see Figure: 16.1.d). The transformation
procedure is discussed in Sec. 16.2 , although any transformation matrix that satisfies
orthogonality and linear independence can be specified.
Figure: 16.1.d Coordinate System dialog for defining coordinate transformation matrix
Step 4: Run the analysis and review the output file for the stiffness data (see Figure:
16.1.e). Note that the data are printed for each load case (or load combination). The data
include unaveraged flexibility terms, averaged flexibility terms, condensed (or
equivalent) stiffness in the FB-MultiPier coordinate system. Further, the transformation
matrix and transformed stiffness matrix are also reported.
Figure: 16.1.e Equivalent stiffness data in the output file
Ensuring Distribution of Large Concentrated Loads

Engineers commonly utilize the Equivalent Stiffness feature to facilitate representation
of a foundation system (e.g., Pile and Cap) in software external to FB-MultiPier. In such
instances, the “connection” between the FB-MultiPier model and the external software
may be limited to a small number of locations, such as the interfaces between the pile
cap and the pier columns. Accordingly, large concentrated loads are often applied within
the FB-MultiPier model at nodes corresponding to these “connection” locations (e.g., pile
cap nodes).
For the above conditions, the engineer is encouraged to take modeling steps that ensure
distribution of the large, concentrated loads throughout the model. For example, the
engineer may distribute the load to nodes that lie within the physical plan-footprint of
the pier column location(s). As another example, the engineer may make use of the FB-
MultiPier feature that permits increasing the stiffness of selected pile cap elements (Sec.
3.2.2 ). As a third example, if the large, concentrated loads are applied to a relatively
thick, monolithic pile cap, then the modulus of the cap could possibly be increased to
reflect the relatively rigid system component. Importantly, the engineer should use
discretion when modifying the model to better distribute large, concentrated loads.
Further, the engineer should ensure that the elected modifications maintain fidelity to
the physical system.
By taking the above into consideration, highly localized (and, possibly, non-physical)
deformations are less likely to develop for elements located in close proximity to the
“connection” locations between the FB-MultiPier model and the externally modeled
system components. Further, and critically, proper distribution of the applied loads
allows for the Equivalent Stiffness feature to better capture the overall system response,
precisely because the stiffness condensation procedure will not be unduly influenced by
the localized effects of large, concentrated loads.
Permitted Load Locations for the Stiffness Model Type

In contrast to the relatively more generalized equivalent stiffness procedure discussed
above for single pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, and pile bent models, when the “Stiffness
(Pile and Cap)” pile-and-cap model type is employed, the program only permits loading
to be applied to the center of the pile cap. Further, in association with use of the
“Stiffness” feature, the equivalent stiffness is calculated at a special “stiffness node”
located at the center of the pile cap, and only for a single load case. It is therefore
imperative, when the “Stiffness” model type is utilized, that the engineer makes sure that
the resultant of the loads from the superstructure (bridge pier) passes through the
center of the pile cap.
Note: For the "Stiffness (Pile and Cap)" model type, four rigid links are included in the
model, where these rigid links join the loaded pile cap node and nodes of the four
adjacent pile cap shell elements. These links are included to facilitate transfer of large-
magnitude concentrated loads across the physical footprint of column members.
16.2 Coordinate System Conversion
The following explanation shows how to convert a 6x6 stiffness matrix from the FB-
MultiPier global coordinate system to a standard coordinate system defined below.
Figure: 16.2.a FB-MultiPier Coordinate Figure: 16.2.b Standard Coordinate

System System
A 3x3 transformation matrix (T) is first defined to show how the two coordinate systems
are related.
Which can be stated as [d] = [T][D]

This shows that x maps to X, y maps to Z, and z maps to –Y.
The same transformation matrix [T] is then used to transform the stiffness matrix from
the FB-MultiPier coordinate system to the standard 3D coordinate system as follows.
Eqn: 16.2.A
This requires 2 matrix multiplications to obtain the transformed stiffness matrix. This
can be easily done using either Excel or MathCad.
As a result, to convert the FB-MultiPier stiffness to a standard coordinate system, use the
following.
Note: Both the locations and signs change for some of the stiffness terms.
Example
The FB-MultiPier stiffness matrix is given by
Then the stiffness matrix in the standard coordinate system would be.
To transform the 6x6 stiffness matrix generated by FB-MultiPier from the 2D x-z
coordinates system to a standard 2D X-Y coordinate system.
Figure: 16.2.c FB-MultiPier Coordinate Figure: 16.2.d Standard Coordinate
System System
The following transformation is used to transform the stiffness matrix from the FB-
MultiPier coordinate system to the standard 2D coordinate system as follows.
Eqn: 16.2.B
As a result, to convert the FB-MultiPier stiffness to a standard coordinate system, use the
following.
17 Engine Input Users Guide
1. Engine Input Overview

2. Global Headers
3. Substructure-Specific Headers
17.1 Engine Input Overview
The engine input parameters are divided into two categories. The Global headers
category describes control data for the entire model. The Pier Specific headers category
describes data that is specific to a particular pier in the model.
Character Limits Per Line

An individual line is limited to 160 characters. However, a continuation symbol "\" can
be supplied at the end of an individual line to indicate that the next line is to be
interpreted by the engine as a single line of data. For lines interpreted in this manner, a
total of 4,000 characters is permitted. For example, 25 adjacent lines could each contain
160 characters and still be interpreted as a single line by the engine as long as the first
24 lines ended with the continuation symbol "\".
Substructure-Specific Data
For bridge models, data specific to each substructure is separated in the input file by a
special header, as follows:
__PIER#x
Where
x Pier number
17.2 Global Headers
1. Model Data
2. Print Control
3. General Control
4. Program Settings
5. User Defined Coordinate System
6. User Defined Extra Member End Fixity
7. Multiple Pier Substructure Information
8. Superstructure Information
9. User Defined Bearing Connection
10. Self Weight and Buoyancy Load Factors
11. Bridge Spring Toggle
12. Pushover
13. Minimum Pile Tip Embedment
14. Bearing Reactions Due to Span Self Weight
15. PreLoad
16. Combination (AASHTO)
17. Modify Load Factors
18. Dynamic Control Parameters
19. Dynamic Step by Step Integration
20. Spectrum Analysis
21. Global Dynamics
22. Girder and Slab Cross-section Dimensions
23. Span Concentrated Nodal Loads
24. Span Thermal Data
25. Span Thermal Load Case
26. One Pier Two Span (OPTS)
27. One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Span End Spring
28. Span Mass
29. Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)
17.2.1 Model Data
PROBLEM
Problem Title
Units
Client
Project Name
Project Manager
Date
Completed By
Description
The first two lines* are reserved for user information - TITLE, DATE, JOB NUMBER, .... etc.
For instance, the second line usually serves as a reminder to the user of the units that
were used to create the input file. The above lines are always required.
Note: a comment line can be added anywhere in the input file by simply placing a C
in column 1 of the line.
17.2.2 Print Control
The following two lines specify the data to be printed to the output file. These lines are
always required.
PRINT
L=L1 M=M1 D=D1 O=O1 S=S1 P=P1 T=T1 F=F1 C=C1 B=B1 J=J1 H=H1 I=I1
R=R1 N=N1 X=X1 G=G1 A=A1 E=E1 K=K1 Q=Q1 V=V1 W=W1
Any of the values: L1,M1,D1... etc. can be either 0 or 1. Setting a value to 1 enables its
printing. Setting the value to 0 turns off the printing of that data block. The default is =0
(NO print). Only the options desired (=1) are required. A SUMMARY OUTPUT TABLE
WILL ALWAYS BE PRINTED.
Where
L1 is the flag for printing of the Pile and Structural coordinates.
M1 is the flag for printing the pier material properties.
D1 is the flag for printing the pile displacement.
O1 is the flag for the out of balance forces.
S1 is the flag for the soil response forces.
P1 is the flag for the pile element forces.
T1 is the flag for the pier columns and pier cap displacement.
F1 is the flag for the pier columns and pier cap force output.
C1 is the flag for the pile cap stress/moment output.
B1 is the flag for the bridge simulation spring force output.
J1 is the flag for the bridge span element displacements.
H1 is the flag for the bridge span element forces.
I1 is the flag for printing the interaction diagrams.
R1 is the flag for printing section stress-strain data.
N1 is the flag for printing missing pile information.
X1 is the flag for XML data printing. This is used in conjunction with the Model Data
Report Generator for data extraction.
G1 is the flag for the pile material properties.
A1 is the flag for the soil data per layer.
E1 is the flag for the soil data per pile node.
K1 is the flag for printing soil resistance curves.
Q1 is the flag for the printing span properties.
V1 is the flag for printing Eigen-analysis results.
W1 is the flag for printing span temperature input data and loading.
17.2.3 General Control
The following lines are required and specify global control parameters.
CONTROL line 1
NUMLC U=U1 F=PROT S=S1 N=NPLNOD J=OPTSSPRINGSMASSES
K=NSTIF C=CASECOMBFLAG P=PRELOAD R=NPUSH E=DYTPE L= CASING_SKIN_
FRICTION W=SPANTEMPERATURE H=DYRELAX I=BEARINGLOADCALC
X=EXPORTOPT D=DESIGN V=VER Z=RSOIL L=RIGSTIFF Y=TRANSSTIFF
B=RIGMOD G=TRANSMOD A=TORSION line 2
where
NUMLC is the number of load cases. An input of 0 will halt execution after all the input
file has been processed by the engine.
U1 is the units flag
= 0 is mixed for English units (ld-f, kips, inches, ft)
= 1 is for SI units (kilonewtons and meters)
= 2 is for metric (kilonewtons and millimeters)
PROT is the soil resistance due to pile rotation about the 2 and 3 axis
= 0 do not include soil resistance
= 1 include soil resistance (default)
S1 is the flag for equivalent stiffness calculation.
< 0 model type is not a stiffness model, and absolute value indicates node at which
stiffness is to be calculated
= 0 off
= 1 model type is a stiffness (pile and cap) model, and stiffness is calculated at center
of pile cap
NPLNOD is the number of nodes per pile
OPTSSPRINGSMASSES = flag that indicates special analysis for determining springs
and masses as part of automatic OPTS model formation (only applicable for interior
piers of bridge models).
= 0 off
= 1 on
NSTIF is the type of stiffness.
= 0 secant stiffness (default).
= 1 tangent stiffness. (required for preload and time step dynamics, optional for a
static analysis)
CASECOMBFLAG flag for use with AASHTO models, which indicates if all load cases
and combinations are to be analyzed, or if just all load combinations are to be analyzed.
Not accessible within UI.
= 0 load combinations(default).
= 1 load cases and combinations.
PRELOAD is the preload option
=0 for no preload
=1 for preload
NPUSH is the pushover option
=0 for normal analysis
=1 for pushover analysis
DYTYPE is the flag for Dynamic Analysis Type (which is selected on the Dynamics Page)
=0 Time Step Integration
=1 Modal Response
CASING_SKIN_FRICTION is a factor on skin friction along embedded casing lengths of
drilled shafts. This value must be positive, where the default value is 1.0.
SPANTEMPERATURE is the flag to indicate whether or not span temperature loading
is utilized, and if so, the scope of activity.
= -1 is for use when temperature loading is utilized while in AASHTO analysis mode.
= 0 is for when span temperature loading is not utilized.
= 1 is for when span temperature loading is utilized in non-AASHTO analyses.
BEARINGLOADCALC is the control flag for engine generation (or reading of) a special
post-processing file for ensuring evenly distributed bearing reactions of span dead load
in bridge models (only used by the UI). When this flag is equal to "1", the PREPLDS
header is printed to the input file.
=0 off
=1 on
DYRELAX is the flag for Dynamic Relaxation, which is selected on the Dynamics Page
(only used by the UI).
=0 do not apply dynamic relaxation
=1 apply dynamic relaxation
EXPORTOPT is a flag to indicate the export format (used only by the UI).
= 0 Excel option.
= 1 PDF option.
DESIGN is the flag for the preliminary design option( currently limited to off, or '0')
VER =Version for English Units
=0 is for English units are Kip & Inches.
=1 is for metric units of newtons and meters.
=2 is for metric units of newtons and millimeters.
RSOIL is the flag for the rotated soil option (not currently available in UI)
=0 do not use rotated soil option
=1 use rotated soil option
RIGSTIFF is the flag for Rigid Link Stiffness ( not currently available in UI)
TRANSSTIFF is the flag for Transfer Beam Stiffness ( not currently available in UI)
RIGMOD is the flag for Rigid Link Modulus ( not currently available in UI)
TRANSMOD is the flag for Transfer Beam Modulus ( not currently available in UI)
TORSION is the flag for Torsion PG( not currently available in UI)
S=IFLEX T=ITIP, TSTIF P=NLOPT F=PHI PHI TENSION PHI FLEXURE line 3
Where
IFLEX controls how the soil is to be modeled (INTEGER)
=0 user supplied P-Multipliers must be given
=1 all user supplied P-Multipliers are set to 1 internally in FB-MULTIPIER
=2 pile restraint only occurs through tip springs (i.e. no soil); soil information may be
supplied, but is ignored.
ITIP is for the linear tip spring option (IFLEX=2) (INTEGER)
=0 for no linear tip springs on piles
=1 for axial tip springs on piles of stiffness TSTIF
=2 all d.o.f. at tip have springs with stiffness TSTIF
TSTIF is the stiffness of linear tips springs (REAL)
NLOPT chooses linear or nonlinear piles
=1 for linear piles
=2 for nonlinear piles (cracked concrete, steel yielding and P-∆).
=3 for linear piles where interaction diagrams are generated
PHI is the user defined Phi factor over-ride used for creating the interaction diagrams.
(REAL)
PHI TENSION is the user-defined tension Phi factor (not currently available in UI)
PHI FLEXURE is the user-defined flexure Phi factor (not currently available in UI)
The no soil model (IFLEX=2) can be useful in testing the model and comparing its
results to other solutions. In this case, the user must make sure the structure is stable
through the proper use of tip springs (ITIP) and pile cap fixity (KFIX). The tip spring
model allows the user to add either linear springs to the axial (ITIP=1) or to all (ITIP=2)
degrees of freedom at the bottom of each pile. In the case of IFLEX=0 or 1, ITIP or
TSTIF are still active in addition to any soil tip properties specified through the use of
soil tip modeling.
I=MAXITER T=TOLER M=MEM P=NPROC X=TRANS A=PILELINE

V=VER L=LETTER line 4
Where
MAXITER is the maximum # of iterations for the nonlinear soil analysis (INTEGER)
TOLER is the tolerance on the maximum out-of-balance force for any node in the
system in the nonlinear analysis (REAL)
MEM is the amount of memory used during analysis, always in Megabytes (MB)
NPROC is the number of processors
TRANS is the option to use the transformed section properties
= 0 do not use the transformed section
= 1 do use the transformed section
PILELINE is a flag used only by the UI to indicate whether or not "Pile Behavior" on the
"Analysis" is applied to all piers/bents.
= 0 Not applied to all piers/bents
= 1 Applied to all piers/bents
VER is Units Version to dictate any needed conversion when input file is opened in the
UI
< 1 indicates that some English units values in the input file need converting (e.g.
from inches to feet for pile segment length) when the input file is opened in the UI;
only files from FB-Pier version 3 and older use a VER value that is not equal to 1
=1 indicates English units values in the input file need converting (e.g. from inches to
feet for pile segment length) when the input file is opened in the UI; all FB-MultiPier
v4 and v5 files save a value of VER= 1
=2 indicates metric units of newtons and millimeters; only files FB-Pier version 3 and
older use a VER value that is not equal to 1
LETTER is the version letter. This value, combined with the version number, fully
describes the version of the program
The out of balance forces are obtained in the following manner. The stiffness matrix is
multiplied times the current set of displacements to obtain a force vector. This force
vector is then compared with the applied forces on the structure. If the structure is in
static equilibrium then the two force vectors would be identical. The difference between
the two sets of forces are the out of balance forces.
The following default values are be used for the maximum # of iterations for nonlinear
analysis (MAXITER) and the tolerance on the out-of balance forces (TOLER) for
convergence:
MAXITER = 50
TOLER = 1.0
FB-MultiPier offers the option to use linear or nonlinear piles and piers. Linear piles will
converge more quickly and should be used for preliminary design and when nonlinear
sections are not significant. NLOPT (on previous line) chooses which type of pile
behavior will be used.
17.2.4 Program Settings
The following lines are required and specify global program settings.
PROGSET line 1
S= AUTO_SOIL_SET_DETECTION line 2
where
AUTO_SOIL_SET_DETECTION indicates whether or not the auto-detection of soil set
assignments versus batter / pile type is enabled (0=disabled; 1=enabled). The flag can
be toggled in the UI via 'Control -> Program Settings -> Message Options'.
17.2.5 User Defined Coordinate System
When making use of the equivalent stiffness feature, a user-defined coordinate system
can be supplied. Consisting of three basis vectors, the coordinate system is used to
transform the condensed stiffness matrix relative to the FB-MultiPier global coordinate
system. Input of the user-defined coordinate system is as follows:
CS_USERCOORDSYS line 1
F= V11,V12,V13 line 2
S= V21,V22,V23 line 3
T= V31,V32,V33 line 4
:
Where
V11 is the X-X entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 1.0000
V21 is the Y-X entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
V31 is the Z-X entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
V12 is the X-Y entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
V22 is the Y-Y entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
V23 is the Z-Y entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to -1.0000
V13 is the X-Z entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
V23 is the Y-Z entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 1.0000
V33 is the Z-Z entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
17.2.6 User Defined Extra Member End Fixity
This section allows for the definition of custom end fixity conditions, which can be
applied to one or more extra members in a model.
X_FIXITY line 1
NUMCONDS line 2
The following lines are repeated for each custom end fixity definition
I1 I2 I3 J1 J2 J3 line 3
...
:
Where
NUMCONDS is the number of custom end-fixity definitions.
I1 to I3 are the end fixity flags for rotations about the 1, 2, and 3 axes at the I-end of a
given element.
J1 to J3 are the end fixity flags for rotations about the 1, 2, and 3 axes at the J-end of a
given element.
17.2.7 Multiple Pier Substructure Information
The following information is used by with multiple pier generation. The information
under the SUBSTR header describes the pier to pier geometry.
SUBSTR
NPIERS
PIERNUM X= XDIST Y= YDIST R= ZROT A= LBROT B= RBROT
Where
NPIERS is the number of piers (or pile bents)
XDIST is the x-distance from the global origin (located at the first pier)
YDIST is the y-distance from the global origin
ZROT is the pier rotation angle about the global z-axis (used for curved alignments)
LBROT is the left bearing row rotation angle about the global z-axis (used for curved
alignments)
RBROT is the right bearing row rotation angle about the global z-axis (used for curved
alignments)
This section must end with a blank line.
The pier rotation option allows each pier to be rotated about the global z-axis (clockwise
positive) to accommodate skew and curved bridge alignments. The rotation is
performed as follows based on the bottom left corner of the pile cap
Figure: 17.2.a Pier rotation options

17.2.8 Superstructure Information
under the SUPPROP header describes the superstructure properties. These properties
are used in establishing the pier to pier connectivity.
SUPPROP
A= AREA, AREASUP I= I3, I2 J= TOR E= EMOD G= GMOD S= WEIGHT F= BEGIN
X=AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD B=END Y=AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD
C= CONTIN Z= AREA, I3 , I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD T= BEGINVERT K= AREA, I3,
I2,TOR, EMOD, GMOD P= ENDVERT Q= AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD H=H1,
H2 L=LH V=VARSP N=NODES U=USERDCOORD (One line for each span)
If variable span properties are present, each property line that follows applies to an
element along the span. For each span, the total number of intermediate span node
coordinates, defined by N=NODES, dictates the number of elements (NODES +1). The
above line contains the properties for Element #1.
A=AREA I=I3, I2 J=TOR E=EMOD G=GMOD S= WEIGHT (One line for each span
element for variable span properties)
If user-defined span nodal coordinate option is selected, each flowing line represent the
user inputted span nodal coordinates.
X=XCOORD Y=YCOORD Z=ZCOORD (One line for each intermediate span node)
where
AREA is the transverse cross-sectional area of the corresponding superstructure
component
AREASUP is the span profile area used for wind load generation
I3 is the moment of inertia of the corresponding superstructure component (strong axis
bending)
I2 is the moment of inertia of the corresponding superstructure component (weak axis
bending)
TOR is the torsional moment of inertia of the corresponding superstructure component
EMOD is the elastic modulus of the corresponding superstructure component
GMOD is the shear modulus of the corresponding superstructure component
WEIGHT is the unit weight of the corresponding superstructure component
BEGIN is the flag for the begin (left) span end condition (0 = Diaphragm; 1 = No
Diaphragm; 2 = Custom)
END is the flag for the end (right) span end condition (0 = Diaphragm; 1 = No
Diaphragm; 2 = Custom)
X= AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD is the property list for begin (left) span end
condition
Y= AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD is the property list for end (right) span end
condition
CONTIN is the flag to indicate custom input of continuity link properties (0=default;
1=custom)
Z= AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMODis the property list for continuity link element
BEGINVERT is the flag to indicate custom input of begin vertical link properties
(0=default; 1=custom)
ENDVERT is the flag to indicate custom input of end vertical link properties (0=default;
1=custom)
K= AREA, I3, I2,TOR, EMOD, GMODis the property list for begin vertical link element
Q= AREA, I3, I2,TOR, EMOD, GMOD is the property list for end vertical link element
H1 is the vertical distance from the center of the pier cap to the center of gravity of the
superstructure (beginning of span)
Note: For OPTS models, the Begin Height of Span 1 will equal the End Height of Span
2, and the Begin Height is not processed by the engine.
H2 is the vertical distance from the center of the pier cap to the center of gravity of the
superstructure (end of span)
Note: For OPTS models, the End Height of Span 2 will equal the Begin Height of Span
2, and the End Height is not processed by the engine.
LH is the live load height from the center of the pier cap to the center of the live load
VARSP indicates whether variable span properties are present (0 = no, 1 = yes)
NODES is the number of superstructure beam nodes
USERDCOORD is the flag for the user-defined span nodal coordinates (0 = program
generated, 1 = user-defined)
XCOORD, YCOORD, and ZCOORD are the global X, Y, and Z coordinates for the
intermediate span nodes in feet (when user-defined span nodal coordinates flag = 1)
:
Each span of the superstructure is modeled with a single beam (divided into sub-
elements) that spans from the center of the back span pier to the center of the forward
span pier. The superstructure beam is connected to rigid beams at the back span and
forward span, which distribute the load to the bearing locations.
Figure: 17.2.b Superstructure Beam
Figure: 17.2.c Superstructure Beam with Continuity Link
Figure: 17.2.d Continuity Rigid Link
17.2.9 User Defined Bearing Connection
under the PADPROP header describes the load-displacement behavior for the bearing
locations. This information is only provided for user-defined substructure to
superstructure connectivity.
PADPROP
NPROP
X1,X2,X3,…,X20
F1,F2,F3,…,F20
T=TYPE1,TYPE2.....TYPE100
Where
NPROP is the number of custom load-displacement curve definitions
F1…F20are the load values in the load-displacement relationship (20 points max.)
X1…X20 are the displacement values in the load-displacement relationship (20 points
max.)
TYPE1....TYPE100 are the bearing curve types. A value of 1 is written for translational, a
value of 2 for rotational.
(Repeat curve pair values for each user-defined curve definition)
:
A maximum of 20 points can be used to describe the load-displacement relationship for

the bearing. Load values should be entered for both positive and negative
displacements. Zero force values can be entered intentionally. For example, to model no
vertical reaction due to girder uplift, enter a load-displacement curve for the vertical
displacement with positive load and displacement values (for loads acting downward)
and zero force values for negative displacement (loads acting upward). Displacement
values must be entered in order from the largest negative displacement to the largest
positive displacement.
Examples:
Figure: 17.2.e Example Load-Displacement Curve for Vertical Displacement

17.2.10 Self Weight and Buoyancy Load Factors
Self weight and Buoyancy loading is handled automatically in the program by entering a
unit weight for each type of element (Pile, Pile cap and pier elements). Since self-weight
and Buoyancy have different load factors, these load factors can be input per load case.
The following data is input for the load factors for self-weight and buoyancy:
SWFACT
LC F=FSW, FBUO (one line per load case)
Where
LC is the load case in which to apply the load factors
FSW is the load factor for the self-weight in load case LC.
FBUO is the load factory for buoyancy in load case LC
17.2.11 Bridge Spring Toggle
This header allow for specification of which static load cases (or load combinations for
models that make use of AASHTO loading) that will not make use of springs during
analysis. Note that this header is not populated for dynamic analyses.
BRSPR
Case #1
Case #2
Case #3
Case #n
Where Integer #n is the load case number for which the bridge springs are turned OFF.
If pre-load is used and bridge springs are present, a –1 value should appear in this list to
indicate that springs are turned off for the pre-load case.
For models that make use of AASHTO loading, the Load Combination numbers where
springs are disabled are written. Note that, in the FB-MultiPier engine, Load
Combinations are ordered after the Load Cases (or Load Types).
17.2.12 Pushover
For static pushover analysis,
PUSH
N=NPSTEP I=PINCR
Where
NPSTEP is the number of load steps
PINCR is load increment (e.g. 1.0 = increase initial load by 100% for each load step)
2 load cases are required

Use load case #1 for permanently applied loads
Use load case #2 for initial load to be incremented
Under the CONTROL header,
R=NPUSH
Where
NPUSH = 0 for normal analysis
= 1 for pushover analysis
17.2.13 Minimum Pile Tip Embedment
For single substructure analyses, the following header allows for automatic calculation
of minimum pile tip embedment (MPTE). Note that use of this header requires
coordination between the user interface (UI) and engine, where the UI creates and
distributes a series of analysis files for each candidate embedment length. When the
engine encounters the following header, it serves as an indicator to print a special post-
processing file (*.PEL). Note that this feature is not permitted for use in association with
the PREPLDS header.
MPTE
B= INCREMENT_INDEX M= FLAG F= EMBEDLENGTH I= NUMINCR
Where
INCREMENT_INDEX is an integer-based index of the pile embedment increment
number, indicating a unique realization of a candidate pile embedment length. Index “0”
indicates the base file, or starting point embedment length. Index values greater than 0
and less than or equal to NUMINCR signify models configured with candidate pile
embedment lengths between the starting-point embedment and (inclusively) the ending
embedment length.
The UI makes use of this index to determine if the MPTE feature should be enabled in
the “Model Data” window upon file loading (0=yes; >0=no). The engine prints this index
to the *.PEL file anytime the *.PEL file is generated.
FLAG is a boolean indicator of the special analysis mode for automatic MPTE calculation
(0=false; 1=true).
EMBEDLENGTH is the final embedment length to consider (can be deeper or shallower
than starting length).
NUMINCR is the number of increments to attempt between the starting and final
embedment lengths.
17.2.14 Bearing Reactions Due to Span Self Weight
The following lines specify the control parameters for engine generation (or reading of)
a special post-processing file (.BPF). This special post-processing file contains load data
associated with even distributions of bearing reactions that are in equilibrium with span
self weight in bridge models. There are two lines of input for this section, including the
title. These lines are only written if the proper flag settings are in place under the
CONTROL header. Note that these lines are not written when the MPTE feature is
employed.
PREPLDS line 1
R=GENERATE_OR_READ line 2
where
GENERATE_OR_READ is a flag that indicates if the engine is to generate or read the
special post-processing (.BPF) file.
= 0 generate the .BPF file
= 1 read the .BPF file
17.2.15 PreLoad Case
This data is used to determine which load cases will be initialized using the results from
a PreLoad case.
PRELOAD line1
For Load Case 1, store the load case number (LCNUM) and indicate if the load case will
utilize the PreLoad feature (LCFLAG), where a value of “1” indicates that the PreLoad
feature is used for the corresponding load case number, and a value of “0” indicates that
the PreLoad is not being used for the corresponding load case number.
L= LCNUM P = LCFLAG line2
Repeat input for each load case (excluding the PRELOAD header).
17.2.16 Combination (AASHTO)
AASHTO limit states can be turned on or off as needed. In the input file after the
COMBINATION header,
COMBINATION
D= CODE F=DMM N= NUMLC

K= L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7, L8, L9, L10, L11, L12, L13
N= NREVER M= MAXMIN L= STYPE1, STYPE2, STYPE3, STYPE4, STYPE5
Where
Code = 0 for LRFD
= 1 for LFD
DMM = 0 for Maximum Load Factors selected on the Load Factor Dialog.
= 1 for Minimum Load Factors selected on the Load Factor Dialog.
(LRFD)
L1 = 1 for STRENGTH-I ( 0 otherwise)
L2 = 1 for STRENGTH-II ( 0 otherwise)
L3 = 1 for STRENGTH-III ( 0 otherwise)
L4 = 1 for STRENGTH-IV ( 0 otherwise)
L5 = 1 for STRENGTH-V ( 0 otherwise)
L6 = 1 for EXTREME-I ( 0 otherwise)
L7 = 1 for EXTREME-II ( 0 otherwise)
L8 = 1 for SERVICE-I ( 0 otherwise)
L9 = 1 for SERVICE-II ( 0 otherwise)
L10 = 1 for SERVICE-III ( 0 otherwise)
L11 = 1 for SERVICE-IV ( 0 otherwise)
L12 = 1 for FATIGUE-I ( 0 otherwise)
L13 = 1 for FATIGUE-II ( 0 otherwise)
(LFD)
L1 = 1 for GROUP-I ( 0 otherwise)
L2 = 1 for GROUP-IA ( 0 otherwise)
L3 = 1 for GROUP-III ( 0 otherwise)
L4 = 1 for GROUP-II ( 0 otherwise)
L5 = 1 for GROUP-IV ( 0 otherwise)
L6 = 1 for GROUP-V ( 0 otherwise)
L7 = 1 for GROUP-VI ( 0 otherwise)
L8 = 1 for GROUP-VII ( 0 otherwise)
L9 = 1 for GROUP-VIII ( 0 otherwise)
L10 = 1 for GROUP-IX ( 0 otherwise)
L11 = 1 for GROUP-VESSEL ( 0 otherwise)
NUMLC = the total number of load combinations (only used by the UI).
NREVER = 1 for reversible loads ( 0 otherwise)
Reversible Loads: WS, WL, BR, FR (LFRD)
W, WL, LF, R, S, T (LFD)
MAXMIN = 1 to consider max and min factors for LFRD permanent loads (DC, DD,
DW) ( 0 otherwise)
STYPE1...STYPE5 are the load case subtypes associated with the five load cases that
accept subtypes.
Here is a list of these load cases and their respective subtypes:
1) Downdrag - Piles (alpha Tomlimson), Piles (lambda method), and Drilled Shafts
(O'Neill & Reese).
2) Horiz. Earth Press . - Active, and At Rest.
3) Vert. Earth Press. - Retaining Walls & Abutments, Rigid Buried Structures, Rigid
Frames, Flexible Buried Structures, and Flexible Metal Box Culverts.
4) Creep - Segmental Superstructure, and Non Segmental Superstructure.
5) Shrinkage - Segmental Superstructure, and Non Segmental Superstructure.
17.2.17 Modify Load Factors
Any of the AASHTO load combination factors can also be modified as follows. In the
input file after the COEFF header,
COEFF
COEFF S=LIMST T=TYPE
Where
COEFF is the new load factor
LIMST is the limit state to be modified (LRFD)
= 1 for STRENGTH I
= 2 for STRENGTH II
= 3 for STRENGTH III
= 4 for STRENGTH IV
= 5 for STRENGTH V
= 6 for EXTREME I
= 7 for EXTREME II
= 8 for SERVICE I
= 9 for SERVICE II
= 10 for SERVICE III
= 11 for SERVICE IV
= 12 for FATIGUE I
= 13 for FATIGUE II
LIMST is the load group to be modified (LFD)
= 1 for GROUP I
= 2 for GROUP I-A
= 3 for GROUP II
= 4 for GROUP III
= 5 for GROUP IV
= 6 for GROUP V
= 7 for GROUP VI
= 8 for GROUP VII
= 9 for GROUP VIII
= 10 for GROUP IX
TYPE is the load type specified in AASHTO
Use one line per load factor.
Example:
COEFF
1.60 S= 1 T= DC
1.45 S= 3 T= WS
:
17.2.18 Dynamic Control Parameters
The following lines specify the dynamic control parameters for the FB-MULTIPIER
program.
DYN
Y=NDYNS C=NDAMP F=ALPHA1,BETA1,ALPHA2,BETA2 S=NPMAX J=DMP
K=DMS O=NPRT M=SMASS H=NSHM L=NBMM N=NDYSOL U=NMSE E=EPP
R=NCMOD T=NSTEEL P=D1,D2,...,D24,D25 Z=NFREQ Q=CFRQ A=NSCS W=JPIL
(1),JPIL(2),JPIL(3) (all on one line)
Where
NDYNS is the type of dynamics solution.
= 0 Step by step integration (default).
= 1 Response spectrum analysis.
NDAMP is the damping option.
= 0 no damping (default).
= 1 damping.
ALPHA1,BETA1 coefficients for Rayleigh damping for the structure
(C=ALPHA*M+BETA*K).
ALPHA2,BETA2 coefficients for Rayleigh damping for the piles.
ALPHA3,BETA3 coefficients for Rayleigh damping for the soil.
NPMAX is the maximum number of time steps for the analysis.
DMP is the mass density for the piles. This a default global value used if a weight
density if not given for a pile cross-section.
DMS is the mass density for the pier (excluding pile cap). This a default global value
used if a weight density if not given for a pier cross-section.
NPRT is the output option for time step analysis.
= 0 maximum displacements and maximum forces caused by the maximum
displacements (default).
= 1 all displacements and maximum forces.
= 2 maximum displacements and all forces.
= 3 all displacements and all forces.
Note: NPRT = 2 or 3 options only allow the program to compute the element forces
for the options above (because this may take some time for a large structure), to print
them out, you still have to use these in addition to the print out option. For example, if
you want the pile forces for every time step use O=4 and set P=1 under the PRINT label.
If you want only the structure forces use T=1. The maximum forces are the forces
caused by the maximum displacements, note that these can be smaller than the
maximum forces for the structure. For options 2 and 3 a summary of the maximum
forces and the time step when it occurred will be printed out at the end.
SMASS is the concentrated mass adopted for the soil. This mass is applied to all the
translational DOF X, Y and Z to represent the attached soil mass.
NSHM is the option for the mass matrix for the cap.
= 0 consistent mass matrix (default).
= 1 lumped mass matrix.
NBMM is the option for the mass matrix for the structure and piles.
= 0 consistent mass matrix (default).
= 1 lumped mass matrix.
NDYSOL is the option for the type of numerical solution. This option is only valid for
step by step solution (NDYNS=0)
= 0 Newmark's method - average acceleration.
= 1 Newmark's method - linear acceleration. This method is conditionally stable and is
not guaranteed to converge unless dt/T < 0.551 for all vibration modes.
= 2 Wilson-Theta method (default).
NMSE is the option for multiple support excitation.
= 0 standard analysis.
= 1 multiple support excitation.
Note: The multiple support excitation feature should only be used for models
containing a single substructure.
EPP is the strain rate for concrete (default = 1e-5)
NCMOD is the option for the concrete model in nonlinear analysis.
= 0 ; nonlinear elastic (default)
= 1 ; hysteresis
NSTEEL is the steel model
= 0 ; bilinear (default)
= 1 ; strain - hardening and Bauschinger effect
D1...D25 this is an option if the user wants to save a specific NODE displacement to a
file for possible later plotting or checking.
D1 - is the number of NODES that will be saved (maximum = 25).
D2...D25 - is the number of the NODE to be saved. For example:
P=25,1,2,...,25
D1 = 25 - twenty five NODES will be saved to the file.
Note: The displacements will be saved in a text file with the name: 'inputname'.DSn,
the velocities in 'inputname'.VSn, and the accelerations in 'inputname'.ASn, where n is
the file number for the chosen node. For example, if the input file is "test.in", then the
displacements for node 1 are saved in test.DS1, those of node 2 in test.DS2, etc.
NFREQ is the option for computing the period.

= 0 (default) - initial period for the structure will not be computed.
= 1- computes the initial periods for the structure.
CFRQ is the frequency of loading (used for cyclic degradation, in Hz)
NSCS is the option for subtracting the stress in the concrete at the level of the steel bar
for dynamic analysis.
= 0 (default) - does not subtract.
= 1 - subtracts.
JPIL is the option to track the forces in a specific pile element.
JPIL(1) = pile number
JPIL(2) = element number, must be between 1 and 16. 1 is top element, 16 is bottom
element. If not specified is set to 1.
JPIL(3) = element node, must be 1 or 2. 1 is bottom element node, 2 is top element
node. If not specified is set to 1.
This information is saved to the file ‘INPUT.DFO’, where INPUT is the input file name.
This section MUST end with a blank line.
17.2.19 Dynamic Step by Step Integration
Any structure may be analyzed using the step by step integration method of dynamic
analysis. This method uses the Newmark method and Rayleigh damping to solve for
dynamic response resulting from time varying loading. The time varying loading can be
applied as a single load function applied at many nodes or different time functions
applied at specific DOF. The applied load function can be a force or a ground
acceleration.
TRANSIENT
T=T1 L=L1 P=P1 Q=Q1 G=GF A=A0 B=A1 F=FF C=PB
Where
T1 is the time step increment for integration, default is 0.01s.
L1 is the number of time varying load functions to be specified. The functions are
applied at the specified nodes and DOF.
P1 is the maximum number of time points specified for any load function. If three
functions are specified, P1 is the maximum number of points used to specify any of the
three functions.
Q1 is the flag for the type of load function applied. If Q1=0 then the load is a force. If
Q1=1, then the load applied is a prescribed acceleration (all nodes). If Q1=2, then the
load applied is a prescribed acceleration (a unique acceleration vs time function can be
applied to one or more nodal DOF).
GF is the gravity factor to multiply times the acceleration or load record input below. If
the acceleration record is given in g’s, then the gravity factor would be 386.4 in/sec2 or
9.81 m/sec2. Use GF=1.0 if the acceleration is not normalized by g.
A0, A1 are global damping factors, implying that only one damping factor will be
applied to structure, piles and soil.
FF is the flag for the file format of the load function file(s): 1 is for new format, 0 is for
old format.
PB is the Peer Berkeley decryption string, to describe the Load Function.
Note: you must choose one damping factor, either here or under the DYN header,
only for the soil. Both can not be chosen.
Z= LFN
Where
LFN is the name of the load function. This can be up to 20 characters in length.
LOADING FUNCTION DEFINITIONS (L1 Sets of lines)
If you choose the multiple support excitation option, you have to create one set of
loading functions for each pile node. Including the first line.
The next lines specify the loading function values. The lines MUST contain FOUR pairs of
numbers each. The number of lines is dictated by the maximum number of points used
to specify the function (P1). The points do NOT need to be at even spacing.
T1,F1 T2,F2 T3,F3 T4,F4
Where
Ti,Fi are the time and force (or acceleration) values for the point being specified.

17.2.20 Spectrum Analysis
The results of an EIGEN solution can be used to perform a spectrum analysis. This
procedure uses the mode superposition method to combine the individual eigen vectors
into a single response, based on the excitation given by a response spectrum. Response
spectrums are usually given for earthquake loading. This procedure combines the
individual modes response for a spectrum acting in each of the three global directions,
X, Y, and Z. The modal responses are combined using the Complete Quadratic
Combination (CQC) procedure, the directions are combined using Square Root Sum of
the Squares (SRSS) or CQC3. SPECT allows only a single input response spectrum with
different scale factors for that spectrum in each of the three directions (X, Y, and Z).
SPECTRUM
For input Spectrum use the following lines:
S=SP D=DX,DY,DZ N=NV F=FF E= EF H=CM L=SM B=RD Q=CQC3FLAG
Where
SP is the number of spectrum points used to define the response spectrum curve. The
points are given in pairs (Period (sec), Value) and are assumed linear between values.
DX is the scale factor to apply to the input spectrum for use in the X direction. The
response spectrum values are scaled by this factor when used for the X direction.
DY is the scale factor to apply to the input spectrum for use in the Y direction. The
response spectrum values are scaled by this factor when used for the Y direction.
DZ is the scale factor to apply to the input spectrum for use in the Z direction. The
response spectrum values are scaled by this factor when used for the Z direction.
NV is the number of eigenvectors to use for the responses. The default is the total
number of vectors solved for from EIGEN.
FF is the flag for the file format of the modal response spectrum function file. 1 is for
new format, 0 is for old format.
EF is the eigenvector analysis stop flag. 1 means analysis will stop after eigenvector
calculations are complete. 0 means analysis will run through to normal completion.
CM is the global mass flag for the cap. 0 means consistent, 1 means lumped.
SM is the global mass flag for the structure. 0 means consistent, 1 means lumped.
RD is the Rayleigh damping coefficients flag for the structure. 0 means Rayleigh
damping is inactive, 1 means Rayleigh damping is active.
CQC3FLAG is a flag (0=OFF; 1=ON) that enables use of the CQC3 combination rule.
A spectrum analysis also needs damping levels for each mode used in the analysis. The
damping level is the percentage of damping for the mode in question. These values
must be specified if a spectrum analysis is to be performed. The next line specifies the
damping levels to use.
NF,NL,NI S=S1
Where
NF is the first mode in a generation sequence for which the damping level is used.
NL is the last mode in a generation sequence for which the damping level is used.
NI is the increment for generating mode for which the damping level is used. Modes
between NF and NL will also use the specified damping level.
NL and NI can be left blank if no generation is desired.
S1 is the damping level value to be used (as a decimal).
Z= LFN
Where
LFN is the name of the load function. This can be up to 20 characters in length.
SPECTRUM DEFINITION LINES (Repeat for as many lines as necessary)

The next lines specify the spectrum function values. The lines MUST contain FOUR pairs
of numbers each. The number of lines is dictated by the number of points used to
specify the function (SP). The points do NOT need to be at even spacing.
F1,A1 F2,A2 F3,A3 F4,A4
Where
Fi,Ai are the period (sec) and acceleration (g's) values for the point being specified.
Note: The acceleration values should represent the maximum absolute acceleration
(spectral acceleration), not the relative acceleration (between the structure and moving
support).

17.2.21 Global Dynamics
Global dynamics header stores the input parameters for calculation of the Rayleigh
damping coefficients (alpha and beta).
GLOB_DYN
F=DF I=M1 J=M2 P=DL
where,
DF is a flag to indicate if the Rayleigh damping coefficients are to be calculated.
0 = no
1 = yes
M1 is the first (lower-index) mode of interest for use in calculating the Rayleigh
damping coefficients.
M2 is the second (higher-index) mode of interest for use in calculating the Rayleigh
damping coefficients.
DL is the supplied damping level (as a percentage of critical damping).
17.2.22 Girder and Slab Cross-section Dimensions
This data is used to define discrete span cross-section geometry for each span.
SPANDIM (line 1)
T= SUPXSECTYPE G= GIRGEOM N= NGIRDERS P= PRISGIRFLAG E=NSPAN S=
BEARPGIR C= TRANSECPROP (line 2)
where
SUPXSECTYPE is superstructure cross-section type.
1 = steel girders.
2 = concrete girders.
3 = box girders.
GIRGEOM shows whether or not girders all have the same cross-section.
0 = all girders have the same cross-section.
1 = geometry varies among girders.
NGIRDERS is the number of girders.
PRISGIRFLAG is prismatic girder flag.
0 = non prismatic.
1 = prismatic.
NSPAN is number of span elements.
BEARPGIR is bearings per girder (usually there is one bearing per girder, but a box
girder can have two bearings per girder).
TRANSECPROP is the transformed section properties flag.
0 = do not compute transformed section properties.
1 = compute transformed section properties.
B= SLABDEPTH U= SLABWIDTH E= SEMOD G= SGMOD S= SUNWT F= GEMOD

H= GGMOD T= GUNWT (line 3)
Note that the above line of parameters is read only once per span.
where
SLABDEPTH and SLABWIDTH are depth and width of slab, respectively.
SEMOD and SGMOD are slab elastic and shear moduli, respectively.
SUNWT is slab unit weight.
GEMOD and GGMOD are girder elastic and shear moduli, respectively.
GUNWT is girder unit weight.
For prismatic (PRISGIRFLAG = 1) and identical in cross-section (GIRGEOM= 0), the

following lines of parameters are read once.
For prismatic (PRISGIRFLAG = 1) and mutually varying in cross-section (GIRGEOM= 1),
the following lines of parameters are read once for each girder.
For non-prismatic (PRISGIRFLAG = 0) but identical (GIRGEOM= 0), the following lines
of parameters are read once for each span element.
For non-prismatic (PRISGIRFLAG = 0) and mutually varying in cross-section
(GIRGEOM= 1), the following lines of parameters are read for each girder of each span
element.
steel girders,
D= BFLDEPTH W= BFLWIDTH (line 4)
E= WEBDEPTH X= WEBWIDTH (line 5)
F= TFLDEPTH Y= TFLWIDTH (line 6)
where
BFLDEPTH and BFLWIDTHare bottom flange depth and width, respectively.
WEBDEPTH and WEBWIDTH are web depth and width, respectively.
TFLDEPTH and TFLWIDTH are top flange depth and width, respectively.
concrete girders,
D= BFLDEPTH W= BFLWIDTH (line 4)
E= BTDEPTH (line 5)
F= WEBDEPTH X= WEBWIDTH (line 6)
G= TTDEPTH (line 7)
H= TFLDEPTH Y= TFLWIDTH (line 8)
where
BFLDEPTHand BFLWIDTH are bottom flange depth and width, respectively.
BTDEPTH is bottom taper depth (i.e. depth of taper between bottom flange and web).
WEBDEPTH and WEBWIDTH are web depth and width, respectively.
TTDEPTH is top taper depth (i.e. depth of taper between web and top flange).
TFLDEPTH and TFLWIDTH are top flange depth and width, respectively.
For box girders,

D= BSLDEPTH W= BSLWIDTH (line 4)
N= NWEBW O= WEBWDIST (line 5)
E= WEBWDEPTH X= AWEBWWIDTH (line 6)
F= TFLDEPTH Y= TFLWIDTH (line 7)
where
BSLDEPTH and BSLWIDTH are girder’s bottom slab depth and width, respectively.
NWEBW is the number of web-walls.
WEBWDIST is the width at top of web walls (i.e. the horizontal distance from the top,
outside of the outermost web walls) .
WEBWDEPTH and AWEBWWIDTH are the web wall depth and width (i.e. the average
web-wall width), respectively.
TFLDEPTH and TFLWIDTH are the top flange depth and width, respectively.
Repeat input (excluding the SPANDIM header) for each additional span.
17.2.23 Span Concentrated Nodal Loads
These are automatically generated load input lines. As many lines as needed can be
used. One line must be supplied for each loaded node and each load condition.
SPANLOAD
NODE L=LC, F=FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ, S=SPAN, T=TYPE, B=BRG, I=INDEX,
P=PIER, R=ROW N=PHODE, D=DL, U=UF
(one line per nodal load)
where
NODE is span node number
LC is the load case number
FX is the force in the global X-direction
FY is the force in the global Y-direction
FZ is the force in the global Z-direction
MX is the moment about the global X-axis
MY is the moment about the global Y-axis
MZ is the moment about the global Z-axis
SPAN is span number (starting at left pier)
TYPE is the load type specified in AASHTO (ignore for non-AASHTO loads)
LRFD Loads:
TYPE =
DC Dead load of components
DD Downdrag
DW Dead load of wearing surfaces and utilities
EH Horizontal earth pressure load
EV Vertical earth pressure load
ES Earth surcharge load
EL Locked-in Construction Stresses
PS Post Tensioning
CR Creep
SH Shrinkage
LL Live load
IM Impact
CE Vehicular centrifugal force
BR Vehicular braking force
PL Pedestrian live load
LS Live load surcharge
WA Water load and stream pressure
WS Wind load on structure
WL Wind load on live load
VP Vertical Wind Pressure
VR Vertical Wind Press. - Reverse Loads
FR Friction
TU Uniform temperature
TG Temperature gradient
SE Settlement
EQ Earthquake
IC Ice load
CT Vehicular collision force
CV Vessel collision force
LFD Loads:
TYPE =
D Dead load
LL Live load (AASHTO Type "L")
IM Impact (AASHTO Type "I")
E Earth pressure
B Buoyancy
WS Wind load on structure (ASSHTO Type "W")
LF Longitudinal force from live load
CF Centrifugal force
R Rib shortening
S Shrinkage
T Temperature
EQ Earthquake
SF Stream flow pressure
ICE Ice pressure
The following are only written for span nodes that correspond to a bearing location:
BRG is the flag for the span node's association with a bearing location (span nodes on
the transfer beam have bearing associated with them).
1 = for bearing association.
0 = for no bearing association.
INDEX is the 0-based bearing position index that the span node is associated, with the
span node's bearing row.
PIER is the 0-based pier number that the span node is associated with.
ROW is flag for the bearing row number in which the span node is located.
0 = for the left row.
1 = for the middle row (when there is one row of bearings).
2 = for the right row.
PNODE is the 1-based pier node number that the span node is associated with.
DL is no longer used and thus a 0 is listed; previously, this line had been used to write
the span dead load applied to the node, which includes the self weight factor.
UF is the span dead load applied to the node, which does NOT include the self weight
factor.
17.2.24 Span Thermal Data
This data is used to determine span thermal loading conditions (either uniform or
gradient-based) for each span.
SPANTHERM (line 1)
R= REFT U=UNIFT (line 2)
S= SPANNO (line 3)
A= GALPHA (line 4)
B= SALPHA (line 5)
S= SLABTOPT T=SLABFINT U= SLABBOTT (line 6)
where,
REFT is the reference temperature.
UNIFT is the uniform span temperature (if using the “AASHTO Combinations” Design
Options feature).
SPANNO is only read by the UI (engine should skip to next line).
GALPHA is the coefficient of thermal expansion for the girders.
SALPHA is the coefficient of thermal expansion for the slab.
SLABTOPT is the slab top temperature.
SLABFINT is the temperature at 4 in. below the slab top.
SLABBOTT is the slab bottom temperature.
For prismatic and identical in cross-section (as determined in the SPANDIM header),
the following lines of parameters are read once.
For prismatic and mutually varying in cross-section, the following lines of parameters
are read once for each girder.
For non-prismatic but identical in cross-section, the following parameters are read once
for each element.
For non-prismatic and mutually varying in cross-section, the following parameters are
read for each girder of each span element.
steel girders,
T= T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 (line 7)
D= D3 D4 D5 (line 8)
where
T1 and T2 are the temperatures at the bottom and top of the bottom flange,
respectively.
T3, T4 and T5 are the temperatures at the first, second and third arbitrary web depth,
respectively.
T6 is the temperature at the top of web.
T7 is the temperature at top of the top flange.
D3, D4, and D5 are the arbitrary vertical offsets ( that correspond to the arbitrary web
depth temperatures, T3, T4, and T5, respectively. Note that the offsets are cumulative,
where D3 is taken relative to the bottom of the web, for the current element being
defined.
concrete girders,
T= T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 (line 7)
where
T1 is the temperatures at the bottom of the girder.
T2is the temperature at the top of the bottom flange.
T3 is the temperature at the top of the bottom flange to web taper.
T4, T5, and T6are the temperatures at the first, second, and third arbitrary web depth,
respectively.
T7 is the temperature at the bottom of the web to top flange taper.
T8 and T9 are the temperatures at the bottom and top of the top flange, respectively.
D4, D5, and D6 are the arbitrary web depths that correspond to the arbitrary web depth
temperatures, T4, T5, and T6, respectively. Note that the offsets are cumulative, where
D4 is taken relative to the bottom of the web, for the current element being defined.
box girders,
T= T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 (line 7)
where
T1 and T2 are the temperatures at the bottom and top of the box-girder bottom slab,
respectively.
T3, T4, and T5 are the temperatures at the first, second, and third arbitrary web-wall
depth, respectively.
T6is the temperature at the top of the web-wall.
T7 is the temperature at the top flange.
D3, D4, and D5 are the arbitrary web depths that correspond to the arbitrary web depth
temperatures, T3, T4, and T5, respectively. Note that the offsets are cumulative, where
D3 is taken relative to the bottom of the web, for the current element being defined.
Repeat input for each span (excluding the SPANTHERM header and the reference
temperature, REFT).
17.2.25 Span Thermal Load Case
This data is used to determine which load cases are active for non-AASHTO models that
utilize span thermal loading.
SPANLCTHERM (line 1)
L= LCNUM P = LCFLAG (line 2)
LCNUM is the load case number.

LCFLAG is flag for span thermal loading feature.
1 = span thermal loading feature is used for the corresponding load case number.
0 = span thermal is not being used for the corresponding load case number.
Repeat input for each load case (excluding the SPANLCTHERM header).
17.2.26 One Pier Two Span (OPTS)
The OPTS header contains input to determine whether or not an OPTS analysis will be
conducted. If OPTS analysis is utilized, then the input file must also contain the X, Y and
Z direction offsets (all parallel to the respective global axes) from the top node of the
vertical link element (see Transfer Beam Properties) of the pier. Used in conjunction with
appropriately determined span springs and span masses, OPTS analysis employs a
single pier and two spans to produce output of similar accuracy with respect to that
obtained from analyzing a multiple-pier model (see Davidson 2007).
OPTS
X=SXPXL Y=SPYL Z=SPZL
X=SXPXR Y=SPYR Z=SPZR
where
SPXL is the x-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the left span.
SPYL is the y-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the left span.
SPZL is the z-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the left span.
SPXR is the x-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the right span.
SPYR is the y-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the right span.
SPZR is the z-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the right span.
Note: 1. In the English system, units are feet for span offsets.
2. In the SI system, units are meters for span offsets.
17.2.27 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Span End Springs
The following lines specify span end spring stiffness input for the OPTS model in FB-
MultiPier. There are six lines of input for each span end. These lines are always required
if the header is present in the text input file.
OPTS_DIR line 1
X= S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 line 2
Y= S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 line 3
Z= S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36 line 4
P= S41 S42 S43 S44 S45 S46 line 5
Q= S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 S56 line 6
R= S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66 line 7
X= S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 line 8
Y= S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 line 9
Z= S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36 line 10
P= S41 S42 S43 S44 S45 S46 line 11
Q= S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 S56 line 12
R= S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66 line 13
where
X, Y, Z, P, Q, R correspond to the rows of the 6x6 stiffness matrices, and where lines 2-
7 pertain to the left extent of the OPTS model, while lines 8-13 pertain to the right extent
of the OPTS model.
S11, S12, S13… are the individual stiffness terms. For each of the six data rows allotted
for the left and right model extents, the rows correspond to X-translation, Y-translation,
Z-translation, X-rotation, Y-rotation, and Z-rotation degrees-of-freedom, respectively.
For example, entry S44 of line 5 corresponds to the diagonal value of X-rotational
stiffness for the left extent of the OPTS model.
Note: For Spring Stiffness, the English units are kip/in and kip-ft/rad for translational
and rotational terms, respectively. SI units are kN/m and kN-m/rad, respectively.
17.2.28 Span Mass
The SPANMASS header contains input that allows users to specify additional (discrete)
mass at span nodes. The input indicates which span(s) and node(s) to which the mass
(es) will be applied.
SPANMASS
NODE M=MTX,MTY,MTZ,MRX,MRY,MRZ S=SPAN (one line per nodal mass set)
…
:
where
NODE is the span node number to which the Mass will be applied
MTX is the additional mass in the x-axis translational DOF
MTY is the additional mass in the y-axis translational DOF
MTZ is the additional mass in the z-axis translational DOF
MRX is the additional mass in the x-axis rotational DOF
MRY is the additional mass in the y-axis rotational DOF
MRZ is the additional mass in the z-axis rotational DOF
SPAN is the span to which the mass(es) will be applied
Note: For Span mass, the English units are kip-sec^2/in and kip-sec^2/rad for
translational and rotational DOF, respectively.
17.2.29 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)
With the COUPLED header active, FB-MULTIPIER conducts an impact analysis on the
pier structure based upon the characteristics of a moving vessel. Using vessel weight
and initial velocity, as well as the load-deformation characteristics of the vessel bow, the
impact loading can be quantified at each time step, and applied to the impacted pier.
The vessel bow can be characterized using elastic-plastic behavior, or arbitrarily defined
bow load-deformation data. To use the COUPLED analysis feature, the external force
modification flag (MODEXT) must be set to “1” in the LOADYN header.
COUPLED
D=IDEFN I=IVTYPE S= MST W=WB M=CH V=VBIX,VBIY T= BCFT L= LO H= HOS
where
IDEFN is the vessel definition method [Pre-defined=1, User-defined=2]
IVTYPE is the vessel type:
If definition is Pre-defined (IDEFN=1):
IVTYPE=1 indicates the vessel is a barge
If definition is User-defined (IDEFN=2)
IVTYPE=1 indicates the vessel is defined by an elastic, perfectly-plastic
curve
IVTYPE=2 indicates the vessel is defined by general load and
unloading curves
MST is maximum separation time between structure and vessel. If this time is reached,
then analysis is terminated.
WB is the weight of the vessel
CH is the hydrodynamic mass coefficient
VBIX is the initial velocity of the vessel in the x-direction
VBIY is the initial velocity of the vessel in the y-direction
BCFT = tolerance for barge contact force convergence (not currently available in UI)
LO = level of output flag (not currently available in UI)
HOS = historical oscillation smoothing parameter (not currently available in UI)
If IDEFN=1 and IVTYPE=1 (Pre-defined vessel, barge)
W=WIDTH S=SURF
WIDTH is the effective impact zone width on the vessel bow

SURF is the shape of the impact surface (1=planar surface, 2=non-planar surface)
If IDEFN=2 and IVTYPE=1 (User-defined vessel, elastic, perfectly-plastic)

A=ABY P=PBY
ABY is the crush depth at yield for the vessel bow

PBY is the yield load for the vessel bow
If IDEFN=2 and IVTYPE=2 (User-defined, general loading and unloading)

N=NABPB
NABPB is the number of points in bow force-deformation curve [limited to 200 points]
AB(1) PB(1)
AB(2) PB(2)
AB is the abscissa for the user-defined vessel bow load-deformation curve
PB is the ordinate for the user-defined vessel bow load-deformation curve
N=NABPBU X=ABMAXU
NABPBU is the number of points in current unloading curve [limited to 25 points]

ABMAXU is the crush level at which the loading and unloading curves intersect
ABU(1) PBU(1)
ABU(2) PBU(2)
ABU is the abscissa for the current user-defined vessel bow unloading curve
PBU is the ordinate for the user-defined vessel bow unloading curve
17.3 Substructure-Specific Headers
1. Pile Information
2. Multiple Pile Sets
3. Pile Batter Information
4. Missing Pile Data
5. Soil Information
6. Multiple Soil Sets
7. Custom Pile Cap Compression-Only Vertical Bearing Springs
8. Structural Information
9. Column Information
10. Concentrated Nodal Loads
11. Bearing Location Loads
12. Generated Loads
13. Wind Load Generation
14. Spring Properties
15. Pile Cap Properties
16. Removed Pier Cap Element
17. Bearing Connection
18. Point Mass
19. Point Dampers
20. Dynamic Load Function Application
21. Surcharge in Retaining Wall Model
17.3.1 Pile Information
The following input lines define the pile properties such as type of cross section, pile
dimensions, quantity and location of reinforcement and prestressing strands, and linear
or non-linear material properties. There are many parameters and input variations.
There are three allowable pile section types, circular, square/rectangular and H-pile. The
H-pile section can be embedded within the circular or square section. If the H-pile is
embedded it is considered a square/rectangular or circular pile. Also note that a pile can
have varying cross sections along its length.
The pile shape (KTYPE) sets the cross sectional shape of the pile. For square linear piles,
the effective diameter (for lateral soil interaction) is calculated automatically by FB-
MULTIPIER. For nonlinear piles, KTYPE determines the cross section for steel layout and
behavior.
PILE line 1
NSET= NPSET N=NPLNOD S= SLUMP M=γc NSEG= NPSEG1, NPSEG2,
NPSEG3... P= GROUPSETTING line 2
Where
N1 specifies how many pile cross sections will be given along the length of the pile.
NSET is the number of pile sets
NPLNOD is the number of nodes in the pile
NPSEGi is the number of segments in pile set i (must specify for each pile set)
PARFIX is the reduction factor for the capacity for the TOP sub-segment of the pile
(attached to the pile cap). This feature is not available in FB-MultiPier, but was used with
the previous Florida Pier program.
γc is the concrete unit weight (used only for axial soil model type 4)
SLUMP is the concrete slump (used only for axial soil model type 4)
GROUPSETTING is 0 - for user-specified
1 - for 3D values
2 - for 5D values
3 - for All equal to 1
4 - for no soil
Cross Sections: The piles may be modeled as varying cross sections along the length.
For example we could have a drilled shaft where the casing only goes partially through
the depth.
Figure: 17.3.a Varying Pile Cross sections
For each cross section, the pile properties must be specified. If any cross section is
nonlinear, you must specify:
1) The material by default (one line) or user defined stress strain curves (one control
line and two additional lines for each stress strain curve used.)
2) The pile shape - by default (one line) or multiple lines to define the shape and
steel placement.
C DESC (comment line, not read by engine)

C T=STYPE D=DSEG U=SUNIT SHAPE LNR (comment line, not read by engine)
Where
C indicates the following info is for commenting purposes only, and is (not read by the
engine)
DESC is a decription of the cross section, for example 24" Square FDOT Presstressed
STYPE is the segment type code, where HPILE = 0, PRECAST = 1, DRILLED SECTION = 2,
and PIPE= 3.
DSEG is the segment data type, where UNKNOWN = 0, LINEAR = 1, and NONLINEAR=
2.
SUNIT is the units code, where ENGLISH = 0, and METRIC = 1.
SHAPE is the shape description. These include H-Pile, PreCast, Drilled Shaft, Pipe Pile,
and Generic.
LNR is the linear / non linear decription. These include nonlinear and linear.
Finally, for both linear and nonlinear piles, six additional lines are needed to define the
pile geometry.
Linear Pile Properties
For Circular Linear Piles (NLOPT=1, KTYPE=1)

L=XPL E=E G=G I=RINER2, RINER3 J=J A=AREA D=DIA S=SW K=KTYPE line 3
For Square / Rectangular Linear Piles and/or Linear H-Piles (NLOPT=1, KTYPE=2 or 3)
L=XPL E=E G=G I=RINER2, RINER3 J=J W=WIDTHD=DEPTH line 3
A=AREA S=SW K=KTYPE line 3
Where
XPL is the pile length for this segment for plumb and battered piles (REAL)
E is Young’s Modulus of the pile (REAL)
G is the shear modulus of pile, default = E/2.4
RINER2 is the moment of inertia of the pile about the 2-axis (REAL)
RINER3 is the moment of inertia of the pile about the 3-axis (REAL)
J is the torsional moment of inertia (REAL)
AREA is the cross-sectional area of the pile (REAL)
DIA is the diameter for round piles (REAL)
WIDTH is the width for square piles (REAL)
DEPTH is the depth for rectangular piles (REAL) (if depth is not given the section is
assumed square)
SW is the unit weight of the pile, used for self-weight calculations.
If SW>0, self-weight is included in the analysis.
KTYPE specifies the cross sectional shape of the pile
KTYPE=1 for a round pile.
KTYPE=2 for a square pile.
KTYPE=3 for an H-pile.
Nonlinear Property Lines
For Nonlinear Piles or Linear Piles with Interaction Diagrams (NLOPT=2 or 3)

The following lines are required for nonlinear piles, or when interaction diagrams are
requested by the user (NLOPT=2 or 3). For the non-linear pile properties, the user can
specify the defaulted stress strain curves or can generate the desired stress strain curves
for the steel and the concrete.
For the Default Stress Strain Curves (MATOPT=1)
K=KTYPE L=XPL M=MATOPT C=FPC, EC S=FY(1), FSU(2), FY(3), FY(4), ES(1), ES
(2), ES(3), ES(4)
or
For user specified Stress Strain Curves (MATOPT=2) plus up to 5 sets of stress strain
points for user defined curve
K=KTYPE L=XPL M=MATOPT S=KSTEEL(1), KSTEEL(2), KSTEEL(3), KSTEEL(4)
Where
XPL is the pile length for this segment for plumb and battered piles (REAL)
MATOPT is the material input option (INTEGER)
MATOPT=1 means input FPC, FY or FSU,ES,EC and KSTEEL on this line and default
stress strain curves will be generated.
MATOPT=2 means describe stress strain curves for steel and concrete in INPUT #6B
and #6C
No FPC, (FY or FSU), ES and EC values to be entered for MATOPT=2.
FPC is the compression stress, f'c, for concrete (REAL)
FPC = 0 for tubular steel sections
EC is the modulus of elasticity of concrete (REAL)
FY(1) is the yield stress, Fy , for mild steel (REAL)
FSU(2) is the ultimate stress for prestressed strands (REAL)
FY(3) is the yield stress for H-pile section (REAL)
FY(4) is the yield stress for tubular steel section (REAL)
(only for circular pile)
ES(1) is the modulus of elasticity of mild steel (REAL)
ES(2) is the modulus of elasticity of prestressing strand (REAL)
ES(3) is the modulus of elasticity of H-pile section (REAL)
ES(4) is the modulus of elasticity of tubular steel section (REAL)
KSTEEL(I) is the steel type option (INTEGER)
KSTEEL(I) = 1 includes steel type
KSTEEL(I) = 0 does not include steel type
KSTEEL(1) for mild steel reinforcement
KSTEEL(2) for prestressing steel strands
KSTEEL(3) for H-pile section
KSTEEL(4) for tubular steel section (only for circular piles)
KTYPE specifies the cross sectional shape of the pile
KTYPE=1 for a round pile.
KTYPE=2 for a square pile.
KTYPE=3 for an H-pile
Tubular and H-pile steel sections can be input by negating concrete as described above
or in the non-linear user defined stress strain curves and inputting the section
properties described in the sections for the input of circular piles and H-piles.
Stress-Strain Curve for Concrete, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2
NC=NPCC, SIGC(1), SIGC(2),,, line 1

EPSC(1), EPSC(2),,, line 2
Where
NPCC is the number of points on concrete curve (INTEGER)
NPCC=0 for round tubular section or H-pile section (no concrete)
No SIGC or EPSC values to be entered for NPCC=0
SIGC(1) is the first stress point on concrete curve (REAL)
SIGC(2) is the second stress point on concrete curve (REAL)
EPSC(1) is the first strain point on concrete curve (REAL)
EPSC(2) is the second strain point on concrete curve (REAL)
Tubular and H-pile steel sections can be input by negating concrete as described above
and inputting the section properties described in the sections for the input of circular
piles and H-piles.
Stress-Strain Curve for Mild Steel, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2 and
KSTEEL(1) = 1
S1=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,, line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y= εy line 2
Where
NPSC is the number of points on the mild steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
εy is the steel yield strain
Stress-Strain Curve for Prestressing Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and
KSTEEL(2) = 1

EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, line 2
where
NPSC is the number of points on the prestressed steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
Stress-Strain Curve for H-pile Steel, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2 and
KSTEEL(3) = 1

EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y=εy line 2
Where
NPSC is the number of points on the H-pile steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
Stress-Strain Curve for Tubular Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL
(4) = 1

where
NPSC is the number of points on the tubular steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
For Nonlinear Analysis of Square/Rectangular Piles, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and

KTYPE=2
W=WIDTH D=DEPTH V=DV B=BV P=PREST N=ISTNOPT S=SW
Where
WIDTH is the width of square pile parallel to the local Z axis (REAL)
DEPTH is the depth of rectangular pile parallel to the local Y axis (REAL)
DV is the diameter of the void (DV=0 for no void) (REAL) (It can also be the width of a
rectangular void IF BV>0)
BV is the depth of a rectangular void. If BV>0, then the void is rectangular and the DV
value is used for the width of the void.
PREST is the prestressing stresses after release & all losses
PREST=0 for non-prestressed (i.e. reinforced concrete)
ISTNOPT is the standard section option (INTEGER)
ISTNOPT=1 means use FDOT standard reinforcement for input width
STNOPT=2 means describe the reinforcement in the section for the nonlinear
analysis of nonstandard rectangular piles. (Use next lines)
SW is the unit weight of the pile, used for self-weight calculations. If SW>0, self-
weight is included in the analysis.
For nonlinear Analysis of Nonstandard Square/Rectangular Piles, used with NLOPT=2,

KTYPE=2, and ISTNOPT= 2
NG=NGRPS HPI= IHPILE BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE

AS, Y, Z, PREST N=N1 D=D1 repeat NGRPS times
Where
NGRPS is the # of groups of bars/strands(INTEGER)
IHPILE is the H-pile option.
IHPILE = 1 for H-pile embedded in the concrete,
else IHPILE = 0
BMETH 0=Custom; 1=Percentage
MINSPACE Minumum spacing between two bars
TYPE Bar Type Number
AS is the bar or strand areas (REAL)
Y is the local Y coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
Z is the local Z coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
PREST is the prestressing stress in the strands after all losses (REAL)
N=N1 D=D1 is code to generate multiple bars in (INTEGER)
N=N1 D=2 means generate N1 bars/strands in the local Y direction as follows:
First bar is at coordinates Y,Z
if N1 = 2, second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
if N1 > 2, then second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
and remaining N1-2 bars/strand are equally spaced between first two bars/strands
N=N1 D=3 means generate N1 bars/strands in the local Z direction as follows:
if N1 = 2, second bar is at coordinate Y,-Z
if N1 > 2, then second bar is at coordinate Y,-Z
and remaining N1-2 bars/strand are equally spaced between first two bars/strand
Figure: 17.3.b Permissible Nonstandard Rectangular Piles
EXAMPLE INPUT
Figure: 17.3.c Example Rectangular Pile for Input
Rectangular Pile (WIDTH=20" and DEPTH = 15") with 12 strands As=0.08 each spaced
as shown
and prestressed to 175 ksi.
W=20 D=15 V=0 N=2
NG=4 HPI=0
0.08, 4.5, 6.0, 175 N=4 D=2
0.08, 4.5, -6.0, 175 N=4 D=2
0.08, -4.5, 2.0, 175 N=2 D=3
0.08, 4.5, 2.0, 175 N=2 D=3
For Piles the orientation of the local Y-Z axis to that of the global XS, YS axes are shown
in figure above.
For Nonlinear Analysis of Round Piles, used with NLOPT=2 and KTYPE=1
NL=NLAY NG=NGRPS D=DP V=DV S=SW TH=DS IC=ICONF T=TR HPI=IHPILE \

BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE
[PREST, NBS, D=DSI, A=ASI] repeat NLAY times
FY= CYIELD HS= CSPG D= CDIA,
Where
NLAY is the number of circumferential steel layers
NGRPS is the # of groups of bars/strands (INTEGER)
DP is the outer diameter of pile (REAL)
DS is the thickness of the outer steel shell (REAL)
DV is the diameter of the void (REAL)
DV = 0 for no void and tubular steel sections
BMETH 0=Custom, 1=Percentage
IHPILE is the h-pile option.
IHPILE = 1 for h-pile embedded in the concrete, else IHPILE = 0
TR=1 for spiral reinforcement with a φ factor of 0.75 (REAL)
=2 for tied reinforcement with a φ factor of 0.70 (REAL)
ICONF is the confined concrete option.
ICONF=0 for none.
ICONF=1 for spiral only.
ICONF=2 for shell and spiral conferment.
ICONF=3 for ‘confine-only’ casing and spiral confinement.
SW is the unit weight of the pile, used for self-weight calculations. If SW>0, self-weight
is included in the analysis.
PREST is the effective prestressing stress in the strands for the layer (REAL)
PREST=0 for no prestressing
NBS is the numbers of bars/strands in the layer (INTEGER)
DSI is the diameter of the centerline of the steel layer (REAL)
ASI is the area of each steel bar/strand in the layer (REAL)
CYIELD is the confined yield
HS is the confined spacing
CDIA is the confined diameter
Figure: 17.3.d Permissible Circular Piles
If the pile is prestressed, then neither tubular steel nor H-pile sections are allowed. If
mild steel is present along with prestressing strands, the prestressing stress on the
concrete is reduced due to the area of mild steel, and the strain in the concrete due to
the prestressing is assumed to be shared with the mild steel.
EXAMPLE INPUT
Figure: 17.3.e Sample Circular Pile for Input
22" diameter circular pile. 1" thick outer steel shell, 2 layers of reinforcing steel with 8
#7 bars in each layer.
NL=2 D=22.0 V=0.0 TH=1.0 HPI=0

8 N=7 C=3
8 N=7 C=5.875
For steel H-piles used with KTYPE=3 or HP=1 in either circular or square sections
Two lines are required:
OR=ORIENT line 1
[D=DEPTH U=WEIGHT] line 2, for standard H-pile sections
or
[D=DEPTH TW=WEB B=WIDTH TF=FLANGE] line 2, for user defined sections
Where
ORIENT is the orientation of the H-pile.
ORIENT=2 for web parallel to the Local Y axis, or 3 for web parallel to thelocal Z-
axis. (INTEGER)
DEPTH is the depth of the H-pile in inches (REAL). (Use the nominal depth for standard
sections)
WEIGHT is the standard unit weight of the H-pile in lb/ft3 (REAL)
WEB is the web thickness in inches (REAL)
WIDTH is the flange width in inches (REAL)
FLANGE is the flange thickness in inches (REAL)
Note: For metric examples H-pile dimensions will be soft converted to metric units.
After the cross section data is input, SIX additional lines defining the pile system are
required
Figure: 17.3.f Allowable H-Pile Orientations
EXAMPLE INPUT
Figure: 17.3.g Sample Mild Steel and H-pile Layout
Square Pile with 14 mild steel bars As=1

each spaced as shown with an embedded
14 x 117 H-pile.
W=30 V=0 N=2

NG=2 HPI=1
1.0 12 12 0 N=7 D=2
1.0 12 -12 0 N=7 D=2
OR=2
D=14 U=117
For Nonlinear Analysis of Oblong Piers, used with NLOPT=2 and KTYPE=4 NOTE: This
type is ONLY available for pier elements NOT for piles.
R= OR RW=RWIDTH D=DIAM T=VT V=DV B=WV S=WDEN
Where
OR is 2 or 3 and defines orientation, see Figure: 17.3.i (INTEGER)
RWIDTH is the width of rectangular portion (REAL)
DIAM is the diameter of semi-circular ends (REAL)
VT is void type, see Figure: 17.3.i VT may be 1 or 2 for OR = 2 or 3 (INTEGER)
DV is the diameter of the void for VT=1 (DV=0 for no void)
DV is the depth of the void parallel to DIAM for VT=2 (DV=0 for no void) (REAL)
WV is the width of the void parallel to RWIDTH for VT=2
(WV= 0 for no void) (REAL)
WDEN is the self weight of the concrete
Reinforcement specification (Rectangular middle is similar to steel generation for

rectangular sections)
NG=NGRPS >M=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE

Where
NGRPS is the # of groups of bars/strands (INTEGER)
BMETH 0=Custom, 1=Percentage
AS is the bar or strand areas (REAL)
Y is the local Y coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
Z is the local Z coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
PREST is the prestressing stress in the strands after all losses (REAL)
N=N1 D=D1 is code to generate multiple bars in (INTEGER)
N=N1 D=2 means generate N1 bars/strands in the local Y direction as follows:
if N1 = 2, second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
if N1 > 2, then second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
and remaining N1-2 bars/strand are equally spaced between first two bars/strands
Reinforcement specification: (Semi-circular ends are similar to steel generation for

circular sections.)
NL=NLAY
PREST, NBS, D=DSL, A=ASI repeat NLAY times
Where
NLAY is the number of circumferential steel layers (INTEGER)
NBS is the number of bars in the layer (INTEGER)
PREST is the effective prestressing stress in the strands for the layer
PREST=0 for no prestressing (REAL)
NBS is the numbers of bars/strands in the layer (total for both semicircular ends.
DSL is the diameter of the centerline of the steel layer (REAL)
ASI is the area of each steel bar/strand in the layer (REAL)
Note: If mild steel is present along with prestressing strands, the prestressing stress on
the concrete is reduced due to the area of mild steel, and the strain in the concrete due
to the prestressing is assumed to be shared with the mild steel.
Figure: 17.3.h Allowable Horizontal Oblong Orientation

Figure: 17.3.i Allowable Vertical Oblong Orientation
Required for all types: Input for free length, number of sub-elements, axial
efficiency and pile head fixity
F=FLNG H=KFIX A=SKNEFF B=TIPEFF S=NSUB G=GAP C=KBCAP pile

configuration line 1
or
E=ECAP H=KFIX A=SKNEFF B=TIPEFF S=NSUB G=GAP C=KBCAP
Where
FLNG is the length of pile between the pile cap and the ground surface, the free length.
It can be zero. If < 0, the cap is analyzed as a buried cap.(not currently written to GUI)
ECAP is the elevation of the pile cap. This is assumed at the top of the pile heads, which
is the same as the centroid of the pile cap. Since the pile cap is modeled using a shell
element, the pier column base, the pile heads and the neutral axis of the pile cap all
meet in the same location. This modeling does NOT account for the thickness of he pile
cap in the geometry of the system (it is included in the behavior).
KFIX is for the pile head fixity into the cap (INTEGER)
KFIX=0 for pinned pile head
KFIX=1 for fixed pile head
NSUB is the number of sub-elements the length of pile between the pile cap and the
ground surface, Z, is to be divided into for the non-linear analysis only. (INTEGER).
Typical values for NSUB vary between 10 to 15 (NSUB ensures adequate cracking and
failure analysis over the large Z [free length] distances)
KBCAP is the option for soil-springs on the pile cap
KBCAP=0 for no springs
KBCAP=1 for 4 vertical springs under each cap element and 3 horizontal springs on
the sides in contact with the soil
KBCAP=2 for 9 vertical springs under each cap element and 3 horizontal springs on
the sides in contact with the soil
SKNEFF is the skin efficiency factor.
TIPEFF is the tip efficiency factor.
GAP is the gap between the bottom of the pile cap and the ground surface. Must be
positive, a zero or negative gap is ignored. Used in conjunction with the KBCAP
parameter.
Input for the number of piles in the X and Y directions
NPX, NPY, NCX, NCY pile configuration line 2
Where
NPX is the # of piles in X direction (INTEGER)
NPY is the # of piles in Y direction (INTEGER)
NCX is the spacing X combo box index on the Pile Cap page(not currently written to
GUI)
NCY is the spacing Y combo box index on the Pile Cap page(not currently written to
GUI)
The piles are generated in the order given in the figure below:
Figure: 17.3.j Pile Numbering and Spacing
For Pile Spacing in the X-direction
The pile system may have even or uneven spacing in the X direction. If only ONE value is
given (DX1), then the spacing is uniform. Otherwise, values MUST be given for each
distance between every row of piles. There must be NPX-1 values given for uneven
spacing.
DX1, DX2,... pile configuration line 3
Where
DX1 is the spacing between the first and second row of piles in the X direction. (REAL)
DX2 is the spacing between the second and third row of piles in the X direction. (REAL)
Pile Spacing in the Y-direction

The pile system may have even or uneven spacing in the Y direction. If only one value is
given (DY1), then the spacing is uniform. Otherwise, values MUST be given for each
spacing value between every row of piles. There must be NPY-1 values given for
uneven spacing.
DY1, DY2,... pile configuration line 4
Where
DY1 is the spacing between the first and second row of piles in the Y direction. (REAL)
DY2 is the spacing between the second and third row of piles in the Y direction. (REAL)
Input for P-Multipliers in the X-direction
P-Multipliers used for the X direction given in order from trail to lead row of piles
(Figure: 17.3.k). P-Multipliers have to be specified for existing rows only. The program
assigns the values in the correct order depending upon the resultant loads in the X
direction.
PYMX1, PYMX2, ... pile configuration line 5
Where
PYMX1 is the multiplier for the trail row (REAL)
PYMX2 is the multiplier for the second row (REAL)
Figure: 17.3.k P-multiplier definition
Input for P-Multipliers in the Y-direction
P-Multipliers used for the Y direction given in order from trail to lead row of piles. P-
Multipliers have to be specified for existing rows only. The program assigns the values
in the correct order depending upon the resultant loads in the Y direction.
PYMY1, PYMY2,... pile configuration line 6
Where
PYMY1 is the multiplier for the trail row (REAL)
PYMY2 is the multiplier for the second row (REAL)
17.3.2 Multiple Pile Sets
This section allows for the definition of multiple pile cross sections to be defined. This
allows for different pile cross sections in a group. Each cross section is referred to as
type. A type of cross sections can be assigned to any pile in the group. The following
data tells which pile cross section type to use for each pile. Only types greater than 1
(the default set to use) need to be specified.
PILESET
The next line can be repeated for as many pile types as need to be specified.
PILEx PSETx (repeat for each pile type greater than 1)
Where
PILE is the pile number to which the cross section type is applied.
PSET is the pile cross section set number to apply to this pile.
Example:
PILESET
1 2 (pile # 1 of pile type #2)
17.3.3 Pile Batter Information
This input specifies the batter of the piles. There can be as many lines as required. Each
line can use the Ni or Pi method of applying the batter for multiple piles but not both.
This section can be skipped if there are no battered piles. NOTE: the self-weight of the
pile is corrected for a battered pile.
BATTER
N1, N2, N3, X=XB, Y=YB
or
P=P1, P2, P3,...PN X=XB Y=YB
Where
N1 is the battered pile number ( zero for no more battered piles) for generation, it is
the first pile number in series (INTEGER)
N2 is the last pile number in series. (defaults to N1) (INTEGER)(not written by GUI)
N3 is the pile number increment in the series (defaults to 1) (INTEGER)(not written by
GUI)
Pi is a list of the piles to which the current batter is specified.(INTEGER)
XB is the battering in x-direction specified as a slope (Figure 8, example 0.33 in./in.)
(REAL)
YB is the battering in the y-direction. (REAL)
Battered piles can be defined in one of several ways. The simplest approach is to list
each pile that is battered with its corresponding batter angle. This is of the form "N1
X=XB Y=YB". To decrease the number of input lines, the pile numbers can be generated
as in a FORTRAN do loop. The format "N1,N2,N3 X=XB" applies the given batter to the
piles starting at N1 and going to N2 with the increment of N3. Thus "5,14,3 X=0.25"
applies an X batter of H=3/L=12 (Figure 8) to the piles 5,8,11,14. Another method of
applying batter to multiple piles is to list all the pile numbers at which the batter is
applied in the form "P=P1,P2,P3,... X=0.25". To apply the same batter as before we could
write "P=5,8,11,14 X=0.25".
Figure: 17.3.l Battered Pile with Slope Defined
17.3.4 Missing Pile Data
This data is used to specify any removed piles. If none are removed, skip this section.
MISSING
NMPIL
Where
NMPIL is the number of missing piles from the pile group (INTEGER). This value may be
zero.
Specify missing piles by x-row, y-row pile coordinate system. The coordinate system of
the pile rows is shown in Figure: 17.3.m. One line is used for each missing pile. Repeat
the following lines NMPIL times.
IXORD, IYORD repeat NMPIL times
Where
IXORD is the x row location of missing pile (INTEGER)
IYORD is the y row location of missing pile (INTEGER)
Figure: 17.3.m Missing Pile Coordinate System Definition

17.3.5 Soil Information
This section is used to specify the soil properties.
SOIL
NSET=SOILSETS, L=NLAYERS, R=NLAYER1, NLAYER2, … C=KCYC, S=NNSPT1,
NNSPT2, … W=WT, O=OBURDEN, V=WFREQ, P=NDYFLG, B=TB, X=LS1, LS2,…
(all on one line)
where
SOILSETS is the number of soil sets.
NLAYERS is the total number of soil layers to be given (INTEGER).
NLAYER1, ... is the number of layers in each soil set.
KCYC is for the cyclic response of soil (INTEGER).
=0 for a static soil response.
=N modifies P-Y curves to account for cyclic application of loads with N number of
events.
NNSPT1, ... is the number of points in the SPT sounding for each soil set (an integer
value is to be provided per soil set).
WT is the water table elevation used in conjunction with the SPT boring log table (in
graphical interface).
OBURDEN is the overburden option used in conjunction with the SPT boring log table
(in graphical interface).
=0 Don’t include overburden.
=1 Include overburden (only applicable value).
WFREQ is the frequency of loading (rad/sec) (Used to create pseudo dynamic p-y
curves from static curves for static loads only)
NDYFLG
= 0 non-reversible P-Multipliers
= 1 reversible P-Multipliers
= 2 sets P-Multipliers to 1.0 after first peak
TB is Flag for user input at top and bottom of all soil layers in all soil sets (This flag is a
legacy flag for input files created in version FB-MultiPier v4.03 or older, that did not yet
treat the top and bottom property flag as a distinct per-layer flag; thus, when an input
file last saved in version 4.03 or older is opened, this flag is applied to each layer in all
soil sets).
= 0 uniform properties specified for layer
= 1 properties specified for top and bottom of layer
LS1 is the flag to indicate the lateral model Limestone (McVay) is present in the soil set
and has at least one soil layer, of any type, beneath it. This is written once per soil set.
The ‘1’ in LS1 indicates this flag belongs to soil set 1, and so on.
= 0 no layers exist beneath Limestone (McVay), or no layer of Limestone (McVay)
exists.
= 1 at least one layer, of any soil type, exists beneath a layer of Limestone (McVay)
Soil property input lines (repeat for each soil layer)

This input specifies the soil properties. When using built-in soil resistance curves, soil
layer properties are defined using a pair of lines. The first line of the pair provides the
soil properties at the top of the layer, the soil type, and depth of the layer. The second
line of each pair provides the soil properties at the bottom of the layer. Properties
between the layer top and bottom elevations are computed by linear interpolation. A
total of 2*NLAYERS lines are required, where NLAYERS is the number of soil layers
defined.
φ; K or E (LSM = 12) or SOIL_TEST_TYPE (LSM = 16) or CONE_TIP_

mLat
RESISTANCE (LSM = 18) or E (LSM = 19) ; γ; C or RQD (LSM = 12) or
iLat u
RESIDUAL_STRENGTH (LSM = 15) or SOIL_TEST_VALUE (LSM = 16) or
MATERIAL_INDEX (LSM = 19); ε or q (LSM = 8 or LSM = 9 or LSM = 12 or
50 uLat
LSM = 13 or LSM = 19) or CoeffEarthPress (ASM = 7); ε or C (LSM = 5 or
100 avg
LSM = 6) or STIFFNESS_CONSTANT (LSM = 12) or GEOLOGICAL_STRENGTH_
INDEX (LSM = 19); G; ν; τf or F (ASM = 7); THICKNESS; LSM; ASM; TSM;
side
SURFACE_TYPE (ASM = 4); q (ASM = 4) or f (ASM = 6); RESERVED; E ;
uAx smax m
E /E ; q ; U= USER_DEF_PU; N=N50; L=SLR; V=SWVS; F=SFDF; M=NSMOD;
m i t
J=RSDAMP; E=ETOP, EBOT; B=PBOT; S=TYPE; A=TANDB line one
φ; K or E (LSM = 12) or SOIL_TEST_TYPE (LSM = 16) or CONE_TIP_
mLat
RESISTANCE (LSM = 18) or E (LSM = 19); γ; C or RQD (LSM = 12) or
iLat u
RESIDUAL_STRENGTH (LSM = 15) or SOIL_TEST_VALUE (LSM = 16) or
MATERIAL_INDEX (LSM = 19); ε or q (LSM = 8 or LSM = 9 or LSM = 12 or
50 uLat
LSM = 13 or LSM = 19) or CoeffEarthPress (ASM = 7); ε or C (LSM = 5 or
100 avg
LSM = 6) or STIFFNESS_CONSTANT (LSM = 12) or GEOLOGICAL_STRENGTH_
INDEX (LSM = 19); G; ν; τf or F (ASM = 7) line two
side
where
φ is the angle of internal friction.
K is the subgrade modulus.
E is the mass modulus for the lateral soil model.
mLat
E is the intact modulus for the lateral soil model.
iLat
SOIL_TEST_TYPE is an integer indicator of the soil test type (SPT, CPT, dilatometer,
pressuremeter). It is paired with the SOIL_TEST_VALUE variable.
CONE_TIP_RESISTANCE is the cone tip resistance.
γ is the total unit weight.
C is the undrained shear strength.
u
RQD is rock quality designation.
RESIDUAL_STRENGTH is the residual strength.
SOIL_TEST_VALUE is the soil test value, given the SOIL_TEST_TYPE.
MATERIAL_INDEX is the Hoek-Brown material index.
ε is the major principal strain @ 50% maximum deviator stress in a UU triaxial
50
compression test.
q is the unconfined compressive strength for lateral soil models.
uLat
CoeffEarthPress is the horizontal earth pressure coefficient.
ε is the major principal strain @ failure in a UU triaxial compression test.
100
STIFFNESS_CONSTANT is the stiffness constant.
GEOLOGICAL_STRENGTH_INDEX is the geological strength index (GSI).
C is the average undrained shear strength for the soil layer.
avg
G is the shear modulus.
ν is Poisson's ratio.
τf is the vertical failure shear stress.
F is the ultimate side friction.
side
THICKNESS is the thickness of the soil layer.
LSM is the Lateral Soil Model (for p-y curves):
1 = Sand (O'Neill, 1984) requires φ, K, γ
2 = Sand (Reese, Cox, and Koop, 1974) requires φ, K, γ
3 = Clay (O'Neill) requires C , ε , ε ,γ
u 50 100
4 = Clay - Soft, Matlock; (Matlock, 1970) requires γ, C , ε
u 50
5 = Clay - Stiff, with free water; (Reese, 1975) requires K, γ, C , ε , C
u 50 avg
6 = Clay - Stiff, without free water; (Reese, 1975) requires γ, C , ε , C
u 50 avg
7 = Custom P-Y curve for lateral soil response. Requires four additional lines of input
(2 for top and 2 for bottom of layer).
8 = Limestone (McVay) Uncoupled requires q
uLat
9 = Limestone (McVay) requires q
uLat
10 = Sand (API) requires φ, K , γ
11 = Clay (API) requires γ, C , ε
u 50
12 = Weak rock (Reese 1997) requires q , E , RQD, STIFFNESS_CONSTANT
uLat mLat
13 = Strong rock (NCHRP 2006) requires q
uLat
14 = Liquefied sand requires γ
15 = Hybrid liquefied sand requires γ, RESIDUAL_STRENGTH, ε
50
16 = Piedmont residual requires γ, SOIL_TEST_TYPE, and one SOIL_TEST_VALUE,
signifying: SPT Blow Count, Cone Tip Resistance, Dilatometer Modulus, or
Pressuremeter Modulus
17 = C-Phi requires γ, K, φ, C
u
18 = Loess requires γ, CONE_TIP_RESISTANCE
19 = Massive rock requires γ, q , ν, E ,, MATERIAL_INDEX, GEOLOGICAL_
uLat iLat
STRENGTH_INDEX
20 = Linear (subgrade) requires γ, K
ASM is the axial soil model (for T-z curves).
1 = Driven Pile (McVay et al, 1989) requires G, ν, τf
2 = Drilled Shaft on Sand (O’Neill et al, 1996) requires γ
3 = Drilled Shaft on Clay (O’Neill et al, 1996) requires C , γ
u
4 = Drilled Shaft on Intermediate Geo Material IGM (O'Neill) requires q , γ, E ,
uAx m
E /E , SURFACE_TYPE, q , drilled shaft unit weight, and concrete slump. Note that
m i t
the latter two items are stored in the PILE header. Further, note that only one set of
parameter values can be specified per layer for this axial soil model.
5 = user defined T-Z curve. Requires four additional lines of input (2 for top and 2 for
bottom of layer).
6 = Drilled shaft limestone (McVay) requires F .
smax
7 = Driven Pile Sand (API) requires φ, CoeffEarthPress, γ, F .
side
8 = Driven Pile Clay (API) requires γ, C .
u
TSM is the torsional soil model.
1 = Hyperbolic Model requires G, τf
2 = user defined T-θ curve. Requires four additional lines of input (2 for top and 2 for
bottom of layer)
SURFACE_TYPE is the bore hole surface type:
1 = Rough surface
2 = Smooth surface
q is the unconfined compressive strength for axial soil models.
uAx
F is the ultimate unit skin friction
smax
E is the mass modulus for the axial soil model
m
E /E is the ratio of mass modulus to intact modulus
m i
q is the split tensile strength
t
USER_DEF_PU is the Pu value for a layer that is assigned user defined p-y curves
N50 is the number of cycles necessary to degrade the soil by 50%.
SLR is the rate of loading for slow cyclic loading.
SWVS is the shear wave velocity for each soil layer.
SFDF is the fully degraded soil factor.
NSMOD
0 = no soil gap, soil loads and unloads on the same curve.
1 = gap model, soil forms a gap when unloading parallel to initial stiffness in either
tension or compression.
RSDAMP is the force proportional soil damping factor (lateral only)
(e.g. 0.01 applies 1% of the lateral soil force as a damping force)
ETOP is the elevation at the top of the soil layer
EBOT is the elevation at the bottom of the soil layer
PTOP is the elevation of the piezometric head at the top of the layer
PBOT is the elevation of the piezometric head at the bottom of the layer
STYPE is the soil layer type (UI only)
0 = Cohesionless
1 = Cohesive
2 = Rock
TANDB specify both Top and Bottom soil layer properties for the select layer.
0 = Use one set of properties per layer
1 = Specify top and bottom properties
SPT Sounding values (values are provided per soil set)

This input lines consists of two input lines per soil set. Contained in the first input line
are the elevations for which SPT data are available, and the SPT values are supplied in
the second input line. In the event that no SPT values are supplied for a given soil set,
then two lines with ‘0’ values will be supplied.
SPTELEV1 SPTELEV2 …
SPTVALUE1 SPTVALUE2 …
:
Where
SPTELEV1 is the highest elevation value for which an SPT blow count value is available.
SPTELEV2 is the second highest elevation value for which an SPT blow count value is
available.
SPTVALUE1 is SPT blow count value corresponding to SPTELEV1.
SPTVALUE2 is SPT blow count value corresponding to SPTELEV2.
User defined P-Y data - ONLY FOR LSM=7

User defined soils require TWO additional lines of input.
(Two lines define the P-Y curve for the soil layer.)
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, Y9, Y10
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10
Where
Yi is the ith Y value on the user specified P-Y curve.
Pi is the ith P value on the user specified P-Y curve.
The user defined curves are specified by a set of TEN points.
User defined T-Z data - ONLY FOR ASM=5

User defined axial soil model requires TWO additional lines of input.
(Two lines define the T-Z curve for the soil layer.)
Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, Z5, Z6, Z7, Z8, Z9, Z10
T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10
Where
Zi is the ith Z value on the user specified T-Z curve.
Ti is the ith T (axial stress) value on the user specified T-Z curve.
User defined T-θ data - ONLY FOR TSM=2

User defined torsional soil model requires TWO additional lines of input.
(Two lines define the T-θ curve for the soil layer)
θ1, θ2, θ3, θ4, θ5, θ6, θ7, θ8, θ9, θ10
T1,T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10
Where
θi is the ith θ value on the user specified T-θ curve.
Ti is the ith T (torque) value on the user specified T-θ curve.
Pile Tip Soil Data

After all layer data is supplied, the soil tip data is input
The following tip models are available:
1 = Diven Pile (McVay et al. 1989)

2 = Drilled Shaft Sand (O'Neill et al. 1996)
3 = Drilled Shaft Clay (O'Neill et al. 1996)
4 = Drilled Shaft Intermediate Geomaterial (IGM) (O'Neill)
5 = Custom Q-Z Curve
6 = Driven Pile Sand (API)
7 = Driven Pile Clay (API)
8 = Driven Pile Sand (Mosher 1984)
9 = Dirven Pile Clay (Skempton 1951)
Gi , ν, Q , TipSM
ult
or
NSPT, 0, 0, TipSM
or
Cub, 0, 0, TipSM
or
Emtip, 0, 0, TipSM
or
phi, EndCond, Eb, TipSM
or
Cub, EndCond, 0, TipSM
or
Eb, Zc, nMosher, TipSM
or
Cub, e50, nSkempton, TipSM
Where
Gi is the shear modulus of the soil
NSPT is the uncorrected SPT value at the tip elevation
Cub is the undrained shear strength at the tip elevation
Emtip is the IGM mass modulus at the tip elevation
ν is the Poisson’s Ratio at tip elevation
Qult is the axial bearing failure load (force) acting on the pile tip
phi is the angle of internal friction
EndCond is the pile end condition (pipe piles only)
0 = not plugged
1 = plugged
Eb is the ultimate unit end bearing
Zc is the tip displacement upon reaching Eb
nMosher isthe soil relative density exponent
e50 is the major prinicpal strain at 50% maximum deviator stress in a UU triaxial
compression test
nSkmepton is the tip displacement expononent
TipSM:
1 = Driven Pile (Mcvay et al, 1989) requires Gi, ν, Qult
2 = Drilled Shaft on Sand (O'Neill et al, 1996) requires NSPT
3 = Drilled Shaft on Clay (O'Neill et al, 1996) requires Cub
4 = Drilled Shaft on Intermediate Geo Material (O'Neill) requires Emtip
5 = user defined Q-Z curve. Requires two additional lines of input
6 = Driven Pile Sand (API), requires phi, EndCond, Eb
7 = Driven Pile Clay (API), requires Cub, EndCond
8 = Driven Pile Sand (Mosher), requires Eb, Zc, nMosher, TipSM
9 = Driven Pile Sand (Skempton), requires Cub, e50, nSkempton
User defined Q-Z data - ONLY FOR TIP SOIL MODEL=5
The user defined tip soil model requires TWO additional lines of input.
Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, Z5, Z6, Z7, Z8, Z9, Z10
Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8, Q9, Q10
Where
Zi is the ith Z value on the user specified Q-Z curve.
Qi is the ith Q value on the user specified Q-Z curve.
SPT data is defined as follows:

Two lines of data are provided for each soil set. The first line of data contains a number
of elevations, where the number of values provided is equal to to the previously defined
value(s) of NNSPT1, ... for each soil set. The second line of data contains a number of
SPT blow counts, where the number of values provided is equal to the previously
defined value(s) of NNSPT1, ... for each soil set.
ELEV1, ...
NSPT, ...
(the two lines of data above are repeated per soil set)
Where
ELEV1, ... is the line of data containing elevation values for soil set 1
NSPT1, ... is the line of data containing SPT blow counts for soil set 1
17.3.6 Multiple Soil Sets
Multiple soil sets are used to define unique soil profiles for a particular pile (or piles) in a
pile group. In the input file after the SOIL header,
SOIL
NSET= NSSET L= NLAYER C= KCYC S= NNSPT R= NSSEG1, NSSEG2, NSSEG3...
Where
NSSET is the number of soil sets
NLAYER is the total number of soil layers
KCYC is for cyclic response of soil
KCYC=0 for a static soil response
KCYC=N modifies P-Y curves to account for cyclic application of loads with N number
of events
NNSPT is the number of points in the SPT sounding
NSSEGx is the number of layers in soil set x (must specify for each soil set)
(Soil properties for each soil layer)
SOILSET
PILEx SSETx (repeat for each pile of soil set greater than 1)
Where
PILEx is the pile number to apply soil set x
SSETx is the soil set number (x)
Example:
SOILSET
1 2 (pile # 1 of soil set # 2)
SOILGRID
PILEX PILEY SSETx (repeat for each pile of soil set greater than 1)
Where
PILEX is the row number that the pile is located within.
PILEY is the column number that the pile is located within.
Example:
SOILGRID
1 1 2 (pile in row 1, column 1 has soil set 2 applied at its grid location)
SOILGRID is only used by the UI.
SOILCAP header is only saved when the Vertical Bearing Resistance is turned on and soil
set greater than 1 is applied to one or more pile cap elements.
SOILCAP
CAPX CAPY SSETx (repeat for each pile cap grid)
Where
CAPX is the row number that the pile is located within.
CAPY is the column number that the pile is located within.
Example:
SOILCAP
1 1 2 (pilecap in row 1, column 1 has soil set 2 applied at its grid location)
17.3.7 Custom Pile Cap Compression-Only Vertical Bearing
Springs
This section allows for the definition of compression-only vertical bearing springs for
fitting to those portions of pile caps that lie at or below the GSE for one more soil sets.
SFND_VC
T= NUMCURVES
The following lines are repeated for each soil set that encompasses the midplane of the
pile cap, and further, for which custom pressure versus displacement curves are defined.
Alternatively stated, the next NUMPOINTS+1 lines are repeated NUMCURVES times,
where NUMPOINTS can vary between 2 and 20 for a given soil set.
S= SOILSETNO N= NUMPOINTS U= ULTBRG

X1 Y1
X2 Y2
XN YN
…
where,
SOILSETNO is the soil set number associated with the next NUMPOINTS lines.
NUMPOINTS is the number of points making up the pressure vs displacement curve,
where up to 20 points can be specified.
ULTBRG ultimate bearing pressure associated with curve.
X1 to XN are the displacement values for the curve (must begin with zero and be in
ascending order).
Y1 to YN are the pressure values for the curve (must begin with zero and be in
ascending order).
:
17.3.8 Structural Information
INPUT FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF STRUCTURES

The following lines are for the differing types of structures available for analysis. This
section can be skipped if no structure is used. There are four different allowable types of
structures. These are indicated by the following headers: STRUCTURE, MAST, SOUND,
RETAIN. The user can only select one type of structure.
The STRUCTURE header is for the standard pier structure
STRUCTURE
N=N1 S=S1, S2, S3... H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, [V=NPAD(L), POFF(L), PSPC1(L), PSPC2(L)...
PSPCn(L), NPAD(R), POFF(R), PSPC1(R), PSPC2(R)... PSPCn, NROW
or
P=NPAD(L), PUNF(L), POFF(L), NPAD(R), PUNF(R), POFF(R), NROW ] \
T=TC, CANT, TBEAM R=RH1, RH2, RH3 J=NLOPT K=SHAPE (all one line)
Figure: 17.3.n Structure Geometry

Figure: 17.3.o Pier Cap Superelevation
When using the STRUCTURE header, a minimum of three material property lines are
required. The first is for the column, the second is the pier cap and the third is for the
center section of the pier cap. After the three material lines, any additional properties
(NUMPR) and then additional members (NUMLM) should be given.
Superelevation is modeled by specifying a slope for the pier cap. When applying
superelevation, the leftmost column height remains the same while all other column
heights are automatically adjusted by the program.
The BENT header is for the pile bent structure
BENT
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \ E=SPELEV
D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR [V=NPAD(L), POFF(L), PSPC1(L), PSPC2(L)...
PSPCn(L), NPAD(R), POFF(R), PSPC1(R), PSPC2(R)...
PSPCn, NROW
or
P=NPAD(L), PUNF(L), POFF(L), NPAD(R), PUNF(R), POFF(R), NROW ] \ T=TC,
CANT, TBEAM R=RH1,
RH2, RH3 J=NLOPT K=SHAPE(all one line)
Figure: 17.3.p Pile Bent Geometry
When using the BENT header, a minimum of two material property lines are required.
The first is for the pier cap and the second is for the center section of the pier cap.
The MAST heading is used for high mast lighting/sign type structures.
MAST
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR T=TC, TCANT, TBEAM R=RH1, RH2,
RH3 J=NLOPT
(all one line)
Figure: 17.3.q Mast Geometry
When using the MAST header, a minimum of two material property lines are required.
The first is for the column, the second is for the mast/sign portion. Next comes any
additional properties (NUMPR). Next comes two lines for high mast line loading, as
follows:
LC= MLL
LA= ALL
Where
MLL is the line loading applied to the mast in the positive Y direction. One value is
written on this line per load case.
ALL is the line loading applied to the arm in the positive Y direction. One value is written
on this line per load case.
Next, the data for the additional members (NUMLM) is written.
The SOUND header is for use when sound walls are required.
SOUND
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR T=TC, CANT, TBEAM J=NLOPT
Figure: 17.3.r Sound Wall Geometry
The sound wall is modeled as a single cantilever in the center of the pile cap. The
properties represent a given width (S1) of the wall. One material property line is
required when using the SOUND header. The properties represent the single column.
Following this line should be any additional properties (NUMPR) and then any
additional members (NUMLM).
This header is needed if retaining walls are used. The retaining wall is modeled by a
cantilever representing a section of the wall. The soil layers behind the wall must also be
defined. The soil layers are used to apply load to the structure.
RETAIN
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR T=TC, CANT, TBEAM J=NLOPT
Figure: 17.3.s Retaining Wall Geometry
The following line defines the soil layers behind the wall
O=IOPTI S=ISURG L=NLAYE line 1
Where
IOPTI is equal to 1 for pressure at rest
is equal to 2 for active case computed with Coulomb expression
is equal to 3 for passive case computed with Coulomb expression
ISURG is 0 for no surcharge
is 1 for uniform surcharge
is 2 for line load
is 3 for strip load
NLAYE is the number of layers
This line defines the basic soil geometry
A=THETA S=BETA H= HWATE G=GWATE Q=Q1, Q2, Q3 line 2
Where
THETA is the inclination of the back of wall measured clockwise from horizontal plane
(degrees)
BETA is the inclination of ground slope behind wall measured counterclockwise from the
horizontal plane (degrees)
HWATE is the Z coordinate of ground water level (reference is center of pile cap)
GWATE is the unit weight of water
Q1, Q2, Q3 are parameters for surcharge definition
If ISURG = 0 Q1, Q2, Q3 are not used
If ISURG = 1 Q1 = uniform surcharge
If ISURG = 2 Q1 = line load intensity
Q2 = Horizontal distance of line load from back of wall
If ISURG = 3 Q1 = Intensity of load
Q2 = Horizontal distance of load from back of wall
Q3 = Width of strip load
Soil Layer Property Lines (one line for each layer, NLAY)
T=THICK S=NSLAY P=COHES, PHI, DELTA G=GAMMA, GASAT

(one line per layer, the bottom layer being layer #1)
Where
THICK is the layer thickness
NSLAY is the number of sub-layers in which the layer will be divided
COHES is the cohesion of the soil
PHI is the friction angle of soil (degrees)
DELTA is the angle of friction soil/wall (degrees)
GAMMA is the unit weight of the soil
GASAT is the saturated unit weight of the soil
One material property line is required when using the RETAIN header. Then any
additional properties and extra members.
The definition of the parameters for all structures are given below.
Where
N1 is # of columns of the bridge bent supported on the pile group (INTEGER)
S1, S2, S3… is spacing of the pier columns. For retaining walls and sound walls, S1 is
the wall width. (REAL)
H1 is height of the pier columns (REAL,)
O1 is offset of the pile cap from the column (REAL)
C1 is # of column nodes (INTEGER)
B1 is # of pier cap nodes (Figure F21) (INTEGER)
B2 is # of pier cap cantilever nodes (Figure F21) (INTEGER)
NPAD(L) is the number of bearing locations (left row of bearings)
POFF(L) is the offset from the first bearing location (left row of bearings)
PSPCx(L) is the bearing location spacing value (left row of bearings)
NPAD(R) is the number of bearing locations (right row of bearings)
POFF(R) is the offset from the first bearing location (right row of bearings)
PSPCx(R) is the bearing location spacing value (right row of bearings)
PUNF(L) is the uniform bearing location spacing (left row of bearings)
PUNF(R) is the uniform bearing location spacing (right row of bearings)
PUNF is uniform spacing between bearing locations, same for all locations (REAL)
For a single row of bearing locations, the left and right row parameters should be the
same.
W1 is cantilever length of top of bent (REAL)
CC is the cantilever flag, where a value of 1 means the model has cantilevers, and a
value of 0 means the model does not have cantilevers.
NUMLM is number of extra beam elements (Figure F21) (INTEGER)
NUMPR is number of extra beam properties (INTEGER)
TC is # of segments for tapered column (INTEGER), equal to zero for no tapered
columns. This overrides C1
TCANT is # of segments for tapered cantilevers (INTEGER), equal to zero for no tapered
cantilevers. This overrides B2
TBEAM is the number of segments for tapered beams (INTEGER), equal to zero for no
tapered beams
NLOPT selects the non-linear option for the pier structure analysis
NLOPT=1 for linear material
NLOPT=2 for nonlinear material
NLOPT=3 for linear material where interaction diagram are generated
RH1 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever base
RH2 is the depth of the pier cap at the center of the pier cap
RH3 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever tip
KFLOOD is the flag to tell if the column (if under the water table) is flooded or not. If
flooded, the buoyancy will use the net area. If not flooded, it will use the
gross area (net=area-void).
SPELEV is the pier cap superelevation slope (+ or -) beginning at leftmost pier column.
Expressed as a decimal (not a percent).
CONT is the bridge span continuity option (over the pier)
0 for discontinous spans (does not transfer moment)(default)
1 for continous spans (transfers moment)
NROW is the number of bearing rows on the pier cap
1 for a single bearing row
2 for two rows of bearings (default)
Specify the number of tapered sections with CANT. If the RH1, RH2, and RH3 properties
are missing (zero by default) then a linear taper will be used.
The bearing locations are specified based on the following figure.
Figure: 17.3.t Positioning Two Rows of Bearings
MATERIAL PROPERTY LINES
The next lines specify the cross-sectional properties of the pier column and pier cap. A
total of 1,2 or 3 + NUMPR properties (extra beam members) are required. The material
properties are input beginning with material # 2 (Figure: 17.3.t) onward: pier columns,
pier cap, center pier cap (Figure: 17.3.t), and extra beams, respectively for a general pier
structure. The extra beam (Figure: 17.3.t) properties have the same format and may be
given individually or lumped together. To simulate no connection between piers, use
very small values for I, E, G, J, and A for the center pier cap material (Figure: 17.3.t). For
linear properties, use the following single lines for each property.
Linear Property Line

L=LEN E=E1 I=I3,I2 J=J1 G=G1 A=A1 W=WIDTH D=DIA S=SW K=SHAPE
Where
I3 is the Moment of Inertia for axis 3 of the frame element (REAL)
I2 is the Moment of Inertia for axis 2 of the frame element (REAL)
J1 is Torsional Moment of Inertia of the frame element (REAL)
A1 is Area of c/s of the frame element (REAL)
G1 is Shear Modulus of the frame element (REAL)
LEN is the component length. Not currently used in the analysis. Reserved for future
program expansion.
WIDTH is the section width. Not currently used in the analysis. Reserved for future
program expansion.
SHAPE is the cross-section shape.
1: Circular
2: Rectangular
3: H-Pile
4: Oblong
Nonlinear property lines (Same as for Piles)
For nonlinear structures with interaction diagrams (NLOPT=2 or 3)

These lines are almost identical to the input for the piles. See pile input for definitions of
terms.
For the default stress strain curves (MATOPT=1)

M=MATOPT C=FPC, EC S=FY(1), FSU(2), FY(3), FY(4), ES(1), ES(2), ES(3), ES(4)
K=KTYPE
or
For user specified stress strain curves (MATOPT=2)
M=MATOPT S=KSTEEL(1), KSTEEL(2), KSTEEL(3), KSTEEL(4) K=KTYPE
Stress-Strain Curve for Concrete, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2

NC=NPCC, SIGC(1), SIGC(2),,, line 1
EPSC(1), EPSC(2),,, line 2
Stress-Strain Curve for Mild Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL(1) =
1
Stress-Strain Curve for Prestressing Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and
KSTEEL(2) = 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, line 2
Stress-Strain Curve for H-pile Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL(3)
=1
Stress-Strain Curve for Tubular Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL
(4) = 1
For Nonlinear Analysis of Square/Rectangular Piers, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and

KTYPE=2
W=WIDTH D=DEPTH V=DV B=BV N=ISTNOPT P=PREST S=SW
For nonlinear Analysis of Nonstandard Square/Rectangular Piers used with NLOPT=2,

KTYPE=2, and ISTNOPT= 2
NG=NGRPS HPI= IHPILE M=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE
For Nonlinear Analysis of Round Piers, used with NLOPT=2 and KTYPE=1
NL=NLAY NG=NGRPS D=DP V=DV S=SW TH=DS IC=ICON, T=TR HPI=IHPILE \

BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE
[PREST, NBS, D=DSI, A=ASI] repeat NLAY times
For confined sections (ICON=2):
When default stress-strain curves are specified for steel components (MATOPT=1), the
following single line is required:
FY=FYHOOP HS=HOOPS D=DHOOP T=CONF_USER_DEF R=CUD_MILD, CUD_
PRESTRESS,CUD_HPILE,CUD_CASING
where,
CONF_USER_DEF=1;
CUD_MILD=0;
CUD_PRESTRESS=0;
CUD_HPILE=0;
CUD_CASING=0.
When user defined stress-strain curves are specified for steel components (MATOPT=2),
the following single line is required:
FY=FYHOOP HS=HOOPS D=DHOOP T=CONF_USER_DEF R=CUD_MILD, CUD_
PRESTRESS, CUD_HPILE,CUD_CASING
where,
CONF_USER_DEF=2.
For any type of steel present in the cross section, the corresponding CUD_ parameter
must be set equal to 1.
For each CUD_ parameter set equal to 1, the following corresponding lines are required:
Stress-Strain Curve for CUD_MILD=1 (Mild Steel):

EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, Y=εy Q=v line 2
Stress-Strain Curve for CUD_PRESTRESS=1 (Prestressing Steel):

Stress-Strain Curve for CUD_HPILE=1 (H-pile)

Stress-Strain Curve for CUD_CASING=1 (Casing)

where:
T= flag to determine default or user defined stress-strain curve.
= 1 (Default Stress-Strain Curve)
= 2 (User-Defined Stress-Strain Curve)
Y = yield strain
Q = poison’s ratio
For steel H-piles used with KTYPE=3 or HP=1 in either circular or square sections
Two lines are required:
OR=ORIENT line 1
[D=DEPTH U=WEIGHT] line 2, for standard H-pile sections
or
[D=DEPTH TW=WEB B=WIDTH TF=FLANGE] line 2, for user defined sections
For Nonlinear Analysis of Bullet Piers, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and KTYPE=2
R=ORIENT W=WIDTH D=DEPTH T=VTYPE V=DV B=BV S=SW N=ISTNOPT
P=PREST (line 1)
NG=NGRPS BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE (line 2)
Figure: 17.3.u Material Property Identification
Figure: 17.3.v Tapered column only - material numbers
Figure: 17.3.w Tapered cantilever only - material numbers

Figure: 17.3.x Tapered column and cantilever material numbers
EXTRA MEMBER LINES (Only Required if NUMLM 0)
The next set of lines define any extra beams used in the superstructure. NUMLM lines
are required to define node numbers and material numbers for each extra beam. The
nodes connecting the extra beams must be in the pile cap or in the Pier. The material
number must correspond to one defined in material properties. The user has the option
of using any previously defined material property (ex. # 3, Pier Cap properties) for the
extra beams or defining new ones (material # 5, 6, etc.) in increasing sequential order.
INODE, JNODE M=MATNUM L=LOC T=TYPE
Where
INODE is the first node of the extra beam
JNODE is the end node of the extra beam
MATNUM is the material number to use for the element
LOC is the location of the extra member in the model. A value of 1 means
the extra member connects column nodes, a value of 2
means the extra member connects pier cap nodes, and a value of 3 means the
extra member connects pile nodes.
TYPE is the cross section type code. A value of 0 means a pier type, and a
value of 1 means a pile type.
TAPERED COLUMN AND CANTILEVER SECTIONS
Columns and Cantilever Pier Cap sections can be set to tapered (non-prismatic) by
setting TC and/or TCANT to values greater than 0. When material properties, linear or
non-linear, are set for tapered sections, 2 sets of properties [base and top (tip)] are
required instead of the one set required for prismatic sections. Figure: 17.3.w and
Figure: 17.3.x, and sample inputs, below, illustrate the addition of tapered column and
cantilever properties to the input file.
Figure: 17.3.y Addition of tapered Column properties
When tapered column properties are set, the Column Base properties are set on
Material Property Line #1, and the Column Top properties are set on Material Property
Line #2. All subsequent structure properties are set on one line # higher than as
specified in MATERIAL PROPERTY LINES.
A sample input for a structure with linear properties and tapered columns is given
below. The structure also has two extra members, with one extra member property. For
reference purposes, the material property lines are numbered and labeled in italics.
STRUCTURE
N= 1 S= 72.0 H= 120.0 O= 90.0 C= 4 B= 1,2 W= 60.0 X= 1 F= 0 E= 0 D= 0 A=
2,1 T= 3,2,0 J= 1 K= 0,0
1 I= 1000.0,1000.0 J= 5000.0 A= 500.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. a)
2 I= 900.0,900.0 J= 4000.0 A= 400.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. b)
3 I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
4 I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
5 I= 100.0,100.0 J= 500.0 A= 50.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
Material Property Lines (MPL’s) 1 and 2 list properties for the Column base and top,
respectively. MPL 3 lists properties for the Pier Cap, and MPL 4 lists properties for the
Center Pier Cap (defaulted to the same values as Pier Cap properties). MPL 5 lists the
extra members’ properties.
Figure: 17.3.z Addition of tapered Cantilever properties
If the Cantilevers are prismatic [TCANT = 0], Cantilever properties default to the Pier
Cap Material properties. For a tapered Cantilever Pier Cap, the Cantilever Base
properties are set on Material Property Line #4, and the Cantilever Tip properties are set
on Material Property Line #5, unless tapered column sections have also been set (see
example below), in which case the properties are set on Material Property Lines #’s 5
and 6, respectively. Any extra member properties are set on two line #’s higher (or three
line #’s higher, if columns are tapered as well) than as specified in MATERIAL PROPERTY
LINES.
A sample input for a structure with linear properties and tapered cantilevers is given
below. The structure also has two extra members, with one extra member property. For
reference purposes, the material property lines are numbered and labeled in italics.
STRUCTURE
N= 2 S= 72.0 H= 120.0 O= 90.0 C= 4 B= 1,2 W= 60.0 X= 1 F= 0 E= 0 D= 0 A=
2,1 T= 3,2,0 J= 1 K= 0,0
1 I= 1000.0,1000.0 J= 5000.0 A= 500.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
2 I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
3 I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
4 I= 400.0,400.0 J= 1200.0 A= 100.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. c)
5 I= 300.0,300.0 J= 1000.0 A= 90.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. d)
6 I= 100.0,100.0 J= 500.0 A= 50.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
Material Property Line (MPL) 1 lists properties for the Column. MPL 2 lists properties for
the Pier Cap, and MPL 3 lists properties for the Center Pier Cap (defaulted to the same
values as Pier Cap properties). MPL’s 4 and 5 list the Cantilever Pier Cap base and tip
properties, respectively. MPL 6 lists the extra members’ properties.
For the output, the material properties are listed starting with property #2. Property #2
is for the column. If the column is tapered, the base is property #2 plus as many of the
next ones required to get one property for each section in the column (TC). Next comes
the beam property, then the center beam. If the cantilever is tapered, then TCANT
properties will be next. Finally only additional (extra members) properties will be last.
Hammerhead Piers with Parabolic Tapered Pier Caps
Under the STRUCTURE header.
STRUCTURE
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \ E=SPELEV
D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR [V=NPAD, POFF, PSPC1, PSPC2, .... or P= NPAD,
PUNF, POFF/
T=TC, CANT, TBEAM R=H1, H2, H3 J=NLOPT KSHAPE (all one line)
Where
H1 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever base
H2 is the depth of the pier cap at the center of the pier cap
H3 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever tip
Specify the number of tapered sections with CANT. If the H1, H2, and H3 properties are
missing (zero by default) then a linear taper will be used.
Figure: 17.3.aa Parabolic Cantilever Taper

17.3.9 Column Information
The “Column” problem type allows for the convenient analysis/design of a single
structural (frame) member. The column ends are supported by springs, and the
engineer may adjust the spring stiffnesses to simulate the actual end support
conditions. A spring value equal to zero eliminates that support. External forces and self
weight may be applied to all nodes on the column.
A total of five lines are required in addition to the pile property data.
COLUMN
S = S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6 top of column
S = S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6 bottom of column
L = LF, LL, LI F = FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ top of column
L = LF, LL, LI F = FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ bottom of column
Where
S1 is the tip spring resistance in the global X direction
S2 is the tip spring resistance in the global Y direction
S3 is the tip spring resistance in the global Z direction
S4 is the rotational spring resistance about the global X-axis
S5 is the rotational spring resistance about the global Y-axis
S6 is the rotational spring resistance about the global Z-axis
LF is the first load case number in the generation sequence that the load will be applied
in.
LL is the last load case number in the generation sequence that the load will be applied
in.
LI is the increment for the generation sequence between load cases LI and LL.
FX is the magnitude of the load in X direction
FY is the magnitude of the load in Y direction
FZ is the magnitude of the load in Z direction
MX is the magnitude of the moment about X axis
MY is the magnitude of the moment about Y axis
MZ is the magnitude of the moment about Z axis
The first S= line is for the top of the column. The second S= line is for the bottom of the
column. The first F= line is for the top of the column. The second F= is for the bottom of
the column.
17.3.10 Concentrated Nodal Loads
These are load input lines. As many lines as needed can be used. One line must be
supplied for each loaded joint and each load condition. This can be skipped if no
concentrated nodal loads are applied. This can happen in the case of mast or sound
walls where wind load is applied or in retaining walls where soil pressure is applied.
Note, torsion in the pile cap can only be applied where piles are located.
In the input file after the LOAD header,
LOAD
NF, NL, NI, L=LC, F=FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ, D=DX, DY, DZ, RX, RY, RZ, T=TYPE
(one line per nodal load)
Where
NF is the starting node number
NL is the ending node number(not available in GUI)
NI is the node numbering increment(not available in GUI)
DX is the force in the global X-direction (only written for applied displacement)
DY is the force in the global Y-direction (only written for applied displacement)
DZ is the force in the global Z-direction (only written for applied displacement)
RX is the moment about the global X-axis (only written for applied displacement)
RY is the moment about the global Y-axis (only written for applied displacement)
RZ is the moment about the global Z-axis (only written for applied displacement)
LRFD Loads:
TYPE =
DC Dead load of components
DD Downdrag
DW Dead load of wearing surfaces and utilities
EH Horizontal earth pressure load
EV Vertical earth pressure load
ES Earth surcharge load
EL Locked-in Construction Stresses
PS Post Tensioning
CR Creep
SH Shrinkage
LL Live load
IM Impact
CE Vehicular centrifugal force
BR Vehicular braking force
PL Pedestrian live load
LS Live load surcharge
WA Water Load
WS Wind load on structure
VP Vertical Wind Pressure
VR Vertical Wind Press. - Reverse Loads
FR Friction
TU Uniform temperature
TG Temperature gradient
SE Settlement
EQ Earthquake
BL Blast Loading
IC Ice load
CT Vehicular collision force
CV Vessel collision force
LFD Loads:
TYPE =
D Dead load
LL Live load (AASHTO Type "L")
IM Impact (AASHTO Type "I")
E Earth pressure
B Buoyancy
WS Wind load on structure (ASSHTO Type "W")
LF Longitudinal force from live load
CF Centrifugal force
R Rib shortening
S Shrinkage
T Temperature
EQ Earthquake
SF Stream flow pressure
ICE Ice pressure
17.3.11 Bearing Location Loads
The following information is used by piers with bearings locations. The information
under the LOADBP header describes the concentrated loads applied to the bearing
locations.
LOADBP
PADNUM L= LC F= FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ T=TYPE B=DIR (one line per nodal
load)
Where
PADNUM is the bearing number
DIR is the bearing row ("L" for left or "R" for right)
:

17.3.12 Generated Loads
This header is only used by UI. For each load generation record, the following lines are
written:
GENERATEDLOAD (line 1)
G=LoadGenerationRecord T=MemberType N=MemberNumber
D=DistributionType L=LoadGenerationType (line 2)
where
LoadGenerationRecord is a 1-based number that specifies the order in which the load
generation occurred amongst other load generation records.
MemberType is the member type, with the range of values as follows: “Column”, “Pier
Cap”, “Pile Cap”, or “Pile”.
MemberNumber is the member number, used in conjunction with the above Member
Type; for example, if T= Column and N= 2, this indicates “Column 2”.
DistributionType is the Distribution Type, with the range of values as follows:
“Constant”, “Uniform”, and “Linear”.
LoadGenerationType is the Load Generation Type; L= 0 for load is for selected
member only, L= 1 for load is for like members.
L=LoadCase T=LoadType D=Displacement N=NumberOfNodes (line 3)
where
LoadCase is the load case in which the load generation was done.
LoadType is the load type; this is only applicable in AASHTO mode; this is the two letter
AASHTO code; for example, LL to indicate Live Load.
Displacement is the flag for displacement or applied load.
= 0 for applied load
=1 for displacement;
NumberOfNodes is the number of nodes at which loads were generated.
This line is written once for each of the nodes as specified by NumberOfNodes in line
3 above:
NodeNumber L=LoadCase D= DX DY DZ DRX DRY DRZ or F= FX FY FZ FRX FRY
FRZ LoadType (line 4)
where
NodeNumber is the node number for the loading data.
LoadCase is the load case in which the load generation was done.
DX is the displacement in the X direction at the specified node.
DY is the displacement in the Y direction at the specified node.
DZ is the displacement in the Z direction at the specified node.
DRX is the displacement in the RX direction at the specified node.
DRY is the displacement in the RY direction at the specified node.
DRZ is the displacement in the RZ direction at the specified node.
FX is the load in the X direction at the specified node.
FY is the load in the Y direction at the specified node.
FZ is the load in the Z direction at the specified node.
FRX is the load in the RX direction at the specified node.
FRY is the load in the RY direction at the specified node.
FRZ is the load in the RZ direction at the specified node.
LoadType is the load type; this is only applicable in AASHTO mode; this is the two letter
AASHTO code; for example, LL to indicate Live Load.
:
17.3.13 Wind Load Generation
The following information is used by the wind load generator in the graphical interface:
WIND
N=NMWIND A=ANGLE1, ANGLE2, ANGLE3, ANGLE4, ANGLE5
S=SSAREA, SSWIND, SSWARM C= CPARET, CPAREL, CPWIND

P=CLARET, CLAREL, CLWIND, CLWARM (Wind load on structure--All on one line)
And
V=LTLENG, LTWIND, LTFARM (Wind load on live load)
SSWINDT SSWINDL PIERWINDT PIERWINDL LTWIND LLWIND (for 0 degrees)

Where
NMWIND is the number of wind load cases (WSx and WLx count together as one case).
A maximum of 5 wind load cases can be generated automatically.
ANGLEx is the skew angle of the wind in degrees measured from the transverse axis.
(angles can vary between 0 and 75°, in increments of 15 degrees).
SSAREA is the transverse area of superstructure.
SSWIND is the transverse wind intensity on superstructure (not currently used).
SSWARM is the transverse wind force moment arm from the center of the pier cap to
the center of gravity of the superstructure.
CPARET is the transverse area of the pier cap.
CPAREL is the longitudinal area of the pier cap.
CPWIND is the transverse wind intensity at the level of the pier cap (not currently
used).
CLARET is the transverse area of the columns.
CLAREL is the longitudinal area of the columns.
CLWIND is the transverse wind intensity at the level of the columns (not currently
used).
CLWARM is the transverse wind force moment arm from the base of the columns to
the center of gravity of the columns. This parameter is computed by the program for
Pile Bent models (using the water table or ground surface elevation).
LTLENG is the transverse length of the live load.
LTWIND is the transverse wind intensity on the live load (not currently used).
LTFARM is the transverse wind force moment arm from the center of the pier cap to
the center of gravity of the live load.
SSWINDT is the transverse wind pressure on the superstructure (at each angle).
SSWINDL is the longitudinal wind pressure on the superstructure (at each angle).
PIERWINDT is the transverse wind pressure on the pier (at each angle).
PIERWINDL is the longitudinal wind pressure on the pier (at each angle).
LTWIND is the transverse wind line load on the live load (at each angle).
LLWIND is the longitudinal wind line load on the live load (at each angle).
Note: This section must end with a blank line.
The wind load generator calculations are as follows:
Wind Load on Structure (WS)
l Transverse load (per bearing location), F

trans
l Longitudinal load (per bearing location), F

long
l Vertical loads at the bearing locations are determined using a rigid beam and spring
model
l Moment about the global x axis (per bearing location), M

x
Note: Since the wind load on the column is applied at the centroid (and not the pier cap),
ratio of clwarm/colheight is used to reduce the wind load in order to apply it at the level
of the pier cap.
Wind Load on Live Load (WL)
l Transverse load (per bearing location), F

trans
l Longitudinal load (per bearing location), F

long
l Vertical loads at the bearing locations are determined using a rigid beam and spring
model
l Moment about the global x axis (per bearing location), M

x
17.3.14 Spring Properties
This set of lines specifies discrete stiffness springs, which may be placed on the pier
columns, pier cap, pile cap, and/or piles/shafts. These lines may be skipped if there are
no springs.
SPRING
NS
Where
NS is the number of spring elements (INTEGER) (zero identifies no springs)
A total of NS lines, one for each spring is required to define the spring stiffness.
If NS=0, no stiffness lines necessary.
NN S=KX, KY, KZ, KXX, KYY, KZZ

Where
NN is the node the spring element is connected to (INTEGER)
KX is the stiffness of the spring in X direction (REAL)
KY is the stiffness of the spring in Y direction (REAL)
KZ is the stiffness of the spring in Z direction (REAL)
KXX is the stiffness of the spring for rotation about X axis (REAL)
KYY is the stiffness of the spring for rotation about Y axis (REAL)
KZZ is the stiffness of the spring for rotation about Z axis (REAL)

17.3.15 Pile Cap Properties
These two lines specify the properties for the pile cap which is identified as material # 1
in Figure F26-a.
CAP
E=E1 U=U1 T=T1 S=WGT O=SWGT
Where
E1 is Young's modulus of the Pile Cap elements (REAL)
U1 is Poisson's ratio of the Pile Cap elements (REAL)
T1 is Thickness of the Pile Cap elements (REAL)
WGT is the unit weight of the pile cap (REAL).
SWGT is the unit weight of the soil on the pile cap (REAL).
Specify thickened cap elements:

Additional lines can be input directly after the cap property line to specify that a
particular element have a different thickness than the one specified above. This can be
done using the following line (repeated as many times as necessary):
ROW, COL T=THICK, SELTHK D=DTHCK
Where
ROW is the row number of the pile cap element
COL is the column number of the pile cap element.
THICK is the thickness to use for the stiffness calculations for this element
SELTHK is the thickness to use for the self-weight calculations.
DTHCK is the drawing thickness used to draw the pile cap thickness in the 3D Edit
window and 3D Bridge Window. This thickness does not affect the analysis.
17.3.16 Removed Pier Cap Element
Pier cap elements can be removed (similar to pile cap elements). The elements can be
removed to create separate pier structures. The following data is required:
RMBEAM
NSPAN, NELEM
Where
NSPAN is the span number in which the element is to be removed
NELEM is the element number in the span to remove
17.3.17 Bearing Connection
under the PADBC header describes the bearing location to superstructure connectivity.
This information is provided per pier.
PADBC
L=LEFTPAD S= FX, FY, FZ, FRX, FRY, FRZ O=OFFSET
Or
R=RIGHTPAD S= FX, FY, FZ, FRX, FRY, FRZ O=OFFSET
Where
LEFTPAD is the bearing location index number in left row of bearing locations
RIGHTPAD is the bearing location index number in right row of bearing locations
FX is the fixity for the local x-direction
FY is the fixity for the local y-direction
FZ is the fixity for the local z-direction
FRX is the fixity for rotation about the local x-axis
FRY is the fixity for rotation about the local y-axis
FRZ is the fixity for rotation about the local z-axis
For all six directions: 0 for released (free), 1 for constrained
Values greater than 1 indicate the custom connection material property number. This
custom connection is described by a load-displacement relationship. See PADPROP
header.
OFFSET is the bearing offset (measured from the centerline of the pier cap to the center
of the bearing). This value must be greater than zero when two rows of bearings are
used.
For a single row, the left and right bearing parameters should be the same.
Figure: 17.3.ab Bearing Connection Layout for One and Two Rows
17.3.18 Point Mass
This section allows the addition of point masses to a structure.
MASS
The next line specifies the mass to be added to a node for each of the six global
directions. There is one header per pier.
NS,NF,NI M=MX,MY,MZ,MRX,MRY,MRZ
Where
NS is the starting node to add the discrete mass.
NF is the ending node to add the discrete mass (not written by UI).
NI is the increment to generate additional node numbers between NS and NF at which
to add mass (not written by UI).
MX mass coefficient in the X translation DOF.
MY mass coefficient in the Y translation DOF.
MZ mass coefficient in the Z translation DOF.
MRX mass coefficient in the X rotation DOF.
MRY mass coefficient in the Y rotation DOF.
MRZ mass coefficient in the Z rotation DOF.

17.3.19 Point Dampers
This section allows the addition of point dampers to a structure. Point dampers are not
allowed for modal analysis.
DAMP
The next line specifies the dampers to be added to a node for each of the six global
directions. There is one header per pier.
NS,NF,NI C=DAMPX,DAMPY,DAMPZ,DAMPRX,DAMPRY,DAMPRZ
Where
NS is the starting node to add the dampers to.
NF is the final node to add the dampers to.
NI is the increment to generate additional node numbers between NS and NF at which
to add dampers.
DAMPTX damping coefficient for X translation.
DAMPTY damping coefficient for Y translation.
DAMPTZ damping coefficient for Z translation.
DAMPRX damping coefficient for rotation about X.
DAMPRY damping coefficient for rotation about Y.
DAMPRZ damping coefficient for rotation about Z.

17.3.20 Dynamic Load Function Application
LOADYN
The next lines specify the load function and its point of application. There is one header
per pier. There can be as many of these lines as required to specify all loaded nodes and
DOF for this load function. There are two possible means of assigning dynamic loads to
nodal DOF, as detailed below.
Method 1: The first method consists of specifying one load function per node, where the
individual load function can be applied to one or more DOF at the selected node. In this
context, the DOF flags (L1 through L6) can be set to N (not loaded), or L (loaded).
NF,NL,NI L=LCN F=L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6 D=FUNC N=LDTYPE
Where
NF is the first node in a generation sequence for which the DOF specification is used.
NL is the last node in a generation sequence for which the DOF specification is used.
NI is the increment for generating node numbers between NF and NL for which the
DOF specification is used. NL and NI can be left blank if no generation is desired.
LCN is the load case number (defaulted to 1).
Li is the state at which the ith DOF can have, either loaded or NO load. Therefore, Li can
have ONLY the two following values;
Li = L is for loaded.
Li = N is for NO load.
FUNC is the load function number to apply (default is 1)
LDTYPE is the method being used to define the dynamic loads (0 = Method 1; 1 =
Method 2).
Method 2: The second method is the default method used by the UI, and allows for
application of a unique load function for each loaded DOF. In this context, the DOF flags
(FCN1 through FCN6) can be set to 0 (not loaded), or some integer value, where the
integer value corresponds to a load function. This method permits up to six load
functions to be assigned across the DOFs of a given node.
NF,NL,NI L=LCN F=FCN1,FCN2,FCN3,FCN4,FCN5,FCN6 N=LDTYPE
Where
NF is the first node in a generation sequence for which the DOF specification is used.
NL is the last node in a generation sequence for which the DOF specification is used.
NI is the increment for generating node numbers between NF and NL for which the
DOF specification is used. NL and NI can be left blank if no generation is desired.
LCN is the load case number (defaulted to 1).
FCNi is the load function assigned to the ith DOF, either unloaded (zero) or loaded
(non-zero).
LDTYPE is the method being used to define the dynamic loads (0 = Method 1; 1 =
Method 2).
17.3.21 Surcharge in Retaining Wall Model
This header RETAIN_SUR would only be written for retaining walls that have some
form of surcharge (line, strip, uniform) applied.
RETAIN_SUR
L= 1 R= 0
L= 2 R= 0
…
:
where
The line is repeated for each load case.
L is load case
R = 0 corresponds to off
R = 1 corresponds to on
18 Post Processing File Formats
FB-MultiPier writes many results files that are used by the post processing plotting
program to display the results. The following is a list of the files and their contents.
NOTE: Each list constitutes a sequential record in the file. Unless otherwise noted, the
FORTRAN convention of variables I-N are four byte integers while (A-H,O-Z) are double
precision. Numbers appended to the file extensions indicate the substructure (e.g.,
*.PLF2 is the Geometry and Control Information for Substructure #2).
1. *.ASH AASHTO Load Combination Results

2. *.AXL Axial Forces for Beam Element
3. *.BPF Bearing Pad Forces Due to Span Self Weight
4. *.CMB AASHTO Load Combinations
5. *.DFO Element Forces (Dynamic Analysis)
6. *.EIG Mode Shape and Frequency Information
7. *.EXM Extra Member End-Fixity
8. *.MOM Maximum Moments in Beam Element
9. *.MPR Multiple Pier Generation
10. *.NCV Analysis Convergence Information
11. *.PCM Pile Cap Element Stresses
12. *.PEL Pile Embedment Length Data
13. *.PIL Pile Data
14. *.PLF Geometry and Control Information
15. *.PLS Pier to Superstructure Connectivity
16. *.SLI Capacity Information
17. *.SOI Soil Spring Forces
18. *.SPE Bridge Span Eigen Results (Without Bearing Coordinates)
19. *.SPN Bridge Span Eigen Results (With Bearing Coordinates)
20. *.STA Pushover Analysis Data
21. *.STR Stresses of Pile Cap
22. *.VES Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis Results
23. *.VMD Shear and Moment Results
18.1 AASHTO Load Combination Results
File: name.ASH
This file contains design code and limit state information.
nCodeType
Where
nCodeType is the AASHTO design code used for load combinations
(0 – for LRFD, 1 – for LFD)
For LRFD,
nGroup1, nGroup2, …, nGroup13
(CritPl(J),J=1,13)
(CritCol(J),J=1,13)
(CritPierCap (J),J=1,13)
Where
nGroup1… are the limit states that were analyzed
(0 – for analyzed, 1 – for not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pile demand/capacity ratio for
each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pier column demand/capacity
ratio for each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pier cap demand/capacity ratio
for each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)
For LFD,
nGroup1, nGroup2, …, nGroup11
(CritPl(J),J=1,11)
(CritCol(J),J=1,11)
(CritPierCap (J),J=1,11)
Where
nGroup1… are the limit states that were analyzed
(0 – for analyzed, 1 – for not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pile demand/capacity ratio for
each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pier column demand/capacity
ratio for each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pier cap demand/capacity ratio
for each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)
18.2 Axial Forces for Beam Elements
File: name.AXL
This file contains the axial forces for each beam type element (structure and pile).
Numtrs, numfrm
where
Numtrs is the number of truss type members (=0)
Numfrm is the number of bending type members.
The next two sections are repeated twice and both are repeated NUMLC times, for each
load case.
Mtype, nume
where
Mtype is the element type (=3 for structure, =2 for piles)
Nume is the number of elements
Axial
where
Axial is the axial force for the member for the appropriate load case.
18.3 Bearing Reactions Data (Due to Span Self Weight)
File: name.BPF
This file is only generated by (or read by) the engine for the purposes of ensuring
uniform bearing pad reactions in bridge/OPTS models due to span self weight.
Generation (or reading) of the file is dictated by the value of a flag within the PREPLDS
header. Further, this file is only generated in association with bridge models and OPTS
models that do not make use of the MPTE feature.
LOAD_PER_BEARING_LEFT_ROW, LOAD_PER_BEARING_RIGHT_ROW
The above line is issued once for each substructure.
18.4 AASHTO Load Combinations

File: name.CMB
This file contains the limit state equations for each AASHTO load combination.
[Comb. INC ] (line1)

+ Fact1 LC1 + Fact2 LC2 + Fact3 LC3 +... + FactN LCN (line2)
INC is the load combination number.

Fact1, Fact2, Fact3 ... , FactN are the AASHTO load factors.
LC1, LC2, LC3 ... , LCN are the load cases.
line1 and line2 are repeated per load combination.
18.5 Element Forces (Dynamic Analysis)
File: name.DFO
This file contains the element forces at a pile node for dynamic analysis. The file contains
the following lines:
# FLPIER_DYN (line 1)
# FORCES FOR PILE # PileNo ELEMENT #ElementNo NODE # NodeNo (line 2)
# IN GLOBAL COORDINATES (line 3)
# UNITS ARE : (line 4)
# Forces in kips - Moments in kip-in (line 5)
# TIME STEP AXIAL F22 F33 TORQUE M22 M33 (line 6)
Timestep Axial ShearF22 ShearF33 Torque MomentM22 MomentM33 (line 7)
where
PileNo is the pile number where the forces are calculated (on line 2).
ElementNo is the element number where the forces are calculated (on line 2).
NodeNo is the node number where the forces are calculated (on line 2).
line7 gives element force values calculated at "NodeNo" located on pile "PileNo",
element "ElementNo" .
Timestep is the time step when time-history analysis is considered.
Axial is the axial force.
ShearF22 is the shear force value in local direction 2.
ShearF33 is the shear force value in local direction 3.
Torque is the torque value.
MomentM22 is the moment force value around local direction 2.
MomentM33 is the moment force around local direction 3.
For time-history analysis, line 7 is repeated for each time step whereas for modal
analysis the line 7 is written once.
18.6 Mode Shape and Frequency Information
File: name.EIG
This file contains eigenvalues (frequencies) and eigenvectors (mode shapes) used in the
response spectrum analysis.
NVEC
where
NVEC is the number of number of eigenvectors
NNODE
where
NNODE is the number of nodes in the model
FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, ….. FREQN

where
FREQx is the vibration period for mode x.
Loop over the number of eigenvectors and over each node in the model
NODE, PHIXX, PHIYY, PHIZZ, PHIRX, PHIRY, PHIRZ
where
NODE is the model node number (integer)
PHIXX is the eigenvector in the x-direction (double)
PHIYY is the eigenvector in the y-direction (double)
PHIZZ is the eigenvector in the z-direction (double)
PHIRX is the eigenvector about the x-axis (double)
PHIRY is the eigenvector about the y-axis (double)
PHIRZ is the eigenvector about the z-axis (double)
Eigenvector data read example:
Do I=1,NVEC
Do j=1,NNODE
Read() NODE, (PHI(k), k=1, 6)
Enddo
Enddo
18.7 Extra Member End-Fixity

File: name.EXM
This file is printed once per substructure. The file printed for the first substructure does
not end in a number. However, all subsequent files do end with a number. For example,
for a two-substructure model, two files would be generated: name.EXM and name.EXM2.
Each file contains ASCII (formatted) content, constituting a listing of extra member
elements defined for each substructure. For each element listing, the end fixity of the
extra member is also listed, as detailed below.
Note:
1.If no extra members are available for a given model type, then no .EXM file will be
printed.
2. If no extra members are defined for a given substructure, then the associated .EXM file
will only contain a single line with ‘0’.
NEXM
where
NEXM is the number of extra members for the substructure.
ELEMNO EF1 EF2 EF3 EF4 EF5 EF6
where
ELEMNO is the extra member element number within the substructure
EF1 through EF3 are the end-fixity conditions for rotation about the I-end 1, 2, and 3
(element-local axes)
EF4 through EF6 are the end-fixity conditions for rotation about the J-end 1, 2, and 3
(element-local axes)
18.8 Maximum Moments in Beam Elements

File: name.MOM
This file contains the maximum moment forces for each beam type element (structure
and pile).
numfrm
where
Numfrm is the number of bending type members.
The next two sections are repeated twice and both are repeated NUMLC times, for each
load case.
Mtype, nume
where
Mtype is the element type (=3 for structure, =2 for piles)
Nume is the number of elements
Rmom
where
Rmom is the maximum moment in the member for the appropriate load case.
18.9 Multiple Pier Generation
File: name.MPR
This file contains information for generating multiple piers and bridge spans.
numPiers nsdof
where
numPiers is the number of bridge piers
nsdof is the number of soil stresses written per node in the soil
pierCoordX, pierCoordY, pierRot
where
pierCoordX is the nodal x-coordinate for the pile cap origin (for that pier)
pierCoordY is the nodal y-coordinate for the pile cap origin (for that pier)
pierRot is the rotation angle about global z-axis (for that pier)
18.10 Analysis Convergence Information
File: name.NCV
This file contains analysis parameters and convergence information.
Nconv
where
Nconv is the number of converged load cases (for static analyses)
is the number of converged load combinations (for AASHTO load combination
problems)
is the number of converged time steps (for dynamic analyses)
Phiovr
where
Phiovr is the user-defined strength reduction "phi" factor to use when factoring the
interaction diagrams.
NPlt
where
NPlt is the results version number (currently version 1)
Ndynam
where
Ndynam is the type of analysis (0 – for static, 1 – for dynamic, 2 – for response spectrum
analysis)
NTimeStep
where
NTimeStep is the time step used (for time domain dynamic analysis, otherwise 0)
NVEC
where
NVEC is the number of eigenvectors (for response spectrum analysis, otherwise 0)
LC,FLAG
where
LC is the load case or load combination number.
FLAG is an indicator if the load case/combination converged (-1 = not applicable; 0 =
converged; 1 = did not converge)
The line is repeated once for each load case/combination. Note that this array will only
be populated with non-zero values for static non-AASHTO/AASHTO models with more
than 1 load case/combination.
18.11 Pile Cap Element Stresses
File: name.PCM
This file contains nodal stresses on the pile cap.

ZSTRESS1 ZSTRESS2 ZSTRESS3 ZSTRESS4 ZSTRESS5 ZSTRESS6 ZSTRESS7 NOD
lcnum
where
ZSTRESS1 - is the pile cap element stress m2
ZSTRESS4 - is the pile cap element stress s23
NOD - is the pile cap node number
lcnum - is the load case number (for static Non-AASHTO analysis) or load comb
number (for static AASHTO analysis) or time step number (for dynamic time-history
analysis):
The pile cap element stresses are printed for corner nodes first followed by midside
nodes.
18.12 Pile Embedment Length Data
File: name.PEL
This file is only generated when the minimum pile embedment analysis mode is
selected.
NUMINCR,INCREMENT_INDEX,NUMLC,EMBED_LENGTH
NUMINCR is the number of increments to attempt between the starting and final
embedment lengths.
INCREMENT_INDEX is an integer-based index of the pile embedment increment
number, indicating a unique realization of a candidate pile embedment length. Index “0”
indicates the base file, or starting point embedment length. Index values greater than 0
signify models configured with candidate pile embedment lengths between the starting-
point embedment and (inclusively) the ending embedment length.
The UI makes use of this index to determine if the MPTE feature should be enabled in
the “Design Tables” windows upon loading of analysis results (0=yes; >0=no). The
engine prints this index to the *.PEL file anytime the *.PEL file is generated
NUMLC is the total number of load cases/combinations.
EMBED_LENGTH is pile embedment length. Note this assumes a single pile type and
single soil set.
The above line is printed once.
LC,MAX_X,MAX_X_PILE,MAX_Y,MAX_Y_PILE,MAX_T,MAX_T_PILE,MAX_C,MAX_C_
PILE,
LC is the load case/combination number.

MAX_X is the max pile head displacement in the X direction.
MAX_X_PILE is the pile corresponding to the max pile head displacement in the X
direction.
MAX_Y is the max pile head displacement in the Y direction.
MAX_Y_PILE is the pile corresponding to the max pile head displacement in the Y
direction.
MAX_T is the max pile axial tension force.
MAX_T_PILE is the pile corresponding to the max pile axial tension force.
MAX_C is the max pile axial compression force.
MAX_C_PILE is the pile corresponding to the max pile axial compression force.
The above line is repeated once for each load case/combination. For load
cases/combinations that do not converge, only the load case/combination number and
zero-valued entries are printed.
EOF
EOF is a string indicator of "end of file".
The above line consists of the string "EOF" and is printed once.
18.13 Pile Data
File: name.PIL
This file contains the pile information data.
NUMPN, NUMLC
where
Numpn is the total number of pile nodes
Numlc is the number of load cases or combinations written to results file.
NPX, NPY, nmpil, npil, kfix, nplnod

where
Npx is the grid in the X direction
Npy is the grid in the Y direction
Nmpil is the number of missing piles.
Npil is the number of actual piles
Kfix is the flag for pile head fixity (0=pinned, 1=fixed)
Nplnod is the number of nodes in a pile (including the top)
Mpilx, mpily (There are nmpil records)
Mpilx is the x index for the missing pile

Mpily is the y index for the missing pile.
Dxsp1, dxsp2, dxsp3,… (npx-1 values)
These are the pile spacings for the X direction.
Dysp1, dysp2, dysp3,… (npy-1 values)
These are the pile spacings for the y direction.
The following line is written ONCE FOR EACH PILE in the system (NPIL times)
(ipp(i), i=1, nplnod-1)
This index tells which cross section to use for each segment of pile.
(numpset(I), I=1, npil)
This index tells which pile set number to use for each pile in the system.
Ndfrln
This is the number of nodes in the free length (above the ground surface). This matches
nsub in the input file.
The next line is written for EACH PILE. (npil times).
TPL, GSE
where
Tpl is the total pile length.
Gse is the height above the ground of the pile cap
Batx, baty, batl (There are npil records)

where
Batx is the slope in the x direction for a battered element.
Baty is the slope in the y direction for a battered element.
Batl is the actual element segment length.
DZ, DX, DY, RZ, RX, RY (There are nplnod*npil records)
There are numpn records. These are the displacements in the X, Y, and Z and the
rotations in the X, Y, and Z directions for the pile nodes.
18.14 Geometry and Control Information
File: name.PLF
This is the main structure geometry and control information file. The contents are as
follows:
Npset
Is the number of pile sets for the piles.
nseg1, nseg2, nseg3, ….. nsegN
Where
nsegi is the number of cross section properties per pile set. There are npset numbers
written.
Ktype, Dia, Width, Depth

There is one record for each segment. (nseg records)
where
Ktype is the shape of the section (1=round, 2=square/rectangular, 3=Hpile)
Dia is the effective diameter of the cross section
Width is the width of the section
Depth is the depth of the section
Name
Is the problem file name (character*256)
Numnp, Nstr, kbent

where
Numnp is the number of nodes in the structure, including pile cap and the tops of the
piles.
Nstr is not used.
kbent is the model type
kbent = -1: For "Pile and Cap" & "Single Pile" models
kbent = 1: For "General Pier" model
kbent = 3: For "High Mast / Lighting Sign" model
kbent = 4: For "Retaining Wall" model
kbent = 5: For "Sound Wall" model
kbent = 6: For "Stiffness Formulation" model
kbent = 7: For "Pile Bent" model
kbent = 8: For "Column Analysis" model
ncol, nclv, ncantn, nadmem, nadprp, nclnod, nbmnod, nbpad, kmetr

where
ncol is the number of columns in the structure
nclv is the number of cantilevers (1 for mast; 2 for pier, bent)
ncantn is the number of cantilever nodes
nadmem is the number of additional members
nadprp is the number of additional properties
nclnod is the number of node in the columns
nbmnod is the number of nodes in the pier cap
nbpad is the number of bearing locations
kmetr is the metric flag (0=english,1=meters/KN, 2=mm,KN)
Space, Height, Offset, Cantil, Padoff
These are double precision.

where
Space is the spacing between columns
Height is the height of the columns
Offset is the distance from x=0 to start the structure.
Cantil is the length of the cantilevers
Padoff is the offset from the left column where the first bearing location starts.
X, Y, Z
There are numnp records. These are the X, Y and Z coordinates of the structure nodes
(Not including the piles below the pile cap).
Idx, idy, idz, idrx, idry, idrz
There are numnp records. There are the structural DOF for the problem. They are for
the x, y, z and then rotation x, y and z.
There are three sets of the following. For the beam type elements (mtype=3), for the
shell elements (mtype=6) and for the spring elements (mtype=8).
Mtype, nume
Mtype is the element type.

Nume is the number of elements of this type.
NELM, NND, (LT(J), J=1, NND) (this line is repeated nume times)
Nelm is the element number

Nnd is the number of nodes saved for this element
Lt() is the list of node numbers for this element.
DX, DY, DZ, RX, RY, RZ
There are numnp records. These are the displacements in the X, Y and Z and the
rotations in the X, Y and Z directions for the structure nodes (Not including the piles
below the pile cap).
MAXIMUMS
lmsh2,lpsh2,lmsp ,lpsp,lmrm2,lprm2,lmrm3,lprm3,
lmaxl,lpaxl,lmtor,lptor,lmsax,lpsax,lmsdx,lpsdx,
lmsdy,lpsdy,lmsto,lpsto,lmdiz,lpdiz,lmdix,lpdix,
lmdiy,lpdiy
lmsh2 is the load case with the max pile shear-2

lpsh2 is the pile number with the max pile shear-2
lmsp is the load case with the max pile shear-3
lpsp is the pile number with the max pile shear3
lmrm2 is the load case with the max pile moment-2
lprm2 is the pile number with the max pile moment-2
lmrm3 is the load case with the max pile moment-3
lprm3 is the pile number with the max pile moment-3
lmaxl is the load case with the max axial force
lpaxl is the pile number with the max axial force
lmtor is the load case with the max torsion
lptor is the pile number with the max torsion
lmsax is the load case with the max soil axial force
lpsax is the pile number with the max soil axial force
lmsdx is the load case with the max soil lateral-x force
lpsdx is the pile number with the max soil lateral-x force
lmsdy is the load case with the max soil lateral-y force
lpsdy is the pile number with the max soil lateral-y force
lmsto is the load case with the max soil torsion
lpsto is the pile number with the max soil torsion
lmdiz is the load case with the max pile axial-displacement
lpdiz is the pile number with the max pile axial-displacement
lmdix is the load case with the max pile x-displacement
lpdix is the pile number with the max pile x-displacement
lmdiy is the load case with the max pile y-displacement
lpdiy is the pile number with the max pile y-displacement
MINIMUMS
lmsh2,lpsh2,lmsp,lpsp,lmrm2,lprm2,lmrm3,lprm3,
lmaxl,lpaxl,lmtor,lptor,lmsax,lpsax,lmsdx,lpsdx,
lmsdy,lpsdy,lmsto,lpsto,lmdiz,lpdiz,lmdix,lpdix,
lmdiy,lpdiy
lmsh2 is the load case with the min pile shear-2

lpsh2 is the pile number with the min pile shear-2
lmsp is the load case with the min pile shear-3
lpsp is the pile number with the min pile shear3
lmrm2 is the load case with the min pile moment-2
lprm2 is the pile number with the min pile moment-2
lmrm3 is the load case with the min pile moment-3
lprm3 is the pile number with the min pile moment-3
lmaxl is the load case with the min axial force
lpaxl is the pile number with the min axial force
lmtor is the load case with the min torsion
lptor is the pile number with the min torsion
lmsax is the load case with the min soil axial force
lpsax is the pile number with the min soil axial force
lmsdx is the load case with the min soil lateral-x force
lpsdx is the pile number with the min soil lateral-x force
lmsdy is the load case with the min soil lateral-y force
lpsdy is the pile number with the min soil lateral-y force
lmsto is the load case with the min soil torsion
lpsto is the pile number with the min soil torsion
lmdiz is the load case with the min pile axial-displacement
lpdiz is the pile number with the min pile axial-displacement
lmdix is the load case with the min pile x-displacement
lpdix is the pile number with the min pile x-displacement
lmdiy is the load case with the min pile y-displacement
lpdiy is the pile number with the min pile y-displacement
18.15 Pier to Superstructure Connectivity
File: name.PLS
This file contains information for the bearing row to bridge span connectivity (per pier).
nodesLeft, nodesRight, spanNodeLeft, spanNodeRight, spanNodeLeftHeight,

spanNodeRightHeight
Where
nodesLeft is the number of connection nodes for the left bearing row
nodesRight is the number of connection nodes for the right bearing row
spanNodeLeft is the connector node number for the begin of bridge span
spanNodeRight is the connector node number for the end of bridge span
spanNodeLeftHeight is the elevation above the pier cap (c.g.) for the begin of bridge
span
spanNodeRightHeight is the elevation above the pier cap (c.g.) for the end of bridge
span
(If there is a left row of bearings – i.e. nodesLeft > 0)

(nodesLeft number of lines)
padLeftCoordX, padLeftCoordY, padLeftCoordZ
Where
padLeftCoordX is the nodal x-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padLeftCoordY is the nodal y-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padLeftCoordZ is the nodal z-coordinate for the bearing connection node
(If there is a right row of bearings – i.e. nodesRight > 0)

(nodesRight number of lines)
padRightCoordX, padRightCoordY, padRightCoordZ
Where
padRightCoordX is the nodal x-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padRightCoordY is the nodal y-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padRightCoordZ is the nodal z-coordinate for the bearing connection node

(one line per connector element)
nElem, padLeftConnI, padLeftConnJ
Where
nElem is the connector element number
padLeftConnI is node number at the I-end of the connector element
padLeftConnJ is node number at the J-end of the connector element

(one line per connector element)
nElem, padRightConnI, padRightConnJ
Where
nElem is the connector element number
padRightConnI is node number at the I-end of the connector element
padRightConnJ is node number at the J-end of the connector element
Nodal displacement information (per load case)

Nodal modeshape information (per eigenvector). Response Spectrum Analysis only.

(nodesLeft number of lines)
PHIX_L, PHIY_L, PHIZ_L, PHIRX_L, PHIRY_L, PHIRZ_L
Where
PHIX_L is the connector node displacement in the x-direction
PHIY_L is the connector node displacement in the y-direction
PHIZ_L is the connector node displacement in the z-direction
PHIRX_L is the connector node rotation about the x-axis
PHIRY_L is the connector node rotation about the y-axis
PHIRZ_L is the connector node rotation about the z-axis

(nodesRight number of lines)
PHIX_R, PHIY_R, PHIZ_R, PHIRX_R, PHIRY_R, PHIRZ_R
Where
PHIX_R is the connector node displacement in the x-direction
PHIY_R is the connector node displacement in the y-direction
PHIZ_R is the connector node displacement in the z-direction
PHIRX_R is the connector node rotation about the x-axis
PHIRY_R is the connector node rotation about the y-axis
PHIRZ_R is the connector node rotation about the z-axis
18.16 Capacity Information
File: name.SLI
This file contains the capacity information for each cross section used in the structure.
Nxpile, nxstruc
where
Nxpile is the number of cross section in the piles
Nxstruc is the number of cross sections in the structure.
idflg is the flag to tell if cross section capacity information (for interaction diagrams)
exists in the file. One flag is written for each cross section.
=1, information is not present
=0, information is present
The next set of records is repeated for each cross section for which capacity information
exists.
Nlcv is the number of contour slices for this cross section
PTUV, YPC, ZPC, YPT. ZPT

where
Ptuv is the ultimate axial tension strength
Ypc is the y shift for the plastic centroid (compression)
Zpc is the z shift for the plastic centroid (compression)
Ypt is the y shift for the plastic centroid (tension)
Zpt is the z shift for the plastic centroid (tension)
(PNC(J)J=1, 13) (repeated nlcv times)

where
pnc is the table of capacity results. Where the values are:
pnc(1) = φ* Compression capacity
pnc(2) = φ* moment capacity about local 3 axis (M1)
pnc(3) = φ* moment capacity about negative local 2 axis (M2)
pnc(4) = φ* moment capacity about negative local 3 axis (M3)
pnc(5) = φ* moment capacity about local 2 axis (M4)
pnc(6) = α1
pnc(7) = β1
pnc(8) = α2
pnc(9) = β2
pnc(10)=α3
pnc(11)=β3
pnc(12)=α4
pnc(13)=β4
The α and β’s are used as a pair for the following capacity equation:
If the compression is in the 1st quadrant (+2,+3) then use M1, M2, α1, β1
If the compression is in the 2nd quadrant (-2,+3) then use M3, M2, α2, β2
If the compression is in the 3rd quadrant (-2,-3) then use M3, M4, α3, β3
If the compression is in the 4th quadrant (+2,-3) then use M1, M4, α4, β4
18.17 Soil Spring Forces
File: name.SOI
This file contains soil spring forces for pile nodes embedded in soil.
do i = 1,npile -----! loop each pile

do j = is,ie -----! loop over pile nodes that are actually in the soil
write(nt9) (pileNdSoilFrcArr(j),j=1,nplnod*nsdof)
enddo
enddo
where
pileNdSoilFrcArr(j) is the array containing the soil spring forces
nsdof is the number of soil stresses written per node; this value will be either 4 or 6, as
dictated by the number of soil stresses written in the .MPR file.
The above function is repeated for each load case (for static Non-AASHTO analysis) or
load comb (for static AASHTO analysis) or time step (for dynamic time-history analysis):
18.18 Bridge Span Eigen Results (without Bearing Coordinates)
File: name.SPE
The file contains analysis results in the following format for models containing
superstructure spans.
nCurRNodes (line 1)
nCurLNodes (line 2)
nSpanElemNo (line 3)
nCurNodes (line 4)
modeShp (line 5)
where,
nCurRNodes - represents the total number of nodes on the right row of bearings on
left pier.
nCurLNodes - represents the total number of nodes on the left row of bearings on
right pier.
nSpanElemNo - represents the number of deck elements on the current bridge span.
nCurNodes - represents the total number of nodes on the current bridge span (right
row of bearings of left pier + left row of bearings of right pier + span nodes).
modeShp - is the mode shape data per span node (6 degrees of freedom).
line 1, line 2, line 3, and line 4 are written once per bridge span.
line 5 is repeated for each bridge span node.
The above process is repeated for each bridge span.
18.19 Bridge Span Results (with Bearing Coordinates)
File: name.SPN
The file contains analysis results in the following format for models containing
superstructure spans.
nCurRNodes (line 1)
coordR1,coordR2,coordR3 (line 2)
nCurLNodes (line 3)
coordL1,coordL2,coordL3 (line 4)
nSpanElem (line 5)
coordL1,coordL2,coordL3 (line 6)
nCurNodes (line 7)
disp1,disp2,disp3,disp4,disp5,disp6 (line 8)
where
nCurRNodes - represents the total nodes on the right row of bearings on left pier.
coordR1,coordR2,coordR3 - represents coordinates of each node on the right row of
bearings on left pier.
nCurLNodes - represents the total nodes on the left row of bearings on right pier.
coordL1,coordL2,coordL3 - represents coordinates of each node on the left row of
bearings on right pier.
nSpanElemNo - represents the number of deck elements on the current bridge span.
nCurNodes - represents the total number of node on the current bridge span (for
Bridge models, this is the right row of bearings of left pier + left row of bearings of right
pier + span nodes; for Span 1 of OPTS models, this is the left row of bearings + span
nodes; for Span 2 of OPTS models, this is the right row of bearings + span nodes).
disp1,disp2,disp3,disp4,disp5,disp6 - nodal displacements
line 1, line 3, line 5, and line 7 are written once per bridge span.
line 2 is repeated for each node on the right row of bearings on left pier.
line 4, and line 6 are repeated for each node on the left row of bearings on right pier.
line 8 is repeated for each span node.
The following lines are subsequently printed:

nSpanElem (line 9)
vXL,v2i,v3i,v2j,v3j,m3i,m2i,m3j,m2j,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,Pi,Pj,tori,torj (line 10)
The above process is repeated for each bridge span and once for each load case (for
static Non-AASHTO analysis) or load comb (for static AASHTO analysis) or time step (for
dynamic time-history analysis).
18.20 Pushover Analysis Data
File: name.STA
This file contains data used in pushover analysis.
The following line is printed, if pushover analysis is performed and a convergence is not
achieved for all the load cases.
NPSTEP ,0
where
NPSTEP is the number of converged load cases
The following line is printed, if dynamic time-history analysis is performed

NPSTEP,NPMAX
where
NPSTEP is defaulted to zero.
NPMAX is the number of total number of time steps specified
The above line is repeated per time step.
18.21 Stresses of Pile Cap

File: name.STR
This file contains the shell element stresses for the pile cap. There are eight records per
load case. Each record contains eight values per element times the number of cap
elements. The eight records represent:
Mxx, Myy, Mxy, Sxz, Syz, Sy, Sx, Sxy
Therefore, the loops are:
Do I=1,numlc
Do j=1,8 (the eight sets of results)
Read() (stress(k), k=1, 8* #elements)
Enddo
Enddo
18.22 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis Results
File: name.VES
This file contains the coupled vessel impact analysis (CVIA) results, particularly
impacting vessel characteristics and impact force history.
Figure: 18.22.a .VES file example
The "Impacting Vessel Characteristics" header contains information regarding the

impacting vessel, namely, the vessel weight, X velocity, and Y velocity.
The "Impact Force History" header contains the impact load and crush depth through
time.
18.23 Shear and Moment Results
File: name.VMD
This file contains the bending element shears, moments and capacities for the pile and
structure elements. This is a direct access file (A fixed record size) of 56 bytes. There is
one set of records for all elements in the piles and structure. The number of elements
(records per set) is:
number of records per load case = NPEL + NUMFRM

where NPEL=NPIL*(nplnod-1).
Note that the numbers NPIL and NPLNOD can be found in the name.PIL file and
NUMFRM can be found in the name.AXL file. The set of results is repeated for each
load case. Each record contains fourteen values per element. The fifteen values
represent:
W, V2I, V3I, V2J, V3J, XMI2, XMI3, XMJ2, XMJ3, XMMAX, XML, FRATI, FRATJ,
AXLI, AXLJ,TORI,TORJ
Where
W is the uniform load on the element.
V2I is the shear on the I end in the local 2 direction.
V3I is the shear on the I end in the local 3 direction.
V2J is the shear on the J end in the local 2 direction.
V3J is the shear on the J end in the local 3 direction.
XMI2 is the moment on the I end about the local 2 axis.
XMI3 is the moment on the I end about the local 3 axis.
XMJ2 is the moment on the J end about the local 2 axis.
XMJ3 is the moment on the J end about the local 3 axis.
XMMAX is the maximum midspan moment if uniform loads exist.
XML is the distance from the I end where the maximum midspan moment exists.
FRATI is the capacity ratio at the I end.
FRATJ is the capacity ratio at the J end.
AXLI is the axial force at the I end of the member.
AXLJ is the axial force at the J end of the member.
TORI is the torisonal moment at the I end of the member.
TORJ is the torisonal moment at the J end of the member.
NOTE: All values are single precision real numbers (4 bytes). Also, the pile elements
come first, then the structure elements.
References
Andrade, P. (1994), "Materially and Geometrically Non-Linear Analysis of Laterally

Loaded Piles Using a Discrete Element Technique," Masters Report, University of Florida,
Gainesville.
Bamford, W. E. (1969). “Anisotropy, and the natural variability of rock properties," Proc.
Symp. Rock Mech., Sydney, 1-10.
Berger, E., Mahi, S. A., and Pyke, R. (1977). "Simplified Method For Evaluating Soil-Pile-
Structure Interaction Effects." Offshore Technology Conference.
Bjerkeli, L., Tomaszewicz, A., and Jensen, J.J. (1990). "Deformation properties and
ductility of high-strength concrete." High-Strength Concrete: Second International
Symposium, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, MI., 215-238.
Boulanger, R. W., Kutter, B. L., Wilson, D. W. (1998), "The response of piles during
earthquakes : dynamic soil-pile-superstructure interaction," Center for Geotechnical
Modeling, Dept. of Civil and Environmental Engineering, University of California, Davis,
Report (University of California, Davis. Center for Geotechnical Modeling), no.
UCD/CGM-98/01.
Bowles, J. E. (1987). “Elastic Foundation Settlement on Sand Deposits,” Journal of

Geotechnical Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 113, No. 8, pp. 846-860.
Bowles, J. E., "Foundation Analysis and Design", McGraw-Hill, New York, 1977.
Brown, D., Morrison, C., and Reese, L. (1988), "Lateral Load Behavior of a Pile Group in
Sand," ASCE Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, Vol. 114, No. 11, pp. 1261-1276.
Brown, D., O’Neill, M. W., Hoit, M., McVay, M., and El Naggar, M. (2001). "Static and
Dynamic Lateral Loading of Pile Groups." NCHRP Report 461, National Cooperative
Highway Research Program.
Brown, E. T. (1970). “Strength of models of rocks with intermittent joints," J. Soil Mech.
Fdn. Eng., ASCE, 96, 1935-9.
California Department of Transportation (CALTRANS), Bridge Design Practice Manual,

Sacrament, CA, 1981.
Castello, R. R. (1980). "Bearing Capacity of Driven Piles in Sand", Ph.D. Thesis, Texas AM
University, College Station, Texas.
Chai, Y., H., Preistly, M., J., N., and Seible, F. (1991), "Flexural Retrofit of Circular
Reinforced Bridge Columns by Steel Jacketing,", University of California, San Diego, La
Jolla.
Consolazio et. al. (2006), "Barge Impact Testing of the St. George Island Causeway
Bridge, Phase III", University of Florida, Final report, FDOT Contract No. BC-354 RPWO
76.
Coyle, H. M., and Reese, L. C. (1966). "Load transfer for axially loaded piles in clay,"
Journal Soil Mechanics and Foundations Division, Proceedings Paper 4702, American
Society of Civil Engineers, Vol 93(SM6).
Das, B. M. (1980). “A Procedure for estimation of Ultimate Uplift Capacity of Foundations

in Clay,” Soils and Foundations, Vol . 20, No. 1 pp. 77-82.
Das, B. M., and Jones, A. D. (1982). “Uplift Capacity of Rectangular Foundations in Sand,”
Transportation Research Record 884, National Research Council, Washington, D. C., pp.
54-58.
De Beer, E. E. (1970). “Experimental Determination of the Shape Factors and Bearing

Capacity Factors of Sand,” Geotechnique, Vol. 20, No. 4, pp. 387-411.
FDOT SFH (2017) Soils & Foundations Handbook, Florida Department of Transportation,
Tallahassee, Florida.
Fernandes Jr., C. (1999). "Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis of Bridge Piers." Doctor of

Philosophy, University of Florida, Gainesville, FL.
FHWA (1993) COM624P User's Manual for Laterally Loaded Pile Analysis Program for
the Microcomputer v2.0, Washington, D.C.
FHWA, PCSTABLS-Users Manual, Federal Highway Administration, Springfield, VA 1988.
Filippou, F. C., Popov, E. P., Bertero, V. V. (1983). "Effects of Bond Deterioration on

Hysteretic Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Joints". Report EERC 83-19, Earthquake
Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley.
Franke, K. W., and Rollins, M., K. (2013). "Simplified Hybrid p-y Spring Model for
Liquefied Soils", Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, 139(4).
Gazetas, G., and Dobry, R. (1984). "Simple Radiation Damping Model for Piles and
Footings." Journal of Engineering Mechanics, 110(6), 937-956.
Gazioglu, S. M., and O’Neill, M. W. "Evaluation of P-Y Relationships in Cohesive Soils,"

from Analysis and Design of Pile Foundations, proceedings of a symposium sponsored
by the ASCE Geotechnical Engineering Division, ASCE National Convention, San
Francisco, CA, pp. 192-213.
Georgiadis, M. "Development of P-Y curves for Layered Soils," Proceedings,

Geotechnical Practice in Offshore Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, pp.
536-545.
Getter, D. J., and Consolazio, G. R., (2011). “Relationships of barge bow force-
deformation for bridge design: Probabilistic consideration of oblique impact scenarios.”
Transportation Research Record 2251, Transportation Research Board, Washington, DC,
3-15, 2011.
Hanna, A. M., and Meyerhof, G. G. (1981). “Experimental Evaluation of Bearing Capacity

of Footings Subjected to Inclined Loads,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 18, No. 4,
pp. 599-603.
Hannigan, P. J., Goble, G. G., Likins, G. E., and Rausche, F., (2006). "Design and
Construction of Driven Pile Foundations – Volume I and II," FHWA Publication No.
FHWA-NHI-05-042. U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway
Administration, Washington D.C.
Hoek, E. and Brown, E. T. (1980). “Empirical strength criterion for rock masses,” J.
Geotech. Engng. Div., ASCE, 106 (GT 9), p. 1013-1035.
Hoek, E. and Brown, E. T. (1988). “The Hoek-Brown failure criterion – a 1988 update ,”
Rock Engineering for Underground Excavations, Proc. 15th Canadian Rock Mech. Symp.
J. C. Curran, Ed. Toronto: Dept. Civil Engineering, University of Toronto, p. 31-38.
Hoek, E. and Brown, E. T. (1997). “Practical estimates or rock mass strength ,” Int. J. Rock
Mech. & Mining Sci. & Geomechanics Abstracts. 34(8), p. 1165-1186.
Ishihara, K. (1996). Soil Behaviour in Earthquake Geotechnics, Oxford University Press

New York, NY.
Ismael, N. F. (1990). "Behavior of Laterally Loaded Bored Piles in Cemented Sand", ASCE
Journal of Geotechincal Engineering, 116(11).
Itani, A. M. "Future Use of Composite Steel-Concrete Columns in Highway Bridges.",

AISC Engineering Journal,33, No.3 pp. 110-115 1996.
Janbu, N., Bjerrum, L., and Kjaernsli, B. (1956). “Veiledning vedlosning av

fundamenteringsoppgaver,” Publication No. 18, Norwegian Geotechnical Institute, pp.
30-32.
Johnson, R., Parsons, R. L., Dapp, S., and Brown, D. (2007). "Soil Characterization and P-Y
Curve Development for Loess", Kansas Dept. of Transportation, Buereau of Materials &
Research.
Kramer, S. L. (1996). Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle

River, New Jersey.
Kim, Myoung-Ho, "Analysis of Osterburg and Stanamic Axial Load Testing and
Conventional Lateral Load Testing", Master’s Thesis, University of Florida, Gainesville,
Florida, 2001.
Kulhawy, F. and Mayne, P. "Manual for Estimating Soil Properties for Foundation
Design." Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) Report. EPRI EL-6800. Project 1493-6.
Aug. 1990, pp. 5-17.
Kumbhojkar, A. S. (1993). “Numerical Evaluation of Terzaghi’s Ny, “Journal of

Geotechnical Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 119, No. 3, pp. 598-
607.
Liang, R., Yang, K. and Nusairat, J. (2009). "p-y Criterion for Rock Mass" ASCE Journal of
Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, 135(1).
Mandel, J., and Salencon, J. (1972). “Force protante d’un sol sur une assise rigide (étude
théorique),” Geotechnique, Vol. 22, No. 1, pp. 79-93.
Mander, J. B., Priestley, M. J. N.,Park R., "Theoretical Stress Strain Model for Confined
Concrete" ASCE Journal of Structural Engineering 114,pp. 1804-1826, 1988.
Mander, J. B., Priestley, M. J. N.,Park R., "Observed Stress-Strain Behavior of Confined

Concrete" ASCE Journal of Structural Engineering 114,pp. 1827-1849, 1988.
MacGregor, J. G., and Wight, J. K. (2005). Reinforced Concrete: Mechanics and Design
4th Edition, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.
Matlock, H. "Correlations for Design of Laterally Loaded Piles in Soft Clay," Paper No.
OTC 1204, Proceedings, Second Annual Offshore Technology Conference, Houston,
Texas, Vol. 1, 1970, pp. 577-594.
McVay,M. C., O'Brien, M., Townsend, F. C., Bloomquist, D. G., and Caliendo, J. A.
"Numerical Analysis of Vertically Loaded Pile Groups," ASCE, Foundation Engineering
Congress, Northwestern University, Illinois, July, 1989, pp. 675-690.
McVay,M. C., M., Niraula, L. "Development of Modified T-Z Curves for Large Diameter
Piles/Drilled Shafts in Limestone for FB-Pier," Report Number 4910-4504-878-12,
National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA June 2004.
Meyerhoff, G. G. (1953). “The Bearing Capacity of Foundations Under Eccentric and

Inclined Loads,” Proceedings, Third International Conference on Soil Mechanics and
Foundation Engineering, Zürich, Vol. 1, pp. 440-445.
Meyerhoff, G. G. (1963). “Some Recent Research on the Bearing Capacity of

Foundations,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp. 16-26.
Meyerhoff, G. G. (1974). “Ultimate Bearing Capacity of Footings on Sand Layer Overlying

Clay,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 11, No. 2, pp. 224-229.
Meyerhoff, G. G. and Adams, J. I. (1968). “The Ultimate Uplift Capacity of Foundations,”

Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 5, No. 4, pp. 225-244.
Meyerhoff, G. G. and Chaplin, T. K. (1953). “The Compression and Bearing Capacity of

Cohesive Soils,” British Journal of Applied Physics, Vol. 4, pp. 20-26.
Meyerhoff, G. G. and Hanna, A. M. (1978). “Ultimate Bearing Capacity of Foundations on

Layered Soil under Inclined Load,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 15, No. 4, pp.
565-572.
Meyerhoff, G. G. (1965). “Shallow Foundations,” Journal of Soil Mechanics and
Foundations Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 91, No. SM2, pp. 21-31
Mitchell, J. S., "A Nonlinear Analysis of Bi-Axially Loaded Beam-Columns Using a

Discrete Element Model," Ph. D. Dissertation, The University of Texas at Austin, August,
1973.
Mirza, S., A., and MacGregor, J., G., "Variability of mechanical properties of reinforcing
bars,", ASCE Journal of Structural Engineering, 105(ST5):921-937, May 1979.
Mosher, R. L. (1984). "Load transfer criteria for numerical analysis of axially loaded piles
in sand; Part 1: Load transfer criteria," Technical Report K-84-1, U.S. Army Engineer
Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
Murchison, J. M. and O’Neill, M. W. "Evaluation of P-Y Relationships in Cohesionless

Soils," from Analysis and Design of Pile Foundations, proceedings of a symposium
sponsored by the ASCE Geotechnical Engineering Division, ASCE National Convention,
San Francisco, CA, pp. 174-191.
NCHRP (2018). Contribution of Steel Casing to Single Shaft Foundation Structural

Resistance, Transportation Research Board, Washington, D.C.
NCHRP (2006). Synthesis 360, Rock – Socketed Shafts for Highway Structures
Foundations, Transportation Research Board, Washington, D.C.
El Naggar, and Bentley (2000), "Dynamic analysis for laterally loaded piles and dynamic
p-y curves", Can. Geotech. J. 37: 1166–1183.
O’Neill, M. W., Brown, D., Anderson, D. G., El Naggar, M., Townsend, F. C., and McVay, M.
C. (1997). "Static and Dynamic Lateral Loading of Pile Groups." NCHRP 24-9, Highway
Research Program, Harbert Engineering Center, Auburn University, Auburn, AL.
O’Neill, M. W. and Dunnavant, T. W., "A Study of Effect of Scale, Velocity, and Cyclic
Degradability on Laterally Loaded Single Piles in Overconsolidated Clay.", Rep. No.
UHCE 84-7, Dept. of Civil Engineering, Univ. of Houston, Houston, TX, 1984.
O’Neill, M.W., Townsend, F. C., Hassan, K. M., Buller, A., and Chan, P. S., "Load Transfer for
Drilled Shafts in Intermediate Geomaterials," Report No. FHWA-RD-95-172, November
1996.
Peck, R. B., W. E. Hanson, and T. H. Thornburn (1953). Foundation Engineering, John

Wiley and Sons, New York.
Peck, R.B., Hanson, W. E. and Thornburn, T. H., "Foundation Engineering", John Wiley &
Sons, 1974.
Pinder, Terrence, "A Model for Concrete Under The Effect of Transverse Confinement",
Report presented to the graduate committee of the Department of Civil Engineering,
University of Florida, Summer 1997.
Precast Conrete Institute, PCI Design Handbook, 4th Ed., Chicago IL, 1992.
Priestley, M. J. N., Seible, F., and Calvi, G. M. (1996). Seismic Design and Retrofit of
Bridges, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Randolph, M.F., "Piles Subjected to Torsion," Journal of the Geotechnical Division, ASCE,
Vol. 107, No. GT8, August, 1981, pp. 1095-1111.
Reese, L. C., Cox, W. R. and Koop, F. D "Analysis of Laterally Loaded Piles in Sand," Paper
No. OTC 2080, Proceedings, Fifth Annual Offshore Technology Conference, Houston,
Texas, 1974 (GESA Report No. D-75-9).
Reese, L. C., Cox, W. R. and Koop, F. D. "Field Testing and Analysis of Laterally Loaded
Piles in Stiff Clay," Paper No. OTC 2312, Proceedings, Seventh Offshore Technology
Conference, Houston, Texas, 1975.
Reese, L.C. (1997)., “Analysis of Laterally Loaded Piles in Weak Rock,” Journal of
Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 123, No. 11, pp. 1010–1017.
Reese, L. C. and Welch, R. C. "Lateral Loading of Deep Foundations in Stiff Clay," Journal
of the Geotechnical Engineering Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 101,
No. GT7, Proceedings Paper 11456, 1975, pp. 633-649 (GESA Report No. D-74-10).
Rollins, K. M., Gerber, T. M., Lane, D., and Ashford, S. A. (2005). "Lateral Resistance of a
Full-Scale Pile Group in Liquefied Sand", ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, 131 (1).
Sayed, S. M. and Bakeer, R. M. "Efficiency Formula For Pile Groups," Journal of the
Geotechnical Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 118, No. 2, Paper No.
26553, 1992, pp. 278-299.
Schnabel, P. B., Lysmer, J., and Seed, H. B. (1972). "SHAKE: A Computer Program for
Earthquake Response Analysis of Horizontally Layered Sites." University of California,
Berkeley, Earthquake Engineering Research Center.
Scott, B., D., Park R., and Priestley, M., J., N., "Stress-strain Behavior of concrete confined
by overlapping hoops at low and high strain rates,", ACI Journal , 79(1): 13-27, Jan./Feb
1982.
Simpson, M., and Brown, D. A. (2003). "Development of p-y Curves for Piedmont
Residual Soils", Auburn University report B-424(2).
Skempton, A. W. (1951). "The Bearing Capacity of Clays." Proceedings,Building Research

Congress, Vol I, Part IIV, 180-189.
Stoll, U.W., "Torque Shear Test of Cylindrical Friction Piles," Civil Engineering, ASCE, Vol.
42, No. 4, April., 1972, pp.63-64.
Stone, W., C. and Cheok, G., S., "Inelastic Behavior of Full-Scale Bridge Columns Subjected
to Cyclic Loading". Report No. NIST/BSS-166, National Institute of Standards and
Technology, U.S. Department of Commerce, Gaithersberg, MD 20899, Jan. 1989.
Sudip Basack, (2007) "Experimental Investigation of Pile Group under Lateral Cyclic Load
in Layered Soil", Dept. of Applied Mechanics, Bengal Engineering and Science University
Taghavi, A., Muraleetharan, K. K., and Miller, G. A. (2017). "Nonlinear seismic behavior of
pile groups in cement-improved soft clay." Soil Dyn Earthq Eng, 99, 189-202.
Tedesco, J. W., McDougal, W. G., and Ross, C. A. (1999). Structural Dynamics: Theory and
Applications, Addison Wesley-Longman, Menlo Park, CA.
Terzaghi, K. (1943). Theoretical Soil Mechanics, Wiley, New York.
Vesic, A. S. (1963) “Bearing Capacity of Deep Foundation in Sand.” Highway Research

Record Mo. 39, National Academy of Sciences, pp. 112-153.
Vesic, A. S. (1973) “Analysis of Ultimate Loads of Shallow Foundations.” Journal of Soil

Mechanics and Foundations Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 99, No.
SM1, pp. 45-73.
Vijayvergiya, V. N. (1977). "Load-movement characteristics of piles," Proceedings, Ports

77, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol II, 269-286.
Wang, S., Kutter, B. L., Chacko, M. J., Wilson, D. W., Boulanger, R. W., and Abghari, A.
(1998). "Nonlinear Seismic Soil-Pile Structure Interaction." Earthq Spectra, 14(2), 377-
396.
Wang, S. T., and Reese, L. C., "COM624P – Laterally loaded pile analysis for the
microcomputer, ver. 2.0" FHWA-SA-91-048, Springfield, VA, 1993.
Welch, R. C., and Reese, L.C., "Lateral Load Behavior of Drilled Shafts", Research Rep. No.
3-5-65-99, conducted for Texas Highway Department and U.S. Department of
Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, Bureau of Public Roads, Center for
Highway Research, Univ. of Texas at Austin, TX, 1972.
Wolf, J. P. (1985). Dynamic soil–structure interaction, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Upper Saddle

River, NJ.
Yassin, M., "Nonlinear analysis of prestressed concrete structures under monotonic and
cyclic loads", PhD. dissertation, University of California, Berkeley, 1994.
Tutorials
Tutorials can be found on BSI website at

https://bsi.ce.ufl.edu/products/Tutorials.aspx?software=7.
Also, a program feature showcase can be found at

https://bsi.ce.ufl.edu/support/featuresshowcase.aspx?software=7.

Phan Mem FB

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Phan Mem FB

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

FB-MultiPier Version 5.

Multiple Pier Modeling

Two rows of bearing locations

Wind Load Generation

Time step integration

Dynamic soil modeling

1.1 File Menu

Figure: 1.1.a File Menu Options

1.2 View Menu

Figure: 1.2.a View Menu Options

1.3 Control Menu

Figure: 1.3.a Control Menu Options

Figure: 1.4.a Help Menu Options

Help About Tutorial

1.5 About FB-MultiPier

The "About FB-MultiPier" dialog displays the following information :

1. New Project/Model Page

2.1 New Project/Model Page

Choose from the following model types:

2.1.1 Pier Model

Figure: 2.1.b Pier Model

Select this option to begin a typical pier model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

Figure: 2.1.c Pile and Cap Model

Select this option to begin a typical pile and cap model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

Figure: 2.1.d Pile Model

Select this option to begin a typical pile model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

Figure: 2.1.e High Mast Lighting/Sign Model

Select this option to begin a typical high mast lighting/sign model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page. .

Figure: 2.1.f Retaining Wall Model

Select this option to begin a typical retaining wall model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

Figure: 2.1.g Sound Wall Model

Select this option to begin a typical sound wall model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

Figure: 2.1.h Stiffness Model

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

Figure: 2.1.i Pile Bent Model

Select this option to begin a typical pile bent model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

Figure: 2.1.j Column Model

Select this option to begin a typical column model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

Figure: 2.1.k Bridge Model

Select this option to begin a typical bridge (multiple piers) model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

Figure: 2.1.l One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Model

Select this option to begin the OPTS model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.2 Analysis Settings Page

Pile/Pier Behavior allows "Linear - Gross", "Linear" or "Nonlinear" material behavior,

Choose options in the following categories:

"Linear - Gross" Behavior:

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

Figure: 2.2.b Transformed Section properties option in Analysis Settings page

Note: If "Linear" behavior is selected, and the "Transformed Section" checkbox is

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

A typical value for the number of iterations is 100.

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

The Analysis Page offers two types of analysis: